n 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


lfe*^**w**w** 


tie 


r,K 

Copyright,  1892,  by  CURTIS  HAVEN,  Chicago. 

IKXAS 


300-WORDS-A-MlNUTE 

SHORTHAND  LESSONS. 

PRESENTING  IN  TWELVE  LESSONS,  WITHIN  THE  COMPREHENSION  OF  A  CHILD, 

EVERY  IMPORTANT  PHONOGRAPHIC  DEVICE  KNOWN  TO  THE"  MOST  SKILL- 

FUL SHORTHAND  WRITERS  OF  THE  WORLD  AND  OF  ALLSYSTEM?  , 

BEING  THE  ONLY  TREATISE  GIVING  THE  PROFESSIONAL 

OUTLINES  FROM  THE  VERY  FIRST  LESSON. 


LESSON   I. 

DEFINITION. 

Shorthand  writing  is  of  two  kinds — stenography  and  phonography. 

Stenography  was  the  shorthand  of  the  ancients,  and  is  not  much  in  use 
today.  It  involves  the  learning  of  hundreds  of  arbitrary  signs  for  words, 
and  is  very  difficult  to  master. 

Phonography  is  the  shorthand  of  the  present,  and  is  the  one  employed 
by  nine  of  every  ten  shorthand  reporters,  although  all  shorthand  writers 
are  called  stenographers,  because  the  old  name  still  clings  to  them.  Phonog- 
raphy is  the  only  scientific  shorthand,  and  is  quite  easily  learned,  if  the 
instructions  contained  in  these  lessons  are  followed. 

The  name  phonography  is  a  union  of  two  Greek  words, phone  and  graphc, 
the  former  meaning  sound  (or  voice),  and  the  latter  a  writing,  thus  making 
the  actual  definition  of  phonography  to  be  sou/id  writing  or  voice  writing, 
that  is,  to  write  the  sounds  of  the  voice.  The  science  was  given  that  name 
because,  in  writing  phonography,  spelling  is  done  by  actual  sound,  not 
according  to  the  usual  way  of  spelling.  For  instance,  the  dictionaries 
would  spell  the  word  nigh  this  way — n-i-g-h — using  four  letters.  But  in 
phonography  we  would  spell  nigh  according  to  its  sound,  thus,  n-i.  And  all 
other  words  on  the  same  plan,  thus,  n-a,  nay,  n-u,  knew,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.  Hence 
it  will  be  seen  that  phonography  is  to  the  human  voice  what  photography  is 
to  the  features^one  places  on  paper  a  likeness  of  our  form,  the  other  a  like- 
ness of  our  speech.  Spelling,  as  taught  in  school,  does  not  do  this;  neither 
does  stenography.  Therefore,  they  are  deficient  in  speed.  But  phonog- 
raphy, by  saving  time  in  spelling,  gives  speed  in  two  ways:  i.  e.,  both  in 
the  use  of  less  letters,  and  in  briefer  signs. 

PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

The  elements  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography  are  two  alphabets,  one 
visible  and  the  other  invisible — a  portion  of  the  visible  alphabet  being  pre- 


sented  in  the  following  sixteen  signs: 


\ 

P 

^_ 

T 

\ 

B 

-^ 

V 

I 

T 

c 

»         ^— 

rrn    Pronotmced 
i  n  J_A5  in  Mith 

ITHorTM 
or  These. 

1 

D 

) 

5 

Ch 

[Pronounced 
[as  in  Watch 

TCHAf\ 
or  Chair.] 

J 

I—' 

(Pronounced  ISHorZffiZ 
L<3s  ±ZL  Pish  orAzv.re^_ 

/ 

J 

r 

L 

— 

s* 

[pronounced 

GAY\ 

^ 

M 

T\T 

—     **    |_<2,s  in  6fa.2n. 

J 

^-^ 

N. 

The  first  column  of  shorthand  letters  in  above  list  is  composed  of  simple 
straight  lines  written  alternately  light  and  heavy  and  slanting  in  pairs  at  four 
different  angles.  The  other  column  of  shorthand  letters  are  all  lightly 
written  curves,  each  one  of  them  being  a  quarter  of  a  circle,  as  the  following 
diagrams  containing  all  the  letters  above  given  will  show: 


M 

L 

V 

Th   ^j)    S 

| 

K 

F 

^5h 

By  the  above,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  straight  letters  are  each  one-quarter 
of  a  complete  square,  just  as  the  curved  letters  are  each  a  quarter  of  a 
complete  circle;  though  it  will  also  be  seen  that  the  two  circles  and  squares, 
in 'above  diagram,  are  each  divided  into  different  quarters  from  the  other. 
This  is  illustrated  still  further  by  the  diagram  below: 


M 

T 

TV.     1    N/  i         eJ 
V^X.  /         ^ 

K      HjH     Gay 

N 

D 

The  straight  characters  are  readily  enough  distinguished  as  to  slant,  but 
sometimes  beginners  are  apt  to  make  mistakes  in  relation  to  the  slant  of  the 
curves,  and  in  order  to  impress  the  direction  of  the  curves  well  upon  the 


beginner's  mind,  the  following  diagrams,  showing  the  exact  slant  of  each  curve 
in  comparison  with  the  straight  letters,  is  given: 


P    V 

^S  Th(|)    3 


From  above,  the  student  will  observe  that  the  points  of  the  curved 
letters  F  and  V  begin  and  end  at  the  same  position,  regarding  the  line,  as 
the  straight  letter  P  would;  that  the  curves  Th  and  S  begin  and  end  in 
similar  positions  to  T,  L  and  Sh  to  Chay,  and  M  and  N  to  K. 

Pronounce  the  double  letters  Ch,  Th,  and  Sh,  as  indicated  in  the  list: 
Chay,  Ith,  and  Ish— never  C-h,  T-h,  and  S-h.  The  sound  for  G  should  also 
be  always  pronounced  Gay.  These  four  signs  require  special  pronunciation, 
for  reasons  which  will  be  better  appreciated  by  students  as  they  progress. 

Always  write  the  signs  for  K,  Gay,  M,  and  N  from  left  to  right. 

Write  L  upward. 

The  other  signs  in  foregoing  list  are  written  downward. 

Other  letters  of  the  visible  alphabet  will  be  given  in  subsequent  lessons. 

SPELLING   BY   POSITION. 

The  invisible  alphabet  also  need  not  necessarily  be  altogether  presented 
in  this  first  Jesson,  but  its  use  and  three  of  its  letters  are  best  given.  The 
invisible  alphabet  is  really  a  method  of  spelling  by  position.  That  is,  writing 
a  visible  letter  (any  one  of  those  in  foregoing  list,  for  instance)  in  a  certain 
position  in  accordance  with  the  ruled  line  of  the  paper  you  are  writing  upon, 
and  by  that  position  indicating  after  the  written  letter  the  presence  of  some 
other  letter  not  written.  The  letters  written  to  indicate  invisible  letters 
are  called  consonants;  the  sounds  indicated  without  being  written  are  called 
vowels.  Three  of  the  vowel  sounds,  which  are  thus  indicated  invisibly,  are 
I,  A,  and  U,  the  mode  of  indicating  them  being  to  write  a  consonant  above 
the  ruled  line  of  your  writing  paper  when  you  desire  to  indicate  I;  write  the 
consonant  resting  on  the  line  to  indicate  A;  and  strike  the  consonant 
through  or  place  beneath  the  line  to  indicate  U. 

For  instance,  suppose  you  desired  to  write  the  word  nigh  in  shorthand: 
That  word  in  shorthand  would  be  spelled  with  only  the  two  letters  n  and  i, 
thus,  n-i,  nigh.  Now,  N  is  a  visible-consonant,  as  will  be  seen  by  referring 
to  your  list  of  letters  at  the  beginning  of  this  lesson.  And  we  have  just 
said  that  the  sound  of  I  may  be  indicated  after  a  written  letter  without 
writing  I,  by  placing  any  visible  consonant  above  the  line  of  the  paper  you 
are  writing  upon.  So,  by  simply  placing  our  shorthand  letter  N  above  the 


line,  we  indicate  the  sound  of  I  after  it,  and  thereby  spell  n-i,  nigh,  as  with 
sign  i  in  Exercise. 

Then,  in  accordance  with  the  rule  for  indicating  the  sound  of  the  letter 
A,  without  writing  it,  we  have  only  to  place  our  letter  N  on  the  line,  and  we 
invisibly  indicate  after  N,  the  sound  of  A,  thus  spelling  n-a,  nay,  as  with 
sign  2  in  Exercise. 

Finally,  by  writing  N  under  the  line  of  our  paper,  we  indicate  after  N 
the  sound  of  U,  and  thus  spell  n-u,  knew,  as  with  sign  3  in  Exercise. 

By  the  above  description,  the  student  sees  that  it  is  \he  position  of  the 
written  consonant  that  indicates  the  sound  of  the  invisible  letter;  and,  there- 
fore, any  consonant  of  the  visible  alphabet  may  thus  /^visibly  indicate  the 
sound  of  I  after  it,  if  such  written  letter  be  placed  above  the  line  of  writing; 
A,  if  placed  on  the  line;  and  U,  if  struck  through  or  placed  below  the  line. 

The  horizontal  letters  K,  Gay,  M,  and  N  can  not  be  written  through 
the  line,  which  is  why  they  are  written  under  the  line  to  indicate  U  after 
them,  the  other  letters  being  easily  struck  through  the  line,  as  in  signs  6,  7, 
15,  17,  etc.,  in  Exercise. 

The  dotted  lines  in  our  Exercise  represent  the  ruled  lines  of  ordinary 
writing  paper. 

If  the  student  has  carefully  read  all  of  Part  I,  of  this  book,  especially 
noted  the  explanation  under  heading  of  "  Preliminary  Information,"  on 
pages  1 6  and  17,  and  memorized  the  sixteen  letters  so  far  given  of  the 
Visible  Alphabet,  commencing  this  lesson,  he  or  she  is  now  ready  to  pro- 
ceed with  the  study  of  Exercise  I,  at  end  of  this  lesson,  which  should  be 
done  in  accordance  with  the  following  plan: 

1.  Read  carefully  the  entire  Exercise,  tracing  over  with  a  dry  pen  each 
shorthand  letter,  as  you  read  it.     The  tracing  helps  to  train  your  hand  to 
a  familiarity  with  the  correct  formation  of  the  shorthand  letters. 

2.  Write  with  pencil  each  separate  word  or  combination  of  Exercise  at 
least  twelve  consecutive  times  on  your  practicing  paper. 

3.  Transcribe  the  entire  Exercise  into  long  hand,  afterward  comparing 
your  interpretation  with  the  Key  below  Exercise.     Repeat  until  perfect. 

4.  Looking  only  at  the  Key,  write  it  into  shorthand,  afterward  com- 
paring your  shorthand  writing  with  the  shorthand  of  the  printed  Exercise, 
repeating  this  wholesome  practice  until  satisfactory,  but  without  attempting 
to   write  faster  than  you  can  write  well.     Speed  will    come   with   careful 
practice. 

These  rules  are  alike  applicable  to  every  lesson  of  this  course.  And,  in 
addition,  in  private  study,  the  name  of  each  sign  should  be  repeated  aloud 
as  it  is  written,  a  proceeding  which  will  train  the  ear  to  recognize  the  proper 
^ound,  and,  at  the  same  time,  train  the  hand  to  form  the  sign  upon  the  writer 
hearing  the  sound  represented. 


Use  a  soft  pencil  for  practicing,  holding  it  between  the  first  and  second 
finger,  keeping  it  in  place  by  the  thumb.  This  position  enables  the  student 
to  write  with  more  ease  than  by  holding  the  pencil  between  the-  thumb  and 
first  finger,  besides  insuring  quicker  writing  generally,  and  more  perfectly 
formed  shorthand.. 

The  best  pencil  for  shorthand  practice  or  professional  use  is  a  soft 
medium  pencil,  called  by  different  manufacturers  No.  2,  or  SM;  and  the 
best  paper  is  ordinary  ruled  foolscap,  providing  it  does  not  have  too  smooth 
a  surface,  as  pencil  writing  can  not  be  done  well  on  highly  calendered  paper. 
The  more  common  the  foolscap,  therefore,  the  better,  the  finest  qualities 
being  only  suitable  for  pen  and  ink,  with  which  shorthand  practice  should 
never  be  attempted. 


SE      I. 


V 

.d............&,..^> 3 .4 $...\ 6..y. y...../. 

/  x.         \  V_ 

.^../ 9 40...  «JL  ,...44.^\  ...4&.......4S.. ^i-..r!T 46... 

£O *..+  /..  ^\  ..  ...-AC/.  ...j u.  i/ *  /\s\J dj,  , •  ,/C  ^-  •«..•••••  4\t%s+,{ 

'        M 

.../e&.I ^5....i «ey.,,,(,  ..) /^.. 


KEY  I. 

i,  Nigh;  2,  nay;  3,  knew;  4,  pie;  5,  pay;  6,  chew;  7,  Jew;  8,  jay;  9,  cue; 
10,  gay;  n,  bay;  12,  by;  13,  tie;  14,  fie;  15,  few;  16,  vie;  17,  view;  18,  sue; 
19,  sigh;  20,  thy;  21,  shy;  22,  lie;  23,  lay;  24,  die;  25,  day;  26,  due; 
27,  They  say  May  knew  my  shoe. 

NOTE  i — The  figures  accompanying  each  word  or  outline  in  the  above 
Exercise  and  Key,  and  others  of  this  course,  are  inserted  for  the  student's 
convenience  in  referring  from  the  one  to  the  other.  They  are  not  to  be 
considered  as  any  part  of  the  phonographic  signs.  The  same  is  true  of 
all  subsequent  lessons  as  well. 

NOTE  2 — Home  students  should  learn  every  lesson  of  this  course  per- 
fectly enough  to  write  each  sign  correctly  when  the  key  is  slowly  read  aloud 
to  them.  This  practice  of  writing  from  dictation  should  be  done  with  every 
Exercise,  and  done  well,  before  commencing  another  lesson.  The  lessons 
may  be  learned  without  such  aid,  but  speed  comes  more  quickly  with  it. 

NOTE  3— Students  of  these  lessons,  desirous  of  having  their  written 
exercises  criticised,  or  desiring  to  ask  any  questions  whatever,  in  regard  to 
the  lessons,  or  relative  matters,  can  address  the  author,  CURTIS  HAVEN, 
Tribune  Building,  Chicago. 


LESSON 


TIMELY  SUGGESTIONS. 

Become  perfectly  familiar  with  one  lesson  before  another  is 
attempted. 

A  careful  revision  each  day  of  the  exercises  written  on  the  previous 
one  will  prove  an  invaluable  aid  to  the  memory. 

It  is  only  by  repetition  that  you  will  obtain  a  complete  familiarity 
with  new  exercises,  therefore  do  not  fail  to  write  every  new  word  or 
sign  at  least  a  dozen  times  before  writing  the  exercise  as  a  whole. 

For  every  hour  spent  in  writing  phonography  spend  a  similar  one 
in  reading  and  rereading.  This  time  will  be  well  spent,  while  a  non- 
compliance  with  this  suggestion  may  cause  infinite  trouble  in  the  stu- 
dent's early  attempts  at  reporting. 

While  practicing  the  exercises  of  any  lesson,  students  should  form 
the  outlines  both  carefully  and  slowly,  paying  particular  attention  to  the 
proper  formation  of  shorthand  characters,  both  regarding  length  and 
curvature.  Careful  practicing  while  learning  will  bring  speed  far  more 
quickly  than  carelessly  written  exercises,  besides  bringing  with  such 
•speed  that  without  which  speed  is  useless  —  legibility. 

SMALL  VISIBLE  LETTERS. 


'  «•  [Pronounced] 

*  Ui  [_as  in  oil.J 

.  A 

•  0 

,  H 

*  OwjPronounced  as  in  owl. 

-  87    [Or  -Ai  <as  in  ai^ 

.  Oo  [Pronouneeci  AS  in  tool 


^    i  [Short-i  as  in 
->     a/|_Sh.ort-a  as  in.  atj 


[Short- e  &s  i 


Yayjpr  sliort-ia.  a,s  in.  BTI! 
U 


By  the  foregoing  list  of  small  signs,  students  are  introduced  to  six- 
teen more  letters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet,  the  three  consonants  (Hay, 
Way  and  Whay),  and  thirteen  visible  vowels — each  pair  of  letters  slant- 
ing or  curving  in  the  same  directions  and  occurring  in  same  order  as 
their  larger  prototypes  in  Lesson  I.  And,  that  their  distinctions  of  out- 
line may  be  the  better  memorized,  the  new  list  is  reproduced  in  com- 
parative form  in  the  diagram  at  top  of  opposite  page. 


Ai 

u. 

A    i  '     S  i   0 

W  c  r    ^  D  Wh 

Oi*_    Ow 

i    u    e 

Oo 

U 

The  letters  Hay,  Way  and  Whay,  like  the  letters  of  first  lesson,  are 
used  to  spell  words  by  position,  above,  on  or  beneath  the  line,  signs 
i  to  7,  inclusive,  indicating  invisibly  I  by  position  above  the  line,  A  OR 
the  line,  and  U  beneath. 

Do  not  imagine,  because  some  signs  of  above  list  have  capital  let- 
ters near  them  and  others  small  letters,  that  such  distinction  is  repre- 
sented by  them.  There  is  no  occasion  for  capital  letters  in  Phonogra- 
phy, any  more  than  in  speech,  and  the  use  of  a  small  Roman  letter  op- 
posite a  sign  is  simply  to  help  the  student  to  remember  that  that  sign 
has  a  short  sound;  and,  upon  the  same  principle,  a  Roman  capital 
letter  near  a  shorthand  sign  in  the  shorthand  alphabet  simply  means 
that  such  shorthand  sign  possesses  a  long  or  ordinary  sound. 

Write  the  shorthand  letters  of  the  present  list  ii\  the  following 
directions:  E  and  short  e,  either  upwards  or  downwards,  according  to 
convenience;  Ai,  Oo,  Yay  and  U,  from  left  to  right.  The  other  signs 
in  above  list  write  downwards. 

The  signs  representing  the  sounds  of  H,  W  and  Wh,  must  always 
be  called  and  referred  to  as  Hay,  Way  and  Whay;  the  signs  opposite 
the  small  letters  i,  a  and  e  should  be  called  short-i,  short-a  and 
short-e;  and  the  other  signs  in  accordance  with  the  letters  opposite 
them,  &  or  Ai  being  either  pronounced  and,  or  the  same  as  A,  excepting" 
perhaps  a  trifle  more  prolonged,  like  the  two  a's  in  the  word  Baal,  though 
even  if  A  and  Ai  be  pronounced  exactly  as  one  sound,  no  difficulty 
would  arise  in  their  use,  as  will  be  seen  by  future  lessons. 

The  signs  represented  by  the  small  letters  i,  a,  e  and  u  require  par- 
ticular attention,  and,  explanatory  of  their  use,  it  is  necessary  to  say 
that  to  spell  by  sound  (which  is  the  only  way  spelling's  done  in  pho- 
nography), there  must  be,  when  writing  them,  a  separate  sign  for  each 
and  every  distinct  sound;  and,  as  I,  A,  E  and  U  have  each  more  than  one 
sound,  we,  therefore,  in  phonography,  when  writing  each  sound,  repre- 
sent it  by  a  separate  and  distinct  letter,  the  long  sound  of  I,  as  heard 
in  the  word  bite,  being  represented  by  the  first  sign  in  the  list  heading 
this  lesson;  the  short  sound  of  i,  as  heard  in  the  word  bit.  being  indicated 
by  the  ninth  sign  in  same  list;  the  ordinary  sound  of  A,  as  heard  in  the 
.word  fate,  by  the  third  sign  in  the  list;  the  long  sound  of  Ai,  as  indi- 


cated  in  pronouncing  the  word  fail,  by  the  seventh  sign  in  the  list;  the 
long  sound  of  E,  as  heard  in  the  word  feet,  by  the  fourteenth  sign  in 
the  list;  the  short  sound  of  e,  as  in  met,  by  the  thirteenth  sign;  long 
sound  of  U,  as  heard  in  the  vfoxtii  pure,  by  the  sixteenth  sign,  and  short-u} 
as  heard  in  butt,  by  the  fifteenth  sign  in  the  list.  Examples  showing 
how  these  signs  are  used  to  the  consonants  are  given  in  this  Exercise. 

By  this  lesson  the  student  will  observe  that  the  vowel  sounds  of  I, 
A  and  U  are  not  only  represented  /'/zvisibly,  as  described  in  the  last 
lesson,  but  also  that  those  sounds  have  visible  letters.  The  reason  for 
the  existence  of  two  ways  of  representing  the  same  vowel  sounds — visi- 
bly and  invisibly — arises  from  the  fact  that  both  are  equally  useful  and 
necessary.  The  -invisible  means  of  representation,  as  described  in 
Lesson  I,  is  most  frequently  used — always,  when,  in  ordinary  words, 
either  of  their  sounds  occur  after  a  consonant,  wherein  it  is  possible  to 
place  the  consonant  in  position  to  indicate  the  presence  of  a  vowel 
without  writing  such  vowel.  But,  vowel  sounds  often  happen  to  be  com- 
plete words  of  themselves,  and  therefore  unaccompanied  by  a  conso- 
nant, as  with  the  personal  pronoun  I,  or  the  article  A;  or,  when  a  vowel 
sound  would  spell  a  word  of  itself,  as  the  vowel  signs  O  and  U  do  in 
the  last  part  of  the  Exercise  to  this  lesson,  wherein  the  first  four  words 
of  the  sentence  "I  owe  you  a  new  tie"  are  represented  simply  by  the 
visible  vowels  I,  O,  U  and  A.  Then,  again,  such  sounds  are  sometimes 
initials  of  personal  names,  as  I  for  Isaac,  A  for  Adam,  etc. — in  which 
cases  invisible  representation  could  not  be  employed.  Sometimes,  too, 
though  not  frequently,  personal  names  are  best  written  with  them,  and 
generally  foreign  terms.  Again,  the  vowel  sounds  of  I,  A  and  U  were, 
in  last  lesson,  represented  invisibly  after  a  consonant,  not  before  one; 
and,  as  there  often  occurs  instances  in  which  the  vowel  sounds  are  the 
commencing  letters  of  words  and  therefore  precede  the  first  consonant  of 
such  words,  it  sometimes  becomes  necessary  to  write  them  as  in  the 
Exercise  to  this  lesson,  signs  8  to  34  inclusive. 

In  those  signs,  8  to  34,  it  will  also  be  seen  that  such  outlines  in- 
variably rest  upon  the  line,  that  position  being  the  proper  one  for  all 
letters  of  the  alphabet  when  not  indicating  invisible  vowels,  as  well  as 
when  indicating  the  second  place  invisible  vowels.  It  is  only^vhen  a 
first  or  third  position  vowel  is  to  be  indicated  /^/visibly  that  written 
characters  are  placed  above,  through  or  beneath  the  line. 

Be  sure  to  learn  every  Exercise  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  four 
rules  preceding  the  Exercise  of  Lesson  I. 

Further  use  of  the  visible  vowels  will  be  explained  in  next  lesson,  in 
which  is  given  the  concluding  letters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet. 


PEN  OR  PENCIL. 

Before  closing  this  lesson,  there  is  one  subject,  the  importance  of 
which  the  author  desires  to  properly  impress  upon  the  minds  of  his 
students:  It  is  the  necessity  of  an  immediate  choice  between  pen  and 
pencil,  in  regard  to  which  shall  be  made  use  of  in  the  student's  phono- 
graphic writing  practice.  Student  are,  of  course,  at  liberty  to  use 
both  if  they  choose,  and  alternate  their  use  as  frequently  as  they  wish, 
but  such  inconstant  use,  the  student  is  informed,  will  greatly  delay  her 
or  his  acquisition  of  speed.  Each  instrument  differs  from  the  other  in 
facility  of  execution,  and  whichever  the  hand  becomes  most  accustomed 
to,  it  writes  much  quicker  and  better  with.  The  author  prefers  a  pencil 
because  it  can  be  used  under  most  any  or  all  circumstances,  while  a  pen 
cannot  be  employed  except  under  certain  favorable  conditions.  The 
pencil  will  glide  over  the  paper  much  more  quickly,  and  thus  affords 
greater  rapidity  of  execution  than  the  pen,  while  rapid  pencil  writing  is 
easier  to  read  than  rapidly-made  penmarks,  for  the  reason  that  the  use 
of  the  pencil  avoids  the  little  meaningless  ticks  and  dashes  which  the 
pen  is  almost  always  certain  to  leave  attached  to  rapid  shorthand  writing. 
It  is,  however,  even  better  to  make  constant  use  of  a  pen  than  to  be 
continually  changing  from  one  to  the  other,  for  the  reasons  given. 


EXERCISE      II. 


,L £..  /...   ...<&..     ...4-..C £...    ...6..'. 


\ 


/f..V. ..*&./ /AJ ^Li_ ^5..\ ytf. 


*)  /?        r  9  *\x  /  *)  &  ^^L.  O  rt        v  5 

/c-o...-! Xij...-±s. ^oo...x f&y.../ c 

f~                f 
.3o..^t* 34-..^  <s55...  \  ...§  ....u i  .. 


KEY  II. 

i,  High;  2,  hay;  3,  hue;  4,  weigh;  5,  whew;  6,  why;  7,  whey;  8,  Ike; 
9,  oil;  10,  ape;  n,  Abe;  12,  age;  13,  ace;  14,  ache;  15,  oath;  16,  oak;  17, 
oar;  18,  owl;  19,  aid;  20,  aim;  21,  air;  22,  ail;  23,  ill;  24,  inn;  25,  Ann;  26, 
Al;  27,  ash;  28,  ebb;  29,  etch;  30,  edge;  31,  egg;  32,  Ed;  33,  eel;  34, 
youth;  35,  I  owe  you  a  new  tie. 


LESSON   III. 

FINAL  LIST  OF  VISIBLE  LETTERS. 


•urn. 
Mb 


, 

Pronounced 


a  o  [Sliort-o  as  in  onj 

w  oo[3hort-oo  <as  in  footj 

a  Ah 

s  ah[SKort-SLh.  as  in  a,skj 

s  Aw 


In  above  final  list  are  presented  ten  signs — the  concluding  letters 
of  the  Visible  Alphabet  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography — the  last 
five — short-o,  short-oo,  Ah,  short-ah  and  Aw — being  vowels;  the  others, 
consonants.  The  three  letters  requiring  particular  pronunciation  are 
Rm,  Mb  or  Mp  and  Ng,  which  must  always  be  learned  and  referred  to 
as  Arm,  Emb  or  Emp  and  Ing,  the  signs  represented  by  the  small 
letters  o,  oo  and  ah,  being  called  short-o,  short-oo  and  short-ah. 

R  and  Arm  are  always  written  upwards  and  at  a  slant  just  midway 
between  Chay  and  K;  Emb  is  a  thickened  M;  Ing  a  thickened  N;  Z  like 
a  thickened  S;  short-o  is  the  O  of  last  lesson  bowed,  or  like  a  shaded 
Whay;  short-oo  is  the  Oo  of  last  lesson  bowed,  or  like  a  shaded  U; 
Ah  is  a  waved  line  resembling  the  juncture  of  the  letters  Whay  and 
Way  in  that  order,  while  short-ah  and  Aw  are  waved  lines  similarly 
resembling  the  juncture  of  Way  and  Whay,  Aw  being  shaded  in  center. 

R,  Arm,  Z,  Emb  and  Ing  are  written  the  same  size  as  the  letters 
illustrated  in  Lesson  I;  the  other  letters  of  this  list  are  written  the  size 
of  the  small  letters  of  Lesson  II,  that  is,  one-eighth  the  size  of  the  large 
ones.  The  letter  R  is,  of  course,  placed  above,  on  or  through  the  line 
of  writing  to  represent  I,  A  or  U  invisibly,  as  in  signs  i,  2,  3,  in  Exercise. 
To  clearly  illustrate  the  exact  slant  of  R  and  Arm,  the  author  presents 
t'.iose  letters  below  grouped  with  Chay,  K,  etc. 


By  always  writing  R  and  Arm  upwards  and  Chay  and  J  downwards, 
the  difference  in  slant  between  those  letters  is  easily  maintained. 

To  better  exhibit  the  similarity  to  each  other,  as  well  as  the 
individual  differences  between  the  outline  of  each  character  given  in 


preceding  alphabetical  lists,  the  author  herewith  appends: 


THE    COMTLETE   VISIBLE  ALPHABET, 

\     P 

s          I 

\     B 

>     Oi 

1       T 
1       D 

,     A 
,     0 

/-..   Tchay 
/    J 

>    Hay 
*     Ow 

>-    R 

-     Ai   or  $> 

***    Arm  or  rVem. 

.     Oo 

_    R 

^     Short-i 

u  r 
?   y 

-  (       Ith  or  Thee 

c     Way 
3     Hway 
>     Short  -  o 

)      S 

1          7 

X         /f 

j     Short  -  e 

f     E 

_y     Ish  or  Zhee 

r   L 

n     Yay  or   Short  -u 

V             U 

^    M 

w     SKort-oo 

^•N    Emb  or  Emp 

^    N 

2     Ah 
s     Short  -ah 

w     Ing 

s     Aw 

The  above  Complete  Visible  Alphabet  of  Practical  Phonography  is 
composed  of  twenty-one  large  letters,  about  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch 
in  length,  and  twenty-one  small  characters,  made  about  one-eight  the 
size  of  the  large  ones.  Twenty-four  of  these  letters  are  called  con- 
sonants and  eighteen  vowels.  All  the  large  letters  and  the  small  ones 
Hay,  Way  and  Whay  are  the  consonant  letters,  the  remainder  of  the 
small  letters  being  the  vowels. 


Now,  for  further  successful  progress  in  these  lessons,  it  is  especially 
necessary  that  every  sign  of  the  Visible  Alphabet  be  so  thoroughly 
familiar  to  the  eye  of  the  student  that  any  of  those  signs  be  known 
when  not  presented  in  the  ordinary  order  of  their  arrangement,  and 
hence,  for  memorizing,  they  are  illustrated  in  comparative  form  below: 


CONSONANTS. 

VOWELS. 

\ 

\           C          ^ 

%        \        «. 

^ 

1 

1           (         c        ,           )              ) 

i            • 

> 

/ 

J         C 

*                 r 

J 

^          ^ 

Z                   S 

s 

— 

~                w 

—                                        0 

•                   »•> 

w 

Students  should  practice  memorizing  the  alphabet  until  the  letters 
in  foregoing  schedule  can  be  read  with  considerable  facility,  both  from 
left  to  right  and  right  to  left,  before  attempting  to  learn  further  exer- 
cises. Such  memorizing  will  not  only  give  a  thorough  acquaintance 
with  the  names  of  the  signs  of  the  Visible  Alphabet,  but  the  separation 
of  the  vowels  and  consonants,  as  in  the  schedule,  will  also  serve  to  im- 
press upon  the  mind  which  signs  are  consonants  and  which  visible  vowels. 

The  use  of  the  vowel  signs  in  spelling  personal  names  is  shown  in 
signs  4  to  20  in  Exercise,  though  all  spelling,  even  in  personal  names, 
should  be  done  phonetically,  viz:  R,  long- 1  and  T,  as  in  sign  4  in 
Exercise,  spells  the  personal  name  of  Wright,  etc.,  etc.,  because  even 
in  writing  personal  names,  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  write  sounds,  for,  in 
speaking  Mr.  Wright's  name,  we  would  simply  utter  the  sounds  of  R, 
long- 1  and  T,  and  hence  we  need  no  more  representation  in  phonography, 
but  we  generally  write  the  vowel  sign  in  personal  names  instead  of  in- 
dicating it  invisibly,  for  reasons  which  will  be  explained  in  a  future 
lesson,  though  in  spelling  the  common  words,  right  or  write,  we  would 
have  indicated  the  vowel  sound  by  position. 

The  numeral  eight  is  spelled  ai-t,  as  in  sentence  in  sign  45. 

The  proper  place  for  all  outlines  which  do  not  indicate  invisible 
vowels  is  on  the  line  of  writing,  hence,  all  the  proper  names  of  signs  4 
to  20  in  the  Exercise  are  commenced  or  rest  on  the  line.  It  is  only  when 
vowels  are  indicated  /^visibly  that  outlines  are  commenced  above, 


through  or  beneath  the  line,  and  even  then  it  is  only  the  first  consonant 
which  takes  position,  other  consonants  taking  whatever  position  is  con- 
venient at  the  time,  as  with  signs  27  and  33  in  Exercise,  wherein  the 
second  written  letter  is  written  out  of  position  simply  because  the  first 
consonant  must  have  position,  and  both  cannot. 

It  will  doubtless  be  no  little  satisfaction  to  the  beginner,  however 
he  or  she  may  love  study,  to  know  that  with  this  lesson  terminates  all 
visible  alphabetical  memorizing,  enough  means  having  now  been  pre- 
sented to  represent,  phonographically,  any  sound  of  the  English  lan- 
guage. The  elements  of  phonography  being  now  within  the  grasp  of 
the  learner,  future  lessons  will  be  entirely  taken  up  with  interesting 
contractions  and  practical  application  of  the  system. 

THE  CIRCLES  S  AND  Z. 

Rapidity  in  writing  shorthand  frequently  necessitates,  for  the 
representation  of  the  oft-recurring  sounds  of  S  and  Z,  a  much  shorter 
method  than  that  found  in  our  Visible  Alphabet. 

A  small  light  circle  is  therefore  often  used  to  represent  the  hissing 
sound  of  S,  and  a  shaded  small  circle  to  indicate  Z  under  similar  cir- 
cumstances. These  circles  are  joined  to  other  consonants  by  writing 
them  on  the  most  convenient  side  of  curved  letters,  and  on  the  right  or 
upper  side  of  straight  ones,  though  they  may  be  placed  at  either  end  of 
any  letter,  as  in  following  diagrams,  the  circle  being  read  where  written: 


St 


3k 


$th 


SI 


in. 


33 


Rs 


Ths 


Ls 


Ms 


& 


The  superiority  of  these  circles  in  point  of  speed,  over  the  long 
signs  for  S  or  Z,  is  a  fact  which  will  be  more  or  less  appreciated  and 
taken  advantage  of  by  the  student.  But,  lest  there  be  a  disposition  to 
do  away  entirely  with  the  original  signs  representing  these  sounds  in 
the  Visible  Alphabet,  it  is  necessary  to  state  that  there  are  instances 
wherein  the  signs  for  S  and  Z,  as  written  in  the  Visible  Alphabet,  must 
be  employed.  They  are: 


First.  When  either  the  sound  of  S  or  Z  constitute  the  only  con- 
sonant of  a  word,  as  in  sign  21  of  this  Exercise. 

Second.  When  either  of  the  sounds  of  S  or  Z  is  the  first  con- 
sonant in  a  word,  and  is  preceded  by  an  invisible  vowel,  as  in  sign  22. 

Third.  When  an  invisible  vowel  sound  terminates  a  word  in  which 
either  S  or  Z  happen  to  be  the  last  consonant.  Signs  26,  27,  33,  35  and  36. 

Under  the  above  three  rules,  the  long  S  or  Z  of  the  Visible 
Alphabet  must  be  used,  and  in  the  second  and  third  rules,  the  student, 
when  reading,  has  an  infallible  guide  whereby  to  determine  when  an  in- 
visible vowel  precedes  or  follows  either  S  or  Z  in  a  consonant  combina- 
tion. In  other  words,  when  he  sees  the  S  or  Z  of  the  Visible  Alphabet, 
beginning  such  a  combination,  he  knows  an  invisible  vowel  must  be  read 
before  and  in  conjunction  with  it,  and  that,  when  either  of  those  long 
letters  ends  such  a  combination,  there  is  an  invisible  vowel  following  it, 
as  part  of  the  word. 

Under  all  circumstances  not  covered  by  above  three  rules,  use  the 
circle  S  or  Z  wherever  possible.  For  instance,  when  either  the  sound 
of  S  or  Z  begin  a  combination,  with  no  vowel  before  it,  use  the  circle  as 
in  signs  23,  29,  30,  37,  38  and  40  in  Exercise.  When  the  sounds  of  S 
or  Z  end  any  combination,  with  no  vowel  sound  after,  use  the  circles,  as 
in  signs  24,  25,  28,  32,  34,  39  and  41  in  Exercise. 

Compare  sign  22,  indicating  a  preceding  vowel,  and  sign  23,  with 
no  vowel  before  the  S.  Also  compare  sign  25,  indicating  no  final  vowel 
sound,  with  sign  26,  indicating  the  final  vowel  E  sound  of  Y. 

Also  compare  sign  34,  maz,  spelled  in  shorthand  with  no  final  vowel 
sound,  and  sign  35,  ma-zy,  showing  the  final  E  sound  of  Y  by  full  sized  Z. 

Just  here  the  student  may  ask  how  it  is  known  that  the  vowel  sound 
is  E  following  long-S  in  signs  26  and  27,  or  following  Z  in  signs  33,  35 
and  36.  The  answer  to  this  is,  that  in  English  the  final  sound  of  such 
words  ending  in  Y  is  always  pronounced  nearly  like  the  vowel  E,  and 
therefore  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  remember  that  when  a  vowel  sound 
ends  a  word  whose  last  visible  letter  is  S  or  Z,  the  shorthander  is  to 
write  the  long  S  or  Z,  as  in  the  instances  just  named,  and  when  he  or 
she  reads  those  letters,  to  pronounce  after  them  the  vowel  sound  of  E, 
when  the  key  to  the  outline  will  be  at  once  evident. 

The  E  in  case,  (sign  24),  race  (sign  25),  sire  (sign  30),  maze  (sign  34), 
etc.,  is  of  course  silent  and  not  considered  in  shorthand  spelling. 

A  double-sized  light  circle,  written  alone  or  joined  to  other  letters 
in  accordance  with  the  rule  governing  the  small  circles,  represents  the 
sounds  ses,  sez,  size,  zes,  zez,  etc.  See  signs  42,  43  and  44  in  Exercise. 


This  double-sized  circle  must  not  be  mistaken  for  double-s  (ss)  in  the 
English  spelling  of  the  word  lass,  etc.  In  phonography  no  letters  are 
wasted  and  lass  and  kindred  words  terminating  with  double-s,  are  spelled 
quite  as  legibly,  and  much  more  economically,  thus:  1-a-s,  lass. 

These  small  and  large  circles  are  joined  to  the  letters  R  and  Arm  in 
the  same  manner  and  upon  the  same  sides  as  those  circles  are  joined  to 
K  or  Gay.  See  signs  24,  25  and  30.  This  is  no  more  than  proper,  for 
R  and  Arm  are  written  from  left  to  right,  as  K  and  Gay  are,  and  should, 
therefore,  be  treated  similarly  in  this  respect. 

This  rule  the  student  will  have  frequent  cause  for  recalling  in  future 
lessons  and  he  or  she  should  bear  it  well  in  mind  and  on  all  occasions 
where  junctions  are  made  with,  or  circles  added  to,  the  letters  R  and 
Arm,  such  junctures  and  additions  must  be  made  to  R  and  Arm  in 
precisely  the  same  manner  that  they  would  be  added  to  K  or  Gay. 

When  joining  shaded  circle-Z  to  letters,  shade  most  convenient  way. 

C,  Q  AND  X. 

There  are  three  letters  which  students  who  have  had  but  little 
experience  in  spelling  by  sound  will  look  in  vain  for  among  the  letters 
of  our  Visible  Alphabet,  viz. :  the  Roman  letters  C,  Q  and  X.  The 
Roman  C  is  not  contained  therein,  because,  in  spelling  by  sound, 
phonographers  do  not  need  the  help  of  that  letter,  the  soft  sound  of  C, 
as  heard  in  the  word  city,  being  represented  in  phonography  by  the 
phonographic  S,  that  word  being  spelled  sit-e,  as  in  sign  29  in  Exercise; 
while  the  hard  sound  of  C,  as  heard  in  case,  is  represented  by  K,  and 
that  word  spelled  k-a-s,  as  in  sign  24  in  Exercise. 

The  soit  and  hard  sounds  of  the  Roman  letter  G  are  similarly  dealt 
with  in  phonography,  J  being  used  to  spell  such  words  as  gypsy  and  sage 
(thus  )\]>-se,gypsey;  s-a-j,  sage)  as  in  signs  27  and  31  in  Exercise;  the  hard 
sound  of  the  Roman  letter  G,  as  heard  in  the  word  game,  being  in- 
dicated phonographically  by  the  letter  Gay  of  our  Visible  Alphabet,  as 
seen  in  sign  28  in  Exercise. 

The  letters  Q  and  X  are  not  incorporated  in  our  Visible  Alphabet, 
because  those  letters  are  not  needed  in  spelling  by  sound,  and  are  never 
so  used,  they  being  themselves  composed  of  more  than  one  simple 
sound  and  therefore  made  by  the  union  of  other  letters  and  really 
spelled  thus:  K-u,  Q;  short-e,  K  and  circle-S,  X;  as  in  sentence  45  in 
Exercise,  in  which  sentence  is  also  shown  how  to  represent  the 
letter  C  as  the  initial  of  a  person's  name  (by  spelling  it  thus:  s-e,  C) 
which  is  the  plan  upon  which  all  initials  are  represented  in  shorthand 
writing,  as  is  fully  explained  in  the  last  lesson  of  this  course. 


HOLDING  THE  PENCIL. 

In  Lesson  I  the  student  is  requested,  when  writing  phonography, 
to  hold  the  pen  or  pencil  between  the  first  and  second  fingers,  merely 
keeping  it  in  place  with  the  thumb.  Most  phonographers  employ  this 
method,  though  there  are  a  few  who  profess  to  prefer  the  ordinary  pen- 
manship style,  saying  that  a  special  method  for  shorthand  writing  is  sim- 
ply affectation.  This  is  a  mistake.  The  philosophy  of  the  matter  is,  that 
in  ordinary  penmanship  the  letters  all  slant  in  one  direction,  and  are 
written  always  either  downward  from  the  right  or  upward  from  the  left, 
and  hence  the  regular  penmanship  manner  of  holding  the  pen  is  de- 
cidedly preferable  in  ordinary  writing;  but  in  writing  phonographically 
the  shorthand  characters  are  formed  in  such  a  variety  of  directions, 
downward  from  the  right,  perpendicularly,  horizontally,  etc.,  etc.,  that 
a  special  position  of  the  hand,  if  one  would  make  the  characters  easily 
and  rapidly,  is  a  requisite  which  is  best  secured  by  holding  the  pen  or 
pencil  between  the  first  and  second  fingers,  by  which  plan  the  hand  is 
less  liable  to  become  cramped  from  excess  of  work. 


EXERCISE     III. 


KEY  III. 

i,  rye;  2,  ray;  3,  rue;  4,  Wright;  5,  Coyle;  6,  Gale;  7,  Coke;  8,  Bower; 
9,  Bain;  10,  Roote;  n,  Rich;  12,  Mack;  13,  Dodd;  14,  Wren;  15,  Peel;  16, 
Kurr;  17,  Cuba;  18,  Foote;  19,  Shah;  20,  Bawn;  21,  say;  22,  ask;  23,  sack; 
24,  case;  25,  race;  26,  racy;  27,  Gypsey;  28,  gas;  29,  city;  30,  sire;  31, 
sage;  32,  dies;  33,  dizzy;  34,  maze;  35,  mazy;  36,  lazy;  37,  same;  38,  save; 
39,  vice;  40,  safe;  41,  face;  42,  faces;  43,  paces;  44,  races;  4-,  Miss  C.  Q. 
X.  Cook  buys  eight  laces  a  day. 


LESSON  IV. 

ADDITIONAL  USE  OF  THE  VISIBLE  VOWELS. 

In  words  wherein  visible  vowels  are  necessary,  and  where  the  junc- 
ture of  a  visible  vowel  with  the  required  consonant  or  consonants  would 
be  difficult  or  impossible  to  accomplish,  a  sign  representing  another 
sound  of  the  same  Roman  vowel  is  substituted.  For  instance,  it  would 
be  impossible  to  recognize  the  straight  sign  for  long  I,  when  joined  to 
the  letter  P,  and  yet  to  properly  read  the  word  Pine,  when  it  is  a 
person's  name,  it  is  necessary  to  visibly  represent  the  vowel  sound.  To 
do  this  we  join  the  sign  for  short-i,  and,  in  order  to  show  that  we  in- 
tend the  sound  meant  to  be  long-I,  we  thicken  short-i,  as  it  is  shown  in 
sign  27  in  Exercise,  which  thickening  tells  us  that  it  is  substituted  for 
long-I.  Similarly,  as  in  signs  28  and  29  in  Exercise,  other  light  vowels 
may  be  substituted  to  represent  the  long  ones  by  thickening,  excepting 
the  sign  for  short-a,  which  is  not  needed  to  be  substituted  for  long,  ordi- 
nary A,  because  the  sound  for  Ai  can  be  better  employed,  as  in  sign  24 
in  Exercise,  though  as  A  and  Ai  represent  sounds  so  very  similar  that 
most  people  make  no  difference  in  their  pronunciation,  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  thicken  either  A  or  Ai  when  substituted  for  each  other,  either 
sign  being  used  for  the  other  without  particular  indication.  In  instances 
where  the  long  sounds  of  O  and  Oo  need  to  be  shown,  but  will  not 
join,  the  signs  for  their  short  sounds  are  used,  and  bowed  in  the  oppo- 
site direction  to  show  substitution,  short-o  being  turned  around  in  the 
form  of  a  heavy  letter  Way,  and  short-oo,  like  a  heavy  short-u,  as  in 
signs  33  and  34  in  Exercise.  Short-oo,  when  made  in  the  shape  of  a 
short-u,  will  not  be  mistaken  for  that  letter;  because,  when  the  sign  for 
long-U  is  substituted  for  the  short  one  it  is  only  shaded  at  one  end  of 
the  curve,  while  short-oo  is  thick  all  over.  Compare  sign  29  with 
sign  34  in  Exercise.  For  a  similar  reason  short-u,  when  shaded  to 
indicate  the  sound  of  long-U,  will  not  be  mistaken  for  the  substituted 
short-oo.  Compare  signs  30  and  34. 

When  Oi  is  required  to  be  added  to  B  and  similar  shaped  charac- 
ter?, it  may  be  bowed  in  the  shape  of  short-a,  as  in  sign  35  in  Exercise, 
and  being  written  heavy  will  not  be  mistaken  for  short-a,  as  short-a  is 
never  thickened  when  substituted  for  any  other  sound  of  A. 

To  accommodate  the  downward  stroke  of  Ow,  the  letter  Hay  is 
written  upward,  as  in  sign  25  in  Exercise,  but  as  Hay  should  generally 
be  written  downward,  Ow  would  have  to  be  written  upward  upon  such 
other  occasions. 

Ah   may  be  used  for  Aw  by  thickening  beginning  stroke.     Sign  31. 


Ah  and  short-ah  may  be  substituted  for  each  other  without  thicken- 
ing, as  in  sign  26  in  Exercise. 

The  sign  for  Ah  or  short-ah  may  be  substituted  for  A  or  short-a  in 
instances  where  the  regular  sign  for  A  or  short-a  would  not  join,  as  in 
sign  32  in  Exercise. 

This  substitution  of  the  vowel  signs  for  one  another,  as  shown  in 
signs  24  to  34  in  our  Exercise,  as  above  described,  illustrate  instances 
which  will,  however,  very  seldom  occur,  and  need  not  cause  any  fear  of 
confliction  on  the  part  of  the  student.  The  vowel  signs  will,  in  general, 
join  easily  when  required,  as  they  do  in  last  lesson,  without  substitutes. 

If  students  prefer,  they  need  not  join  the  vowels. 

COALESCING  VISIBLE  VOWELS. 

Besides  the  preceding  described  uses  for  the  visible  vowels,  they 
are  also  employed  in  instances  where  two  vowel  sounds  together  ter- 
minate a  word,  as  with  the  vowel  sounds  of  a  and  e  pronounced  ter- 
minating the  word  payee.  Sign  18  in  Exercise.  In  such  case  and 
others  illustrated  in  the  Exercise,  it  would  be  impossible  to  invisibly 
represent  two  sounds  by  one  preceding  consonant  sign,  and  a  visible 
vowel  cannot  indicate  an  invisible  one,  nor  a  consonant  indicate 
one  invisible  and  one  visible  vowel  at  the  same  time.  Hence,  the 
necessity  and  wisdom  in  writing  both  vowel  sounds  wnen  they  together 
terminate  a  word. 

In  some  instances,  however,  as  in  such  words  as  Uriah,  Noah,  etc., 
the  final  Roman  ah  possesses  a  sort  of  neutral  sound,  in  which  the 
aspirate  sound  of  H  seems  to  take  so  important  a  part,  the  sound  being 
eh,  that,  in  such  cases,  especially  if  the  sign  for  short-e  would  not 
make  a  perfect  juncture,  the  sign  for  Hay  may  be  joined  terminating 
the  outline,  providing  Hay  be  written  upwards  when  so  joined,  as  in 
signs  21  and  22,  etc.  in  Exercise.  This  use  of  the  letter  Hay  will  not 
cause  it  to  clash  with  its  ordinary  use  as  a  consonant,  because,  as  a 
consonant,  it  would  not  occur  following  a  visible  vowel,  and  also  because 
of  the  fact  that  it  is  written  downwards  as  a  consonant,  while,  in  the 
representation  of  i-ah  and  o-ah,  it  is  written  upwards.  I-ah  and  O-ah 
are  written  the  same  when  they  occur  preceding  a  word,  as  in  Owen, 
where  the  sound  is  O-eh-n.  If  Owen  were  to  be  written  simply  O-n,  as 
some  suppose,  it  might  be  read  as  Own.  Therefore,  indicate  the  eh 
sound,  as  in  sign  23. 

It  will  be  noticed  in  writing  the  names  Uriah,  Noah,  etc.,  that  no 
provision  is  made  in  phonography  to  indicate  capital  letters.  In 
other  words,  the  capital  letter  N  in  Noah  (sign  22),  is  represented  by 


the  same  sign  which  is  used  to  indicate  the  small  letter  n  in  kneii?,  sign  3 
in  Lesson  I.  This  principle  is  founded  upon  the  fact  that,  as  people  do 
n<^t  indicate  capital  letters  when  they  speak,  it  is,  therefore,  equally 
unnecessary  to  represent  them  in  phonography,  and  as  phonographers 
write  from  sound  entirely,  no  confusion  can  arise  in  reading  one's  short- 
hand notes  even  without  capital  letter  indication. 

VISIBLE  VOWEL  JUNCTURES. 

As  it  is  in  only  a  very  few  words  of  our  language  wherein  it  is 
necessary  to  write  vowels,  the  student  will  seldom  be  required  to  write 
such  cumbrous  outlines  as  predominate  this  lesson,  vowels  in  general 
being  indicated  invisibly,  as  in  Exercise  of  first  and  succeeding  lessons. 

The  principal  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  show  students  how  to  join 
vowels  when  necessary,  in  personal  names  and  initials,  and  though,  in 
writing  the  latter,  the  vowel  signs  should  always  be  employed  for  reasons 
which  students  will  understand  better  as  they  progress,  yet,  even  in 
personal  names,  if  students  are  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  personality 
they  are  writing  about,  they  need  not  insert  vowels  unless  they  so 
desire,  but  simply  write  the  consonant  outline  in  position  to  indicate 
the  vowel,  just  as  common  words  are  written  phonographically. 

THE  INVISIBLE  ALPHABET. 

In  Lesson  I  was  explained  the  application  of  the  main  principle  of 
the  Invisible  Alphabet  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography,  in  indicating 
the  vowel  sounds  of  I,  A  and  U  invisibly  by  writing  a  consonant,  after 
which  one  of  those  vowel  sounds  occurred,  either  above,  on,  through  or 
beneath  the  line  of  writing,  according  to  whichever  vowel  was  intended 
at  the  time,  and  such  principle  has  been  used  throughout  the  Exercise 
of  each  lesson  preceding  this,  but  the  positions  of  the  consonants  were 
given  no  technical  names.  The  student  now  being  prepared  for  further 
explanation  concerning  the  entire  Invisible  Alphabet,  it  becomes  neces- 
sary to  state  that  those  three  positions — above,  on,  through  or  beneath 
the  line  of  writing — are  known  respectively  as  the  first,  second  and  third 
positions,  and  the  vowels  represented  by  such  positions  are  known  as 
first-place  vowels,  second-place  vowels  or  third  place  vowels,  the  sound 
of  I,  therefore,  when  represented  invisibly,  being  a  first-place  vowel;  A., 
a  second-place  vowel,  and  U,  a  third-place  vowel. 

But  those  three  vowels  are  not  the  only  ones  so  represented  and  so 
named.  On  the  contrary,  the  entire  eighteen  vowel  sounds  of  the 
English  language  are  divided  into  those  three  classes — first-place, 
second-place,  and  third-place  vowels — and  are  represented  invisibly  by 
those  three  positions  only,in  accordance  with  the  table  at  top  of  next  page: 


FIRST 

PLACE 

VOWELS 

SECOND 
PLACE 


E 
I 


Long  sound,  as  heard  in  beet, 
Short  sound,  as  heard  in  b^t. 

Long  or  dual  sound,  as  heard  in  b/'te, 
Short  sound  as  heard  in  bit. 


I 

,^y   j  The  diphthongal  sound,  heard  in 
(  the  words  boil  and  ouster. 

f  Long  English  sounds,  heard  in  pate  or  pair, 
.     !  Sounds  of  AH,  heard  in  pa  and  ask. 
I  Broad  sound  of  AW,  heard  in  pall, 
[_  Short  sound,  as  heard  in  Pat. 


To  indicate 
these  sounds, 
write  the  con- 
sonants or  a 
( word  in  the 


f 


FIRST 


POSITION, 
j  above  the  line. 


PLACE 


VOWELS 


O 


U 


OO 


Long  sound,  as  heard  in  p^le, 
Short  sound,  as  heard  in  P^lly. 


I 

j  Long  sound,  as  heard  in  p?/re, 
|  Short  sound,  as  heard  in  pwtty. 

Long  sound,  as  heard  in  ioo\, 
Short  sound,  as  heard  in  ioot. 


/-VTX7  )  Diphthongal  sound,  as  heard 
in  the  words  f^zc/1  and  allow. 


To    indicate 
these    sounds, 

consonants 
should  occupy 

SECOND 
POSITION, 

resting  on  the 
line. 


For  these, 
place  con- 
sonants in 

THIRD 
POSITION. 


through  or  be- 
neath the  line. 

Read  the  above  table  over  until  well  understood,  but  it  is  not 
necessary  to  memorize  it  entire.  Simply  to  memorize  the  main  letters 
E,  I,  Oi;  A,  O;  U,  Oo  and  Ow;  and  their  positions,  is  sufficient  to  im- 
press the  positions  of  the  other  sounds  upon  the  mind,  because  the 
other  sounds  are  merely  variations  of  those  eight. 

Nor  need  students  fear  that  the  use  of  only  three  positions  for  the 
representation  of  eighteen  different  vowel  sounds  will  serve  to  perplex 
them,  when  reading  their  own  notes,  if  correctly  written.  All  profes- 
sional shorthand  writers  omit  those  eighteen  sounds,  representing  their 
omission  by  three  positions  only,  and  to  illustrate  how  comparatively 
easy  it  is  to  read  by  position,  even  with  such  a  number  of  invisible  vowel 
sounds  to  choose  between,  let  us  analyze  the  first  word  in  our  Exercise. 
The  fir  t  sign  in  our  Exercise  happens  to  be  an  F  above  the  line,  which 
position,  we  are  told  by  above  schedule,  represents  the  indication  of 
either  of  the  three  sounds  E,  I  or  Oi  after  the  letter  F;  therefore,  such 
sign  reads,  according  to  the  rule,  either  f-e,  fee;  f-i,  fie;  or  f-oi,  foi. 
But,  as  f.'i  is  no  word  at  all,  we  have  but  two  words  to  choose  between, 
fee  or  fie.  In  this  instance  the  word  intended  is  fee,  because  the  Key 
to  the  Exercise  says  so.  But  should  there  have  been  no  Key  it  would 


not  have  mattered  which  word  the  pupil  transcribed  it  as,  because 
the  words  in  this  Exercise  are  in  no  wise  dependent  on  each  other. 
Indeed,  in  this  and  some  subsequent  lessons,  wherein  the  words  of  the 
Exercise  are  isolated,  pupils  may  frequently,  though  working  according 
to  rule,  interpret  words  differently  from  the  Key,  as  they  might  have 
done  with  fee,  in  this  Exercise.  This  must  not, -however,  lead  them  to 
suppose  that  this  will  always  be  their  experience.  On  the  contrary, 
should  this  letter  F  have  occured  (in  the  position  it  occupies  in  this  in- 
stance) within  a  sentence,  no  doubt  about  its  meaning  would  have 
arisen,  because  other  words  preceding  or  following  this  particular  word 
in  the  same  sentence  would  have  designated  its  meaning  at  once.  A 
person  would  not  be  apt  to  say  "A  lawyer'syfc, "  or  "Fee,  fee,  for  shame!" 

In  sign  2  in  Exercise  the  position  adds  either  A  or  O  to  F,  making 
either  fay  or  foe,  but  as  the  Key  says  foe,  read  it  so,  especially  as  there 
is  no  such  modern  word  as  fay. 

Sign  3  would  read  as  either  f-u  few;  f-oo,  foo;  or  f-ow,  fow;  but  as 
foo  and  fow  are  no  words,  we  read  the  outline  as  few;  so  that,  as  a 
general  [rule,  only  one  word  could  be  made  out  of  such  outlines  anyway, 
and  where  more  than  one,  the  context  shows  which  one.  Where  such 
would  not  be  the  case  the  visible  vowel  would  be  written  as  in  signs  1 2  to 
14  in  Exercise.  Sometimes  a  preceding  vowel  is  written,  and  the  final 
vowel  indicated  by  position,  as  in  signs  15  to  17 — the  preceding  vowel 
a  in  allow  being  written  and  the  L  placed  through  the  line  to  indicate 
ow  after  the  L,  spelling  a-l-ow,  allow,  etc.,  etc. 

IMPORTANCE  OF  SPELLING  BY  SOUND. 

The  main  thing  is  not  to  forget  that  phonography  means  writing  by 
sound.  No  attention  should  be  paid  to  ordinary  spelling.  Keep  in 
mind  the  fact  that  the  invisible  vowel  Ow  does  not  mean  the  letters  O 
and  W,  and  can  not  be  used  to  spell  the  word  know.  The  Invisible 
Alphabet  Ow  is  the  sound  of  Ow,  as  heard  in  such  words  as  bough,  which 
word  is  spelled  phonetically  b-ow,  bough,  as  in  sign  6  in  Exercise.  The 
word  know  is  spelled  n-o,  know;  shows,  sh-o-s,  as  in  signs  8  and  44. 

Again,  do  not  seek  to  indicate  the  silent  letter  e  occurring  at  the 
end  of  such  English-spelled  words  as  foe,  chase,  sale,  etc.,  signs  2,  38  and 
40  in  Exercise.  F  and  o  spell  foe  phonographically  and  chay-s,  chase, 
or  S,  long-A  and  1,  sale,  just  as  correctly  as  speech  can  utter  them. 

Do  not,  for  an  instant,  forget  that  it  is  the  phonographic  reporter's 
duty  simply  to  write  the  sounds  which  drop  from  the  speaker's  lips,  not 
to  spell  words.  For,  if  all  the  sounds  of  a  speaker's  utterance  are  cor- 
rectly placed  on  paper,  the  speech  has  actually  been  placed  there,  and 


simply  by  pronouncing  the  sounds  ther,on,  in  their  order,  the  speech  is 
heard  again,  and  can  easily  be  transcribed  iflto  ordinary  spelling  for  the 
use  of  those  who  do  not  know  the  shorthand.  Once  get  the  sound  cor- 
rect and  the  sense  is  there  also,  for  it  is  only  sounds  we  hear  when  we 
speak  to  one  another,  and  what  is  more  useful  or  more  used  than 
speech?  People  do  not  spell  nor  indicate  silent  or  capital  letters  when 
speaking,  which  fact  is  the  prime  reason  why  it  is  not  necessary  to  do 
either  in  phonography.  The  simple  presentation  of  the  seven  small 
letters,  i  c  u  x-1  f-e,  when  addressing  a  lady  or  child,  would  be  under- 
stood quite  as  readily  as  if  you  had  written  the  words  which  those 
sounds  represent,  and  had  spelled  and  capitalized  them  into  the  bargain. 
The  full  sentence,  "I  see  you  excel,  Effie,"  may  be  better  English  spell- 
ing, but  it  means  no  more  than  the  seven  letters  above  printed. 

Spelling  by  sound  always  saves  time,  and  though  it  may  seem 
strange  to  the  beginner  that  it  makes  our  shorthand  Visible  Alphabet 
longer  than  the  ordinary  A,  B,  C,  or  Roman  alphabet,  yet  such  devia- 
tion in  length  is  really  only  a  seeming  "one,  as,  in  the  Roman  alphabet, 
several  letters  have  more  than  one  sound. 

The  reason  our  shorthand  alphabet  commences  with  P,  B,  T  and  D, 
instead  of  A,  B,  C,  is  because  the  phonographic  alphabet  is  arranged  to 
suit  the  order  of  the  signs,  instead  of  their  name. 

POSITION  VOCALIZATION. 

As  in  this  lesson  are  represented  words  having  two  joined  conso- 
nants, it  is  necessary  to  state  that,  in  general,  the  invisible  vowel  sound 
is  indicated  by  the  first  consonant  of  a  word,  no  matter  what  position 
the  other  consonants  may  happen  to  be  in,  as  in  sign  48,  the  invisible 
vowel  O  in  ropes  being  indicated  by  the  position  of  the  first  consonant  R, 
and  not  by  the  second  consonant.  This  is  the  rule.  But  like  most  rules 
in  life  it,  of  necessity,  has  an  exception,  but  only  one:  That  exception 
existing  in  instances  where  the  small  consonants,  Hay,  Way  and  Whay, 
or  the  horizontal  consonants,  K,  Gay,  M  and  N,  are  followed  by  a  de- 
scending letter,  as  in  signs  51  to  62,  inclusive,  in  which  case  the  invisible 
vowel  is  determined  by  the  position  of  the  second  consonant,  instead  of 
the  first.  But  it  is  only  when  the  second  consonant  is  a  descending  one 
that  the  exception  applies,  as  otherwise  the  regular  rule  governs  Way, 
K,  Gay,  etc.,  as  well  as  other  consonants. 

In  words  of  two  syllables,  such  as  berry  and.  funny  (signs  64  and  65), 
the  concluding  letter  Y  is  pronounced  somewhat  like  the  short-i  in  bit, 
or  like  an  E.  Those  words,  then,  in  spelling  by  sound,  must  be  spelled 
ber-e,  berry;  fun-e,  funny;  and,  being  spelled  phonographically  with 
those  sound  letters,  they  must  be  written  accordingly;  hence  the  final 


letter  Y  in  those  and  similarly  constructed  words  is  written  with  the  E 
sound  of  Y  indicated  invisibly,  but  not  by  position,  because  not  necessary. 

It  is  impossible,  in  writing  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  always 
to  give  each  syllable  the  proper  position  required  by  its  particular 
vowel.  As  a  general  rule,  only  one  syllable  in  a  word  can  be  accommo- 
dated in  this  respect,  and  the  syllable  thus  honored  should  be  either  the 
first,  as  in  sign  65,  or  the  syllable  containing  the  most  conspicuous 
vowel,  which  is  generally  the  accented  one.  There  are  instances,  how- 
ever, in  which  it  is  not  necessary  to  apply  this  rule.  Those  instances  are 
found  in  words,  the  phonetic  outlines  of  which  are  so  extended  that 
their  meaning  is  sufficiently  distinct  without  recourse  to  any  especially 
significant  position,  and  which  are,  therefore,  written  in  the  second  po- 
sition, the  easiest  position  in  which  to  write.  Sign  67  in  Exercise. 

It  may  be  asked  what  rule  will  determine  whether  sign  65  in  Exer- 
cise spells  fun  or  funny,  since  both  words  contain  the  same  consonants, 
F  and  N.  To  this  the  author  replies  that  each  alphabetical  conso- 
nant may  indicate  an  invisible  vowel  after  it,  and  there  being  two  full- 
sized  consonants  (F  and  N)  in  funny,  there  may  also  be  two  vowels  indi- 
cated, one  after  each  consonant,  as  there  happens  to  be  (f  u  and  n-e), 
which,  vowels  and  consonants,  spell  funny.  Fun  would  have  been  written 
with  only  one  full  sized  consonant  (an  F),  the  N  in  fun  being  indicated 
in  another  manner,  the  explanation  of  which  is  reserved  for  future  lessons. 

It  would  be  unprofitable  to  students  were  the  author  to  fake  up 
space  in  the  descriptive  part  of  a  lesson  to  presuppose  instances  ahfad 
of  the  principles  already  described  in  the  lesson.  And,  furthermore, 
such  a  method,  ia  addition  to  being  a  waste  of  time,  would  have  no 
other  effect  than  to  confuse. 

It  is,  therefore,  best  for  students  not  to  worry  themselves  about  future 
possibilities — wondering  whether  such  a  manner  of  writing  a  word  will 
or  will  not  cause  connection  with  other  words  not  in  the  lessons,  etc., 
etc.  Better  learn  the  lessons  just  as  they  are,  reading  the  Exercise  as 
the  Key  says,  and  writing  words  in  the  Key  as  the  Exercise  directs,  and 
the  student  will  be  sure  not  to  go  astray.  Remember  that  everything 
cannot  be  explained  in  one  lesson,  and  that  if  students  will  be  satisfied 
to  take  instruction  as  it  comes,  they  will  find  all  their  questions  answ  red 
and  all  their  conundrums  solved  by  the  time  the  last  lesson  is  reached, 
while  most  questions  will  solve  themselves  as  one  progresses. 

Students  must  expect,  at  first,  a  little  difficulty  in  reading  purely 
consonant  outlines,  but  this  difficulty  will  diminish  with  each  lesson,  and 
entirely  disappear  with  practice  in  reading. 


In  sign  42  in  Exercise,  the  big  circle-Ses  is  written  above  the  line 
for  the  word  cease,  and  in  sign  43,  the  small  circle-s  is  also  added  inside 
the  large  circle  to  make  ceases, 

Additional  practice  in  joining  the  circle-S  and  Ses  is  given  in 
signs  37  to  50,  inclusive.  The  word  necessity,  sign  65,  is  spelled  ne-ses-te, 
as  it  is  easy  to  read  it  in  that  shape,  while  such  outline  is  easily  written. 

Accustom  yourself  to  holding  your  pencil  between  the  first  and 
second  fingers,  and  not  between  the  thumb  and  first  finger.  The  latter 
may  be  correct  for  ordinary  penmanship,  where  the  letters  all  slant  in 
the  same  direction,  but  in  shorthand  the  letters  slant  in  so  many  ways, 
many  of  them  backward  and  perpendicular,  that  to  accurately  write 
such  shorthand  characters  it  is  necessary  to  hold  the  pencil  as  advised. 


EXERCISE     IT. 


^ 


^ 


..40..C..4.*.  ..42.°..4£?..44  ^...45.^.46  ....... 


.^l..^J...^3..]...^4.:..^^ 

's&Mb^Q.^  ........ 

^»—^  6 


KEY  IV. 

i,  Fee;  2,  foe;  3,  few;  4,  joy;  5,  dough;  6,  bough;  7,  knee;  8,  know;  9, 
thou;  10,  key;  n,  cow;  12,  caw;  13,  low;  14,  law;  15,  allow;  16,  ago;  17, 
ague;  18,  payee;  19,  snowy;  20,  Louis;  21,  Uriah;  22,  Noah;  23,  Owen; 
24,  Dale;  25,  Howe;  26,  Parr;  27,  Pine;  28,  Penn;  29,  Rugg;  30,  Buelah; 
31,  Shaw;  32,  Pattie;  33,  Doe;  34,  Hook;  35,  Boyle;  36,  Katie;  37,  soup; 
38,  chase;  39,  sash;  40,  sale;  41,  seize;  42,  cease;  43,  ceases;  44,  shows; 
45,  nice;  46,  muses;  47,  teams;  48,  ropes;  49,  reaches;  50,  rushes;  51, 
weighed;  52,  weed;  53,  wooed;  54,  whit;  55,  hate;  56,  hut;  57,  hit;  58, 
hop;  59,  nip;  60,  nap;  61,  myth;  62,  mouth;  63,  ferry;  64,  berry;  65, 
funny;  66,  necessity;  67,  customary;  68,  Ripe  peaches  are  wholesome. 


LESSON   V. 

THE  BEGINNING  HOOKS. 

While  the  letter  Way  is  quite  correctly  joined  to  Ing,  as  in  sign  2 
in  Exercise,  there  is  also,  in  some  instances,  a  much  easier  and  more 
rapid  manner  of  joining  Way  or  Whay  to  N  and  to  some  other  letters. 
This  is  by  running  the  letter  Way  into  the  letter  to  which  it  is  joined, 
without  showing  point  of  juncture,  as  in  signs  i,  7,  8,  etc.  in  Exercise, 
forming  what  is  known  as  the  Way  or  Whay  hook,  it  indicating  the 
sound  of  Whay  as  well.  The  hook,  it  will  be  noticed,  is  always  shaded 
upon  the  commencing  stroke  and  accommodates  itself  to  the  shape 
of  the  main  letter  to  which  it  is  joined,  being,  therefore,  joined  to 
the  full-sized  letters  L,  M,  etc,  in  the  most  convenient  manner,  which 
though  in  the  case  of  L  (sign  9),  makes  the  hook  somewhat  resemble 
U,  yet  it  will  never  be  mistaken  to  be  any  other  character  than  what  it 
is,  for  the  reason  that  U  would  not  be  written  backwards,  as  the  Way 
and  Whay  hook  is  in  these  cases.  The  letter  Whay  can  also  be  sub- 
stituted for  Way,  to  facilitate  junctures,  as  in  signs  3  to  5  in  Exercise. 

This  Way  or  Whay  hook  is  what  is  known  as  a  beginning  hook,  be- 
cause it  is  placed  at  the  beginning  of  outlines.  There  are  other 
beginning  hooks  of  still  more  value  as  abbreviating  principles,  but 
which,  for  special  reasons,  are  best  classed  as  double,  triple  and  quad- 
ruple consonants.  Below  we  explain  the 

DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. — A  small  beginning  hook,  written  on  the  left 
side  of  the  upright  and  slanting  straight  characters,  P,  B,  T,  D,  etc.,  and 
on  the  under  side  of  the  horizontal  ones,  K,  Gay,  etc.,  indicates  the 
addition  of  R  to  the  full-sized  consonants  to  which  it  is  joined.  See 
signs  ii,  13,  15,  17,  19,  21  and  50  in  Exercise.  A  similar  hook,  also  be- 
ginning outlines,  but  written  on  the  upper  side  of  horizontal  and  left 
side  of  upright  straight  characters,  adds  L  to  the  full-sized  consonants 
to  which  it  is  joined.  See  signs  numbered  12,  14,  16,  18,  2o  and  49  in 
Exercise.  Although,  in  writing  these  combinations,  which  are  denomi- 
nated the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  Double  Consonants,  the  signs  are  com- 
menced at  the  hooks,  yet,  in  reading  them,  the  L  or  R  hook,  as  the  case 
may  be,  is  read  after  the  consonant  to  which  it  is  joined.  These  com- 
binations must  not  ba  called  p-r,  p-1,  etc.,  but  as  one  sound,  Per,  Pel,  etc. 

While  these  L  and  R  hooks  are  comparatively  easily  added  to 
straight  letters,  such  is  not  entirely  the  case  with  the  curved  consonants. 
For  instance,  though  the  L  hook  may  readily  be  added  to  Ith,  as  in  sign 
38  in  Exercise,  yet  it  would  be  very  awkward  to  add  an  R  hook  to  Ith. 
Similarly  with  other  curves.  We  can  add  an  L  hook  to  an  F,  as  in  sign 


34.  but  not  an  R  hook  conveniently.  We  can  add  an  R  hook  to  V,  sign 
36;  to  long  S,  sign  40;  or  to  Ish,  sign  42;  but  we  cannot  conveniently  add 
an  L  hook  to  V,  long  S  or  Ish.  We  therefore  employ  this  rule:  Add 
the  beginning  hooks  to  curved  letters  the  same  way  as  to  the  straight 
letters,  when  convenient;  when  not  convenient,  shade  the  curved  letters 
to  indicate  the  hook  instead  of  writing  the  hook.  This  shading  would 
indicate  the  additio  i  of  R  to  F,  Ith  and  L,  signs  35,  39  and  44;  and  would 
add  L  to  V  or  Ish,  signs  37  and  43.  That  is,  the  shading  indicates  the 
hook  letter  that  cannot  be  easily  attached. 

The  L  hook  is  not  added  to  L,  and  it  cannot  be  added  to  long-Z, 
nor  should  long-S  be  thickened  to  indicate  L,  because  thickening  long-S 
would  make  it  look  like  a  long-Z. 

It  will  be  seen,  by  reference  to  signs  52,  53  and  54,  that  the  L  is 
indicated  to  Ish  in  two  ways,  due  to  the  fact  that  the  sign  Ish  may  be 
written  either  upwards  or  downwards  in  junctures  with  other  full 
sized  characters,  though,  when  alone,  it  is  only  written  downward.  On 
one  plan,  signs  52  and  53,  the  hook,  being  a  beginning  one,  is,  of  course, 
joined  at  the  bottom  of  the  letter,  Ish  therein  being  written  upwards 
and  begun  at  the  lower  end,  the  hook  being'attached  the  same  as  to  K 
''in  sign  51.  In  the  outlines  in  signs  52  and  53,  is  also  another  full-sized 
letter — Ing  in  52  and  F  in  53 — which  show  the  direction  in  which 
the  Ish  is  written,  but,  where  the  only  full  sized  letter  written  is 
Ish,  then  it  would  be  impossible  to  tell  in  which  direction  Ish  is  written 
unless  we  adhere  to  the  rule  to  write  Ish  downwards  always  when  it  is 
written  alone,  and  in  such  case  we  must  shade  Ish  to  indicate  the  addi- 
tion of  L,  as  in  sign  43;  also  whenever  Ish  is  written  downwards,  no 
matter  how  many  letters  we  attach  to  it,  as  in  shellac,  sign  54. 

The  R  hook  is  added  to  M  and  the  L  hook  to  N  on  the  most  con- 
venient side  of  those  two  letters,  which  would  be  the  same  sides  as  they 
would  be  added  to  straight  letters.  Compare  sign  45  with  sign  13  in 
Exercise  and  sign  47  with  sign  51.  To  add  L  to  M  and  R  to  N,  we 
thicken  M  or  N  and  retain  the  same  hooks,  as  in  signs  46  and  48  in 
Exercise.  This  is  done  because,  if  we  did  not  retain  the  hooks,  the 
thickening  of  M  and  N  would  cause  them  to  be  mistaken  for  Mb  or  Mp 
and  Ing.  Therefore,  the  student  need  entertain  no  fear  that  sign  46 
will  ever  be  mistaken  for  Mbr,  Mpr,  Mbl,  or  sign  48  for  Ingr,  or  Ingl, 
for  the  hooks  R  or  L  are  never  added  to  Ing,  nor  Emp,  nor  are  they  in- 
tended to  be  added  to  any  of  the  small  characters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet. 

Signs  47,  48,  49,  51,  etc.,  need  not  be,  by  the  careful  pupil,  con- 
fused with  Way-n,  Way-ing,  Way-r,  etc.,  as  the  latter  are  written 
as  in  signs  i,  2,  7,  4, etc.,  with  either  a  shaded  hook  or  letter  Way  or  Whay. 


Rarer,  sign  33,  is  simply  the  word  rare,  with  another  R  added  to  it. 

Although  the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants  should  be 
ordinarily  pronounced  as  though  the  invisible  vowel  E  existed  between 
the  P  and  L  or  P  and  R,  etc.,  yet  this  is  done  merely  for  the  sake  of 
appreciating  the  double  character  of  their  consonants,  for  any  other 
vowel  may,  at  times,  occur  between  the  P-l  and  P-r,  etc.,  as  with  chair, 
sign  19.  Furthermore,  these  double  consonants,  Per,  Pel,  etc.,  may 
not  possess  any  vowel  sound  between  them,  but  indicate  it  after  them, 
as  with  sign  21,  in  which  the  invisible  vowel  sound  Oo  follows  the 
double  consonant  Dr.  When,  however,  there  are  two  separate  vowel 
sounds  in  a  word,  as  in  the  two-syllabled  word  dowry  (spelled  phono- 
graphically  d-ow-re),  the  hook  R  should  not  be  employed,  the  conson- 
ants of  the  word  being  written  out  in  full,  as  in  sign  22,  in  order  to 
clearly  indicate  the  presence  of  two  vowel  sounds. 

The  student  should  particularly  bear  in  mind  that,  although,  in 
writing  these  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants,  they  are  com- 
menced at  the  hooks,  yet,  in  reading  them,  the  R  or  L  hook,  as  the  case 
may  be,  is  read  after  the  main  consonant;  therefore,  in  reading  Shel, 
the  second  syllable  in  facial,  sign  53,  the  full  sized  consonant  Ish  is 
read  before  the  hook  L,  and  the  hook  L  last;  thus,  fa-shel;  not  fa-lish. 

Below  is  given  a  table  of  the  double  consonants: 


Ber 

f 

• 

ytQ\. 

,^Ttl(iT 

l\er 

-  

•  c  

B^mel 
Kel 

Mer 

ff-N           tf> 

Mel 

£er 

<r- 

c- 

del 

Ner 

W          ^ 

Nel 

Per 

\ 

•\ 

Pel 

Per 

L.     <L 

Tel 

3er 

[\ 

^ 

Bel 

Ver 

^    ^> 

Vel 

\ 

Ter 

i 

t 

Tel 

TKer 

(     C 

TKel 

Der 

1 

[ 

Del 

E$er 

5      r 

Cher 

/ 

f 

Chel 

3Jb.er 

J  -Jj. 

| 

Jer 

/ 

f 

Jel 

ler 

r  ^ 

r 

TRIPLE  AND  QUADRUPLE  CONSONANTS. —  The  time-saving  principle  of 
double  consonants  has  just  been  explained;  but  there  are  two  still 
greater  consonant  combinations,  known  as  triple  and  quadruple  series. 

The  triple  series  is  of  two  kinds — the  Pier  and  Prel  series  and  the 
Sper  and  Spel  series,  both  of  which  are  illustrated  at  top  of  next  page: 


Rler 

f 

^ 

Rrel 

3rer 

^ 

e/ 

Srel 

Rmler 

<? 

^ 

Rrarel 

£rmer 

<< 

sS 

Srmel 

Kler 

c- 

c_ 

Rrel 

Sker 

<,— 

^_ 

Skel 

Gler 

C" 

c- 

Grel 

3ger 

«- 

«- 

Sgel 

Pier 

<\ 

^ 

Prel 

Sper 

\ 

^ 

5pel 

Bier 

c\ 

s^ 

Brel 

5ber 

\ 

\ 

Stel 

Tier 

1 

r 

Trel 

3ter 

1 

r 

Stel 

Pier 

1 

r 

Drel 

3der 

1 

r 

3olel 

CKler 

9 

r 

Chrel 

3cKer 

/ 

/ 

3cKel 

Jler 

? 

r 

Jrel 

3jer 

/ 

r 

Sjcl 

Pier 

t. 

c_ 

Irel 

3£er 

^ 

<L 

S£el 

Yler 

^ 

c> 

Vrel 

3ver 

1 

^ 

Svel 

TKler 

C 

c 

THrel 

Stiver 

f 

e 

Sthel 

SKler 

D 

3 

Shrel 

3sJier 

3 

j 

3skel 

Mler 

c\ 

c\ 

Mrel 

3mer 

<^ 

<5\ 

3mel 

Nler 

^ 

0 

Krel 

Pner 

*S 

^ 

Sn.el 

Tlie  above  Pier  and  Prel  series  of  triple  consonants  are  made  by  en- 
larging the  hooks  of  the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants.  See 
signs  23  to  32  Inclusive  in  Exercise.  This  is  merely  the  adding  of  both 
beginning  hooks  R  and  L,  on  same  side  of  the  letter  at  one  time.  The 
written  hook  itself  remains  the  R  hook  or  L,  hook  according  to  which 
side  it  is  on,  the  other  hook  being  read  between  the  the  full  sized  letter 
and  the  hook,  the  fact  that  the  written  hook  is  far  away  from  the  full 
sized  letter,  indicating  the  insertion  of  the  invisible  hook.  Pronounce 
the  full  sized  letter  first,  invisible  consonant  next,  and  written  hook  last. 

The  Sper  and  Spel  series  of  triple  consonants  in  foregoing  plate  is 
formed  by  converting  into  a  circle  the  R  hook  of  the  straight  letters  of 
the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants  (signs  55,  58  and  59  in- 
clusive); by  writing  the  S  circle  inside  the  L,  hook  of  the  straight  letters 
•of  the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants  (signs  56,  57  and  60)  and 
inside  both  the  L,  and  R  hooks  of  the  curved  letters,  Signs  63,  65  and 
66  inclusive.  Where  curved  letters  are  only  shaded  to  add  ~L  or  R,  the 
circle  S  is  added  naturally,  as  in  signs  6r,  62  and  64. 


Sper,  Sjer,  Sker,  etc.,  (signs  55,  58  and  59),  will  not  clash  with 
Sp,  Sj,  Sk,  etc.;  because  in  Sper,  Sjer,  Sker,  etc.,  the  circle  is 
written  on  the  left  and  lower  sides  of  the  main  consonant  to  add  R, 
while  in  the  latter,  the  circle  S  is  on  its  natural  side.  Compare  signs 
55,  58  and  59  of  this  lesson  with  29,  31  and  23  of  Exercise  to  Lesson  III. 

The  quadruple  series  of  consonants,  like  the  triple,  are  of  two 
kinds,  the  Spier  and  Sprel  series  and  the  Sesper  series. 

The  Spier  and  Sprel  series  are  formed  by  adding  a  circle  S  inside 
the  hook  of  the  Pier  and  Prel  series  of  double  consonants.  See  signs 
67  to  71  inclusive  and  the  following  diagram: 


0rler  CP^     e^    3rrel 

iSrmler  ££**    ex*   I 

Skier  G-    e_    $krel 

v-  -/•  I  rt  -y»  ^^"^™          /^                    ^/^*"?»^  I 

L^W    -t  ^  •*•  ^^                   ^MM        t**f*  •*  ^  * 

$pler  ^\     \       Sprcl 

Stler  <°\    \     3i>rel 

5tler  $irel 

3dler  I       I        ^Sdrel 

Sckler  /      /        3cK^e" 

3jler  ?     /*     Sjrel 


jSmler  <?> 
Snler  O 
SHer  t 
3vlcr  ^ 
$tKler  C 


Smrel 


(L/ 


Sfrel 


3sKI 


er 


In  the  cut  below,  we  illustrate  the   beginning  hooks  from  double 
to  quadruple  series,  so  that  the  student  may  intelligently  compare  them: 


Ter 


Tier 


3rer 


3rler 


Tel 


Trel 


Krel 


The  Sesper  series  of  quadruple  consonants  are  formed  by  convert- 
ing into  a  large  sized  circle  the  R  hook  of  the  straight  letters  of  the  Per 
series  of  double  consonants.  The  circle  is  written  twice  the  size  of  the 


circle   S,  and   is  really  the  Ses  circle  written  upon  the  R  hook  side  of 
the  double  consonants,  as  per  diagram  below: 


Ses-ter 
.-per 
Ses-: 


The  Sesper  circle  cannot  be  added  to  the  curved  letters  F,  V,  etc., 
and  therefore,  when  used,  will  never  be  mistaken  for  Ses-p,  Ses-t,  etc., 
because,  as  with  the  preceding  explanation  of  the  difference  between 
Sper  and  Sp,  the  double  consonants  Sesper,  Sester,  etc.,  are  written^  on 
the  reverse  side  of  the  P,  T,  etc.,  to  that  occupied  by  Sesp,  etc.  Sign  77. 

In  writing  these  triple  and  quadruple  consonants,  they  are  always 
commenced  at  the  circle,  when  it  accompanies  them,  and  at  the  hook 
when  the  combinations  have  no  commencing  circle.  In  reading  the 
latter  class  (the  Pier  and  Prel  series)  the  main  consonant  is  read  first, 
ler  or  rel  last,  as  with  the  R  and  L  hooks  in  the  Per  and  Pel  series  of 
double  consonants;  but,  in  reading  all  combinations  beginning  with 
a  circle  (the  Sper  and  Spel,  Spier  and  Sprel  series)  the  circle  S  or  Ses  is 
read  first,  the  main  consonants  P,  B,  etc.,  next,  and  the  hook  or  other 
letter  of  the  combination  last.  This  explanation  refers  only  to  consonants. 
Invisible  vowels  may  intervene  between  any  consonants,  as  in  settle 
(sign  57),  wherein  an  invisible  vowel  is  indicated  between  the  S  and  T 
of  Stel,  in  which  case  S  is  read  first,  invisible  vowel  E  next  and  Tel  last. 
No  invisible  vowel,  however,  can  be  indicated  preceding  the  circle  S  or 
Ses,  because,  as  explained  in  Lesson  III  ,  the  long  sign  for  S,  as  in  the 
Visible  Alphabet,  is  written  when  it  is  desired  to  indicate  an  invisible 
vowel  preceding  S  or  Z,  when  S  or  Z  begin  outlines. 

In  further  explanation  of  the  use  of  these  triple  and  quadruple  conso- 
nants, it  is  necessary  to  state  that  not  only  may  an  invisible  vowel  exist 
between  any  two  consonants  of  these  combinations,  as  with  settle  above 
instanced,  but  any  vowel  may  be  indicated,  as  in  sprawl  (sign  68),  and, 
furthermore,  as  many  invisible  vowels  may  exist  between  the  conso- 
nants as  there  are  consonants  to  read  them  betweefc,  as  instance  the 
case  of  quadruple  consonant  Skier,  which,  in  the  position  represented  in 
the  Exercise  (sign  71)  spells  secular,  thereby  indicating  an  invisible 
vowel  between  the  S  and  K,  one  between  K  and  L,  and  one  between 
L  and  R.  It  is  best  not  to  bother  about  vowels  in  this  lesson.  Learn  the 
words  without  question,  as  shown  in  the  Key,  so  long  as  the  consonant 


combinations  are  well   understood.     The  vowel  sounds  will  be  found  to 
take  care  of  themselves  as  you  progress. 

There  are  instances,  as  in  signs  86  and  87,  straggler  .an.&  stickler, 
where  the  full  form  of  hooks  cannot  be  written,  but  signs  thus  slighted 
will  be  quite  easily  read  by  the  student  alter  becoming  somewhat 
acquainted  with  them.  Do  not  suppose,  however,  that  sign  84  is  simi- 
larly slighted,  for  the  word  descry  is  perfectly  formed,  thus:  d-skr-i,  desry. 


V. 


J^ 


.«^ 


KEY  V. 

i,  Wan;  2,  wing;  3,  wave;  4,  week;  5,  wag;  6,  warm;  7,  wire;  8,  windy; 
9,  whale;  10,  whistle;  u,rare;  12,  rule;  13,  cry;  14,  goal;  15,  pry;  1 6,  blow; 
17,  try;  18,  deal;  19,  chair;  20,  jail;  21,  drew;  22,  dowry;  23,  roller;  24, 
rural;  25,  collar;  26,  girl;  27,  pillar;  28,  barrel;  29,  dealer;  30,  trial;  31, 
jailer;  32,  Charles;  33,  rarer;  34,  fall;  35,  fare;  36,  veer;  37,  vale;  38, 
Ethel;  39,  their;  40,  icer;  41,  user;  42,  share;  43,  shawl;  44,  lore;  45, 
more;  46,  mill;  47,  nail;  48,  near;  49,  rail;  50,  armor;  51,  kill;t/52,  shilling; 
53,  facial;  54,  shellac;  55,  spree;  56,  sable;  57,  settle;  58,  sieger;  59,  soaker; 
60,  saggle;  61,  safer;  62,  civil;  63,  savor;  64,  slur;  65,  sinner;  66,  small; 
67,  sabler;  68,  sprawl;  69,  settler;  70,  sidereal;  71,  secular;  72,  buckler;  73, 
tunnel;  74,  tippler;  75,  treacle;  76,  strainer;  77,  sisterly;  78,  cobbler;  79, 
corporal;  80,  grammar;  Si,  viper;  82,  labor;  83,  leers;  84,  descry;  85,  straggle; 
86,  straggler;  87,  stickler;  88,  George  tore  May's  silk  dress. 


LESSON  VI. 

FINAL  HOOKS. 

A  small  final  hook,  written  on  the  right-hand  side  of  upright  and 
slanting  straight  characters,  and  on  the  upper  side  of  horizontal  ones, 
represents  the  addition  of  either  F  or  V.  Signs  i,  3,  5,  7  and  9,  in 
Exercise.  S  or  Z  may  be  added  to  this  hook  by  writing  the  circle 
within  the  hook.  Signs  13,  15,  17,  etc.  This  F  or  V  hook  is  not  in- 
tended to  be  added  to  the  curved  letters  F,  V,  etc.,  although  some 
writers  use  a  small  shaded  final  hook  on  curves  to  represent  F  or  V,  as 
in  signs  41  and  46. 

A  similarly  sized  final  hook,  written  on  the  left-hand  side  of  upright 
and  slanting  straight  letters,  on  the  lower  side  of  horizontal  ones,  and 
added  in  the  most  convenient  manner  to  curved  letters,  represents  the 
addition  of  N.  Signs  2,  4,  6,  8  and  37  in  Exercise.  The  S  or  Z  circle  is 
added  to  this  hook,  on  curved  letters,  by  writing  the  circle  within 
the  hook  (signs  40,  43  and  50);  and  to  the  straight  consonants, 
by  converting  the  N  hook  into  a  complete  circle  (signs  14,  16,  18,  20 
and  22),  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  by  which  S  is  added  to  Per 
in  Lesson  V.  This  conversion  of  the  N  hook  into  a  circle,  forms  what 
is  called  the  Ns  circle,  which  need  not  be  mistaken  for  the  plain  circle 
S,  because  the  original  circle  S  is  written  on  the  right  hand  side 
of  straight,  upright,  and  the  upper  side  of  horizontal  characters.  The 
following  cut  illustrates  these  hooks  exactly  and  also  the  manner  in  which 
the  S  and  Ns  circles  are  added  to  them. 


R-n 

Rm-n. 

K-n 

Gay-n 

P-n 

B-n 

T-n 

D-n 

Ch-n 

J-rx 


J        J 
J        J 

J      J 


D-TLS 

Ch-nS 
J-n$ 


B4 

T-* 


X  \9 

X  V 

L  I 

I  L 


J- 

J 


-H 
VS 


fs 

V3 


The  Ns  circle  may  be  enlarged  to  represent  the  sounds  of  Nses  or 


Nza>,  signs  51,  53,  etc,  the  Nses  circle  really  being  a  Ses  circle  written 
on  the  N  hook  side.  Neither  the  Ns  circle  nor  the  Nses  circle  are  ever 
added  to  curved  letters. 

A  large  sized  final  hook,  written  on  the  same  side  of  full  sized  con- 
sonants as  that  to  which  the  F  or  V  hook  is  added,  represents  the  ad- 
dition of  the  sounds  Vive,  Viv  or  Tiv.  Signs  26,  28  and  30  in  Exercise. 
The  Tiv  hook,  like  the  V  hook,  is  not  intended  to  be  added  to  curved 
letters,  but  some  writers  use  a  large  shaded  final  hook  on  curves  to  in- 
dicate Tiv,  as  in  sign  48.  The  objection  to  these  shaded  final  hooks  is 
that  generally  they  have  to  be  written  backwards  and  as  it  is  often  hard 
to  form  them,  it  is  quite  as  easy  to  write  the  V  or  Tiv  in  full. 

A  large  final  hook,  written  on  the  same  side  of  full  sized  consonants 
as  that  on  which  the  N  hook  is  written,  represents  the  addition  of  the 
sound  Shun,  as  heard  in  the  words  represented  by  signs  25,  27,  29  and 
31  in  Exercise.  By  consulting  below  diagrams,  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
Shun  hook  is  an  enlarged  N  hook,  the  letter  N  being  the  last  sound  in 
Shun.  Similarly,  the  Tiv  hook  is  an  enlarged  V  hook,  the  sound  of  V 
being:  the  terminat'ng  sound  of  Tiv. 


\J/ 


SK 


un 


Tiv 

or 


Some  phonographers  write  the  Shun  and  Tiv  hooks  transposed,  but 
this  is  very  inadvisable,  for  many  reasons.  For  instance,  by  writing  the 
Shun  hook  on  the  under  side  of  K,  the  word  affectionate  (sign  104)  is 
very  easily  written,  but  write  the  Shun  hook  on  the  reverse  side  and  the 
student  will  find  that  he  can  write  as  far  as  the  sound  Shun  in  the  word, 
but  when  he  attempts  to  add  the  final  syllable  ate,  his  Shun  will  be 
spoiled  entirely.  This  will  never  happen  in  writing  the  syllables  Shun 
or  Tiv  in  the  positions  prescribed  in  these  lessons.  The  only  syllables 
which  are  most  likely  to  follow  Tiv  are  ly  or  ness,  the  latter  being  easily 
added  in  either  case  and  the  former  (/v)  being  easily  added  to  Tiv  only 
when  Tiv  is  written  upon  the  side  prescribed  in  this  lesson.  See  sign 
102  in  Exercise.  Then  again,  it  is  much  more  reasonable  to  suppose 
that  Tiv,  containing  a  V  sound,  should  be  written  on  the  same  side  as 
the  V  hook,  and  the  syllable  Shun,  containing  an  N  sound,  should  be 
written  on  the  same  side  as  an  N  hook,  an  arrangement  which  is  also  a 
great  aid  to  the  memory. 


The  circle  S  or  Z  is  added  to  both  the  Shun  and  Tiv  hooks,  by 
enclosing  the  circle  S  or  Z  within  the  hooks  in  the  manner  illustrated  by 
signs  24  and  44  in  Exercise.  In  adding  the  circle  to  these  large  hooks, 
care  should  be  taken  that  this  addition  does  not  crowd  those  large 
hooks  into  a  resemblance  to  the  smaller  F  or  V  or  N  hooks.  This  is 
easily  avoided  by  making  the  large  hooks  somewhat  larger,  when  adding 
the  circle,  than  ordinary.  The  following  schedule,  which  shows  how 
the  Shun  and  Tiv  hooks  are  added  to  straight  letters,  gives  trfe  proper 
<  sizes  for  the  hooks,  with  or  without  the  circle  S. 


R-shun 

^ 

^s 

R  -  ghuns 

R-tiv 

^ 

6\ 

R-tivs 

Km-  shun 

xO 

^jRnvshunS 

frm-tiv 

x^ 

«J 

Rm-tiv^ 

R-shun 

-o 

—3 

K-  shuns 

K-tiv 

_? 

_2 

R  -tivs 

(Jay  -shun 

—l 

-s 

Gay-  shuns 

Gay-tiv 

_> 

_S 

Gay-  tivs 

P-shun 

^ 

^> 

P-  shuns 

P-tiv 

NO 

\s 

P-tivs 

B-shun 

^ 

^ 

B-sKunS 

B-tiv 

V 

V 

B-tiv^ 

T-shun 

J 

J 

T-shun  3 

T-tiv 

L 

b 

T-tivs 

D-shun 

J 

J 

D-ghun.5 

P-tiv 

L 

b 

D-tivs 

Ch-shun 

J 

e/ 

Ch-  shuns 

Ch-tiv 

6 

^ 

Ch-tivs 

J-  shun 

J 

c/ 

J-  shuns 

J-tiv 

t 

^ 

J-  tivs 

Below  we  give  a  table  showing  how  the  hooks  are  added  to  CUM- 
letters: 


F-n 

V-ZL 

Th-n 

^-^ 

L-n 

M-n 


U  ^ 

C  C 

o/  OS 

r  c* 


F-nS  . 


TK-ns 


M-n 

Ng-a 


M-ns 
M^-ns 
N-ns 
Kg-n5 


F-shun    to     ^2>  I 
V-shun    "D      DA 

G      6    Th-^huns 


L-shan 
M-shiin 


M-shun.3 


N-shun. 
Ng-shun 


N- shuns 
r-  shunS 


o 


In  sign  49  of  this  Exercise,  the  N  hook  of  the  word  shown  is  appar- 


ently  written  identically  the  same  as  the  L  hook  in  the  word  facial,  sign 
53  in  Lesson  V.  This  resemblance,  however,  is  only  a  seeming  one. 
The  L  hook,  when  added  to  Ish,  should  never  be  mistaken  for  an  N 
hook,  for  the  following  reasons:  First,  when  L  and  Ish  are  the  only 
consonants  in  a  word,  the  L  hook  is  not  made  use  of,  Ish  being  shaded 
to  represent  the  L  in  words  of  one  syllable,  as  in  sign  43  in  Lesson  V, 
or  written  full  sized  in  words  of  two  syllables.  Second,  the  Ish  in  signs 
52  and  53,  Lesson  V,  is  written  upwards,  and,  therefore,  the  hook  at- 
tached to  it  must  be  a  beginning  hook,  for,  were  it  a  final  hook,  the  Ish 
being  written  upwards,  the  hook  would  be  written  on  the  upper  end. 
Third,  the  hook  in  signs  52  and  53,  Lesson  V,  being  a  beginning  hook,  it 
could  not"  be  N,  for  N  is  a  final  hook.  Fourth,  the  L  hook  never  being 
added  to  Ish,  unless  some  other  consonant  is  contained  in  the  combina- 
tion, and  the  R  hook  being  added  to  Ish  only  as  in  sign  42,  Lesson  V, 
therefore,  the  hook  in  sign  49,  this  Exercise,  must  be  a  final  hook,  and 
being  a  small  final  hook  must  be  N,  for  F  and  V  hooks  are  seldom  added 
to  curved  letters,  and  are  then  shaded,  which  is  not  the  case  with  the 
hook  in  sign  49,  this  Exercise. 

In  Lesson  IV,  promise  was  made  that  a  rule  would  be  given  which 
would  determine  the  difference  between  the  words  fun  and  funny,  and 
other  similar  words  in  which  N  is  the  final  consonant.  The  instruction 
now  presented  has  prepared  the  student  for  this  explanation,  the  second 
paragraph  of  this  lesson  directly  providing  for  the  distinction.  In  other 
words,  fun  and  words  terminating  with  the  letter  N,  ara  written  with 
the  use  of  the  hook  N  (sign  34),  while  words  ending  with  the  syllable 
ny  are  written  with  the  Visible  Alphabet  sign  for  N,  the  final  vowel 
sound  thus,  by  this  distinction  in  outline,  being  indicated  invisibly,  as  in 
sign  65  of  Lesson  IV.  Compare  also,  in  this  lesson's  Exercise,  signs  5 
and  8  with  n  and  12.  In  sign  23,  the  concluding  vowel  sound  is 
written,  because  China  is  a  proper  name. 

Just  as  the  beginning  hook  in  the  word  stickler,  sign  87  of  last 
lesson,  was  slighted  to  make  a  juncture,  so  can  the  final  Tiv  or  Shun 
hooks  be  slighted  when  necessary,  as  in  sign  33  in  Exercise  to  this 

lesson. 

The  sounds  of  Sesshun  or  Sisshun,  as  heard  in  the  words  possession, 
decision,  etc.,  are  nicely  represented  by  continuing  the  circle  S,  when 
added  to  full  sized  consonants,  into  a  hook,  as  in  signs  55  and  56.  The 
Ns  circle,  continued  into  the  same  kind  of  a  hook,  may  similarly  rep- 
resent the  sound  of  Ensisshun,  as  heard  in  the  word  transition,  sign  57. 
An  additional  circle  S  is  added  to  these  hooks,  as  in  sign  58.  The  Ns 
circle  may  occasionally  be  continued  over  to  add  a  final  sound  of  N, 


as  in  signs  60  and  61,  where  the  circle  and  hook  read  as  N-sn,  without 
clashing  with  the  Ensisshun  hook. 

THE  ST  AND  STR  LOOPS. 

A  narrow  loop,  half  the  length  of  a  full  sized  consonant  and  written 
on  the  same  side  of  consonant  as  the  circle  S  or  Z  is  written  upon,  rep- 
resents the  addition  of  St  or  Sd  to  the  main  consonant.  Signs  62  to  70. 

A  larger  loop  adds  Str.     Signs  71,  72,  75,  76,  84,  etc. 

When  these  loops'are  added  on  the  R  hook  side  of  P,  B,  etc.,  the 
P  or  B  become  doubla  consonants,  just  as  though  the  R  hook  was 
actually  there,  the  P  or  B  being  pronounced  Per,  Ber,  etc  ,  as  the  case 
may  be,  the  St  or  Str  loop  being  read  first,  as  in  signs  83  and  85  (St-per, 
Str-per)  stopper,  strapper.  A  comparison  of  sign  82  with  sign  83  and 
sign  84  with  sign  85  will  show  their  difference  of  outline  and  individual 
significance.  See  also  below  diagram: 


-D     T     ,«  &    „    i.  S"  Strt 

i  .^  ^Pn  P  j^sfe  Stp^  0  ^Stch    Strp 

K 


$r  5tr  3trr 

Tr  Str  Sttr 


^-r  3rr  3*rr  3trrr 


Young  students  in  this  art  of  winged  words  sometimes  are  at  a  loss 
to  understand  why  phonographers  indicate  the  addition  of  R  to  St,  by 
writing  St  on  the  R  side  of  P,  B,  etc.,  when,  as  they  think,  that  unneces- 
sary trouble  might  be  obviated  by  the  use  of  the  Str  loop,  which  contain  s 
R  without  special  assignment  of  position.  The  reason  this  question  is 
very  generally  asked  is  because  a  student  does  not  always  immediately 
grasp  the  particular  u^e  of,  and  difference  between  those  combinations. 
Let  us  look  carefully  at  the  two  signs  83  and  84.  Truly  the  loop  of  both 
signs  indicate  the  same  consonants.  But  let  us  investigate  farther. 
Let  us  take  the  entire  word  of  each  sign.  The  first  is  stopper,  the  other 
strop.  Now  analyze  them  phonographically,  leaving  out  vowels  and 
repeated  consonants,  and  we  find  their  outlines  to  be — sign  83,  st-pr; 
sign  84,  str  p.  Looking  at  these  analyses,  we  discover  that  the  R  in 
sign  84  precedes  the  letter  P,  while  in  sign  83  it  follows  the  P.  This, 
then,  is  the  sole  secret  of  their  difference  in  outline.  You  could  not 
spell  stopper  by  writing  an  Str  loop  on  the  right  hand  side  of  letter  P, 


because  loops  on  that  side  are  read  before  the  letter  to  which  they  are 
joined,  and  you  could  not  spell  strop  by  writing  the  St  loop  on  the  R 
hook  side  of  P,  because  in  such  instance  where  an  R  is  indicated  only 
in  that  manner,  the  R  is  read  after  the  P.  The  diagram  on  opposite 
page  illustrates  these  differences  very  clearly: 

When  the  St  or  Str  loops  terminate  a  word,  the  letter  N  may  be 
indicated  in  a  manner  similar  to  the  foregoing  indication  of  the  letter  R. 
It  is  done  by  writing  the  St  or  Str  loop,  as  tli3  case  may  be,  on  the  N 
hook  side  of  a  letter,  thereby  clearly  indicating  N  without  writing  it. 
Compare  signs  86  with  87  and  88  with  89.  This  is  on  the  same  princi- 
ple as  the  Ns  circle,  which  sort  of  terminations  are  illustrated  below: 


st 


Str 


\J</ 


~~»»  ^Kstr 


As  will  be  seen  in  Exercise,  the  St  and  Str  loops  are  added  either 
beginning  or  ending  a  word,  and  in  some  combinations  may  easily  be 
employed  in  the  middle  of  a  word.  See  sign  100. 

When  the  circle  S  is  the  last  consonant  of  a  word,  and  is  imme- 
diately preceded  by  the  loop  St,  Sd  or  Str,  the  circle  S  may  be  added  to 
those  letters,  as  in  signs  91  and  92.  The  St  and  Str  loops  are  added  to 
the  curved  letters  on  the  most  convenient  side,  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  circle  S  is  added.  Signs  72,  77,  93,  etc. 

The  word  lesson  is  written  downwards  in  sign  106,  where  the  words 
a  single  lesson,  are  joined  together.  This  joining  is  called  phrasing  and 
is  fully  explained  in  other  lessons.  When  lesson  is  written  alone,  it  must 
be  written  upwards,  because  L  is  written  upwards  when  alone. 

The  word  ten  in  sign  106  is  written  on  the  line,  because  it  is  a  fre- 
quently occurring  word  and  may  be  easily  read  in  that  position,  which  is 
the  f  istest  position  in  which  to  write. 

This  ignoring  of  position-vocalization  to  place  words  in  the  posi- 
tion in  which  they  may  be  most  easily  read  is  a  principle  which  students 
had  best  not  apply  to  words  not  explained  in  these  lessons. 


EXIRC1SZ    VI 


/  / 

*  <> 


C.:tO../^..4^ 

-  59 


r77.^.X-— 


KEY  VI. 

i,  roof;  2,  remain;  3,  cave;  4,  gain;  5,  puff;  6,  bone;  7,  tough;  8,  down; 
9,  chaff;   10,    June;   n,  puffy;   12,  downy;   13,  roofs;  14,  remains;   15,  caves; 
16,  gains;  17,  puffs;  18,  bones;  19,  staffs;  20,  downs;  21,  chiefs;  22,  Junes:  23, 
China;  24,  revives;  25,  ration;  26,  active;  27,  caution;  28,  po-tive;  29,  potion; 
30,  dative;  31,  tuition;  32,  stations;  33,  stationary;    34,  fun;  35,  frown;    36, 
fashion;  37,  vine;  38,  evasion;  39,  loan;  40, -loans;  41,  love;  42,  man;  43, 
man's;  44,  missions;  45,  known;  46,  knife;  47,  nation;  48,  native;  49,  si. 
50,  shines;. 5 1,  dances;  52,  prances;  53,  tenses;  54,  bounces;  55,  p 
56,  decision;  57,  transition;  58,  transitions;  59,  translation;  60,  Johnson;  <  i. 
Wisconsin;  62,  post;  63,  praised;  64,  blest;  65,  trust;  66,  staid;  67,  roast; 
68,  storm;  69,  stick;  70,  stag;  71,   streak;  72,   stream;  73,   test;  74,   t 
75,  toaster;  76,  stride;  77,  fast;  78,  list;  79,  steel;  So,  stiff;  Si,  : 
83,  stopper;    84,  strop;    85,  stropper;    86,  chaste;  87,  chanced;  SS,  poster; 
89,  punster;  90,  coast;    91,  coasters;    92,  spinsters;    93,  fluster;   94,  bo 
95,  faster;  96,  strife;  97,  strive;  98,  string;  99,  strangle;  100,  justify;  101,  a 
ive;    102,  affectively;    103,  affection;    104,  affectionate;    105,  affectionately; 
106,  A  single  lesson  well  conned  surpasses  ten  merely  glanced  throi;toh. 


LESSON   VII. 

THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 

T  and  D  occur  so  frequently  in  words  of  daily  use,  and  the  repre- 
sentation of  those  letters,  by  writing  their  full  phonographic  outlines,  is 
often  so  cumbrous,  that  a  shorter  way  of  expressing  their  sounds  was 
devised  early  in  the  history  of  phonography.  It  is  done  by  halving  the 
consonant  which  immediately  precedes  T  or  D,  and  is  termed  the  Halv- 
ing Principle.  Therefore,  all  full-sized  consonants,  whether  simple 
or  compound,  excepting  Ing  and  Emb  or  Emp,  when  halved,  express 
the  addition  of  either  T  or  D.  Signs  i  to  41  in  Exercise. 

Ing  nor  Emb  and  Emp,  not  being  halved,  when  the  sound  D  is  re- 
quired to  be  added  to  the  light  strokes  of  M  and  N,  those  letters  should 
also  be  made  heavy,  besides  being  halved.  Signs  9  and  10.  When  the 
sound  of  the  letter  T  is  required  to  be  added,  the  signs  should  remain 
slight.  Signs  8  and  n. 

Always  write  the  light  stroke  L-t  (sign  6)  upwards,  and  the  heavy 
stroke  L-r-d  (sign  7)  downwards. 

A  halved  S  is  sometimes  more  conveniently  stricken  upwards  than 
downwards,  as  in  sign  59. 

In  making  use  of  the  half-length  consonants,  care  should  be  taken 
that  such  use  does  not  become  an  abuse.  For  instance,  while  the  word 
miglit  may  be  rightly  written  as  in  sign  n  in  Exercise,  mighty  must  be 
written  as  in  sign  12,  because,  thougn  both  words  possess  the  same 
phonographic  consonants  (M  and  T),  yet  there  is  a  concluding  vowel 
sound  in  mighty  which  renders  it  a  necessity,  for  complete  pronuneiation 
and  vocalization,  that  the  extended  form  be  employed.  This  rule  ap- 
plies to  all  words  terminating  with  a  vowel  sound. 

T  or  D  are  added  after  N  or  V  hooks,  by  shortening  the  main  con- 
sonant to  which  the  hook  in  question  occurs,  as  in  signs  14,  27,  31,  32, 
43  and  57.  This  is  really  equivalent  to  shortening  the  entire  sign. 

In  signs  42  and  43  the  hook  V  is  made  in  the  v most  convenient 
shape.  It  will  not,  so  made,  clash  with  any  other  hook. 

CONSONANTS  OF  DOUBLE  AND  TRIPLE  SIZE. 
To  express  the  addition  of  the  sounds  ter,  der,  cher  and  ther,  full 
sized  consonants  are  made  twice  their  usual  length.  Signs  69  to  90  in 
Exercise.  This  principle  is  also  taken  advantage  of  by  experienced 
phonographers  to  represent  the  addition  of  the  words  their  and  there. 
This  doubling  principle  may  also  be  employed  to  add  the  sounds  of  kcr 
and  gcr  to  Ing,  and  the  sounds  of  per  and  bcr  to  M.  Signs  99  to 
103.  In  applying  this  doubling  principle  to  the  heavy  consonants  B,  D, 


etc.,  as  in  such  words  as  debtor,  be  careful,  throughout  the  entire  length 
of  the  double  letter,  to  preserve  the  heavy  stroke,  as  in  sign  70,  in  order 
that  it  may  not  be  taken  for  the  word  deity,  sign  71. 

When,  in  a  sentence,  any  of  the  syllables  ter,  der,  cher  or  ther  is 
immediately  followed  by  either  of  the  words  their  or  there,  the  syllable 
and  word  may  be  sometimes  together  represented  by  tripling  the  pre- 
ceding consonant,  as  in  signs  91,  93,  95,  97  and  98.  This  principle  of 
doubling  and  tripling  consonants  is,  of  course,  not  applicable  to  any  of 
the  small  letters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet,  excepting  Way  and  Whay,  it 
being  applied  to  those  last  named  letters  in  the  manner  shown  by  signs 
871091  in  Exercise.  Consonants,  when  made  double  and  triple  size, 
indicate  the  invisible  vowel  by  the  first  half  of  their  outline,  the  vowel 
O  of  the  word  bol  der  being  shown  by  the  position  of  the  first  half  of 
sign  69,  the  position  of  the  second  half  of  that  outline  taking  no  part  in 
invisible  vowel  indication. 

INVISIBLE  INDICATION  OF  PRECEDING  VOWELS. 

In  one  of  the  paragraphs  of  Lesson  III,  the  necessity  for  economy 
in  word  outline  is  incidently  referred  to,  the  word  lass  being  used  in 
illustration.  By  reference  to  the  paragraph  in  question,  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  student  is  directed  to  spell  lass  and  kindred  words  that  end  in 
double  S,  with  a  single  S,  thus:  1  a-s,  lass.  This  exercise  of  economy  in 
the  use  of  the  consonants  is  still  more  essential  in  words  of  more  than 
one  syllable,  the  young  phonographer  having  most  need  for  caution  in 
those  words  in  which  the  same  consonants  occur  together  in  the  ordinary 
spelling,  as  //  in  illiberal,  rr  in  irregular,  etc.,  etc.  Young  phonograph- 
ers  are  very  prone  to  write  illiberal  with  two  commencing  phonographic 
L's,  when  one  commencing  L  is  sufficient —  illiberal,  irregular,  immoral 
and  kindred  words  being  divided  into  phonographic  sound  syllables, 
thus:  short-i  and  li-brel  for  illiberal;  short-i  and  re-glar  for  irregular; 
short-i  and  mrl  for  immoral.  In  other  words,there  are  exactly  the  same 
consonant  sounds  in  immoral  and  such  words  as  there  are  in  moral,  etc.— 
that  is,  m-r-1 — the  only  difference  being  the  commencing  short-i;  there- 
fore moral  and  immoral  should  have  the  same  consonant  outline  in  short- 
hand, illiberal  the  same  consonant  outline  as  liberal,  etc.,  etc.;  the  dis- 
tinction between  them  being  made  by  placing  thj  word  commencing 
with  the  short-i  above  the  line  of  writing,  as  in  signs  105,  107  and  109  in 
Exercise,  the  words  moral,  regular  and  liberal  being  placed  on  the  line 
of  writing,  independent  of  their  vowel  sounds,  they  being  words  not 
needing  invisible  vowel  indication,  but  needing  to  be  \\\  easiest  position. 

This  brings  us  to  the  subject  introduced  by  the  heading  to  this  por- 


tion  of  the  lesson — the  Invisible  Indication  of  Preceding  Vowels — the 
preceding  vowel,  in  the  case  of  such  words  as  immoral,  irregular,  etc., 
being  indicated  by  placing  the  outline  in  the  first  position,  above  the 
line.  This  is  for  one  class  of  words  having  a  commencing  vowel.  An- 
other class,  whose  commencing  vowel  is  followed  by  the  sound  of  S,  we 
indicate  that  commencing  vowel  by  writing  the  long  S,  as  in  sign  22,  in 
Lesson  III.  If  the  commencing  vowel  should  be  immediately  followed 
by  the  sound  of  L,  we  can  indicate  that  preceding  vowel  by  writing  L 
downwards,  as  in  signs  112,  114,  115,  in  this  Exercise,  as  could  also  be 
done  in  the  case  of  sign  107,  if  the  student  prefers,  though  in  sign  107 
it  is  not  necessary,  for  the  rule  for  //  applies  there.  The  writing  of  L 
downwards  to  indicate  a  vowel  preceding  it,  applies  also  to  syllables 
which  are  not  the  first  syllables  of  a  word.  For  instance,  the  syllable  el 
of  fuel,  contains  a  vowel  preceding  the  letter  L  of  el,  and  therefore  the 
L.in  that  outline  is  written  downwards.  Sign  111  in  this  Exercise. 
Wherever  a  vowel  follows  L,  write  L  upwards,  as  in  signs  no  and  113. 
A  vowel  preceding  S  is  indicated,  as  explained  in  Lesson  III,  by  writing 
the  S  of  the  Invisible  Alphabet,  as  in  the  word  ask,  sign  22  in  Lesson  III, 
above  refered  to,  and  as  in  signs  66  and  67  of  this  lesson. 

Occasionally,  a  commencing  vowel  may  be  indicated  by  what  i? 
known  as  the  fourth  position — i,  e.,  writing  the  first  consonant  of  the  word 
in  question  just  under  and  touching  the  line  of  writing,  as  in  signs  119 
and  1 20.  This  position  represents  any  commencing  vowel,  it  being 
used  only  when  the  character  of  the  vowel  itself  is  not  important,  the 
writer  merely  needing  to  know  that  there  is  a  preceding  vowel  to  be  able 
to  read  the  outline.  It  is  best  not  to  use  this  plan  excepting  where  the 
word  has  also  a  conspicuous  third-place  vowel  elsewhere  in  its  sound. 
The  author  does  not  particularly  commend  this  fourth  position  plan; 
and,  in  fact,  rather  than  hesitate  between  rules,  the  author  would  remind 
students  that  they  can  always  use  visible  vowels  to  words  commencing 
with  a  vowel,  when  they  so  desire,  and  it  is  often  quite  as  convenient, 
as  in  signs  116,  117  and  118,  though  there  are  many  occasions  where  the 
consonant  outline  alone  is  so  plain  that  a  Deginning  vowel  does  not  need 
indication,  as  in  such  words  as  admission  and  attention,  signs  121  and  122. 

This  matter  of  indicating  an  invisible  beginning  vowel  is,  after  all, 
one  which  students  of  all  methods  of  phonography  must  regulate  for 
themselves.  Some  will  find  nearly  all  outlines  perfectly  legible  without 
indicating  invisible  preceding  vowels,  while  others  who  do  not  possess 
quite  as  good  a  memory  of  sight  may  need  to  make  such  indications 
frequently.  Above  rules,  however,  apply  to  all  cases. 


EXERCISE    VII. 


KEY  VII. 

i,  Date;  2,  write;  3,  rate;  .;,  vote;  5,  that;  6,  iate;  7,  Lord;  S,  night; 
9,  need;  TO,  mud;  n,  might;  12,  mighty;  13,  bright;  14,  bind;  15,  cheered: 
16,  child;  17,  cloud;  1 8,  court;  19,  told;  20,  dread;  21,  ward;  22,  hurt;  23, 
yield;  24,  wont;  25,  flight;  26,  fright;  27,  found;  28,  find;  29,  notes;  30, 
mates;  31,  braved;  32,  grooved;  33,  sort;  34,  sound;  35,  sprite;  36,  sacred; 
37,  strained;  38,  surround;  39,  sent;  40,  send;  41,  slight;  42,  receive;  43. 
received;  44,  better;  45,  mattress;  46,  pullet;  47,  midnight;  48,  sentiment; 
49,  named;  50,  maiden;  51,  clothed;  52,  rock;  53,  rocked;  54,  rib;  55,  rib- 
bed; 56,  love;  57,  loved;  58,  knowest;  59,  nicest;  60,  fitted;  61,  portrait; 
62,  titled;  63,  derived;  64,  deserved;  65,  engraved;  66,  assort;  67,  assort- 
ment; 68,  captivate;  69,  bolder;  70,  debtor;  71,  cliety;  72,  chatter;  73,  char- 
ter; 74,  order;  75,  culture;  76,  fitter;  77,  father;  78,  farther;  79,  falter;  86. 
verdure;  81,  thither;  82,  zither;  83,  meter;  84,  mother;  85,  furniture;  86. 
wilderness;  87,  sweeter;  88,  water;  89,  weather;  90.  whether;  91,  whether 


their;  92,  enter;  93,  enter  their  house;  94,  center;  95,  center  their  ideas: 
96,  further;  97,  further  their  laws;  98,  surrender  their  homes;  99,  juniper: 
100,  hamper;  101,  lumber;  102,  tinker;  103,  finger;  104,  moral;  105. 
immoral;  106,  liberal;  107,  illiberal;  108,  regular;  109,  irregular;  no. 
sickly;  in,  fuel;  112,  alum;  113,  likely;  1 14,  elective;  1 15,  elocutionist; 
116,  else;  117,  item;  118,  Edmund;  119,  answer;  120,  another;  121,  ad- 
mi-sion;  122,  attention;  123,  ablution;  124,  intimation;  125,  intention;  126, 
indicates;  127,  indication;  128,  indicated;  129,  undivided;  130,  injunction; 
131,  Neither  brave  nor  just  men  employ  slander.  . 


LESSON   VIII. 

There  are  a  small  number  of  brief  words  in  our  language,  mostly 
one-syllabled,  whose  frequent  occurrence  and  consequent  rapid  utter- 
ance precludes  the  possibility  of  writing  them,  even  phonetically,  as  fast 
as  they  can  be  spoken.  To  provide  for  such  emergencies,  all  methods 
of  shorthand  writing  employ  brief  arbitrary  characters  called  Word- 
Signs,  some  phonographies  containing  long  lists  of  them.  But,  becau-2 
of  a  better  construction  of  principles,  Haven's  Practical  Phonography 
requires  only  fifteen  such  arbitrary  characters,  all  of  which  are  contained 
in  the  following  list: 


THE     WOTVD-SIGNS. 

...;•  Of 

•%    .     All 

To 

....%....     Two 

Too 

s 

.'  Or 

Already 

But 

j 

Before 

.J  The 
....!..      On 

..'.'...      Ought 

...,  Who 
Whom 

An 

* 

The  above  list  of  word-signs,  being  entirely  arbitrary,  students 
must  not  expect  to  find  in  them  any  element  of  previously  explained 
principles — that  is,  they  must  neither  expect  them  to  agree  in  position 
with  their  vowel  sounds  nor  their  outline  to  be  composed  of  any  portion 
of  the  consonants  of  the  words  they  represent,  the  instances  in  which 
previously  explained  principles  will  be  recognized  being  very  few. 


Commit  the  list  of  word-signs  thoroughly  to  memory  in  the  manner 
described  for  memorizing  the  Visible  Alphabet  and  repeatedly  test  your 
ability  to  write  the  proper  signs  without  referring  to  the  list.  In  the 
list  of  word-signs,  the  signs  are  placed  beneath,  on  or  over  dotted  lines. 
These  dotted  lines  must  not  be  mistaken  to  be  a  part  of  any  of  the  signs. 
The  dotted  lines  are  supposed  to  be  the  lines  of  the  paper  on  which  one 
is  writing,  and  are  merely  placed  there,  as  in  the  Exercises  of  these  les- 
sons, to  show  that  the  same  word-sign,  in  order  to  represent  different 
words,  is  sometimes  written  on,  above  or  under  the  line,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  indication  of  invisible  vowels.  Thus,  students  find  that,  in 
phonography,  words  are  sometimes  denoted  by  position  in  the  same 
manner  that  a  vowel  sound  of  a  word  is  generally  indicated  by  the 
position  of  a  consonant. 

No  difficulty  need  be  apprehended  in  regard  to  deciphering  such 
signs  when  met  with  in  regular  sentences.  They  will  never  be  mis- 
taken for  halved  characters,  nor  for  any  of  the  small  letters  of  the 
Visible  Alphabet,  which  they  may  seem  to  resemble,  as  their  uses  are 
entirely  different.  They  are  not  in  same  positions  when  written  alone, 
and  when  used  in  sentences  words  preceding  or  following  them  are 
always  perfect  keys  to  them.  It  is  well,  however,  to  explain  cLarly 
their  particular  uses. 

IntheJjstof  word-signs  there  is  one  representing  the  article  the. 
It  is  the  fifth  one  of  the  light  outlines  presented  in  the  list.  Particular 
attention  is  called  to  that  sign  because  it  looks  like  the  letter  Hay,  and 
because,  for  that  reason,  it  must  always  be  written  in  a  particular  direc- 
tion, that  is,  upwards,  from  left  to  right.  As  the  outline  stands  alone  in. 
the  list,  the  student  may  suppose  that  it  does  not  matter  in  which  direc- 
tion it  is  written,  and  if  it  were  always  written  alone  in  actual  use  it 
would  not  matter;  but  even  if  it  be  but  occasionally  joined  and  then 
joined  upwards,  as  is  the  case,  it  would  be  better  to  write  the  sign  up- 
wards even  when  written  alone,  in  order  to  form  the  habit,  for  very  rapid 
writing  is  greatly  a  matter  of  habit.  And,  as  it  is  particularly  neces- 
sary, both  for  the  purpose  of  speed  and  for  legibility,  that  this  sign  for 
the  be  written  always  joined  when  possible,  it  will  be  understood  how 
important  it  is  at  the  outset  to  form  the  habit  of  writing  the  sign  for  the 
upward. 

The  main  object,  in  fact,  of  all  the  fifteen  word-signs  in  Haven's 
Practical  Phonography,  is  to  facilitate  junctures  with  each  other,  forming 
a  principle  of  phrasing — viz,  writing  two  or  more  words  connectedly  with- 
out lifting  the  pen — a  principle  which  means  a  great  deal  in  point  of 


spejd  ia  writing  shorthand  and  can  be  made  an  efficient  aid  to  reading 
one's  notes  if  the  simple  directions  in  regard  to  junctures  are  carefully 
•observed. 

Commencing  with  sign  i  in  Exercise,  some  three  lines  of  said 
Exercise  will  be  seen  to  be  devoted  to  illustrations  of  how  these  fifteen 
word-signs  are  joined  into  beautiful  little  phrases,  which,  by  their 
brevity,  give  much  speed,  and,  because  of  the  fact  that  they  look  nothing 
Kke  anything  but  what  they  mean,  are  also  an  important  aid  to  legibility. 
Ly  looking  carefully  at  these  first  three  lines  of  our  Exercise,  it  will  be 
noticed  that  the  word-signs  are  joined  to  other  characters.  For  in- 
stance, in  sign  i,  the  word-sign  for  of  has  the  letter  a  joined  to  it,  the 
j  incture  forming  the  phrase  of  a.  In  sign  4  the  word  he  is  joined  to  the 
word-sign  for  all,  the  word  he  being  expressed  by  the  letter  Hay,  the 
combination  making  the  phrase  all  he.  In  sign  6  and 'is  joined  to  a/!, 
the  word  and  being  expressed  by  the  &  or  Ai  of  our  Visible  Alphabet, 
the  phrase  thus  formed  representing  all  and.  In  sign  12,  the  personal 
pronoun  I  is  joined  to  the  word-sign  for  or,  making  the  phrase  or  I. 

Thus,  by  these  four  instances  just  noted,  we  have  introduced  the 
four  words,  /,  lie,  a  and  and  into  the  phrases,  these  four  words  not  being 
needed  in  any  list  because  a,  I  and  and  were  given  in  the  Alphabet  in 
Lesson  II,  and  the  word  he  is,  of  course,  naturally  spelled  with  the  letter 
Hay  of  the  alphabet.  In  the  same  manner  as  the  word  he  is  spelled,  we 
we  can  also  spell  the  words  we  and  you,  the  word  -we  being  spelled  with 
the  letter  Way,  and  you  by  either  of  the  signs  for  U  or  short-u  of 
the  Visible  Alphabet,  according  to  whichever  of  those  two  signs  of  U 
joins  easiest.  This  gives  us  six  words  which  we  can  join  to  these  word- 
signs,  and  a  peculiarity  of  all  six  is  that  they  are  attachable  in  any 
position,  those  six  words  when  joined  taking  the  position  occupied  by 
the  other  words  to  which  they  are  joined.  This  is  also  the  case  with 
the  word-sign  for  an  and  the  word-sign  for  ///<?  of  our  list,  so  that  those 
eight  words,  namely,  the  conjunction  and,  the  articles  a,  an  and  the,  and 
the  four  pronouns  /,  he,  we  and  you,  should  always  when  possible  be 
joined  to  other  words  in  the  sentences  in  which  they  occur,  and  they  may 
be  joined  in  any  position,  remember. 

In  the  list  of  word-signs,  the  sign  for  the  is  placed  on  the  line,  and 
the  sign  for  an  is  placed  under  the  line,  but  those  positions  are  intended 
only  for  instances  where  it  might  be  impossible  to  make  a  juncture,  and 
where  those  words  would  have  to  be  written  alone,  in  which  seldom- 
occurring  instances,  to  read  them,  it  is  necessary  they  should  have  their 
<own  positions.  They  should  always  be  joined  when  possible,  in  which 


cases  position  does  not  need  to  be  observed.  Now,  while  position  docs 
not  need  to  be  observed  in  those  eight  words  above-named  when  joined 
to  other  words,  yet  there  are  three  words  whose  particular  direction  of 
writing  must  be  observed,  and  these  simple  rules  here  given,  if  observed 
strictly,  will  make  them  alwaj'S  clear  in  their  meaning,  where  a  violation 
of  the  rule  would  cause  uncertainty.  The  three  words  referred  to  are 
the,  he  and  /. 

If  the  sign  for  tlic  be  always  written  upwards  in  junctures  ;:-d  he 
always  written  downwards,  notwithstanding  they  are  both  the  sanrj  sign, 
they  can  never  clash,  as  will  be  seen  by  comparing  sign  4,  all  he,  with 
sign  7,  all tJie,  in  which  instances  it  will  be  noticed  that  he  is  written 
downwards  and  the  upwards.  Sometimes  students  may  suppose  that  they 
can  distinguish  the  difference  between  he  and  the  by  position  without  re- 
gard to  the  direction  in  which  the  signs  are  written,  but  if  it  is  borne  in 
mind  that  those  words  are  written  in  any  position  in  junctures,  that  they 
must  be  joined  when  possible  for  speed  purposes,  and  that  the  words  to 
which  they  are  joined  must  have  the  preference  of  position,  it  will  be 
understood  that  the  outlines  for  he  and  the  may  sometimes  both  be  in  the 
same  position,  as  they  are  in  signs  4  and  7  in  Exercise,  in  which  cases 
naught  but  a  difference  in  the  direction  of  writing  will  make  them  read- 
able. Writing  the  sign  for  the  always  upwards  and  the  sign  fo_-  he 
ahvays  downwards,  will  thoroughly  distinguish  those  words,  and  if  that 
cign  for  t.'ie  could  always  be  used  for  that  word,  as  the  sign  Hay  is 
always  used  for  he,  there  might  be  no  danger  of  confliction  in  any  in- 
stance, but  this  joining  of  words  together  in  phrases  is  so  necessary  for 
speed  and  legibility,  that  phrasing  must  be  done  as  much  as  possible, 
and  on  account  of  the  different  shape  of  some  outlines,  it  is  not  always 
possible  to  join  the  list  sign  for  the  to  ever)'  outline. 

It  does  not  so  greatly  matter  if  the  sign  he  is  disjoined  occasionally, 
as  that  is  not  so  frequently-occurring  a  word  as  some  others,  but  t'.e 
word  the  is  said  to  be  the  most  frequently-occurring  word  in  the  English 
language.  This  being  granted,  the  word  the  must  therefore  be  the  wcr  J. 
of  all  others  which  most  needs  to  be  phrased  whenever  possible,  for  secur- 
ing speed.  For  the  words  a,  an  and  and,  which  are  next  in  frequency  cf 
^ccurence,  we  can  easily  substitute  one  for  the  other,  where  the  prop,  r 
one  will  not  join — the  sign  for  an,  doing  duty  also  for  either  a  or  and,  as  i  i 
signs  6,  17,  2 1,  25  and  42  in  Exercise,  and  and  for  a,  as  in  the  phrase  /.// 
a,  in  sign  79,  for  those  words  will  not  clash,  it  being  naturally  allowable 
for  the  articles  a  and  an  to  be  substituted  for  each  other  or  even  fcr 
them  to  alternate  with  the  conjunction  and,  but,  if  it  be  necessary  to  do 


this  substitution  for  a,  an  and  an.!,  to  gain  speed  by  facilitating  junct- 
ures, it  is  far  more  necessary  to  make  use  of  a  plan  of  substitution  for 
the  word  tJie,  where  the  word-sign  in  our  list  will  not  join,  and  the  best 
sign  that  can  be  selected  for  such  substitution  is  the  pronoun  /,  which 
letter  can  be  used  in  substitution  for  the  word  the,  as  in  sign  59  in 
Exercise,  without  the  least  danger  of  its  being  mistaken  for  /,  as  the 
words  /  and  the  thus  used  will  never  clash.  For  this  reason,  where  the 
sign  for  /  will  not  join,  we  can  reciprocate  by  using  the  upward  tick  of 
the  for  /,  so  that  the  signs  for  these  two  words,  being  entirely  distinct,  may 
b?  always  substituted  for  each  other  where  their  own  sign  will  not  join, 
the  student  not  forgetting,  of  course,  that  it  is  always  best  to  join  the 
original  sign  for  any  word  when  possible,  and  to  substitute  the  other 
sign  only  when  the  original  sign  will  not  join,  but  to  be  sure  to  substi- 
tute rather  than  lose  the  opportunity  of  phrasing,  which  is  so  very 
necessary  to  be  observed  in  writing  the  eight  words  and,  a,  an,  the,  I, he, 
iv s  and  you,  spoken  of  in  foregoing  paragraphs. 

We  now  come  to  the  most  particular  reason  why  the  original  sign 
for  the  should  be  always  written  upward.  It  lies  in  the  fact  of  tins 
substitution  of  the  signs  for  (lie  and  /where  we  cannot  join  the  proper 
outline.  The  words  he  and  the  would  seldom  clash  any  more  than  the 
words  tJie  and  /,  because  they  represent  entirely  different  parts  of 
speech,  but  the  words  he  and  /  are  of  the  same  parts  of  speech, 
both  being  pronouns,  and  it  is  words  of  the  same  parts  of  speech  that 
are  most  apt  to  clash.  The  student  can  understand  what  a  difference 
there  is  between  the  two  statements,  "he  will  pay"  and  "I  will  pay",  and 
yet  the  only  difference  lies  in  the  words  he  and  /,  which  proves  con- 
clusively that  he  and  7  must  be  made  distinct  in  shorthand  writing,  but. 
if  we  use  the  sign  for  the,  which  is  just  like  he,  when  we  intend  it  to 
mean  7,  we  are  going  to  have  trouble,  unless  we  write  the  word-sign 
stroke  downward  when  we  mean  he  in  junctures,  and  the  same  sign 
upward  when  it  means  tJie  or  /.  Then  there  is  no  difficulty  in  securing 
distinctions  between  such  combinations  as  are  presented  in  signs  63 
and  64  of  Exercise.  By  writing  the  word-sign  for  the  upwards,  there- 
fore, when  it  means  either  the  or  7,  we  prevent  clashing  with  he,  provid- 
ing we  always  write  he  downwards. 

These  are  the  only  particulars  of  striking  importance  that  are 
necessary  to  be  observed  in  the  writing  of  phrases  containing  word- 
signs,  excepting  the  general  injunction  that  the  word-signs  in  foregoing 
list  must  be  written  in  their  proper  positions,  joined  or  not,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  and  an,  which,  as  we  have  stated,  in  company  with  six 


other  words,  take  any  position  when  joined.  It  may  be  as  well  also  tj 
add  that  the  word-signs,  with  the  exception  of  tJie  and  an,  are  joined 
commencing  phrases,  never  at  the  end  of  them,  but  that  the  and  an  and 
the  other  six  words  we  have  named,  and,  a,  I,  he,  we, you,  may  be  phrased 
with  other  words,  either  beginning,  ending  or  intermedially. 

The  signs  for  a,  an  and  tftf^/are  shown  substituted  for  each  other  to 
make  easier  junctures,  in  signs  53  to  56  inclusive,  and  in  other  instan- 
ces throughout  the  sentences  given  in  this  Exercise,  as  in  sentences 
shown  by  signs  79,  80  and  85. 

In  joining  phonographic  word-signs  and  outlines  into  phrases,  the 
the  ordinary  rule  is  to  place  the  first  word  in  its  proper  place-position, 
and  let  the  other  words  in  the  phrase  take  care  of  themselves,  in  the 
same  manner  that  the  second  vowel-sound  in  a  long  word  is  treated. 

To  avoid  connection  with  half-length  consonants,  always  write 
these  word-signs,  and  all  visible  vowels,  about  one-eighth  the  size  of  a 
full-sized  consonant;  in  other  words,  write  them  as  small  as  possible, 
the  merest  ticks  being  sufficient.  This  will  serve  as  a  perfect  method 
of  distinction  between  the  word-signs  in  the  foregoing  list  and  half- 
length  outlines. 

The  time-s'aving  principle  of  phrasing  is  given  consideraLle  practice 
upon  in  the  Exercise  to  this  lesson  and  others  which  follow;  and,  al- 
though beginners  may  find  at  first,  in  their  own  writing,  that  a  little 
extra  thought  is  sometimes  required  in  order  to  make  the  best  junctions 
possible,  and  that  it  may  therefore  at  first  appear  to  them  that  longer 
time  is  required  to  join  the  words  than  to  write  them  separately,  yet  this 
difficulty  will  diminish  with  each  Exercise,  and  become  more  and  more 
of  a  pleasure  with  each  step,  eventually  being  found  to  be  a  beautiful 
method  of  phrase  representation,  and  perfectly  easy  to  read  when  writ- 
ten, providing  care  has  been  taken  not  to  join  most  of  the  word-signs 
out  of  position. 

The  circle-S  can  be  added  to  the  sign  for  ivlio  in  order  to  make  the 
word  whose,  as  in  sign  51.  Other  junctures  may  be  made  for  compound 
words,  like  the  adding  of  the  word  hand  to  the  word  before,  spelling 
before-hand,  as  in  sign  52. 

Throughout  these  sentences,  concluding  our  Exercises,  there  will  be 
found  outlines  which  are  rather  ahead  of  the  lesson,  but  which,  for  the 
purpose  of  showing  how  sentences  are  written,  it  was  thought  best 
to  include  herewith.  The  word  should  is  hardly  one  of  these,  but  it 
might  as  well  be  described  at  this  stage.  That  word  is  a  halved-letter 
Ish,  written  under  the  line,  when  written  alone,  to  indicate  its  vowel- 


sound,  as  in  sign  67.  When  joined  it  may  occasionally  be  written  on 
the  line. 

The  phrase  "I  told  you  so,"  in  sign  73,  shows  how  common  words 
may  be  joined  together,  and  sometimes  a  common  word,  like  sj,  written 
out  of  position.  In  sign  80,  the  L  sound  in  the  syllable  ly  is  indicated 
by  an  L  hook  on  the  letter  N.  This  is  done  to  secure  an  easier  juncture. 
In  the  sentence  in  sign  82,  the  syllable  less  of  the  word  motionless  is 
written  downwards  for  the  same  purpose — to  facilitate  junctures.  In 
sign  85  the  word  one  is  represented  by  the  addition  of  an  N  hook  to  the 
letter  Way.  This  makes  that  character  resemble  short-ah,  but  as  the 
sign  for  short-ah  is  not  used  alone  it  will  not  clash.  To  represent  Ah, 
as  an  exclamation,  the  sign  for  the  ordinary  Ah  is  used,  which  is  writ- 
ten in  an  opposite  direction.  When  one  is  used  for  a  figure  the  letter 
Way  is  sufficient,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  list  given  in  the  next  lesson,  but 
in  a  sentence  where  there  are  no  other  figures  it  might  be  mistaken  for 
Way,  and  therefore  the  hook  N  is  used  in  such  cases.  When  we  want 
to  write  ones,  or  one's  own,  the  hook  N  is  not  absolutely  necessary,  as  will 
be  seen  further  on  in  these  same  sentences.  Signs  85  and  87.  Junct- 
ures of  common  words  which  follow  easily  in  position,  such  as  the  con- 
cluding phrase  in  sign  85,  "by  a  microscope,"  and  that  beginning 
sign  86,  "presents  the  best,"  should  be  taken  advantage  of  whenever 
possible,  as  such  junctures  are  a  great  aid  to  both  speed  and  legibility. 

In  the  word  energy  (sign  86)  long-E  may  be  substituted  for  short-e, 
and  there  are  other  instances  in  these  Exercises  where  this  s^rl  of  sub- 
stitution is  done,  it  being  in  accordance  with  the  rule  for  vowel  substi- 
tution set  forth  in  Lesson  IV. 

Many  other  apparent  digressions  may  be  discovered  in  these  ad- 
vanced lessons  by  the  careful  student;  but,  as  it  would  require  too  much 
unnecessary  space  and  time  to  explain  these  singly  as  they  occur 
throughout  this  book,  the  student  will  please  without  demur  accept  all 
such  slight  digressions  as  being  perfectly  correct.  They  bear,  ail  of 
them,  the  result  of  years  of  practice,  such  practice  having  determined 
their  present  form  and  position  to  be  the  best  for  purposes  of  speed,  and 
that  without  destroying  their  legibility  in.  the  least.  It  should,  there- 
fore, be  the  duty  of  students  to  memorize  these  somewhat  peculiar  out- 
lines, and  make  use  of  them  whenever  possible  in  their  own  notes,  and 
the  result  will  be  that  the  eye  will  become  so  accustomed  to  these  out- 
lines that  they  will  recognize  them  unconsciously,  without  regard  to 
philosophy  of  outline  or  position.  Such  is  always  the  case  with  a  pro- 
fessional shorthand  reporter  and  his  notes.  He  reads  them  from  habit, 


without  stopping  to  think  of  the  elements  composing  them,  just  as  you, 
the  reader  of  this  explanation,  are  now  doing  with  these  printed  words. 
You  are  not  spelling  these  words  as  you  read  them.  Neither  are  you 
noticing  the  separate  letters.  You  unconsciously  read  these  words  as 
words,  and  you  would  read  them  aright  even  if  a  letter  cr  two  were  in 
error  omitted  from  the  word,  because  you  read  each  word  at  a  glance,  and, 
in  the  case  of  a  trivial  mistake  such  as  the  omission  of  an  unimportant 
letter,  the  other  words  of  the  sentence  would  prove  a  perfect  key  to  it. 

Never  slight  the  joined  words.     The  skilled  reporter  executes  these 
combinations  in  half  the  time  requisite  to  write  each  word  separate]} . 


VIII. 


:^~.l^c.XJ^.« 


POINTS  TO   REMEMBER. 

Devote  as  much  time  to  reading  as  to  writing  phonography. 

Write  the  Exercises  contained  within  these  lessons,  over  and  ever 
again,  even  after  )ou  have  become  perfectly  familiar  with  them.  They 
contain  words  and  phrases  which  have  been  selected  for  all-time  practice. 

Remember  that  time  is  wasted  by  attempting  to  write  rapidly  be- 
fore one  can  write  well;  that  the  difficulty  of  reading  poorly  written 
phonography  will  be  far  more  regretted  than  a  lack  of  speed  while  learn- 
ing; and  that  speed  is  certain  to  follow  where  a  neat  and  accurate  style 
is  the  student's  aim. 

KEY  VIII. 

i,  of  a;  2,  of  an;  3,  of  the;  4,  all  he;  5,  all  a;  6,  all  an-d;  7,  all  the: 
a;  9,  to  an;  10,  to  the;  n,  orhe;  12,  or  I;  13,  or  an;  14,  or  the;  15,  already 
he;  16,  already  I;  17,  already  a-n;  18,  already  the;  19,  but  he;  20,  but  I;  21, 
but  a  n;  22,  but  the;  23,  before  he;  24,  before  I;  25,  before  a-n;  26,  before 
the;  27,  ought  a;  28,  ought  I;  29,  ought  an;  30,  ought  the;  31,  the  eye;  32, 
who  a;  33,  who  an;  34,  who  the;  35,  whom  a;  36,  whom  I;  37,  whom  an; 
38,  whom  the;  39,  on  a;  40,  on  the;  41,  and  he;  42,  and  a-n;  43,  and  I;  44, 
and  the;  45,  and  that;  46,  should  he;  47,  should  a;  48,  should  I;  49,  should 
an;  50,  should  the;  51,  whose;  52,  beforehand;  53,  know  a;  54,  rule  a;  55, 
send  an;  56,  just  a;  57,  that  a;  58,  a  man;  59,  the  man;  60,  the  most;  61, 
sign  the;  62,  catch  the;  63,  I  may  64,  he  mar;  65,  I  mean  the  man;  66,  I 
know  he  caught  the  name;  67,  To  whom  should  we  write?  68,  Already  suc- 
cess seems  near;  69.  All  joys  are  but  fleeting;  70,  Who  lighted  the  lamp? 
71,  He  and  I  read  one  or  two  daily;  72,  On  some  occasions  two  or  more 
sang;  73»  ^  e  are  too  apt  to  say  "  I  told  you  so;"  74,  He  showed  great  sense 
by  the  selection;  75,  Before  he  saw  the  city  he  loved  the  farm;  76,  The  muscles 
move  only  by  the  law  of  the  brain;  77,  Why  should  you  go  -on  that  journey 
that  early?  78,  None  of  the  men  seemed  disposed  to  step  aside;  79,  The  king 
may  rule  the  nation,  but  a  midget  may  rule  the  king;  So,  A  slovenly  boy 
gains  no  deference — a  slovenly  girl  still  less;  81,  No  two  scientists  hold  like 
views  on  the  departments  of  the  art  they  follow;  82,  The  rain  poured  down 
steadily,  but  the  soldiers  remained  erect  and  motionless  through  all;  83, 
Solomon  gave  attention  to  the  wants  of  the  nation  he  ruled  and  thus  bene- 
fitted  posterity;  84,  Benefactions  multiplied  may  create  a  growler,  while  a 
scarcity  may  cause  an  opposite  effect;  85,  To  see  a  friend's  faults  one  needs 
no  spectacles,  but  one's  own  we  fail  to  see  even  aided  by  a  microscope; 
86,  Youth  presents  the  best  occasion  to  gain  mind-capital — old  age  weakens 
the  energy,  subdues  one's  ardor — "too  late"  thus  happens  across  one  un- 
awares; 87,  One's  desires  alternate  with  one's  necessities. 


LESSON   IX. 


COMMON     ABBREVIATIONS 


.  \  ..Up ,  party ,  patent 

.\.-Hope 

.\.  Be, been, object 

.V.To  be 

r 

......Time, what 

.1.... It, take 

•I...  At,out,too1c 

I 

..'.  Dollar 

.(...DO 

..I..  Had,  today,  to  do 
./..Each  ' 
./.Which, change 
.../..Much,  charge 
......Jesus 

./..Advantage 
.-/.  Large 


-^^•-Our ,  hour 

".Kingdom,  common 
Can, came 

....Country,  come 

Give-n 

__  Together" 


.If, off           '  ..  ~.  Important-ce 
For, 4, 4th, f  ortn   ..  /^...Improve-d-ment 
In, any, never 


...X^..  Far,  fact 


From 


Thing, long 
^..Language 

Young 
....r....With 
....c  ...Were,  1 
.Would 

c 

....  *  ...Where 
When 

3 

Year 

n...You 

Beyond 

n 

L.Yet 

Yes 

if 

Yes  sir 

u> 

..\...Us,use^ieaning  of  use)..?.Is.his 

..V...Use  ^pronounced  u2e}...o..As.has,  the  ciphei 


...^.Form 

\  Ever 

...7^  Have, five 

..."^..However 

..."!>.. Value 

....>..  Think 

....(...Them 

.../.... Though,  thank 

r 

t^  ...Either, author 

..( Other 

...7^..Wish 
..-J..ShalliU3uaI-ly 

.._/.. issue 


...^7...Will 
..O..Am 
..XTHN.. Him,  make 
Home 


Was 

o 

Is  it 

...<t First, as  it, has  it 

,...Was  it 


In  the  list  of  Common  Abbreviations  o.i  opposite  page,  the  student 
is  introduced  to  the  representation  of  entire  words  by  writing  only  a 
portion  of  their  outline,  the  words  in  the  foregoing  list  being  repre- 
sented mostly  by  only  one  shorthand  letter — in  some  cases  the  first,  as 
T  for  take;  in  other  cases  the  last,  as  Ch  for  which;  and,  in  still  other 
cases,  an  intermediate  letter,  as  Gay  for  together. 

This  method  of  abbreviation  is  quite  as  important  to  the  npid 
writer  as  the  list  of  Word-Signs  given  in  a  preceding  lesson,  besides 
being  more  easily  committed  to  memory,  because  of  the  fact  that  a  part 
of  each  word  is  actually  written,  and  not  represented  by  arbitrary  char- 
acters peculiar  to  the  Word-Signs.  These  Common  Abbreviations  are 
easily  read,  because  frequently  met  with  in  sentences,  and  also  because 
these  simple  word-abbreviations  conduce  greatly  to  easy  and  legible 
phrasing. 

The  sign  for  was,  the  student  must  bear  in  mind,  can  only  be  joined 
to  other  words  in  its  proper  position,  under  the  line  of  writing,  a  rule 
equally  applicable  to  the  signs  for  to  be,  to  do,  and  any  third  place  or  first 
place  word-abbreviation.  It  is  only  a  few  of  the  second  place  word- 
abbreviations  which  can,  when  phrased,  be  written  out  of  position,  and 
when  not  phrased  even  those  must  have  proper  position.  The  words  in 
this  list  with  which  this  liberty  may  be  taken  are  u/>,  be  or  bevn,  /'/,  do, 
winch,  for,  from,  have,  tJtem,  shall,  will  and  you,  and  even  these  only 
where  shown  in  the  Exercises. 

The  circle  S  or  Z  can  be  added  to  any  of  the  abbreviations  of  the 
foregoing  list,  in  the  manner  indicated  in  signs  2,  4  and  6  in  Exercise. 

There  is  only  one  point  in  which  the  above  word-abbreviations  do  not 
agree  with  previously  described  principles — /'.  e.,  in  their  place  positions. 
They  are  not  all  placed  in  position  in  accordance  with  their  visible  vowel 
elements.  This  is  because  some  of  them  take  their  positions  \~\  accord- 
ance with  the  importance  of  the  words  they  represent,  those  words 
which  are  apt  to  occur  most  frequently  being  placed  on  the  line  simply 
because  it  is  the  easiest  position  in  which  to  write,  and  hence  enables  the 
phonographer  to  write  them  much  more  quickly  than  would  be  possible 
were  they  placed  in  the  position  which  their  vowel  sounds  would  have 
placed  them.  Words  so  placed  out  of  position  are,  however,  only  those 
which  the  student  will  find  no  difficulty  in  recognizing  in  their  new  po- 
sitions, after  once  memorizing  them,  as  with  the  word-signs.  Where  an 
abbreviation  in  the  foregoing,  or  any  list  of  word-abbreviations,  has 
laced  opposite  it  two  or  more  words,  each  word  separated  by  a  comma 
(as  with  the  first  and  third  abbreviations  in  the  foregoing  list),  the 


abbreviation  in  question  may  separately  represent  eith'  r  word,  but  only 
one  of  the  words  at  a  time.  Where  two  or  more  words,  placed  opposite 
a  phonographic  abbreviation,  are  not  separated  by  a  comma  (as  with 
the  fourth  abbreviation  in  the  foregoing  list),  the  abbreviation  in  ques- 
tion represents  all  words  opposite  it  at  one  and  the  same  time.  Finally, 
when,  opposite  a  phonographic  abbreviation,  three  or  more  words  ap- 
pear, the  words  being  separated  by  commas  in  some  instances  and  not  in 
others  (as  with  the  abbreviation  for  first,  near  the  end  of  preceding 
list),  then  the  abbreviation  is  intended  to  represent,  at  one  ar.d  the  same 
time,  any  group  of  words  not  so  separated,  but  not  more  at  a  time. 

There  are  occasions  when  the  words  is,  his  and  similar  words  repre- 
sented by  the  circle  S,  may  be  indicated  by  enlarging  the  S  circle  of  a 
preceding  word,  as  in  signs  57  and  101  in  Exercise.  Similarly  the  circle 
S,  which,  in  this  word-abbreviation  list,  represents  either  is  or  his,  would 
represent  both  words  if  made  into  a  large  .SVc-circle,  as  in  sign  69.  As 
//as  and  was  as  would  be  formed  on  the  same  plan,  as  per  signs  71  and  73. 

As  the  letter  T  is  used  as  a  word-abbreviation  for  take  in  the  fore- 
going list,  it  is  therefore  allowable  to  represent  taken  by  the  addition  of 
the  hook  N  to  the  letter  T,  as  in  signs  39  and  40  in  Exercise.  This 
brings  us  to  a  very  important  principle  in  rapid  writing,  respecting  the 
extension  of  the  use  of  the  word-abbreviations.  Incur  list  is  presented 
only  the  root  word,  it  being  expected  that  the  student  will,  from  those 
word- abbreviations  as  a  base,  build  other  abbreviations  by  simply  adding 
the  different  terminations  which  distinguish  the  same  family  of  words. 
Fcr  instance,  just  as  the  letter  Chay  in  sign  8  represents  the  word  charge, 
so  it  is  allowable  and  expected  that  the  word  charges  (sign  9)  be  formed 
by  adding  a  circle  to  the  sign  for  charge,  and  the  syllable  dis  be  added  to 
the  sign  for  charge  when  the  word  discharge  is  desired  to  be  written,  as 
in  sign  10.  On  the  same  principle  the  words  larger  and  largest  are  built 
from  If-rge,  signs  n,  12  and  13;  hourly  is  built  from  our,  signs  23  and  25; 
objects,  objector,  objection  and  objective  from  object,  signs  34  to  38,  inclusive; 
and  hundreds  of  other  word-abbreviations  arrived  at  in  a  manner  which 
gives  the  student  the  key  note  to  the  thousands  of  word  signs  which 
other  authors  put  in  their  dictionaries  in  a  way  which  requires  years  to 
memorize  them,  but  which,  on  this  plan,  without  any  dictionary,  enables 
the  student  to  write  them  on  sight  as  soon  as  he  or  she  becomes  familiar 
with  our  lessons.  Authority,  sign  109,  is  thus  formed  from  author,  etc. 

Signs  58  and  59,  in  Exercise,  show  how  the  word-abbreviations  help 
to  distinguish  between  letters  that  are  attached  to  them,  those  two  out- 
lines, although  one  begins  with  a  letter  of  the  alphabet,  the  letter  I,  and 


the  other  commences  with  the  word  sign  for  of,  forming  characters 
nearly  alike,  are  rendered  perfectly  distinct  by  the  fact  that  the  word- 
abbreviations  give  them  different  positions,  these  word-abbreviations 
equally  well  distinguishing  between  halved  characters  and  word-signs, 
even  when  there  are  no  other  means  of  distinction — which  there  generally 
are — halved  outlines  never  clashing  with  a  vowel  character  or  a  word- 
sign,  as  they  are  used  for  different  purposes. 

The  word  whereas,  as  will  be  seen  by  sign  63,  is  formed  by  the  junct- 
ure of  the  word-abbreviations  for  inhere  and  as.  In  the  next  compound 
word,  shown  by  sign  64,  elsewhere,  ll.e  word  where  is  out  of  position, 
but,  being  joined,  is  perfectly  legible  ia  that  case.  This  leads  us  to  state 
that  the  words  else  and  less  will  sometimes  clash  unless  the  E  of  else  is 
written,  or  some  other  means  of  indicating  that  beginning  vowel  is  taken 
advantage  of — for  instance,  in  junctures  where  the  vowel  cannot  be  writ- 
ten, write  less  upward  and  else  downward.  This  can  only  be  shown  in 
junctures.  When  else  is  written  alone,  else  must  have  its  vowel  written. 

la  signs  77  to  80  inclusive,  the  circle-S  is  added  within  loops  to 
indicate  the  addition  of  is,  as  or  was. 

The  word  seldom,  on  third  line  from  the  end  of  Exercise,  is  abbrevi- 
ated by  omitting  the  M.  It  is  perfectly  legible  thus  curtailed. 

To  signs  87  to  98  inclusive,  the  student  should  give  special  atten- 
tion. In  Lesson  III,  describing  the  use  of  the  circle-S,  which,  in  this 
lesson,  represents  is,  his,  as,  has.  or  was,  according  to  position,  the  stu- 
dent was  instructed  to  always  write  such  circle  on  the  right-hand  side  of 
upright  or  slanting  straight  characters,  and  on  the  upper  side  of  horizontal 
ones.  In  that  same  lesson  the  student  was  enjoined,  when  the  circle-S 
was  added  to  R  or  Arm,  to  consider  those  letters  the  same  as  the  hori- 
zontal cues  K  and  Gay,  because  they  are  written  in  the  same  direction — 
from  lefi  to  right — the  circle  being  thus  attachable  upon  the  upper  sides 
of  R  or  Arm,  precisely  as  to  K  and  Gay.  This  same  rule  will  apply 
to  the  word-sign  for  the  when  the  circle  is  joined  to  it,  because  the 
stroke  the  is  written  upwards  from  left  to  right,  the  same  as  K  and  R, 
and  therefore  takes  all  circles  added  to  it  on  the  upper  side  of  the  stroke, 
as  in  signs  87  to  89  and  96  to  98  inclusive.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
stroke  he,  being  written  downwards,  the  circle  S  is  attachable  to  it  on  the 
same  side  as  to  the  letter  Chay,  the  circle  being,  therefore,  according  to 
rule  before  quoted,  attachable  on  to  the  right-hand  side  of  Chay  or  the 
stroke  he,  whether  such  circles  begin,  as  in  signs  90  to  92,  or  terminate 
he.  as  in  signs  93  to  95.  This  arrangement — writing  the  stroke  always 
downward  for  he  and  upward  for  tiie,  and  placing  the  circles  on  the 


upper  left-hand  side  of  tlie  and  right-hand  side  of  he,  will  serve  as  a  sure 
means  of  distinction  between  such  outlines,  both  in  reading  and  writing. 
The  circle-S,  representing  is,  as  or  was,  may  be  written  double 
length  to  add  the  word  there  or  their,  as  in  signs  74  to  70.  These  forms 
will  not  clash  with  is  it,  as  it  and  was  it,  in  word-abbreviation  list,  for  those 
word-abbreviations  are  slanted,  whereas  signs  74  to  76  are  horizontal. 


EXERCISE   IX. 


ta.lf^.4.^.aLtfl-?l..iy..^ 

/&^2£!S**<£^x<^x.<H^$^ 

jj.^j  A  .  «?  Ax  je\^j/\3  AJ.  js  J.  4^^ 

[lJ&.^..$&.f4\^l..j£ 

In     /a       (V1         o     O 


...6?.....6&M..?o.o.71.o..?Z..73...74..M 

O  e»     *  ff  -° 


( 

..^ 

I 


...r: 


....,.^.  ......         I..XTV-/  .....  ™, 

^>    v 


The  word  shall,  in  sign  in,  will  be  noticed  to  have  been  written  up- 
wards. This  is  allowable  where  junctures  are  to  be  facilitated  with  letters 
or  words,  but  when  Ish  has  only  hooks  attached,  and  no  other  character 
added,  Ish  must  be  written  downwards,  as  in  sign  42  of  Lesson  V,  and  sign 
49  of  Lesson  VI,  to  show  on  which  end  the  circle  or  hook  is  to  be  read. 

KEY  IX. 

i,  It;  2,  its;  3,  come;  4,  comes;  5,  do;  6,  does;  7,  and  do  you;  8, 
charge;  9,  charges;  10,  discharge;  n,  large;  12,  larger;  13,  largest;  14,  ad- 
vantage; 15,  advantages;  16,  advantageous;  17,  disadvantage;  18,  Jesus; 
19,  Jesus  Christ;  20,  yours;  21,  are;  22,  are  there;  23,  our;  24,  ours;  25, 
hourly;  26,  give;  27,  gives;  28,  give  them;  29,  common;  30,  commonly;  31, 
commonest;  32,  to  be  sure;  33,  is  to  be;  34,  object;  35,  objects;  36,  object- 
or; 37,  objection;  38,  objective;  39,  taken;  40,  taken  up;  41,  to-day;  42, 
to-day's;  43,  Yours  of  to-day's  mail  received;  44,  out;  45,  outward;  46, out- 
side; 47,  outwit;  48,  off;  49,  often;  50,  office;  51,  facts;  52,  wish;  53. 
wisher;  54,  wish  their;  55,  think;  56,  thinks;  57,  and  thinks  his  a;  58,  I 
think;  59,  of  them;  60,  improve;  61,  improves;  62,  where;  63,  whereas;  64, 
elsewhere;  65,  year;  66,  years;  67,  yearly;  68,  is;  69,  is  his;  70,  as;  71,  as 
has;  72,  was;  73,  was  as;  74,  is  there;  75,  as  there;  76,  was  there;  77,  as 
there  has;  78,  is  it  as;  79,  as  it  has;  80,  was  it  as;  8r,  and  is;  82,  and  as; 
83,  and  was;  84,  is  an;  85,  as  an;  86,  was  an;  87,  is  the;  88,  as  the;  89, 
was  the;  90,  is  he;  91,  as  he;  92,  was  he;  93,  he  is;  94,  he  has;  95,  he  was; 
96,  his  is  the;  97,  as  has  the;  98,  was  as  the;  99,  is  not;  100,  is  sent;  101, 
is  seen;  102,  is  that;  103,  that  is;  104,  has  been;  105,  as  has  been;  106, 
why  there  have;  107,  whether  there  have;jio8,  His  time  is  limited;  109,  Has  it 
your  full  authority?  no,  The  patent  is  my  invention;  in,  At  what  hour  shall 
I  be  on  board  ?  112,  That  issue  as.  given  forth  came  out  Tuesday  last; 
113,  A  select  party  of  us  will  make  the  trip  up-country;  114,  Where  is  it  the 
charges  are  to  be  found?  115,  I  am  far  from  liking  the  form  of  his  order; 
116,  Which  offer  was  it  the  author  first  made  you?  117,  The  value  the  thing 
brought  was  small — one  dollar  in  a  thousand;  118,  If  our  plan  ever  matures 
as  it  should,  we  will  owe  many  thanks  to  the  little  kingdom;  '119,  How  long 
were  you  there  with  young  Brown  ?  One  year.  Can  he  appreciate  the  impor- 
tance of  a  use  of  that  language?  Yes,  I  think  he  does.  Does  he  use  it 
often?  Yes,  sir.  Yet  the  others  say  they  never  heard  him?  They  were 
seldom  with  him;  we  were  usually  together  daily.  He  improved  each  day 
beyond  my  calculations.  Any  change,  however  hard,  took  but  little  time 
for  him  to  master.  To-day  he  will  read -four  chapters,  though  to  do  from 
one  to  five  an  hour  would  take  but  little  effort  when  he  either  wished  to  or 
has  had  much  rest  at  home.  I  hope  for  still  more  important  improvement. 


LESSON  X. 

A  list  of  word-abbreviations  containing  either  beginning  or  final 
hooks  is  presented  in  table  on  opposite  page.  Learn  them  as  directed 
for  the  Word-Signs  of  Lesson  VIII,  and  the  Common  Abbreviations  of 
last  lesson.  They  will  bs  found  upon  better  acquaintance  to  be  ex- 
ceedingly handy,  not  only  containing  important  speed  elements,  but 
being  also  thoroughly  legible  when  well  memorized. 

Si^ns  113  to  141  in  Exercise,  illustrate  the  adaptability  of  the 
abbreviations  in  this  list  being  extended  by  adding  terminating  differ- 
ences, the  word  remembrance,  sign  114,  being  simply  remember,  sign  113, 
with  an  Ns  circle  added;  equalled,  sign  1 18,  being  formed  by  halving  the 
word  equal,  sign  117;  over  their,  sign  131,  being  a  lengthened  over,  sign 
130;  and  a  number  of  words,  as  in  signs  137  to  141,  being  formed  from 
the  word-abbreviation  for  organ,  illustrating  clearly  the  apparent  inex- 
haustibility of  word-abbreviation  formation,  aside  from  the  instances 
given  in  the  lesson. 

In  memorizing  word-abbreviation  lists>  the  student  should  bear  in 
mind,  as  explained  in  connection  with  the  Common  Abbreviations  in 
Lesson  IX,  that  it  must  not  be  expected  of  word-abbreviations  that 
they  should  in  every  case  agree  in  position  with  their  vowel  sounds. 
Sometimes  the  greater  conspicuousness  of  a  vowel  in  one  word-abbrev- 
iation will  compel  another  word-abbreviation  with  less  conspicuous 
vowel  sound,  to  occupy  a  position  which,  reasoning  by  place  position 
rule,  would  properly  not  belong  to  it.  The  word-abbreviations  in  the 
foregoing  list  of  Half-Length  Abbreviations  is  evidence  of  this. 
Furthermore,  it  is  not  always  the  case  that  conflictions  with  another 
word-abbreviation  causes  it  to  be  written  in  a  position  out  of  accordance 
with  its  vowel  elements.  Sometimes  a  word-abbreviation  is  given  an 
apparently  wrong  position  because  the  outline  cf  some  ordinary  word, 
not  a  word-abbreviation,  would  conflict  with  it.  Again,  words  with  first 
or  third-place  vowels  are  sometimes  represented  by  signs  written  in  the 
second  position,  on  the  line,  simply  because  that  is  the  easiest  position 
in  which  to  write;  though  this  is  done  only  in  cases  wherein  the  word- 
abbreviations  would  be  perfectly  familiar  in  any  position  and  at  the 
same  time  would  not  clash  with  common  or  other  words  of  similar 
outline. 

A  student's  practice  in  the  art  of  rapid,  and,  at  the  same  time,  leg- 
ible writing,  depends  very  greatly  upon  the  frequency  and  length  cf 
time  given  to  practising  the  art.  Students  who  practice  most  frequently 
and  for  the  longest  period  at  a  time  master  the  art  first. 


HOOKED   ABBREVIATIONS- 

.../..People,  appeal 
...^..Apply 

..A.Principle-al-ly 

\ 

......Appear 

...;..  Be  long 

...\  Able,  belief  .believe 

\ 

....^.Liberty 

...\Re-member 
.5Y.  Brother,  number 
..  [...Till,  tell 
...(!..  .Until 
....'..Truth 

LjDeliver 

1 

...'..Doctor 

.„!..  Dear 

./.Angel 
.  X..  Danger 
Call,equal-ly 
c  Difficult-y 

^-  AV7f  Ul 

....J...  Addition 
.1  ..Providential 

..Over 

..rXi  Very,  every 
..^..Moreover 
>  Witha-l 

i 

^..Jehovah 
/..Juvenile 
...^..Religion 

...J)...  Pleasure  ,  sure 
...JJ..  Measure  ,  assure 
.C...  Well 
Mr  .  ,remark-ed-abl 

....</..  General-ly 

..../..Imagine 
..C/..  Generation 
e-y.rr-aQuestion 

...r...r.Begin 

Hymor 

^^  Honor,  nor 

Manner 

,..TTT5  Again,  organ,  began 
Begun 

\j  Poverty 

.  \...Punish-ment 
..\j.  Above 
...I  ...Twelve-fth 

^..^..Phonography 
...^.Philanthropy 
/°...  .Within 

....\>....Then 
.../....Than  • 
-  ../^T..  Alone,  eleven,  learn 

q 

,J...Internal-ly 

"3 

Eternal-ity 

^  Divine,  defendant 

...(.....  Revelation 

<^_  Glory-ify-fied 
Agree,  degree 
.^.Work 
^..Workmen 
t//?..  Workman 

...L...Differ-ent-ence 

1  ...Advance 

J 

Denominate 

.../?.  Revolution 

....Human 

Opinion 

J  Done 

J  Condition 

Union 

.  ..^T^.  Inf  ormat  i  on 

WORDS  INDICATED  BY  HOOKS. 

As  Emb  i.s  frequently  employed  in  professional  work  to  represent 
the  words  may  be,  sign  2  in  Exercise,  Way-Emb  may  be  quite  as  readily 
employed  for  the  phrase  we  may  be,  sign  3  in  Exercise.  This  is  on  the 
principle  that,  as  the  letter  Way  represents  we,  the  letter  M,  may,  and  B 
the  verb  be:  therefore,  Way-Emb,  which  really  contains  the  consonant 
elements  of  all  three  words,  can  quite  consistently  be  written  for  them 
altogether.  Reasoning  from  this  point  of  view,  as  Ith  on  the  line  spells 
they  and  the  letter  R  will  do  for  are,  the  combination  Thr  will  answer 
for  the  phrase  they  are,  as  in  sign  i  in  Exercise.  Upon  the  same  plan, 
as  the  word  will  is  represented  as  a  word-abbreviation  by  the  letter  L, 
we  may  occasionally  use  the  hook  L  for  the  word  will  or  even  all,  as  in 
signs  6  to  17  in  Exercise,  and  the  N  hook  for  the  words  own,  been,  than 
or  one,  as  in  signs  18  to  26  in  Exercise.  As  sign  26  represents  at  one, 
sign  27  would,  of  course,  by  making  the  N  hook  into  a  circle, 
represent  the  words  at  once.  To  the  word-signs  or,  but,  etc.,  and  to 
any  halved  characters,  such  as  did,  the  N  hook  can  be  used  for  the 
word  not,  as  in  signs  40,  41  and  42.  To  full  sized  characters,  however, 
such  as  do,  had,  be,  haf>e,  etc.,  the  word  not  must  be  spelled  by 
writing  an  N  hook  and  halving  the  words  do,  had,  etc.,  to  add  the 
T  of  not,  as  in  signs  44  to  53  inclusive.  ll'c  will  not,  sign  49,  is  a  case 
in  point.  In  that  outline,  analyzed,  we  find  the  beginning  hook-Way 
represents  we,  the  letter  L,  will,  and  the  final  N  hook,  together  with  the 
shortening  of  the  entire  combination  to  add  T,  indicates  not.  Result: 
We  will  not.  May  not,  sign  53,  and  other  similar  abbreviations,  are  sub- 
ject to  the  same  manner  of  analysis,  the  letter  T  being  quite  correctly 
added  after  a  final  hook  by  shortening  the  main  consonant  to  which  the 
hook  is  attached.  Signs  57  and  58  illustrate  instances  where  not  must 
be  written  with  a  halved  N  to  distinguish  might  and  meant,  to  which  not 
is  there  attached.  Continuing  the  above  plan,  the  words  are  and  our 
may  be  represented  by  the  hook  R  (signs  29  to  34  and  36  to  39)  and  off, 
forth,  of,  //or  have  by  the  V  hook  (signs  59  to  76).  Signs  35  and  36  show 
howjiw/r  and  our  are  distinguished  in  such  combinations. 

The  circle-S  may  be  quite  legibly  employed  to  represent  the  pronoun 
wf,  when  joined  to  some  words.  Signs  79  to  81  in  Exercise.  In  many 
words  possessing  the  same  consonants,  a  difference  of  outline  is  taken 
^dvxantage  of,  in  order  to  aid  legibility.  The  words  last,  lost  and  lowest 
possess  the  same  consonant  sounds  (L-S-T)  and  have  some  position 
vowels,  but  should  be  distinguished  by  indicating  the  consonants  in  the 
three  different  ways  shown  by  signs  90  to  92  in  Exercise,  the  most 


frequently  occurring  word  being  given  the  shortest  and  easiest  made 
outline.  Other  instances  of  distinction  are  illustrated  in  signs  95  to  102. 

Without  regard  to  size,  when  there  is  a  choice,  make  use  of  such 
outlines  for  word  representation,  as  are  easiest  made  and  afterwards 
interpreted.  Thus,  though  both  the  outlines  of  sign  103  are  proper 
ones  for  the  word  murder,  yet  the  largest  sign  is  best,  because  the  crook 
in  the  shorter  sign,  caused  by  the  juncture  of  R,  necessitates  the  ex- 
penditure of  more  time  than  is  requi.ed  for  making  an  uninterrupted 
outline  such  as  the  large  outline  for  murder  presents. 

As  illustrated  in  Lesson  IV,  by  the  word  customary  (sign  67  in  Ex- 
ercise to  that  lesson)  many  words  are  perfectly  familiar  by  their  con- 
sonant outline  alone,  and  hence  are  written  in  the  second  position,  that 
position  being  the  easiest  in  which  to  write.  Some  of  the  word-ab- 
breviations are  of  that  character,  and  so  are  the  outlines  for  the  words 
saith  and  said  (pronounced  seth  and  sed~)  and  also  survey  and  circle,  signs 
105  to  109  in  this  lesson. 

In  sign  5  in  Exercise,  the  word  certain  is  written  cert,  the  letter  N 
being  omitted.  This  is  one  of  a  number  of  easily  remembered  contrac- 
tions which  the  student  will  meet  with  in  these  concluding  lessons  and 
\vhich  are  to  be  accepted  unconditionally  as  being  the  best  forms  for 
those  words.  Many  of  such  contractions  are  really  word-abbreviations, 
which  it  was  thought  best,  for  the  purpose  of  memorizing,  to  give 
the  pupils  in  their  Exercises  rather  than  arranged  in  the  list-forms. 
The  words  in  the  sentences  of  this  Exercise  are  also  words  of  this 
character. 

In  fact,  there  is  no  precise  limit  at  which  one  need  stop  in  thip 
matter  of  abbreviations*  providing  the  student  keeps  within  the  bounds  of 
legibility,  the  latter  being  a  matter  upon  which  every  phonographer  must 
bring  individual  judgment  to  bear — those  whose  memory  is  more  retentive 
than  their  fingers  are  agile,  being  able  to  abbreviate  with  more  safety 
than  persons  whose 'quickness  of  hand  exceeds  their  capacity  for  mem- 
orizing— the  latter  class  not  needing  as  much  abbreviation  as  the  former. 
But  do  not  permit  the  thirst  for  abbreviations  to  interfere  with  the  rep- 
resentation of 

SOUND  SYLLABLES, 

in  words  of  not  very  frequent  occurrence.  A  proper  appreciation  of  the 
sound  syllables  of  language  is  a  great  aid  to  students  in  building  cut- 
lines  for  infrequently  occurring  words,  and  it  is,  therefore,  an  aid  that 
should  be  cultivated  as  much  as  possible.  A  good  way  to  attain  this 
result  is  to  write  words  in  as  few  syllables  as  possible,  consistent  with 


legibility.  For  instance,  do  not  divide  the  word  vagrancy  thus:  va-ga- 
ran-see,  sign  1 12;  nor  yet  omit  the  final  vowel  sound  as  in  va-grans,  sign 
in.  The  shape  of  sign  112  forms  too  extended  an  outline  for  speed 
and  that  of  sign  1 1 1  is  too  brief  for  legibility,  while,  by  the  use  of  the 
Ns  circle  as  a  termination,  sign  1 1 1  fails  to  provide  for  the  final  invisible 
vowel,  which  is  always  entitled  to  representation  by  writing  the  last 
consonant  in  full.  Vagrancy  should  be  divided  into  sound  syllables  as 
in  sign  110 — va-gran-cy — thus  giving  its  final  vowel  full  representation 
by  the  use  of  the  full-sized  letter  S,  and  at  the  same  time  rendering  the 
word  outline  sufficiently  brief  for  rapid  writing. 

NS  VERSUS  S. 

The  small  circle  S,  when  occurring  in  such  junctures  as  task  (sign 
83  in  Exercise)  is  frequently  misunderstood,  until  its  formation  is 
properly  explained,  to  be  an  Ns  circle.  While  its  shape  is  exactly  that 
of  the  Ns  circle,  yet  its  right  to  be  written  in  the  same  manner,  is  very 
conclusive.  This  can  be  best  illustrated  by  closely  observing  the  com- 
binations of  the  consonant  sounds  of  t-k,  t-s-k,  t-n-s-k,  as  they  are  shown 
in  the  words  talk,  task  and  transaction  in  signs  82,  83  and  84  of  Exercise. 
The  letter  T  of  sign  82,  it  will  be  observed,  is  written  directly  on  and 
touching  the  dotted  line.  To  add  Ns  to  that  letter  one  must  necessarily 
first  turn  the  end  of  the  T,  which  rests  on  the  line,  into  an  N  hook  and 
then  bring  it  round  into  a  circle,  after  which,  if  we  want  to  add  K,  the  K 
will  appear  somewhat  above  the  line  on  which  the  T  rests,  as  in  sign  84 
When,  however,  only  S-K  is  to  be  added  to  T,  the  S  is  written  under  the 
dotted  line,  at  the  lower  end  of  the  T,  thus  bringing  the  final  letter  K  on 
the  line  (sign  83)  as  perfectly  as  T-K  is  written  without  the  S  in  sign  82. 
This  arrangement  clearly  isolates  the  circle  S  (sign'  83)  from  any  col- 
lusion with  the  letters  T  or  K,  excepting  as  a  joined  letter,  and  clearly 
indicates  that  it  is  not  written  on  the  left-hand  side  of  T,  as  might  be 
supposed,  but  rather  on  the  under  side,  which  as  perfectly  declares  its 
individuality  as  though  it  were  written  upon  the  right-hand  side,  an 
arrangement  which,  in  this  sort  of  a  combination,  would  be  quite  awk- 
ward; and,  as  this  similarity  between  the  S  and  Ns  circles  will  never, 
under  any  circumstances,  cause  them  to  be  mistaken,  the  one  for  the 
other,  is  a  needless  one.  Convenience  in  writing  is  as  necessary  to  rapid 
writing  as  brevity  is,  and  clearly  formed  angles  are  as  necessary  to 
speed.  The  manner  in  which  the  circle  S  in  sign  83  is  added,  is  the 
most  convenient  way  it  can  be  added,  prevents  the  K  from  degenerating 
into  the  shape  of  an  N,  as  it  would  if  the  circle  were  written  on  the  right 


hand  side  of  T,  and  therefore  preserves  the  shape  of  all  the  letters  in 
the  combination,  and  the  circle  S  in  such  outlines  never  clashes  with  the 
Ns  circle.  Always  place  the  circle  on  the  proper  side,  when  possible, 
but  sometimes,  as  in  instances  above  noted  and  in  signs  5  and  85  to 
88,  the  S  circle  has  to  be  joined  in  the  most  convenient  way  for  the 
reasons  first  given. 

The  juncture  of  the  word  has,  in  signs  77  and  78  of  Exercise,  in 
which  case  it  is  apparently  turned  upon  the  left  side  of  the  word  //,  is 
also  in  accordance  with  the  placing  of  the  circle  S  in  the  word  task. 

RESPECTING  PRACTICE. 

A  plaaof  practice  in  writing  which  will  much  accelerate  the  student's 
proficiency,  is  that  of  practicing  in  precisely  the  same  manner  a  regular 
phonographic  reporter  works.  To  accomplish  this  object,  procure  a 
reporter's  note  book,  either  by  purchase  or  making  it  yourself.  These 
books  are  about  the  size  and  shape  of  a  common  pass-book,  and  nearly 
half  an  inch  thick,  to  admit  of  lengthy  reports  being  taken;  but,  unlike 
most  other  note  books,  they  open  at  the  bottom  instead  of  at  the 
side,  and  when  in  use,  only  one  side  of  the  paper  is  written  on — that 
which  is  nearest — and,  afterwards, when  those  pages  are  all  written  upon, 
the  book  is  turned  and  the  other  sides  are  ready  for  use.  This  method 
ahvays  secures  a  good  foundation  for  the  phonographic  writing,  and  pre- 
'vents  in  a  great  measure  awkward  illegibility. 

Some  teachers  claim  that  a  good  plan  of  study  for  the  purpose  of 
gaining  familiarity  with  a  large  number  of  words,  is  for  the  student  to 
get  a  common  spelling-book  and  practice  on  all  the  hard  words  therein. 
Practice  of  this  sort,  it  is  claimed  by  such  teachers,  will  go  a  great  way 
toward  making  easy  the  path  which  leads  to  rapid  writing.  This  is  in  a 
measure  true,  though  only  of  the  student  who  has  thoroughly  memor- 
ized all  the  Exercises  of  the  lessons— for  others  it  will  simply  delay  pro- 
gress. In  fact,  any  attempt  of  the  student,  until  he  has  finished  the 
lessons,  to  write  words  not  in  the  lessons  as  far  as  he  has  learned,  is  to  be 
deprecated,  for  the  reason*  that,  until  all  the  principles  of  the  art  have 
been  learned,  he  is  sure  to  make  imperfect  outlines  for  words  containing 
principles  at  v:hich  he  has  not  arrived,  and  his  eyes  are  unfortunately  too 
apt  to  make  mental  pictures  of  such  wrong  outlines,  and  when  he  comes 
to  practice  for  speed,  after  the  lessons  are  finfehed,  he  will  find  difficulty 
in  avoiding  those  bad  outlines.  Every  lesson  should  be  well  learned  be- 
fore the  student  makes  any  attempt  at  writing  words  not  in  the  lessons 
he  has  learned.  Then,  when  all  are  learned,  he  will,  by  having  in  mind 
all  the  principles,  be  enabled  to  more  readily  form  words  not  in  the  lessons. 


EXERCISE    X. 


..44..A«.^3...4*ji.4^^.46?47^.4y!/^.<f^ 

j  J 

i> 

yj-.^A^.^ydwy7X.^*«£.y9|-«.^rft».W...^.L- 

°  -  ^  J  p 

..9o^.9L^\..9Z.^..9d....^ 

£\rr^.M^rmM£ 
^ZO.J..^Zl.m^».^ZZ.^^.^3 

f       -J- 

I 
i 

-..^./z.  /j..^.^.^6:..\.^..\^.^.^  .?...ui 

"  > 
^  i  °  ---  •     -^    ^    -,-^.-.//       ^ 


KEY  X. 

i,  they  are;  2,  may  be;  3,  we  may  be;  4,  they  may  be  likely;  5,  you  may 
be  certain;  6,  it  will;  7,  which  will;  8,  much  will;  9,  at  all;  10,  for  all;  n, 
of  all;  12,  to  all;  13,  on  all;  14,  and  all  the;  15,  and  will  you;  16,  who  will; 
17,  in  all;  18,  my  own;  19,  our  own;  20,  have  been;  21,  more  than;  22, 
softer  than;  23,  no  one;  24,  none;  25,  some  one;  26,  at  one;  27,  at  once; 
28,  and  are  own;  29,  on  our;  30,  but  our;  31,  of  ours;  32,  of  our  own;  33, 
to  ours;  34,  to  our  own;  35,  by  your;  36,  by  our;  37,  who  are;  38,  each 
are;  39,  which  are;  40,  or  not;  41,  but  not;  42,  did;  43,  I  did  not;  44,  Ida 
not;  45,  I  had  not;  46,  be  not;  47,  have  not;  48,  I  will  not;  49,  we  will 
not;  50,  we  are  not;  51,  I  think  not;  52,  am  not;  53,  may  not;  54,  wn 
mean;  55,  we  meant;  56,  we  may  not;  57,  we  meant  not;  58,  we  might 
not;  59,  cle_ar  off;  60,  set  off;  61,  set  forth;  62,  call  forth;  63,  we  are  of; 
64,  which  are  of;  65,  out  of;  66}  or  if;  67,  but  if;  68,  and  of;  39,  v/hich 
have;  70,  all  have;  71,  who  have;  72,  I  have;  73,  to  have;  74,  Iha~^  been; 
75,  I  have  to  be;  76,  to  have  been;  77,  it  has  been;  78,  such  has  been  taken; 
79,  let  us;  So,  sent  us;  81,  send  us;  82,  talk;  83,  task;  84,  transaction;  85, 
desire;  86,  dissection;  87,  destroy;  88,  desolate;  89,  dissolute;  90,  last;  91, 
lost;  92,  lowest;  93,  wheat;  94,  white;  95,  stock;  96,  stack;  97,  marked; 
98,  market;  99,  greatly;  100,  gradually;  101,  read;  102,  re(a)d;  103,  murder; 
104,  days;  105,  saith;  106,  said;  107,  survey;  1 08,  circle;  109,  circular;  no, 
vagrancy;  1 1 1,  va-grans;  112,  va-ga-ran-cy;  113,  member;  114,  remembrance; 
115,  brother;  116,  brethren;  117,  equal;  118,  equaled;  119,  imaginary;  120, 
imagination;  121,  govern;  122,  governor;  123,  again;  124,  against;  125, 
angel;  126,  angelic;  127,  Dear  Doctor;  128,  measured;  129,'  measure 
their;  130,  over;  131,  over  their;  132,  overthrow;  133,  overcome;  134, 
every;  135,  everyone;  136,  everything;  137,  organs;  138,  organize;  139, 
organic;  140,  organism;  141,  organization;  142,  Tell  the  difference;  143, 
The  truth  of  a  question;  144,  Liberty  is  the  best  government;  145,  Till 
you  agree  to  call;  146,  The  organ,  then,  belongs  to  Mr.  White;  147,  To 
the  Christian,  eternity  means  union;  148,  Delivered  from  an  awful  internal 
danger;  149,  Many  people  appear  to  be  more  able  than  lucky;  150,  Mercy 
.and  Truth  are  attributes  of  Jehovah;  151,  The  very  measure  I  began  to 
fear  is  on  appeal;  152,  Learn  to  humor  the  aged,  but  kindly  govern  the 
child;  153,  Denominate  alone  a  degree  of  juvenile  philanthropy;  154, 
A  providential  revelation  was  the  defendant's  testimony;  155,  Poverty 
often  applies  the  lash  which  leads  to  ultimate  honor;  156,  We  base  our 
opinions  upon  information  often  second-handed  and  withal  faulty;  157, 
Above  all  things  remember  that  principles  need  not  be  prejudices;  158, 
Until  you  assure  me  to  whom  they  belong,  you  shall  retain  them;  159, 
Punishment  is  the  pleasure  of  the  cruel,  the  manner  of  a  darkened  mind; 
1 60,  Phonography  has  had  its  revolution  here  and  most  of  its  difficulties 
have  vanished;  161,  This  generation  can  only  imagine  the  remarkable  glory 
which  awaits  the  human  race  of  the  future;  162,  True  religion  is  from  within, 
and  is  that  divine  belief  which  sees  a  brother  or  sister  in  every  human 
countenance;  163,  Generally  the  work  which  is  well  begun  is  nearly  done; 
moreover,  it  is  equally  sure  that  the  conditions  will  be  less  wearisome;  164, 
Your  next  lesson  is  number  eleven.  When  through  with  it  and  the  twelfth, 
begin  all  the  lessons  again  and  review  each  one  thoroughly  until  your 
advance  in  the  art  has  brought  speed  and  ease  in  reading. 


LESSON    XL 


COMPOUND  ABBREVIATION. 

..../...  Speak,  speech 

J...  Audience 

..  ./   Especially 

.1...  Providence 

^  ....Secession 

.A  .Spiritual-ly 

L- 

•"TV.  .Dignity 

...^  Cessation 

»\>  Person 

../^....Justification 

...^....Association 
...\...  Yesterday 
.,{T...  Salvation 
../^...Manufacture 
Minimum 

Peculiar 

...(^...Jurisdiction 
...<£\..  Jerusalem 
..(^...Juxtaposition 
..^....  Archangel 
..x\-\.  Represent 

\ 

........Business 

...\..  Subject 
........Strength 

^^v^^  Memoranda 
Memorandum 

1  External-ly 

/"\_.  Reform 

....^....Construct 
.  ..P..  .Satisfy 

..xr^\...Respect-ful-ly 
Because 

<^v_o  Maximum 
Impossible 

P 

.System 

Scripture,  describ 

e  Somebody 
Stenography 

1 

Extreme-ity 

Inscribe-i 

J  .  Strange 

Signify,  signature 

Influence 

....!f...Instruct-ed 

....[...Utilize 
lb 

..>  —  P..  No  sir 
Nscessary 

.  d  ..Universe-al-itj 

-....C...This 
...Q..  Those 

..s^P..unite<3  states 
/  .  Knowledge 

,..c...  Advert  is  e-ments 

The  above  list  of  compound  abbreviations  is  of  equal  importance 
with  those  which  have  preceded  it,  should  be  as  thoroughly  memorized, 
and  is  as  adaptable  to  the  formation  of  derivative  abbreviations  as  the 
other  lists,  illustrations  of  which  are  given  in  signs  153  t:>  255,  subjection, 
sign  154,  being  formed  by  adding  a  Shun  hook  to  subject,  sign  153;  sub- 
jective, sign  155,  by  the  addition  of  a  Tiv  hook,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.,  through- 
out the  lesson. 

The  beginning  hook  preceding  the  circle-S  in  the  word-abbreviations 


fur  instruct  and  inscribe  in  foregoing  list,  is  used  to  express  the  sound  of 
in,  en  or  un  before  the  S-circle  only  where  the  long  N  will  not  readily  join. 

If  students  will  note  carefully  how  the  particular  sort  of  word- 
abbreviations  in  this  list  are  often  made  up  of  short-cuts  of  speech,  such 
as  Ins  or  biz  for  Inisiness  (the  seventh  abbreviation  in  the  list),  ad  for 
advertisement,  dig  for  dignity,  sig  for  signify,  etc.,  they  will  be  able  to  make 
many  similar  short-cuts  for  themselves,  in  words  which  would  be  other- 
wise cumbrous,  and  will  understand  why  such  outlines  as/«j/,  sign  162 
in  Exercise,  does  for  Pennsylvania;  bach,  sign  170,  for  bachelor;  cab,  sign 
171,  for  capable;  kath  for  Catholic,  sign  172;  pop,  sign  188,  for  popular; 
pub,  sign  189,  {QT  public  or  publish,  and  the  reasons  for  many  other  simi- 
lar abbreviations  in  this  lesson.  Then  of  course,  if  pub  does  lot  publish, 
add  an  R  to  it  and  we  have  publisher,  as  in  sign  190;  add  a  Shun  to  pub, 
as  in  sign  191,  and  we  have  publication;  begin  pub  with  an  R  and  we  have 
repub,  as  in  sign  193,  meaning  republic;  put  an  N  hook  to  that  and  we 
get  republican,  sign  192,  etc.,  etc.  On  the  same  plan,  kath  being  Catholic, 
put  an  R  in  front  of  it  and  we 'have  R-kath,  which  will  naturally  be  read 
for  Roman-Catholic,  as  in  sign  173.  This  use  of  the  letter  R  for  a  whole 
word  as  in  Roman  in  this  instance,  we  may  extend  to  other  words  or 
collection  of  words,  representing  each  word  of  that  collection  by  one 
letter,  as  p-r-r  for  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  sign  163  in  Exercise;  1-j-k  for 
Li-rd  Jesus  Christ,  sign  167,  etc.,  etc.  All  these  methods  of  abbreviation 
are  done  in  words  and  phrases,  names,  etc.,  which  are  familiar  to  the 
writer,  and  whereof  he  needs  only  a  suggestion  in  order  to  read  them. 
With  words  or  phrases  which  are  not  familiar,  this  shortening  should 
not  be  attempted,  but  all  that  are  given  in  these  lessons  can  and  should 
be  used,  familiar  or  not,  as  they  are  necessary  to  speed.  The  student 
should,  therefore,  practice  them  until  they  become  familiar,  and  employ 
these  principles  of  abbreviation  on  all  possible  occasions  not  illustrated 
in  the  lessons  where  similar  words  and  phrases  are  familiar.  Practice 
in  suck  invention  will  soon  make  it  easy  and  as  spontaneous  in  actual 
rapid  work  on  words  never  attempted  before,  as  if  it  was  being  done  at 
ease,  giving  the  writer  possibilities  which  no  dictionary  or  phrase-book 
can  give,  so  long  as  it  is  borne  in  mind  to  write  all  words  and  phrases 
in  these  lessons  exactly  as  the  author  gives  them. 

In  such  words  as  are  represented  by  signs  24  to  38,  the  letter  Way 
may  often  be  entirely  omitted  without  destroying  legibility. 

In  phrase  numbered  51  in  Exercise,  the  word  well  is  represented 
simply  by  writing  the  letter  L.  It  will  not  be  found  to  conflict  with  the 
word-abbreviation  for  will,  even  though  written  in  the  same  position. 


This  dropping  of  the  Way  hook  in  &AY'/ should  not,  however,  be  attempted 
when  well  is  written  alone.  It  is  used  only  in  junctures  with  other  words. 
It  is  sometimes  expedient  to  slight  the  formation  of  some  words  in 
order  to  accomplish  phrase-writing;  but  such  means  will  not  interfere 
with  the  correct  reading  of  the  words  so  slighted.  Note  the  formation 
of  must  in  signs  79  and  80,  a.nd  J»st/>one  andfestage,  signs  74  and  75,  etc. 

PHRASE  POSITIONS. 

The  general  rule  with  most  phonographers,  when  joining  \vords,  is 
to  write  the  first  word  in  its  proper  place-position,  and  let  the  ether  words 
in  the  phrase  accommodate  themselves  to  the  position  of  the  first. 

There  are  times,  however,  when  this  rule  will  not  apply.  For  in. 
stance,  when  some  other  word  in  the  phrase  requires,  in  order  to  be 
read  correctly  and  with  ease,  that  it  shall  be  given  its  proper  position 
in  preference  to  commencing  word. 

For  the  above  reason,  there  are  phrases,  as  well  as  words,  that 
should  occupy  the  second  and  third  positions,  even  though  the  com- 
mencing word  be  a  first-place  word.  Hence  there  are  first-place,  second- 
place  and  third-place  phrases. 

A  first-place  phrase  is  one  in  which  there  occurs  a  word  (either  ini- 
tial, intermediate  or  final)  which,  in  order  to  be  read  as  joined,  necessi- 
tates the  placing  of  the  entire  phrase  in  the  first  position,  above  the  line  of 
writing.  A  few  such  phrases  are  illustrated  by  signs  41  to  48  in  Exercise. 

A  s.econd-place  phrase  is  one  in  which  the  necessity  of  reading  a 
certain  word  within  it  causes  the  entire  phrase  to  be  placed  in  the  second 
position,  on  the  line,  as  illustrated  by  signs  49  to  56  in  Exercise. 

A  third-place  phrase  is  one  in  which  the  important  word  happens 
to  be  a  third-place  word  and  thus  gives  third  position  to  the  entire  out- 
line, as  illustrated  by  signs  57  to  64  in  Exercise. 

Signs  65  to  73,  inclusive,  illustrate  these  three  sorts  of  phrases 
comparatively,  and  by  attentive  notice  of  how  a  difference  of  position 
changes  the  meaning  of  the  same  phrase  outline,  students  will  find  a 
rule  for  the  proper  placement  of  other  phrases  which  they  will  come  in 
contact  with  when  engaged  in  actual  work.  No  principle  in  phono- 
graphy is  so  unimportant  that  it  may  be  only  casually  acquired,  and 
memorizing  these  phrases  will  especially  repay  for  the  time  consumed. 

WORDS  COMMENCING  WITH  X  AND  Q. 

The   compound  sounds  of  the   English  letters   X  and  Q  prove  the 

most  difficult  for  the  student  to  analyse  when  writing  English  words  in 

which  those  sounds  occur,  or  writing  English  words  spelled  with  those 

letters.      The  purpose,  therefore,  of  the  first  part  of  the  Exercise  to  this 


lesion  io  to  make  this  matter  an  easy  one  for  the  student,  commencing 
with  the  presentation  of  an  easy  form  for  the  sound  of  X,  which  is  com- 
posed of  the  sounds  short-e,  K  and  S.  Where  that  sound  commences 
a  word,  the  student  need  not  spell  it  out  in  full,  but  can,  instead,  write 
a  shaded  circle  like  the  circle  Z,  as  in  signs  i  to  16  in  Exercise, 

This  shaded  circle  readily  does  for  the  sound  of  X,  beginning  words, 
and  in  each  instance  will  not  be  mistaken  for  the  Z  circle,  for  the  circle 
Z  always  ends  words.  Use,  therefore,  a  heavy  circle  for  the  sound  of  X 
beginning  words,  attaching  to  it  the  balance  of  the  word,  just  as  a  halved 
R  is  added  to  that  circle  in  sign  i  in  Exercise,  the  whole  outline  being 
therein  placed  above  the  line,  for  the  vowel  in  the  last  syllable  ert  in  that 
outline  for  exert,  is  entitled  to  the  position,  the  circle  X  taking  any  posi- 
tion, it  only  being  necessary  to  indicate  the  principal  vowel  of  the 
balance  of  the  word.  This  X  circle,  being  merely  a  shaded  circle  S,  is 
added  to  all  other  characters  on  the  same  side  as  the  circle  S,  the  right 
or  upper  side  of  straight  characters,  and  like  the  circle  S,  may  denote 
the  indication  of  R  to  the  main  consonant,  by  putting  the  X  circle 
on  the  R  side  of  straight  consonants,  just  as  the  X  circle  is  placed  to 
the  letter  P  in  such  words' as  experience,  sign  9  in  Exercise,  the  shaded 
circle  being  read  first,  then  the  full  consonant  and  next  invisible  R. 

Signs  185  to  187  illustrate  words  containing  the  sound  of  X  inter- 
medially,  as  in  the  words  next,  mixed  and  fixed.  Phonetically,  these 
words  are  spelled  n-e-k-s-t,  next,  m-i-k-s-d,  mixed,  f-i-k-s-d, _/?:«•<•<//  but  the 
student  may  omit  the  K  sound  of  X  from  them,  spelling  such  words  as 
though  they  were  nest,  fi st  and  mist;  and  if  there  is  fear  that  they  will  clash 
with  those  words,  the  loop  may  be  shaded  to  indicate  the  K  sound  of  X. 

The  sound  of  Q  and  the  letter  Q  are  apt  to  give  more  trouble  than 
the  sound  of  X.  All  words  in  English  which  are  begun  with  the  letter 
Q,  have  the  sound  of  K  and  Way,  the  word  queer,  sign  17  in  Exercise, 
being  properly  spelled  phonetically  K,  Way,  long-E  and  R,  so  that  all 
words  beginning  with  the  English  letter  Q,  are  easily  analyzed  if  we  simply 
write  their  sounds,  as  will  be  seen  in  signs  17  to  23,  wherein  the  Way 
hook  follows  the  letter  K  in  giving  the  exact  sound  of  Kway,  which  the 
letter  Q  always  has  when  it  commences  a  word. 

Sometimes  there  are  words  which,  in  English  spelling,  do  not  con- 
tain the  English  Q,  but,  in  their  pronunciation  do,  such  words  being 
cute  and  curiosity,  which  are  pronounced  as  if  begun  with  a  letter  Q. 
This  is  because  the  primary  sound  of  Q  is  a  K,  as  K-u,  Q,  and,  as  the 
English  letter  C  in  such  words  has  also  the  K  sound  followed  by  U,  the 
phoneticion  hears  the  equivalent  of  the  English  letter  Q  only,  such 


words  being  therefore  treated  just  as  if  they  were  spelled  with  the  let- 
ters K  and  U  beginning  them,  the  K  being  written  and  the  sound  of  U 
indicated  by  position,  as  in  signs  39  and  40  in  Exercise. 

EXPEDIENCIES. 

The  word  it  may  often  be  readily  expressed  by  halving  the  last  full- 
length  consonant  of  a  preceding  word,  as  in  signs  132  and  133.  Many 
word-signs  may  also  be  halved  to  represent  the  addition  of  if,  without 
writing  ;'/.  See  signs  134  to  136.  A  halved- V  is  often  used  to  rep- 
resent the  phrase  of  it,  providing  it  is  written  above  the  line,  as  in  sign 
137.  This  spells  Tit,  which  is  very  near  the  sound  of  of  it.  In  this,  V 
has  been  used  for  of.  A  double  length  V,  upon  a  similar  plan,  may  be 
used  to  represent  of  their,  as  in  signs  138  and  139. 

The  halving  principle  can  also  be  used  to  add  the  words  ought  and 
would  o*  had  on  the  same  plan  that  halving  adds  //  in  the  phrase  take 
it,  sign  135.  In  that  instance,  the  word  rests  on  the  line  when  adding  //, 
while  in  signs  140  and  146  and  150,  the  words  //,  which  and  such  are 
placed  above  the  line  and  halved  to  add  ought.  It  must  be  observed 
that  the  halved  outline  must  be  above  the  line  to  add  ought,  as  in  above 
instances,  and  must  be  below  the  line  to  add'  would  or  had,  just  as  sign 
141  adds  would  QI  had  to  the  word  //,  reading  /'/  would  or  it  had.  But  it  is 
only  such  common  second-place  word-abbreviations  as  //  or  which  that 
may  be  taken  out  of  position  to  add  the  words  ought  and  would  or  had  by 
halving.  First  or  third-place  abbreviations  must  keep  their  positions. 

By  adding  the  V-hook  meaning  have,  the  N  hook  for  not,  or  the  L 
hook  for  will,  more  extended  phrases  may  be  made  from  these*  small 
outlines,  as  illustrated  by  signs  143  to  145  and  148,  149,  151  and  152, 
and,  in  some  instances  the  word  to  may  be  also  implied,  though  not 
indicated,  as  in  sign  142,  in  which  instance  the  halving  of  the  character 
is  done  to  add  the  word  ought,  to  being  merely  understood  in  that  phrase. 

In  sign  157,  the  circle-S  is  added  on  the  most  convenient  side. 

Signs  159  and  161,  165  and  166,  show  what  sort  of  derivatives 
may  be  formed  from  the  signs  immediately  preceding  them,  while  signs 
174  to  184  illustrate  how  portions  of  words  may  be  used  legibly  for 
entire  words.  Signs  168  and  169  are  partly  of  this  character. 

Signs  194  to  201  represent  the  best  derivative  forms  for  those  words. 
Difference  of  position  is  chosen  to  indicate  the  difference  of  meaning  be- 
tween words  having  same  outline,  signs  194,  195,  196  and  197,  256  and  257. 

Signs  258  to  260*  are  phrase-abbreviations  for  those  words. 

The  beginning  letter  O  is  omitted  from  the  word  oblige,  in  sign  261, 
because  unnecessary,  llige  being  just  as  legible. 


All  these  differences  in  outline,  shading,  position,  direction  of  writ- 
ing, size,  etc.,  should  be  noted  well  by  the  student,  and  carefully 
heeded,  whether  they  occur  in  separated  words  or  in  the  sentences 
terminating  the  Exercises  to  the  concluding  lesson  of  this  course.  Such 
words  and  phrases  are  incorporated  in  these  lessons  for  the  particular  bene- 
fit of  students,  and  they  can  depend  upon  it  that  there  is  a  reason  for  both 
the  position  and  outline  of  every  one  of  them.  For  instance,  the  con- 
text will  seldom  tell  the  difference  between  write  and  read;  therefore, 
write  is  an  R  halved  to  indicate  the  T,  and  read  is  written  with  the  R 
and  D  in  full.  For  a  similar  reason,  a  distinction  is  made  between  read 
(pronounced  reed)  when  meaning  to  read,  and  read  (pronounced  red)  when 
meaning  have  read,  although  spelled  the  same  in  English;  thus,  put  read 
(pronounced  reed)  above  the  line  when  it  means  to  read,  because  of  its 
more  distinct  vowel  E,  and  write  read  (pronounced  red)  when  meaning 
have  read  on  the  line,  as  in  sentences  in  this  lesson.  Other  necessary  dis- 
tinctions are  particularly  shown  in  the  sentences  represented  by  sign  266 
of  Exercise,  wherein  are  illustrated  differences  between  six  words  sounded 
much  alike,  viz:  ceasing,  season,  session,  secession,  cessation  and  association. 

The  word  of  can  occasionally  be  expressed  by  the  V  hook,  as  in  the 
phrase  part  of  the  in  the  sentence  represented  by  sign  265  in  Exercise. 

The  N-hook  may  occasionally  do  duty  for  the  sound  of  Ng,  as  in 
sign  8i,b-ang-k, bank, but  this  should  only  be  when  no  other  letter  follows 
Ng  in  same  word,  for  Ng,  when  final,  is  written  long,  as  in  sign  go. 

Signs  82  and  83  are  instances  of  brevity  in  formation  only  to  be 
followed  when  it  can  be  safely  done.  The  consonant  sounds  are  all 
there,  but  syllable  indication  is  not  observed. 

Sign  84  is  the  best  outline  for  the  word  eye,  as  the  pronunciation 
of  that  word  is  the  same  as  the  letter  I.  And,  when  any  one  pronounces 
the  word  aye  the  same  as  the  letter  I,  the  letter  I  will  do  for  that  word 
also,  but  when  aye  is  pronounced  like  the  letter  A  of  the  alphabet,  then 
it  should  be  written  as  in  sign  85.  The  interrogative  Eh  is  sometimes 
pronounced  like  the  letter  A  of  the  alphabet,  in  which  case  that  letter 
should  be  written  for  it,  as  in  sign  85;  but  when  it  is  properly  pro- 
nounced, it  sounds  like  short-e,  and  that  letter  then  should  be  employed 
for  it,  as  in  sign  86.  For  the  sound  of  the  interjection  Ah,  the  alpha- 
betical letter  for  that  sound  should  be  used,  as  in  sign  87. 

The  word  now  is  best  spelled  in  full,  n-ow,  as  in  sign  88.  The  word 
once  should  be  written  as  in  sign  89. 

In  junctures  of  the  letter  Hay  with  N  or  Ing,  the  Hay  may  be 
written  upwards,  as  in  sign  90. 


The  sound  of  P  is  omitted  from  the  word  impugned,  sign  91,  wherein 
it  is  written  with  a  letter  M  halved  and  thickened  to  add  D,  and  at  the 
same  time  placed  under  the  line  to  indicate  the  very  prominent  sound 
of  U,  with  its  preceding  vowel  sound  unprovided  for,  because  unneces- 
sary. 

Signs  92  to  125  contain  outlines  for  words  and  phrases,  the  former 
mostly  compound,  for  which  the  student  needs  special  outlines  for  dis- 
tinction sake,  or  to  provide  easy  forms  for  words  difficult  to  write 
according  to  rule,  the  latter  sort  being  mainly  and  meanwhile,  signs  92 
and  93,  and  the  distinctive  outlines  being  such  as  the  provision  for  the 
difference  existing  between  the  words  into,  unto  and  onto,  signs  94,  95 
and  96,  also  adopt  and  adapt,  signs  100  and  101.  The  termination  ers 
and  fries,  occurring  in  such  words  as  distillers,  distilleries,  and  similar 
words,  need  to  be  clearly  indicated,  ers  being  indicated  in  hook  and 
circle  form  as  in  sign  98,  and  eritsby  the  full  sized  R  and  circle  as  in  sign 


EXERCISE    XI. 


r*?*?  \     \  C 

i^...<?....4cL_.5:cyr.6^r.2..<£R.3\^ 


I   —  i  —  i     V~  L_ 

' 


.  ........  45  ........  46.....  .......  4y.  ......... 

..\^^.....S-Z..^....^3..^...S4:..^^.....SS..L  ____  J6..!V^JD.... 
.  .........  60....t>  ______  £1  ......  61  ......  63...../r....61.... 

>  >-N  V  ff  v-^-Q 

j^arrr  ^ 

84-  ?5 
..\  ....  i.tt.jSy.s.$'&.'^.&9.<o.9os^.9d.  .... 

//"- 


.....  lot.  ..... 


\.i30S>.i3t..\..£3Z....133_J?.. 


99-  These  differences  and  many  others  which  the  student  should  care- 
fully note,  are  plainly  shown  in  this  Exercise. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  in  sign  119  the  preposition  to  is  omitted  in 
the  word  tomorrow,  the  outline  for  morrow  being  written  in  the  third 
position  to  indicate  the  to  in  tomorrow,  just  as  it  is  indicated  in  the 
phrase  to  be  and  to  do,  in  list  of  Common  Abbreviations  in  Lesson  IX. 
This  preposition  to  is  often  understood  at  the  end  of  a  phrase,  without 
being  written,  as  in  signs  121  to  125.  When  a  hyphen  separates  to  from 
other  words  in  the  key,  it  implies  that  the  outline  represents  the  ad- 
dition of  the  to,  on  some  occasions,  and  not  on  others,  according  to  cir- 
cumstances. Signs  121  and  123  are  allowable  instances  of  abbreviation 
in  the  case  of  frequently  occurring  phrases,  the  former,  in  order  or  in  order 
to  being  simply  an  N  with  an  R  hook,  halved  to  add  D,  spelling  Nerd, 
which  is  sufficient  for  that  phrase,  while  sign  123  is  an  N,  with  Rel  and 
Shun  hooks,  forming  Inrels/iun,  which  nearly  spells  in  relation-to.  Both 
these  outlines  are  placed  in  position  for  in. 

Sometimes  the  word  to  is  indicated  by  halving  an  outline,  as  in  sign 
130,  wherein  the  word  able,  of  sign  129,  is  halved  to  indicate  able  to,  as 
in  sign  130. 

KEY  XI. 

i,  exert;  2,  exercise;  3,  exercisist;  4,  exact;  5,  exactly;  6,  expect,;  7, 
except;  8,  accept;  9,  experience;  10,  experienced;  n,  extend;  12,  excel; 
13,  excellent;  14,  examine;  15,  examined;  16,  examination;  17,  queer;  18, 
query;  19,  quaint;  20,  quart;  21,  quartz;  22,  quarto;  23,  quake;  24,  quick; 
25,  quicken;  26,  quadrant;  27,  qualify;  28,  quality;  29,  quantity;  30, 
quinine;  31,  quiet;  32,  quote;  33,  quota;  34,  twill;  35,  twig;  36,  twelve; 
37,  require;  38,  request;  39,  cute;  40,  curiosity;  41,  I"am;  42,  1  am  glad; 
43,  I  am  inclined;  44,  if  you;  45,  if  it  is;  46,  if  it  is  not;  47,  of  course;  48, 
in  all  cases;  49,  I  may;  50,  take  you;  51,  it  may  as  well;  52,  for  you;  53, 
for  it  is;  54,  for  it  is -known;  55,  till  you  can;  56,  in  the  same  cases;  57,  put 
you;  58,  took  you;  59,  to  whom;  60,  has  had  it;  61,  used  some;  62,  was 
not;  63,  whom  you  will;  64,  in  some  cases;  65,  in  each;  66,  in  which;  67, 
in  much;  68,  give  these;  69,  give  this;  70,  give  thus  (those);  71,  and  if;  72, 
and  for;  73,  and  few;  74,  postpone;  75,  postage;  76,  postal;  77,  postal 
card;  78,  you  must;  79,  you  must  be;  80,  you  must  have;  81,  bank;  82, 
surprise;  83,  surprised;  84,  eye;  85,  aye;  86,  eh;  87,  ah;  88,  now;  89,  once; 
90,  hang;  91,  impugned:  92,  mainly;  93,  meanwhile;  94,  onto;  95,  into;  96, 
unto;  97,  distiller; '98,  distillers;  99,  distilleries;  100,  adopt;  101,  adapt;  102, 
adoption;  103,  adaption;-  104,  nevertheless;  105,  notwithstanding;  106,  here- 
after; 107,  herein;  108,  hereinafter;  109,  hereinbefore;  no,  hereinto;  in, 
hereunto;  112,  hereon;  113,  hereof;  114,  heretofore;  115,  hope  to  have; 
116,  I  beg  to  say;  117,  morrow;  118,  the  morrow;  119,  to-morrow;  120,  in 
order  that;  121,  in  order-to;  122,  in  reply-to;  123,  in  relation-to;  124,  in 
reference-to;  125,  with  reference-to;  126,  reference;  127,  reform;  128,  per- 
form; 129,  able;  130,  able  to;  131,  to  be  able  to;  132,  read  it;  133,  shave  it; 


...... 

</>       I? 


I  J 

V          V  - 


P 


l9£/rr*.i99.srz....,.2oo^Zols^,...9 

x —         ^~f  \^>       ^/ 

'.).         9        -^ 


o 


£32.... 


c    t;^^> 


. 


...c/N...8C.e.  ...............  '-t-  ..i  ......  J... 

\      )       X 

ri^ 
.ar^ 

-    "VflX    ov          °-T> 

•  ......  <_X   ........  •  ..............  *••• 


1 34,  make  it;  135,  take  it;  136,  have  it;  137,  of  it;  138,  of  their;  139,  of  their 
own;  140,  it  ought;  141,  it  would-had;  142,  it  ought  to  have;  143,  it  would 
have;  144,  it  ought  not;  145,  it  would-had  not;  146,  which  ought;  147,  which 
it;  148,  which  would  have;  149,  which  will  it;  150,  such  ought;  15 1,  such  would 
not;  152,  such  will  have  had;  153,  subject;  154,  subjection;  155,  subjective; 
156,  business;  157,  businesslike;  158,  necessary;  159,  necessarily;  160, 
United  States;  161,  Constitution  of  the  United  States;  162,  Pennsyl- 
vania; 163,  Pennsylvania  railroad;  164,  university;  165,  University  of 
Pennsylvania;  166,  Universalism;  167,  Lord  Jesus  Christ;  168,  character; 
169,  children;  170,  bachelor;  171,  capable;  172,  Catholic;  173,  Roman 
Catholic;  174,  Savior;  175,  several;  176,  visible;  177,  technical;  178, 
dignity;  179,  dogmatic;  180,  discover;  i8r,  England-ish;  182,  possible; 
183,  positive-ly;  184,  system;  185,  next;  186,  mixed;  187,  fixed;  188,  popular; 
189,  public-ish;  190,  publisher;  191,  publication;  192,  Republican;  193, 
republish;  194,  workman;  195,  workmen;  196,  workingman;  197,  working- 
men;  198,  manufacture;  199,  manufacturer;  200,  manufactures;  201,  manu- 
facturers; 202,  advertisement;  203,  advertisements;  204,  advertising;  205, 
advertiser;  206,  advertised;  207,  especial-ly;  208,  external-ly;  209,  impossible,; 
210,  impossibility;  21 i,  justification;  212,  justification  by  faith;  213,  repre- 
sent; 214,  representation;  215,  representative;  216,  represented;  217,  mis- 
represent; 218,  misrepresentation;  219,  misrepresented;  220,  peculiar;  221, 
peculiar  case;  222,  peculiarly;  223,  peculiarity;  224,  respect-tul-ly;  225, 
salvation;  226,  salvation  of  thesoul;  227,  satisfy-fied;  228,  satisfactory,  229, 
satisfaction;  230,  scripture;  231,  scriptural;  232,  signify-fied;  233,  significance; 
234,  significancy;  235,  significant;  236,  signification;  237,  significative;  238, 
similar-ly;  239,  similarity;  240,  simple-y-fi-ed;  241,  single-singular-ly;  242, 
singularity;  243,  somebody;  244,  special;  245,  speak;  246,  spoke;  247, 
spoken;  248,  spinal  column;  249,  spiritual;  250,  spiritualism;  251,  spirit- 
ualist; 252,  spirituality;  253,  stenography;  254,  stenographer;  255,  stenogra- 
phic; 256,  sometime;  257,  somewhat;  258,  substantial  identity;  259,  Supreme 
Being;  260,  temperance  society;  261,  Oblige  me,  and  while  I  write,  you  read 
those  memoranda  which  you  read  before;  262,  No  sir,  you  can  never  construct 
a  minimum  or  maximum  jurisdiction;  263,  The  universe  grows,  as  our 
knowledge  of  it  expands;  264,  Strange  was  the  idea  of  the  manufacturer 
who  hoped  co  succeed  with  no  advertising;  265,  A  special  business  needs 
the  audience  which  is  best  secured  by  a  satisfactory  advertisement;  266, 
This  memorandum  of  secession  of  part  of  the  association  last  season  was 
read,  without  ceasing,  before  the  cessation  of  yesterday's  session;  267,  A 
desire  to  be  somebody,  though  mere  priue,  is  far  more  creditable  than  to 
be  satisfied  with  being  nobody;  268,  Because  his  answer  was  not  inscribed 
in  juxtaposition  with  signatures  on  the  opposite  page  of  the  book,  the  man- 
ager was  dissatisfied;  269,  The  city  of  Jerusalem  of  old  has  been  used  to 
describe  a  state  of  future  existence  for  the  just — in  old  pictures  an  arch- 
angel is  seen  guarding  it  while  its  inhabitants  sleep;  270,  Providence  deals 
not  in  the  impossible,  but  seems  always  willing  to  influence  knowledge  to 
perform  wonders  for  the  person  who  utilizes  extremity  as  a  justification  for 
reform  in  business  methods;  271,  I  speak  especially  of  the  respect  which 
should  be  shown  to  Scripture  as  representing  a  peculiar  spiritual  revelation 
which  must  instruct  by  its  acknowledged  external  strength  even  to  those 
who  may  not  see  in  it  a  necessarily  saving  significance. 


LESSON   XII. 


HALF-LENGTH  ABBREVIATIONS. 

Between 
..\  Body 
Beauty,  about 
.~.Quit-e 
.7".  God 

X.After 

C 
Thought 

Without 
C 
Throughout 

c< 

On  either  hand 

On  the  other  hand 
C 

.;...Establish-ed-ment 

•X..A.stonish-ed-ment 

...^..  Met 
Imme'diate-ly 

Gentlemen 

-ing-ly 
;ord& 

acc'fe 

...{/...Gentleman 

Agent 
</ 

..t^...Word 
....World 

..  W  Not 

....v_>...  Nature  -d 
Tonight 

...t9...0n  the  one  hand 
...W..  Hundred,  hand 
Under 

«/ 

..o*...  Certain 

.Creature  ,  ace 

Accurate—  ly 

<\ 
Particular-ly 

.Cannot 

..A  ....Opportunity 

...r-3..  Account,  on 
Consequent 

<: 
...?.  Plaintiff 

..  Behind 

Foundation 

..S....  Subsequent 

,  Movement 

With  the  above  list,  all  the  abbreviating  word-forms  have  been  given 
necessary,  with  the  derivative  abbreviations  which  may  be  made  from 
them,  for  a  speed  of  over  300  words  a  minute,  if  well  memorized  and  used 
in  connection  with  the  other  instruction  given  in  these  lessons,  the  pres- 
ent list  being  the  shortest,  and,  in  reality,  also  the  easiest  memorized, 
becatise  most  of  the  Half-length  Word-abbreviations  contain  nearly  the 
entire  consonant  elements  of  the  words  they  represent.  These  abbrevia- 
tions are  subject  to  the  same  plan  of  derivative  word-building  as  the  other 
list.  Thus,  the  circle-S  may  be  added  to  any  sign,  making  thoughts  of 
thought;  ing  may  be  added  to  form  establishing  from  establish;  and  combi- 
nations such  as  joining  the  signs  for  behind  and  hand  may  be  made,  as  in 
sign  269,  forming  the  phrase  behindhand,  etc.,  etc. 

Other  short-hand  authors  have  taken  the  trouble  to  compile  cum- 
brous phonographic  dictionaries,  containing  brief  forms  for  many  thou- 
sands of  English  words,  thus  conveying  to  learners  the  false  impression 
that  it  was  necessary  for  them  to  learn  innumerable  word-signs  before 


they  could  become  adept  at  the  art  of  the  shorthand  writer.  The  author 
of  this  work,  therefore,  desires  to  assure  all  who  may  labor  under  sucii 
an  impression,  that  it  is  an  erroneous  one,  the  most  skilled  phonogra- 
phers  of  the  day  not  using  more  than  are  contained  in  these  lessons. 
And,  in  fact,  such  phonographic  dictionaries  do  not  contain  more,  their 
ten  or  twenty  thousand  outlines  being  nothing  more  than  variations  of 
the  ones  these  lessons  contain,  but  arranged  so  that  they  seem  more, 
and,  so  arranged,  require  years  to  learn,  even  by  the  few  that  can  mem- 
orize them  at  all.  In  these  lessons  we  give  all  the  root  abbreviations 
from  which  are  formed  all  the^other  words  those  useless  shorthand  dic- 
tionaries contain,  and  our  explanation  enables  the  student  to  make  them 
better  than  a  dictionary  can  show  him,  while  in  addition  he  will  have  the 
principle  at  his  fingers'  ends. 

Another  equally  useless  work  is  the  phrase  book  issued  by  other 
authors,  and  made  only  to  sell.  It  requires  years  to  memorize  phrases 
thoroughly  in  that  shape.  We  give,  in  Lessons  VIII  and  IX,  the 
simple  rules  which  govern  them  all,  and  in  those  and  -Lessons  X  to  XII 
sufficient  examples  to  enable  students,  for  themselves,  to  properly  make 
an}'  others. 

The  Half-length  Abbreviations  would  not  conflict  with  the  word- 
signs,  even  if  both  were  made  about  the  same  size,  but  it  is  best  to  distin- 
guish them  by  writing  the  word-signs  much  smaller  than  the  half-length 
abbreviations,  as  directed  in  previous  lesson. 


THE     HUMERAL  5. 

..o..The  ciphei 

..c.-.l.  ........ 

..%...$  

..^..3  

..W...4  

.:x5  , 

_..6  

..)....*  

L..£  

..J..10  
./?.4i  

.1.12  
../»J3  

..u.i4  

...D..15.  

...^.16  

..j...4y.  
..j...l£  

..J/..-80  
..S...3O..... 
..^...40..... 
...-,..#0..... 
—  ..60  
...;..>tt  
...l..^.  

..O..4OO... 
.\>..200.. 
.J>..3oo. 

..k>,.400... 

.~3)..500... 
-0..600.. 

..&.%OO..'. 

.3.  ..ffoo... 

.L.iooo 

..+..2OOO. 
^r  3OOO. 

..£.1,000,000 

^.^000,000 

^{.dOOOOOO 

.^4000 
.^..30OO 
^..€000. 

.r.fooo.. 
Jlftwa. 

^4,000,000 

^3,000,000 

—T..  '6,000,000 

.^.^.000,000 

y^.f  ,00  ofooo 
^£9,000,000 

.^..9.  

..^...19  

-  $o  

..^£>..900... 

A.9000 

The  adoption  of  shorthand  signs  for  the  Arabic  numerals  has  been 
attempted   by  .writers  on  shorthand  before  the  compilation  of  these  les- 


sons,  but  such  attempts  have  been  of  the  crudest  character  imaginable, 
one  author  employing  as  many  as  three  different  signs  to  represent  each 
Arabic  numeral,  all  of  which  certainly  tends  to  confuse  rather  than  en- 
lighten the  pupil,  or  save  time  for  him.  Again,  they  have  been  ob- 
jectionable from  another  reason,  that  of  being  entirely  arbitrary  in  their 
character,  not  a  single  symbol  being  used  which  would  phonetically  afford 
any  clew  whatever  to  its  meaning. 

In  the  list  presented  on  foregoing  pa^e,  however,  the  author  believes, 
will  be  found  that  unity  of  character  wnich  is  so  important  in  a  matter 
of  this  kind. 

By  looking  carefully  over  the  numeral  list,  the  student  cannot  fail  to 
recognize  the  simplicity  of  its  arrangement  and  its  entire  legibility. 
The  figure  i  is  represented  by  its  word-abbreviation,  and  2  by  the  word- 
sign  for  its  common  name.  The  other  figures  are  each  represented  by  a 
conspicuous  consonant  element  of  their  several  names,  the  figure  3  be- 
ing a  letter  R,  4  a  letter  F,  5  a  letter  V,  6  a  letter  K,  7  a  letter  S,  8  is 
spelled  in  full,  and  9  is  a  letter  N;  10  is  spelled  in  full,  n  and  12  partly 
so,  while  the  "teens"  are  represented  as  in  13,  14,  etc.,  by  halving  the 
original  sign  to  add  the  sound  of  T,  and  concluding  with  an  N  hook;  20 
is  practically  spelled  in  full,  30  is  indicated  by  simply  halving  the  pri- 
mary letter  representing  the  numeral  3,  and  similarly  with  40,  50,  etc. 
A  small  circle- S  is  used  for  the  cypher,  because  it  most  resembles  the 
.unit,  and  from  this  principle  the  word  hundred  is  properly  represented  by 
a  large  Ses  circle;  thousand  is  well  represented  by  the  phonographic  con- 
sonant Ith,  and  the  letter  L  does  for  million. 

The  adding  of  the  "teens"  in  which  the  hook  is  read  after  the  halv- 
ing principle,  can  of  course,  only  be  applied  to  our  figures.  In  regular 
spelling  the  phonographer  must  read  the  hook  before  the  halving 
principle. 

At  first  students  will  be  disposed  to  fear  that  these  phonographic 
numerals  will  conflict  seriously  with  their  word-abbreviations.  But,  if 
they  persevere  in  the  use  of  them,  they  will  find  this  to  be  anything  but 
the  case,  especially  if  they  have  much  figure  work  in/which  to  make  use 
of  these  signs. 

In  writing  some  ordinal  numbers,  such  as  second,  twenty-first,  etc., 
a  full  phonographic  outline  is  preferable,  as  in  signs  6,  4,  etc.,  in  Exer- 
cise, but  where  the  name  of  the  number  ends  with  ///,  that  part  of  an 
ordinal  must  be  omitted,  or  it  will  conflict  with  the  sign  for  thousand. 
Compare  signs  42  and  43  in  Exercise.  Sixteenth,  written  without  the  ///, 
as  in  sign  42,  would  never  be  mistaken  for  sixteen  when  met  with  in  a 


sentence.  Signs  25,  34,  41,  etc.,  representing  fourth,  ffth,  sixth,  etc., 
will  be  seen  to  be  the  same  signs  as  four,  Jive,  six,  etc.,  in  the  table  cf 
numerals. 

In  joining  these  phonographic  numerals  where  the  word  thousand  or 
million  are  intended,  though  omitted,  it  is  best  to  join  the  signs  in  groups, 
separating  such  groups  at  the  point  wherein  the  words  thousand  or  million 
would  have  occurred  had  they  been  spoken,  as  in  sign  74  of  Exercise. 
In  the  same  manner,  the  words  dollars,  pounds'  (sterling)  and  shillings 
should  be  indicated  when  omitted,  as  in  signs  75  and  76.  But  it  is  best 
not  to  omit  those  words  in  sentences  where  the  context  would  not  indi- 
cate them.  In  book-keeping  no  numeral  junctures  whatever  are  allow- 
able, excepting  in  dates  or  prices,  as  the  columns  of  amounts  require 
the  figures  to  be  written  separately  in  order  to  add  them.  For  that 
reason,  calculations  by  multiplication,  subtraction  or  division  must  all  be 
made  by  separated  figures,  as  in  examples  77  to  80  of  Exercise. 

Other  than  the  above  exceptions,  the  more  figures  joined  the  better. 

Where  the  sign  for  thousand  would  be  difficult  of  juncture  to  a 
hooked  figure,  such  hook  is  run  into  a  circle,  as  in  signs  24  and  29,  pro- 
viding the  circle  of  straight  letters  is  placed  on  the  N-hook  side.  Such 
transformation  of  the  hook  on  curved  letters,  which  makes  them  into  a 
circle,  as  in  sign  29,  will  not  be  mistaken  for  a  cipher,  because  the  cipher 
is  only  used  separately — never  joined.  It  is  only  the  large  circle  for 
hundred  that  is  ever  joined.  The  hundred  circle  can  be  joined  upon  the 
most  convenient  side  of  either  straight  or  curved  characters,  as  in  signs 
69  to  73  in  Exercise. 

In  instances  where  the  large  circle  for  hundred  will  not  readily  join, 
that  word  can  be  represented  by  a  shaded  halved  N  of  the  Half-length 
Abbreviations,  shown  in  sign  32  in  Exercise. 

Signs  i  and  2,  3  and  4,  5  and  6,  7  and  8,  9  to  n,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.,  in 
Exercise,  are  placed  near  each  other  for  the  purpose  of  showing  the  stu- 
dent their  contrasting  outlines. 

Lest  there  should  be  any  misunderstanding  in  regard  to  the  use  of 
the  shorthand  numerals,  a  considerable  part  of  the  Exercise  of  this  lesson 
.  is  devoted  to  their  illustration. 

Signs  9,  10  and  n  illustrate  how  to  distinguish  between  3,  third, 
and  30.  The  first  and  last  named  are  not  apt  to  give  trouble  by  clashing, 
provided  the  halving  principle  is  carefully  observed,  but  as  some  students 
are  apt  to  wrongly  halve  the  R  of  three  to  indicate  third,  this  last  word  is 
shown  as  in  sign  10.  When  possible,  the  word  the  should  be  indicated 
by  the  letter  I,  in  junctures  \viih  numerals,  when  there  can  be  no  conflic- 


tion  with  a  halved  R  of  thirty,  in  instances  where  the  proper  sign  must  be 
joined.  If  joined  at  all  to  numerals,  the  should  therefore  appear  as  in  the 
phrase  the  first,  sign  13  in  Exercise,  seldom  as  in  phrase  the  second,  sign 
15,  though,  as  a  rule,  it  is  best  not  to  join  the  or  any  word  to  numerals. 

In  junctures  with  other  numerals,  the  student  should  remember  that 
30,  40,  etc.,  are  not  always  halved,  being  distinguished  from  3,  4,  etc.,  by 
sort  of  junctures  shown  in  signs  19,  20,  46,  etc.,  just  as  with  the  ordinary 
Arabic  numerals  used  in  print.  For  instance,  in  writing  the  Arabic 
numerals,  34,  75,  etc.,  one  does  not  show  the  cipher  of  the  30  or  70 
which  compose  them,  the  added  figures  4  and  5  of  34  and  75  taking 
the  place  of  the  cipher  which  would  otherwise  be  there,  and  hence,  in 
shorthand,  3  and  4  make  34,  and  7  and  5  make  75,  just  as  they  do  in  our 
common  Arabic  numbers.  To  write  a  halved  3  for  30,  and  then  add  a  5 
to  it  in  shorthand  would  be  as  misleading  and  wrong  as  to  add  the  Arabic 
figures  30  and  4,  as  they  would  make  304  instead  of  34.  So  the  student 
should  remember  that  the  numerals  3,  4,  etc.,  are  only  halved  to  indicate 
the  cipher  of  30,  40,  etc.,  and  therefore  this  should  only  be  done  when 
they  are  either  written  alone,  as  in  signs  n,  30,  etc.,  or  appear  at  the 
end  of  an  outline,  as  in  sign  72  in  Exercise.  Therefore,  remember  that 
when  the  shorthand  numerals  are  joined  together,  3  and  4  make  34,  7 
and  5  make  75,  etc.,  etc.,  none  of  the  letters  being  halved.  This  ex- 
plains the  letter  R  for  3,  of  signs  12  and  14  of  Exercise,  the  R  for  30 
being  made  full  length  because  it  has  another  letter  after  it  to  show  that 
the  R  means  30.  For  the  same  reason,  when  we  write  33,  we  should  write 
two  full-sized  letters  R,  joined  together  as  in  sign  16,  which  really  forms 
a  double-length  R.  Of  course,. when  we  want  to  write  30,000,  etc.,  the 
R  is  plainly  shown  to  be  halved,  for  the  reason  that  it  is  there  necessary; 
but  if  it  were  34,000,  the  R  should  be  written  full-sized. 

The  lower  end  of  the  letter  S  for  7,  had  better  be  slanted  a  little  to 
the  left,  almost  like  an  Ish,  which  will  plainly  distinguish  the  S  of  7  from 
the  V  of  5,  even  in  the  most  rapid  writing.  Care  should  be  exercised  in 
these  numerals,  as  well  as  in  any  principle  of  phonography,  but  not 
more  so,  and  if  the  halving  principle  is  observed  strictly  and  the  other 
hints  herein  given,  the  shorthand  numerals  will  be  found  to  be  as  legible 
as  the  ordinary  figures,  and  far  more  rapid,  being,  in  fact,  the  only  plan 
by  which  a  number  of  figures  can  be  taken  verbatim  when  read  at  a 
convention,  or  occurring  in  court  cases. 

The  numeral  9  and  its  derivatives,  90  and  19,  particularly  the  two 
latter,  should  have  the  right  end  written  a  little  higher  than  the  left  end. 
as  in  sign  61.  This  will  prevent  junctures  with  other  characters  causing 


it  to  conflict  with  the  figure  4  and  its  derivatives.  In  all  junctures 
where  you  intend  a  full-sized  figure,  be  sure  to  make  it  full-size,  and 
your  halved  characters  less  than  halved,  if  possible,  a  rule  which  is 
equally  applicable  to  any  shorthand  outline. 

The  figure  eight,  in  the  list  of  shorthand  numerals,  is  spelled  in 
full.  This  should  always  be  done  when  it  is  written  alone,  as  in  signs  53 
to  55,  and  if  it  is  the  first  numeral  in  a  juncture  writh  other  characters, 
as  in  sign  70;  but,  when  it  is  the  second  character,  or  in  any  instance 
where  it  is  preceded  by  another  figure,  the  vowel  A  is  omitted  from  it 
and  only  the  letter  T  used  for  8.  This  adding  of  the  letter  A  to  8  and 
its  derivatives,  80  and  18,  when  written  alone,  furnishes  a  complete  plan 
of  distinction  between  the  shorthand  80  and  the  letter  A  of  our  Alpha- 
bet. Note  the  difference  between  the  outlines  in  signs  89  and  90. 

Fractions  are  sometimes  spelled  in  full,  as  in  signs  81  and  83,  but 
may  be  written,  and  should  be  ordinarily,  as  in  signs  82  and  84  to  87; 
that  is,  just  as  one  would  unite  the  common  Arabic  fractions,  omitting 
the  lines  which  separate  denominator  and  numerator  in  ordinary  English- 
Arabic  fractions,  as  such  line  is  unnecessary. 

Just  as  one  when  a  word-numeral,  occurring  alone  in  a  sentence,  is 
spelled  in  full,  as  in  sign  85  of  Lesson  VIII,  so  should  any  numeral  be 
when  alone  in  a  sentence,  nine  being  spelled  with  a  letter  N  and  hook-N 
above  the  line,  etc.,  in  such  instances. 

PROPER  NAMES  AND  INITIALS. 

The  writing  in  shorthand  of  proper  names  and  initials  being  a 
necessary  element  to  speed  in  shorthand,  since  no  person  can  write  a 
proper  name  in  long-hand  quickly  enough  to  do  verbatim  reporting,  par- 
ticular directions  are  necessary  respecting  this  important  subject  before 
concluding  the  instructions  in  these  lessons.  We,  therefore,  devote 
several  lines  of  our  Exercise  to  this,  beginning  with  sign  91.  The  list 
of  initials  pretty  thoroughly  treats  of  that  branch,  and  the  writing  of 
proper  names  was  somewhat  explained  in  an  earlier  lesson,  but  there  is 
one  point  in  particular  that  was  not  dealt  upon — viz:  the  writing  of 
vowels  disjoined  in  those  few  instances  where  it  may  be  advisable,  such 
as  in  the  name  of  Pike,  sign  91;  Peck,  sign  92;  Boyd,  sign  94,  and  in 
other  instances  shown  herein.  The  rules  which  have  been  given  for 
making  vowel  junctures  are  sufficient  for  most  purposes,  excepting  where 
the  phonetic  outline  has  been  written  without  the  visible  vowel,  in  in- 
stances where  the  writer  thought  it  unnecessary  at  the  time,  but  wherein 
the  writing  of  subsequent  word  outlines  caused  the  reporter  to  fear  they 


might  clash  with  others  before  written,  and  he,  therefore,  has  thought 
it  advisable  to  turn  back  and  insert  the  vowel.  Where  this  is  desired, 
the  vowel  can  be  inserted,  as  in  the  instances  above  illustrated,  so  long 
as  it  is  placed  between  the  consonants  to  which  it  is  to  be  read,  or  at 
least  directly  after  the  consonant  which  immediately  precedes  it,  as  in 
signs  91,  92  and  94,  so  that  it  will  be  read  immediately  following  the 
proper  consonant.  In  those  instances  it  is  comparatively  easy  to  do  this, 
as  it  also  is  in  the  word  Price  in  sign  97,  but  where  the  proper  name 
written  has  been  partially  formed  by  a  hook,  and  the  vowel  is  to  be  read 
between  the  main  consonant  and  the  hook,  then  the  vowel  should  be 
struck  through  the  main  consonant,  which  will  indicate  that  it  must  be 
read  immediately  after  the  main  consonant,  and  before  the  hook,  just  as 
the  vowel  E,  struck  through  the  letter  P  in  outline  for  the  word  Pierce,  in 
sign  96,  is  read  after  the  Pand  before  the  hook  R. 

This  will  show  the  distinction  between  the  word  Price  in  sign  96,  and 
the  word  Pierce  in  sign  97,  aside  fyrom  the  difference  in  the  vowel  sound. 

The  vowel  Ow  may  be  written  upward,  when  it  is  desired  to  write 
Hay  downwards,  but  when  Ow  is  written  downwards,  it  is  necessary  to 
write  Hay  upward.  This  is  illustrated  in  signs  106  and  107.  Many  other 
peculiarities  are  also  illustrated  in  this  Exercise  respecting  the  writing 
of  proper  names. 

A  distinction  should  be  made  in  some  titles.  For  instance,  Miss  is 
of  course  written  with  the  letter  M  and  circle  S  above  the  line,  as  in 
sign  98,  and  Mrs.  should  be  written  as  in  sign  100,  that  is,  with  a  Sez 
circle  attached  to  the  letter  M,  as  this  is  the  exact  sound  of  that  word, 
but  for  the  word  Misses,  the  plural  of  Miss,  as  it  occurs  very  seldom, 
there  should  be  a  distinct  form,  and  it  is  therefore  written  with  two 
small  circles-S  attached  to  the  letter  M,  as  in  sign  99.  This  will  clearly 
distinguish  Mrs.  from  Misses,  which  are  both  pronounced  the  same,  and 
to  which  the  context  generally  furnishes  no  key. 

The  word  Katie  is  written  several  ways  in  this  Exercise,  sign  99 
showing  it  with  a  vowel  ah  substituted  for  a  to  make  a  juncture. 

Some  easily  read  words,  names  and  titles  are  not  vocalized  either 
with  visible  vowel  or  position.  See  sign  93,  etc.,  icf  Exercise. 

All  the  substitutions  of  visible  vowels  for  each  other,  as  shown  in 
this  Exercise,  are  in  accordance  with  the  explanations  regarding  same, 
given  in  Lesson  IV,  to  which  the  student  is  referred. 

The  principle  of  spelling  the  sounds  of  a  letter  by  the  union  of 
visible  characters,  as  described  in  Lesson  III  in  regard  to  X  and  Q, 
extends  also  to  the  representation  of  all  consonants  when  it  is  desired 


to  represent  the  initials  of  people's  names,  but  not  to  the  vowels.  The 
Roman  vowels  A,  E,  I,  O  or  U,  when  such  vowels  are  used  as  the 
initials  of  personal  names,  are  represented  by  our  phonographic  visible, 
vowels,  as  in  signs  98  and  104  in  Exercise.  But  the  names  of  the  Roman 
consonants,  when  pronounced,  always  possess  a  broader  sound,  and 
therefore,  when  representing  initials,  should  be  actually  spelled  with 
visible  signs,  as:  b-e,  B;  c-e,  C;  etc.,  etc.,  as  in  Exercise. 

This  spelling  of  the  sound  of  letters  when  they  are  initials  rep- 
resenting personal  names,  gives  them  a  distinctive  appearance  and 
enables  a  reporter  always  to  recognize  an  initial  at  a  glance.  Other- 
wise, a  plain  initial  might  be  mistaken  in  hurriedly  written  phono  .jrapny 
for  a  word.  The  following  is  the  complete  list: 


INITIALS. 


V 


1^ 


\ 


r 

I 


SYLLABLE  ABBREVIATIONS. 

An  efficient  means  of  avoiding  some  very  cumbrous  written  forms 
is  that  of  abbreviating  the  phonographic  outlines  of  a  number  of  the 
prefixes  and  affixes  of  our  language.  And,  as  this  method  of  syllable- 
abbreviation  can  be  affected  without  the  least  sacrifice  to  legibility,  it 
becomes  a  very  important  factor  in  rapid  writing. 

All  works  on  phonography  present  this  principle,  but  as  most  of  the 
abbreviations  recommended  by  their  authors  cannot  be  joined  to  the 
rest  of  the  words  of  which  they  are  a  part,  they  therefore  fail  to  give 
any  extra  speed  in  writing.  The  time  saved  by  their  abbreviation  of 
form  is  lost  by  the  time  consumed  in  lifting  the  pen  or  pencil  from  the 
paper,  in  disjoining,  it  being  a  much  slower  method  to  write  two  dis- 
joined characters  than  even  a  half  dozen  joined  ones.  The  method 
taught  herein,  by  being  both  abbreviated  in  form  and  easy  of  juncture, 
gives  extra  speed  from  two  sources,  besides  relieving  writers  of  the  pos- 


•sibility,  common  to  those  old  methods,  of  mistaking  the  disjoined  por- 
tions of  a  word  for  separate  words. 

There  are,  of  course,  many  more  prefixes  and  affixes  in  use  in  our 
language  than  presented  in  the  lists  herein  explained,  but  those  not 
found  here  are  either  of  very  infrequent  occurrence,  or  are  ones  not  in 
need  of  abbreviation,  such  as  the  affixes  ly,  ness,  etc.,  whose  ordinary 
phonographic  outlines  are  sufficiently  brief  in  themselves. 

PREFIXES.  • 

Con,  Com  or  Cog.  These  short  prefixes  (as  one  is  not  at  all  likely 
ever  to  clash  with  either  of  the  others)  are  represented  by  the  same  sign 
— the  consonant  outline  K,  which  is  joined  as  in  signs  in  to  1 18  in  Ex- 
ercise. This  use  of  the  phonographic  K  to  express  the  sounds  of  con  or 
.com,  etc.,  when  prefixes,  is  in  accord  with  the  construction  of  the  word- 
abbreviation  for  the  words  can  or  come,  which  words  the  student  will  re- 
member are  also  represented  by  the  letter  K.  When  the  syllables  con 
.com  or  cog  are  not  prefixes,  but  occur  between  other  syllables  of  a  word, 
they  may  still  be  represented  as  though  prefixes,  as  in  signs  123  to  125. 
In  word's  in  which  con  and  com  occur  together,  it  is  best  to  write  con  in 
full  as  in  sign  122  in  Exercise.  Accom  is  formed  by  adding  a  short-a  to 
the  letter  K,  of  the  prefix  com,  as  in  signs  119  to  121. 

Contra,  Contri,  Contra  or  Counter  are  represented  by  a  halved  K  in 
most  cases.  Signs  141  to  144.  Exceptional  instances  are  junctures 
with  the  letters  K  or  Gay  wherein  the  N  hook  is  added  to  the  prefix  as 
in  sign  145.  In  this  instance  the  part  of  the  prefix  count  is  spelled,  the 
prefix  taking  position  of  Ow. 

Circum  or  Self  are  represented  by  the  circle  S,  as  in  signs  148  and 
153.  When  the  circle  S  also  begins  the  next  syllable,  as  it  does  in  stance, 
in  the  word  circumstance,  enlarge  the  S  circle  of  stance  to  indicate  the 
addition  of  circum,  as  in  sign  149;  write  it  within  an  initial  hook,  as  in 
sign  147. 

for  and  Fore  are  represented  the  same  as  the  word  for  is  expressed 
in  list  of  Common  Abbreviations  in  Lesson  IX — i.e.,  by  the  phono- 
graphic letter  F.  Signs  155  and  156,  this  Exercise. 

In  and  Un,  when  joined  preceding  the  circle  S,  may  be  very  con- 
veniently expressed  by  a  backward  beginning  hook,  as  in  signs  157  to  166. 
In,  as  a  word,  may  also  be  similarly  indicated.  Phrase  161  in  Exercise. 

Intel,  Inter,  Enter,  Intro  or  Under  are  represented  by  a  halved  N 
joined  as  in  signs  167  to  173. 

e,  Magna  and  Magni  may  be   expressed   in  a   few  words,  such 


ify,  magnitude,  etc.,  by  the  phonographic  consonant  M,  as  in  sign 
174  to  177. 

AFFIXES. 

Ble,  Ely  or  Bility  are  represented  by  the  phonographic  stroke  B,  as" 
in  signs  180  to  183.  Bleness,  by  joining  a  letter  N  and  circle  S  to  the 
letter  B,  as  in  sign  182. 

For  or  Fore  as  affixes,  and  Ful,  are  indicated  by  the  same  sign  as 
when  prefixes.  See  signs  186,  187  and  194  in  Exercise. 

Ful  or  Full  may  be  indicated  by  an  F  hook  to  some  words,  as  in  sign 
1 88.  N  and  a  circle  S  can  be  added  to  this  book  to  represent  fulness \ 
as  in  sign  189. 

Ing,  as  an  affix,  is  represented  by  the  phonographic  letter  N,  as  in 
sign  196.  Ings  and  Ingly  are  therefore  properly  written  as  in  signs  200 
and  201.  To  some  halved  characters,  where  the  letter  N  nor  Ng  does 
not  j«in  well,  it  is  preferable  to  attach  a  small  horizontal  curved  line 
similar  to  the  juncture  of  short-u  and  U,  as  in  sign  203  in  Exercise.  The 
circle  S  can  be  attached  to  this  hook  when  necessary,  as  in  sign  204. 

Mental  or  Meniality  are  each  expressed  by  a  halved  M,  terminating 
with  an  N  hook,  as  in  signs  209  and  210.  Ment  is,  of  course,  written 
the  same.  See  sign  208. 

Self  and  Sameness,  as  affixes,  are  represented  by  the  same  sign  used 
for  the  prefix  self—  the  circle  S.  Signs  211  to  215. 

Selves  &&&  Lessncss  are  represented  by  the  Ses  circle,  as  in  signs  216 
to  222  in  Exercise. 

Ship,  as  an  affix,  is  represented  by  the  phonographic  letter  Ish,  as  in 
sign  223,  etc. 

Soever  is  expressed  by  a  joined  circle  S  and  an  R.  Signs  225  to  227 
in  Exercise. 

Ted,  as  a  concluding  phonographic  syllable,  in  instances  wherein  a 
halved  letter  T  cannot  well  be  joined,  can  be  represented  by  the  double 
tick  shown  in  sign  230  in  Exercise,  such  double  tick  somewhat  resem- 
bling a  juncture  of  two  letters  Hay,  the  first  written  upwards,  and  the 
second  downward.  Ded  is  indicated  by  shading  the  downward  stroke 
of  this  tick,  as  in  sign  231.  When  ted  or  ded  can  be  spelled  out,  it  is 
done  as  in  sign  232. 

THE  USE  OF  THE  PREFIXES  AND  AFFIXES. 

In  making  use  of  the  phonographic  prefixes  and  affixes  students  are 
probably  more  apt  to  lose  sight  of  the  two  grand  principles  of  phone- 


graphic  writing — sound  spelling  and  outline-brevity — than  in  any  other 
range  of  practice.  Hence  the  necessity  for  extra  caution.  Remember, 
the  prefix  for  com,  con  or  cog  represents  the  sounds  of  those  prefixes,  not 
simply  the  letters;  and  therefore  the  sign  for  those  prefixes  may  also 
represent  the  sounds  for  conn  or  comm,  as  in  the  word  commend,  which  is 
therefore  correctly  written,  as  in  sign  112  in  Exercise,  that  word  being 
phonographically  spelled  kom-end,  according  to  the  rule  of  brevity  in 
word-outline. 

Frequently  the  prefixes  com  or  con,  or  the  affix  ing,  may  be  alto- 
gether omitted  from  some  words,  the  context  being  generally  a  sure  in- 
dication of  their  omission.  See  signs  126  to  140  and  others  in  Exercise. 

Where  one  sign  is  used  to  express  different  prefixes  or  affixes  (as  K 
for  com,  con  or  cog,  and  B  for  ble,  bly  or  bility)  the  groups  are  those  in 
which  there  is  no  danger  of  mistaking  which  word  the  sign  is  intended 
for  at  the  time. 

The  instances  are  very  rare  wherein  words  containing  abbreviated 
prefixes  or  affixes  can  be  phrased  with  other  words;  and,  when  done,  the 
word  containing  the  affix  or  prefix  must  occupy  its  proper  place  position, 
no  matter  in  what  position  the  other  words  of  the  phrase  are  thus  com- 
pelled to  be  placed.  Furthermore,  whether  written  alone  or  in  phrases, 
ail  words  containing  abbreviated  prefixes  or  affixes  take  position  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  principal  vowel  sound  contained  in  the  main  portion 
of  the  word,  not  the  vowel-sound  of  the  prefix  or  affix.  Prefixes  or 
affixes  are  only  secondary  to  the  rest  of  the  words  to  which  they  may  be 
attached,  and  are  therefore  subject  to  no  particular  position,  occupying 
simply  whatever  position  the  rest  of  the  word  may  give  them  by  their 
own  position.  For  instance,  contradict,  sign  141  in  Exercise,  is  written 
in  the  first  position  to  indicate  the  vowel  sound  of  the  syllable  diet,  thus 
compelling  contra  to  be  written  above  the  line,  even  though  the  vowel 
sounds  of  contra  are  second-place  ones  In  brief,  the  prefixes  and 
affixes  are  to  be  treated  precisely  as  though  they  contained  no  vowel 
element  whatever.  Ccmpare  signs  111  and  112. 

The  prefixes  in  our  language  which  are  not  given  in  abbreviated 
form  in  these  lessons  are  spelled  in  full,  and  mostly  they  are  such  simple 
ones  as  that  of  re  in  regret,  regard,  etc.,  and  these  prefixes,  like  the  others 
illustrated,  must  not  be  purposely  given  their  vowel  position,  for  the 
balance  of  the  word  is  entitled  to  the  position.  For  instance,  in  regard, 
the  main  portion  of  the  word,  the  syllable  gard,  must  have  the  position, 
as  in  sign  178,  while  gret  takes  position  as  in  sign  179.  This  dis- 
t'-.quishes  clearly  between  those  words,  and  the  rule  must  be  observed 


in  all  dealings  with  prefixes,  which  never  take  their  vowel-position  ex- 
cept by  accident,  the  rest  of  the  word  being  entitled  to  the  position. 
Were  it  not  for  this  rule,  one  could  never  distinguish  regret  from  regard, 
a  very  important  matter. 

In  some  words  it  may  be  somewhat  difficult  for  the  student  to  de- 
cide which  prefix  belongs  to  a  word — for  instance,  whether  the  prefix 
con  or  contri  should  be  written  to  the  word  contribute.  In  that  word  the 
difficulty  is  caused  by  the  last  vowel  of  contri  not  being  very  conspicu- 
ous, and  also  by  the  fact  that  tribute  being  a  word  of  itself  the  student 
is  therefore  apt  to  think  the  prefix  in  this  case  should  be  con.  This 
would  be  an  erroneous  impression,  however,  contri  being  the  proper 
prefix.  The  rule  is  to  use  the  briefest  form  consistent  with  legibility. 

PHRASE  COMBINATIONS. 

Beginning  with  signs  205,  206,  207  and  240  in  this  Exercise,  and 
ending  with  sign  307,  are  given  a  number  of  phrase  combinations,  some- 
times made  up  of  word-abbreviations,  joined  often  with  unimportant 
words  omitted,  and  sometimes  abbreviated  in  an  apparently  arbi- 
trary manner,  the  object  being  to  gain  an  outline  the  most  service- 
able for  speed  with  legibility,  they  representing,  as  a  rule,  phrases 
which  are  uttered  very  rapidly,  and  whose  outlines  in  any  other  shape 
could  not  be  written  rapidly.  They  cover  the  entire  field  of  political 
orations,  sermons,  legal  arguments,  and  work  where  the  utmost  rapid- 
ity is  absolutely  essential,  and,  as  they  represent  also  the  most  read- 
able forms,  their  position  and  outlines  are  strictly  observed  by  all  pro- 
fessional writers  of  importance,  and  should  be  learned  as  thoroughly 
and  religiously  as  any  principle  in  these  lessons,  or  the  word-abbrevia- 
tions. Be  sure,  however,  to  make  that  portion  of  them  halved  which  is 
shown  as  halved,  keeping  full-sized  portions  full-size  where  herein  shown, 
observing  carefully  their  position,  as  well  as  the  size  of  their  hooks, 
circles  and  loops.  They  are  the  best  outlines  for  these  combinations  of 
words,  look  like  nothing  else  than  what  they  are,  if  correctly  written,  and 
thus  furnish  exact  distinctions  between  each  other,  and  between  outlines 
which  are  not  illustrated  in  any  lessons,  but  which  may  happen  unawares 
in  actual  work.  They  are  of  vast  importance,  both  to  speed  and  legibility. 

Lest  students  should  imagine  that  it  is  necessary  for  professional 
phonographers  to  allow  a  speaker  to  be  a  few  words  in  advance  of  them, 
in  order  to  write  in  their  proper  position  the  kind  of  phrases  referred  to 
in  the  preceding  paragraphs  on  phrasing,  the  author  would  state  that 
such  a  condition  is  not  necessary.  With  a  rapid  speaker,  such  is  natur- 


ally  the  case,  and  then,  it  is  by  means  of  these  beautiful  phrase  methods 
and  abbreviations  that  a  lagging  shorthand  writer  is  enabled  to  catch 
up  with  a  speaker  momentarily  excited. 

To  further  illustrate  the  explanation  in  last  lesson  respecting  how, 
for  purposes  of  phrasing,  joined  words  are  often  written  out  of  position, 
the  student  is  referred  to  the  phrase  /  am  glad,  sign  42  in  Exercise 
to  last  lesson,  wherein  the  word  glad,  although  properly,  according  to  its 
vowel,  belonging  on  the  line,  is  written,  in  such  combination,  above  the 
line,  because  its  position  when  joined  is  not  important,  and  the  word  am 
must  have  the  first  position  or  it  will  clash  with  may,  in  most  instances. 
This  will  explain  why  the  word  course,  in  the  phrase  of  course,  is  written 
above  the  line  in  sign  47  in  the  Exercise  to  last  lesson,  it  being  neces- 
sary for  the  word  of  to  have  proper  position.  Signs  48,  56  and  64  of 
Exercise  to  last  lesson,  and  which  occur  immediately  under  each  other 
in  that  Exercise,  illustrate  this  rule  still  more  plainly.  In  each  of  those 
phrases  the  word  cases  occurs,  and  each  time  in  a  different  position. 
In  the  first  instance,  cases  is  written  above  the  line,  because  the  word 
in,  of  that  phrase  in  all  cases,  must  have  first  position.  In  the  third  in- 
stance, sign  64  of  the  Exercise  to  last  lesson,  cases  is  in  the  third  position 
because  the  word  some  of  that  phrase  in  some  cases,  must  be  written 
under  the  line  or  it  will  clash  with  same,  sign  56,  Exercise  to  last  lesson. 

Similar  instances  will  be  found  in  this  lesson,  as  in  sign  244,  Exer- 
cise to  this  lesson,  wherein,  in  the  phrase  Son  of  God,  the  word  God  which 
when  alone  is  written  in  first  position,  is,  in  sign  244  of  this  lesson,  writ- 
ten in  the  third  position  under  the  line,  because  the  word  Son,  to  be 
read,  must  have  that  position. 

OMITTED    WORDS. 

One  of  the  most  frequently  occurring  words  in  the  English  language 
is  the  word  to,  and,  as  it  requires  almost  as  much  time  to  write  as  a 
much  longer  word,  the  author,  early  in  his  professional  experience, 
adopted  a  method  by  which  to  may  frequently  be  indicated  without  be- 
ing written.  This  is  done  by  writing  a  succeeding  word  near  the  lou<fr 
portion  of  the  word  immediately  preceding  to  in  a  phrase.  See  signs  235 
to  237  in  Exercise. 

When  the  word  to  begins  a  sentence,  above  plan  does  not,  of  course, 
apply,  the  word  to,  as  the  initiatory  word  of  any  sentence,  being  written 
as  in  the  List  of  Word-Signs. 

The  oft  recurring  word  of  may  be  similarly  indicated  by  writing  the 
succeeding  word  near,  but  towards  the  upper  portion  of  the  preceding 
outline,  as  with  signs  238  and  239. 


Neither  to  nor  cf,  however,  should  ever  be  invisibly  indicated  this 
•way,  save  where  the  words  between  which  they  occur  can  occupy  their 
proper  position,  with  regard  to  the  line  of  writing. 

In  some  instances,  as  in  such  phrases  as  are  represented  by  signs 
240  to  251  of  this  Exercise,  the  indication  of  of  or  of  the  need  not  be 
considered,  the  other  words  of  the  phrase  being  written  joined  as  if 
tiiere  were  no  o/or  of  the  in  the  phrase. 

In  phrases  represented  by  signs  253  to  271  and  27710  282,  etc., 
etc.,  other  words  can  be  omitted  without  indication  or  without  des- 
troying legibility,  their  outlines  being  distinctive  of  themselves  and  not 
clashing  with  any  others.  Such  outlines  are  really  phrase-abbrevia- 
tions and  should  be  accepted  as  such. 

PUNCTUATION. 

Professional  shorthand  writers  punctuate  by  leaving  spaces.  Others 
mora  precise,  maka  use,  in  particular  work,  of  signs  which  cannot  clash 
with  their  phonographic  symbols.  The  vowel  indication  of  other 
methods  of  shorthand  writing  make  a  substitution  of  extraordinary 
punctuational  signs  a  necessity  when  punctuation  is  desired,  but  the  uni- 
formity of  the  word-building  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography  permits 
ths  use  of  all  ordinary  punctuation  marks  except  the  dash,  the  marks  of 
parenthesis  and  the  hyphen.  The  dash  is,  therefore,  represented  by  a 
short  waved  line,  the  parenthesis  by  brackets  and  the  hyphen  by  two 
small  parallel  lines.  See  sentence  of  sign  314  in  Exercise. 

The  foregoing  remarks  apply  solely  to  work  done  at  leisure  (busi- 
ness memoranda,  etc.),  there  being,  of  course,  no  time  in  actual  report- 
ing for  any  punctuation  marks  whatever.  Punctuation  at  time  of  re- 
porting is  done  entirely  by  spacing,  a  space  of  about  an  inch-and  a-half 
•serving  for  a  period,  a  space  of  somewhat  less  than  an  inch  doing  duty 
for  all  the  other  ordinary  marks,  the  hyphen  not  being  indicated  at  all. 
All  new  paragraphs  are  commenced  one  inch  from  the  left  hand  margin 
cf  the  paper  written  upon,  questions  commencing  one-and-one-half 
inches  from  same  margin,  the  other  lines  of  writing  all  commencing 
very  near  left-hand  margin. 

REPEATED  WORDS. 

When  a  speaker  repeats  the  same  phrase  several  times  in  a  sentence, 
the  phonographer  may  make  use  of  an  extra  long  waved  line  to  denote 
t'.ie  repeated  words  in  their  re-occurrer.ee  instead  of  re-writing  the 
words.  See  sentence  shown  by  sign  3:8  ia  Exercise. 


EXERCISE     XII. 


(. 

r 

J.XZJ^J.^-I.^O.^Lv^^xIJ 

J.  £6^.67.1.  6?.*.  eP.o./tfeLvyJd 

^a.ri_-^. 

>  N         <TN  zs- 

JL..95. .T^.J 


.  .  f 


cj 

.^^^ 

-• 


KEY  XII. 

i,  one;  2,  first;  3,  twenty-one;  4,  twenty-first;  5,  two;  6,  second;  7, 
twenty-two;  8,  twenty-second;  9,  three;  10,  third;  n,  thirtieth;  12,  thirty- 
first;  13,  the  first;  14,  thirty-second;  15,  the  second;  16,  thirty-three;  17, 
thirty-third;  18,  the  third;  19,  thirty-fourth;  20,  thirty-fifth;  21,  thirty 
thousand;  22,  thirty  hundred;  23,  thirteenth;  24,  thirteen  thousand;  25, 
fourth;  26,  four  thousand;  27,  four  hundred;  28,  fourteenth;  29,  fourteen 
thousand;  30,  fourtieth;  31,  forty  thousand;  32,  forty  hundred;  33,  forty 
hundred  thousand;  34,  fifth;  35,  five  hundred;  36,  five  thousand;  37, 
fifteenth;  38,  fifteen  hundred;  39,  fiftieth;' 40,  fifty  thousand;  41,  sixth;  42, 
sixteenth;  43,  sixteen  thousand;  44,  sixtieth;  45,  seventh;  46,  seventy-five; 
47,  fifty-five;  48,  seventeenth;  49,  seventeen  hundred;  50,  seventieth;  51, 
seventy  thousand;  52,  seven  thousand;  53,  eighth;  54,  eightieth;  55, 
eighteenth;  56,  ninth;  57,  908;  58,  980;  59,  918;  60,  919;  61,  nineteenth; 
62,  19,000;  63,  nine  hundred;  64,  ninetieth;  65,  tenth;  66,  eleventh;  67, 
twelfth;  68,  hundredth;  69,  hundred  thousand;  70,  805;  71,  508;  72,  430; 
73,  403;  74,  34,569;  75,  $4.59;  76,  £9.  3s.  6d.;  77,  684)5,917,320(8,651  1-19> 

5,472 

80,     79,685  *,453 

•    1,423  4,104 
78,     246         79,     29,468 

359  15,379  239,055  3,492 

178  1,593,70  3,420 

31,864,0  


783  79,685  720 


113,381,755 

36       1 
36)- 

684      ]9 

81,  half;  82,  1-2;  83,  quarter;  84,  1-4;  85,  3-4;  86,  7-8;  87,  5-18;  88,  Box 
18;  89,  Box  80;  90,  Drawer  A;  91,  H.  V.  Pike;  92,  Charles  G.  R.  Peck;  93, 
Sir  Robert  Beale;  94,  J.  George  Boyd,  Esq.;  95,  Mr.  Henry  X.  Train;  96, 
Alexander  S.  Pierce;  97,  Messrs.  B.  &  F.  Z.  Price;  98,  Miss  Katie  I. 
Coombs;  99,  Misses  Sarah  and  Katie  Y.  Marr;  100,  Mrs.  Louisa  N.  Tott; 
101,  Anthony  T.  W.  Shirley;  102,  Island  of  Cuba;  103,  Commodore  Coots; 
104,  Ada  O.  L.  Dawn;  105,  Teresa  M.  Q.  Chawter;  106,  Maria  E.  C.  Howe; 
107,  Sophia  P.  Howe;  108,  Isaac  D.  Hugg;  109,  Frank  K.  Stowe;  no,  Ger- 
trude U.  Hoover;  in,  command;  112,  commend;  113,  compassion;  114, 
concurrent;  115,  confession;  116,  confuse;  117,  confusion;  118,  cognate; 
119,  accommodate;  120,  accommodation;  121,  accompany;  122,  concomi- 
tant; 123,  decompose;  124,  misconstrue;  125,  unaccompanied;  126,  com- 
mence; 127,  commenced;  128,  commences;  129,  complete;  130,  comple- 
tion; 131,  consider;  132,  consideration;  133,  considerate;  134,  constituent; 
135,  constitute;  136,  constitution;  137,  recognize;  138,  recognition; 
139,  recommend;  140,  recommendation;  141,  contradict;  142,  contribute; 
143,  contribution;  144,  controvert;  145,  counteract;  146,  counterfeit; 
147,  circumflex;  148,  circumjacent;  149,  circumstance;  150,  circum- 
stances; 151,  self-evident;  152,  self-esteem;  153,  selfish;  154,  forfeit; 


^ 


155,  forswear;  156,  forewarned;  157,  in  (the)  experience;  158,  inexperie;.  td; 
159,  instrumental;  1 60,  insult;  161,  in  seeming;  162,  in  as  many  as  possible; 
163,  unseemly;  164,  unselfish;  165,  unstrung;  166,  unscrew;  167,  entertain; 
168,  interest;  169,  introduce;  170,  intelligent;  171,  intellectual;  172,  under- 
stand; 173,  understood;  174,  magnesia;  175,  magnify;  176,  magnificence; 
177,  magnanimous;  178,  regard;  179,  regret;  180,  nobly;  181,  feeble;  182, 
feebleness;  183,  unstability;  184,  whatever;  185,  whoever;  186,  therefor-e; 
187,  wherefore;  188,  careful;  189,  carefulness;  190,  doubtful;  191,  faithful- 
ness; 192,  powerful;  193,  truthful-ly;  194,  useful;  195,  usefulness;  196, 
beginning;  197,  doing;  198,  seeing;  199,  racings;  200,  musings;  201,  know- 
ingly; 202,  owing;  203,  building;  204,  spreadings;  205,  everlasting;  206, 
everlasting  life;  207,  everlasting  love;  208,  supplement;  209,  fundamental; 
210,  instrumentality;  211,  himself;  212,  myself;  213,  itself;  214,  yourself; 
215,  gladsomeness;  216,  yourselves;  217,  themselves;  218,  of  ourselves;  219, 
to  ourselves;  220,  by  ourselves;  221,  carelessness;  222,  thoughtlessness;  223, 
courtship;  224,  friendship;  225,  wheresoever;  226,  whensoever;  227,  whoso- 
ever; 228,  whosesoever;  229,  fellowship;  230,  dated;  231,  dreaded;  232, 
freighted;  233,  voted;  234,  plentitude;  235,  not  to  call;  236,  right  to  the 
last;  237,  sensitive  to  the  touch;  238,  habits  of  birds;  239,  efforts  of 
the  press;  240,  Kingdom  of  Heaven;  241,  Kingdom  of  Christ;  242,  Church 
of  Christ;  243,  Throne  of  Grace;  244,  Son  of  God;  245,  Word  of  God;  246, 
Works  of  God;  247,  choice  of  the  people;  248,  member  of  the  press;  249, 
members  of  the  Legislature;  250,  members  of  Congress;  251,  members  of 
Parliament;  252,  not  to  be;  253,  not  to  have  been;  254,  little  by  little; 
255,  insult  upon  insult;  256,  in  the  world;  257,  on  account  of  the  fact;  258,  on 
the  one  hand;  259,  on  the  other  hand;  260,  on  either  hand;  261,  on  the 
contrary;  262,  more  or  less;  263,  every  one  of  us;  264,  off  and  on;  265, 
again  and  again;  266,  around  and  around;  267,  hand  in  hand;  268,  under- 
hand; 269,  behind-hand;  270,  some  one  or  other;  271,  somehow  or  other; 
272,  as  well  as;  273,  as  good  as;  274,  as  great  as;  275,  as  soon  as;  276,  as 
soon  as  possible;  277,  as  a  matter  of  course;  278,  as  a  matter  of  fact;  279, 
the  best  and  worst;  280,  the  first  and  second;  281,  the  first  and  last;  282,  the 
first  and  least;  283,  the  first  thing;  284,  the  first  subject;  285,  the  first  position; 
286,  in  the  first  place;  287,  in  the  second  place;  288,  in  the  third  place; 
289,  in  the  next  place;  290,  in  the  last  place;  291,  in  the  least  place;  292, 
at  least;  293,  at  last;  294,  utilized;  295,  has  met;  296,  at  first;  297,  at 
length;  298,  at  the  rate  of;  299,  at  any  rate;  300,  at  all  times;  301,  at  all 
events;  302,  at  the  same  time;  303,  at  the  present  time;  304,  between  them; 
305,  although;  306,  could  not;  307,  A  creature  of  God;  308,  Gentlemen 
throughout;  309,  To-night  -the  beauty  of  that  heavenly  body  will  be 
particularly  noticeable;  310,  According  to  custom  the  world  means  the 
people;  311,  The  establishment  is  not  in  the  nature  of  a  corporation;  312, 
An  accurate  use  of  words  is  indispensable  to  the  orator;  313,  Begin  no  new 
movement  without  quite  a  good  deal  of  proper  thought;  314,  The  foundation 
(the  stone-work)  under  the  house  was  poor — its  consequent  fall  was  about 
certain;  315,  Opportunities  must  be  seized  immediately,  if  at  all— after  they 
pass,  it  is  too  late;  316,  The  plaintiff  gave  subsequent  testimony  which  aston- 
ished the  hundred  opposing  witnesses;  317,  The  agent  is  certainly  a  gentle- 
man— I  cannot  account  for  his  action  toward  you  to-night;  318,  They  were 
onte  the  conquerors  of  the  East — they  were  once  the  keepers  of  the  Shekinah. 


Copyright  1891,  by  Curtis  Haven. 

ooi-.i_,EOTioisr  nsro.  i. 

OF  HAVEN'S  SELECTED  LISTS  OF 

ACTUAL        BUSINESS        LKTTKRS. 

Containing  all  the  Ordinary  Words,  Terms  and  Phrases  Occurring  in    Actual    Busi- 
ness, Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  Practice,  with 
Words  Counted  and  Numbered 
for  Timing  Speed. 

1OO  Letters— Price  10  Cents. 

[EXPLANATION.— Every  twenty-five  words  are  marked  (25),  (50)  or  (75)  and 
every  hundred  words  are  shown  by  black  figures,  (1),  (2),  (3)  etc.,  representing  100, 
200,  300,  etc.,  respectively.  Such  figures  are  not  to  be  read  as  part  of  the  letters.] 

1.  Dear  Sir:  We  cannot  be  guided  by  what  those  houses  maybe  willing  to  do,  as  it 
was   our  option  to   have  you  ship  the  (25)  goods  to  whoever  we  desired,  and  as  said 
once  before,  we  wrote  you  that  we  would  prefer  you  to  turn  them  over  to  someone 
else.  (50)     We  have  done  the  very  best  we  could  for  you  and  really  see  no  occasion 
for  any  reduction,  or  any  ill  feeling  on  your  part.  (75) 

2.  Gentlemen:  We  still  feel  that  it  would  benefit  your  goods  to  put  them  on  the 
rebate  plan  in  Canada.     We  have  spoken  to  two  or  (1)  three  dealers,  and  find  theii 
views  coincide  with  ours  on  this  point.     Our  idea  is  if  jou  proposed  it,  all  would  at 
once  cordially  fall  [25]  in  line.     Messrs.  H.M.  Sweitzerte  Co.  have  not  had  the  slight- 
est  hitch,  since  they  began  it,  that  we    have  heard  of,  and  we  [50]  sell  large  lots  of 
goods  with  perfect  satisfaction,  and    no  trouble  as  to  prices. 

3.  Gents:  We  are  in  receipt  of  a  bill  Oct.  9th,  for  (75) goods  amounting  to  $30.00. 
We    are    informed  that  these  goods  were  ordered  by  the  \V right  Mercantile  Co.  of 
your  agent  here  and  there  is  (2)  no  excuse  whatever  for  your  charging  them  to  us. 
The  Wright  Mercantile  Co.  is  a  sub-let  department  in  our  store  and  is  entirely  re- 
sponsible for  (25)  goods  sold  to  them,  but  it  is  of  course  a  great  deal  of  trouble  and 
confusion   to  have  our  accounts  mixed  up  wi^h  theirs  and  (50)  we  will  not  permit  it 
under  any  circumstances.     Very  respectfully, 

4.  Gents:  Enclosed  herewith  we  send  you  the  bill  of  cloaks  delivered  to  your  de- 
partment in  (75)  our  store  and  charged  to  W.  P.&  Co.   We  do  not  see  what  necessity 
there  is  for  doing   any  thing  of  this  kind,  and,  (3)  on  the  other  hand,  it  causes  con- 
fu>ion  in  our  office.     We  have  nothing  to  do  with  this  maker  and  we  trust  you  will 
omit  sending  (25)  us  bills  of  this  sort  hereafter  or  charging  goods  belonging  to  your 
department  in  the  store,  or  buying  goods  in  our  name  to  be  delivered  (50)  to  your 
department.    Respectfully, 

5.  Dear  Sir:  We  have  your  favor  of  the  tenth  hist.,  referring  to  an  order  given 
vou   for  business   cards  of   our  (75)   company,  by  a  man  purporting  to  be  our  agent 
under  the  real  or  assumed  name  of  Cook,  on  receipt  of  which  we  wired  you   his  (4) 
description  and  have  just  a  reply.     We  are  unable  to  identify  the  man  from    the  de- 
scription you  have  kindly  given,  but  from  his  youth  we  (25)  would  judge  him  to  be  a 
new  adventurer  in  the  field,  who  is  getting  up  his  stationery  and  making  other  pre- 
parations to  become  a  professional  (50)  swindler  under  the  guise  of  a  traveling  man 
We  hope  soon  to  be  advised  of  his  detection  and  arrest.     Yours  very  truly, 

6.  Dear  Sir:  In  [75]  order  for  us  to  check  up  the  articles  you  wrote  and  which  are 
unpaid  for,  we  must  receive  from  you  a  list  of  the  titles  [5]  of  the  articles  in  question. 
Please  furnish  us  with  same  promptly  and  oblige. 

7.  Dear  Sir:     We  certainly  must  request  you  to   send  at   once  for  (25)   the  note 
returned  to  vou.     Monev  is  very  tight  now  and  we  must   make  collections.     Please 
attend  to  this  at  once  and  oblige. 

8.  Dear  Sir:     (50)  I  send  you  by  return  mail  a  catalogue.     The  only  young  stla- 


Copyright  1891,  by  Curtis  Haven. 


IsTO.    1 

OF  HAVEN'S  SELECTIONS  OF 

ACTUAL    -     COURT         TESTIMONY, 

Containing  the  Ordinary  Words,  Terms  and  Phrases  used  in  General  Court  Trials 
Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  Practice,  with  Words 
Counted  and  Numbered  for  timing  speed. 

1O,000  Words-Price  10  Cents. 

[EXPLANATION. — In  this  printed  court  testimony  only  such  omissions  and 
changes  have  been  made  as  were  considered  necessary  to  disguise  the  identity  of  the 
parties  to  the  suit.  Each  25  words  are  numbered  [25],  [50]  and  [75];  every  hundred 
words  being  indicated  by  the  black  figures  [1],  [J3],  [3],  etc.  Such  figures  are  not  to 
be  considered  as  any  part  of  the  reading  matter.] 


MORNING  SESSION. 

B.  C.  STARR,  a  witness  for  tire  prosecu- 
tion, being  duly  sworn,  testified  as 
follows: 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  U.  S.  Attorney  Winn:  Mr.  Starr' 
[25]  what  is  your  business?  A.  I  am  an 
employe  of  Clarence  Carter. 

Q.  Do  you  know  S.  F.  Markham?  A. 
I  do. 

Q.  What  was  his  business  at  that  [50] 
time?  A.  He  was  also  employed  by 
Mr.  Carter. 

Q.  Do  you  know  Mr.  Smith,  the  assist- 
ant general  freight  agent  of  the  Minne- 
sota Railroad?  A.  I  do. 

Q.  And  [75]  Mr.  Winters,  who  was 
the  Carmine  line  agent?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  was  his  official  title?  A. 
Agent  of  the  Carmine  Line  and  Minne- 
nesota  Railroad. 

Q.  And  Mr.  [1]  Norton,  did  you  know 
him?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.     And  Mr.  Green?     A.     Yes  sir. 

The  Court.  Whose  employ  was  Nor- 
ton in?  A.  He  was  local  agent  of  the 
[25[  Minnesota  Railroad. 

Mr. Winn:  What  was  Green's  position? 
A.  Contracting  agent  of  the  Minnesota 
Railroad. 

Q.  What  was  Carter's  business?  A. 
Grain  business. 

Q.  Well,  in  what  way?  What  ]5o] 
was  he  doing  with  grain?  A.  He  was  a 
shipper  of  grain. 

Q.  Did  he  own  any  elevators  or 
operate  any?  A.  Yes,  sir. 


Q.  What  elevators?  A.  He  was  [75] 
manager  of  the  St.  Paul  elevator. 

Q.  Where  is  that  elevator  located? 
A.  Near  Corwith,  on  the  St.  Paul  road 

Q.  Where  is  that?  A.  I  could  not 
say  [2]  exactly  where  it  is.  It  is  about 
five  miles  out  of  Chicago. 

Q.  Will  you  state  to  the  court 
whether  at  any  time  along  in  the  [25] 
fall  of  iS8S  you  had  any  conversation 
with  Smith  or  any  of  the  other  defend- 
ants in  this  case — Mr.  Winters  or  Mr. 
Norton  [50] — respecting  the  shipping  of 
grain  belonging  to  Carter  from  New 
York?  A.  Yes,  sir;  I  did. 

Q,  Just  tell  the  jury  in  yo*ur  own 
way  briefly,  the  [75]  history  of  that 
whole  conversation  or  arrangement, 
whatever  it  was  you  had  with  these  men 
or  any  of  them?  A.  The  arrangement 
that  we  had  with  [3]  Mr.  Smith,  who  was 
assistant  general  freight  agent  of  the  Min- 
nesota Railroad,  was  simply  to  haul  grain 
from  Chicago  on  what  would  be  their  pro- 
portion [25]  of  the  through  rate. 

Q.  On  what?  A.  On  th^ir  propor- 
tion of  the  through  rate. 

Q.  Through  rate  from  where?  A. 
Their  proportion — 

Q.  Well,  through  rate  from  where? 
A.  From  [50]  New  York — from  no  per 
cent,  points. 

The  Court:  From  what  points*  A. 
Anv  Eastern  point  that  their  line  made. 

Mr.  Wrinn:  At  their  proportion  [75]  of 
the  through  rates  from  no  per  cent, 
points?  A.  Yes,  sir. 
|l  Q.  What  grain  did  that  refer  to — grain 
originating  where?  A.  Grain  originat- 
ing in  i.'hicago  [4] — in  elevators,  on 


prise  deserves:' 

I  trust  their  report  [75]  will  receive  your  most  careful  attention,  and  that  their 
recommendation  will  command  the  substantial  approval  which  .they  so  eminently 
merit,  because  of  their  untiring  devotion  [t)B]  to  the  interests  of  the  cause. 

But,  gentlemen,  ignoring  the  consideration  of  self-interest,  are  we  not  bound  in 
honor  to  support  this  company,  whose  [25]  officers  will  to-day  clearly  demonstrate  to 
you  not  only  that  they  have  done  a  successful  business,  but  that  they  are  worthy  of  your 
unreserved  confidence  [50J  and  cordial  co-operation.  I  do  not  hesitate  to  say  that  I 
should  esteem  it  a  stain  upon  our  good  name  should  we  fail  heartily  to  [75]  stand  by 
this  Child  of  our  Association. 

The  favorable  decision  rendered  by  Judge  Hammond,  in  the  United  States  Circuit 
Court  in  Western  Tennessee,  in  April  [O7]  last,  after  a  third  trial,  in  the  case  of  the 
Mansfield  Drug  Company  vs.  three  eastern  companies,  is  of  vital  interest  to  the  entire 
drug  [25]  trade  of  the  country,  involving  as  it  did,  the  hitherto  untried  issue  of  the 
liability  of  insurance  companies  for  proprietary  or  compounded  medicines  prepared 
by  [50]  druggists.  The  trade  is  certainly  under  no  small  obligations  to  INI 
Mansfield  &  Co.  for  their  tireless  efforts  in  bringing  the  question  to  a  final  [75]  test, 
and  it  is  sincerely  hoped  that  the  decision  will  prove  to  the  insurance  companies  at 
once  a  rebuke  and  a  lesson.  It  is  due  [4)8]  to  the  Druggists'  Mutual  Insurance 
Company  to  say,  that  it  paid  its  loss  promptly  in  this  case  as  in  every  other. 

The  report  of  the  [25]  Committee  on  Proprietary  Goods,  always  one  of  the  most 
important,  will  naturally  elicit  your  closest  attention.  Even  the  man  who  was  once 
arbiter  of  the  [50]  destines  of  Europe,  the  great  Napoleon  himself,  met  his  Waterloo: 
but  defeat  is  a  word  unknown  in  the  vocabulary  of  the  able  and  vigilant  chairman  [75] 
of  that  Committee,  to  whose  unwearied  energy  we  may  attribute  the  comparatively 
few  complaints  of  violation  of  the  contract  plan.  Sincere  gratitude  is  also  due  [Oi)l 
to  the  proprietors  who  have  so  faithfully  stood  by  the  committee,  aiding  it  by  both 
word  and  work.  The  few  leading  manufacturers  who  are  still  [25]  without  the  fold 
we  hope  will  yet  see  the  fairness  of  the  plan,  and  I  respectfully  recommend  the  in- 
coming committee  to  persevere  in  the  effort  [50]  to  secure  the  co-operation  of  the  few 
recalcitrants  not  now  committed  to  the  contract  plan — a  system  which,  while-  it 
scarcely  affords  even  a  fair  [75]  profit  for  handling  their  goods,  considering  the  great 
expense  in  conducting  the  business,  not  only  affords  a  just  protection  to  the  manu- 
facturer, but  at  the  [1OO]  same  time  results  in  good  alike  to  the  consumer  and  the 
dealer.— (10,012  words.) 

fig^The  foregoing  10,000  words  of  convention  report  represent  a  supplement  to 
Haven's  Complete  Manual  of  Typewriting.     See  advertisement  below. 


1  s\r\    MISCELLANEOUS    i    C"TT CDC  1  f\ 

II    II    1    ACTUAL  BUSINESS    L.  fc.    I       I     CL  M  O     I  I    I 

I   Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted    I 
•    and  numbered  for  timing  speed,  like  above  convention  report,  will.be    I 
I   V/    \y    sent  by  C.  HAVEN.  Room  17,  Tribune  Bldg..  Chicago.  111.,  on  receipt  of   1    \*/ 


C. 


JA  f\f\f\       WORDS    OF    ACTUAL    COURT 

1U,UUU         TESTIMONY  m 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for  I      Ip 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  ("'.  HAVEN.  Tribune  Building,  Chicago,  Illinois,  on  receipt  of  I  V/l)i 

/\  I       I  *T"  l_|  CT"         /V   P^  f""^  V/ F~~       It-tiers,  testimony  and  convention  prac- 

*»  ^™  ~—  •  * •  ^—  ^^^^J\*^  >r  L-^_  tice.  and  much  more,  together  with  a 
complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching  300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will 
be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete  Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  tin-  NVw 
York  Herttld,  Philadelphia  F/'e,«s.  Bo-ton  Herald,  and  other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies. 
and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "The  only  complete  work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind  —  epistolary. 
society,  legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial— accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descrip- 
tive of  each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  etc., 
most  of  the  points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert  operators. 
Whether  you  are  teacher,  expert,  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting— no  matter  what  make  of 
machine  you  favor— you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  a  copy. 

Price.— $2.00  to  the  public  -but  $1.33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  Chicago.  111. 


ITEMS. 

Queen  Victoria  is  the  latest  convert  to  type- 
writing. She  is  so  pleased  with  this  work 
that  nowadays  all  orders,  lists  of  guests,  etc., 
in  connection  with  the  royal  household  are 
written  by  one. 


SURE  RECIPE. 

He  was  warned  against  the  woman — 
She  was  warned  against  the  man, 

And,  ef  that  won't  make  a  weddin', 
Wy,  they's  nothin'  else  that  can. 

Jainrx  W/iitfomb  Biley . 


BENEFIT  OF  BENEFIT  COMPANIES. 

"He  has  failed,  has  he?  Extravagant  liv- 
ing, I  suppose?" 

"  No ;  you  see  he  belonged  to  a  number  of 
benefit  organizations  and  the  assessments 
broke  him." — New  York  Press. 


New   or  Second    hand  of    all  makes, 


bought,  sold,  exchanged  and  repaired. 
Also  rented  anywhere  in  the  country. 
Largest  Stock  in  America.  Not  run  by 
a  Typewriter  Manufacturer.  Send  for 
New  Illustrated  Catalogue  describing  all 
Machines.  GERBER'S  SUPPLIES. 

NATIONAL  TYPEWRITER  EXCHANGE 

200  LaSalle  Street, 
CHICAGO. 


ADVERTISING. 


IF  you  wish  to  advertise  anything  anywhere  at 
any  time  write  to  GEO.  P.  KOWELL  &  CO., 
No.  10  Spruce  St.,  Mew  York. 

EVERY  one  in  need  of  information  on  the 
subject  of  advertising  will  do  well  to  obtain 
a  copy  of  "Book  for  Advertisers,"  368  pages,  price 
one  dollar.  Mailed,  postage  paid,  on  receipt  of 
price.  Contains  a  careful  compilation  from  the 
American  Newspaper  Directory  of  all  the  best 
papers  and  class  journals;  gives  the  circulation 
rating  of  every  one,  and  a  good  deal  of  informa- 
tion about  rates  and  other  matters  pertaining  to 
the  business  of  advertising.  Address  KO  WELL'S 
ADVERTISING  BUKEAU,  10  Spruce  St.,  N.  Y. 


NORTHWESTERN    AGENTS, 

185  LI  8KLLE  8T,,  GHIGIGO, 

Aiention  this    advertisement 


TTERS 


MISC  ELLANEOUS 
ACTUAL,    BUSINESS 

Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and 
numbered  for  timing  speed,  will  be  sent  to  any  address  by  C.  HAVEN, 
TRIBUNE  BUILDING,  CHICAGO.  ILLIXOIS,  on  receipt  of 

WORDS    OF   ACTUAL   COURT 

TESTIMONY 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


I 


lOc. 


WORDS    OF    ACTUAL    CONVENTION 

PROCEEDINGS 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 

timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 

MII  TLJIT  AD  f^  \/  C"  Letters,  testimony  and  convention  practice,  and  much  more, 
M  LL.  inc.  MDVJVC.  together  with  a  complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching 
300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will  be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete 
Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadelphia  Press,  Boston  Herald,  and 
other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "The  only  complete 
work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind — epistolary,  society, 
legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial—  accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descriptive  of 
each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  etc.,  most  of  the 
points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert  operators.  Whether  you  are 
teacher,  expert,  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting— no  matter  what  make  of  machine  you  favor, 
you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  a  copy. 

Price.—  S2.00  to  the  public— but  §1.33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


HAVEN'S    POPULAR    MOCK    LETTERS. 


TYPEWRITER  ERASER  FREE.     Send  your  name  and  address  at  once. 


.  . 

GAFFE Y'S  SUPPLY  OFFICE.  New  Haven,  Conn 


(ist  day.)  MONDAY,  JANUARY  2d,  1870. 

Messrs.  Wilson  Bros.,  Burksville,  Ala. 

GENTLEMEN: — Please  send    the  statement  of   unpaid   bills  which   you 
have  against  us  up  to  date,  and  greatly  oblige. 

Respectfully  yours. 

Messrs.  Dennison  6°  Lawrence,  Dovepark,  Clark  Co.,  Ark. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  return  bill  dated  February  28,  amount  $8.75. 

We  presume  that  these  goods  were  bought   by  the   Wiley    Mercantile 
Co.;  they  were  never  ordered  by  us. 

(2nd  day.)  TUESDAY,  FEBRUARY  ist,  1871. 


Mr.  J.  B.  Black,  410  S.  i$tA  St.,  Oakland,  Cal. 

DEAR  SIR: — We  have  received  bill  of  $24.00  for  advertising  in  Oakland 
Telegraph,  and  presuming  it  tojpe  all  right,  have  paid  it. 

Please  let  me  know  by  return  mail,  if  it  be  correct. 

St.  Joseph's  Savings  Bank,  Denver,  Colo. 

GENTLEMEN: — The  enclosed  bank  book  and  documents  were  picked  up 
in  our  store  to-day.  Will  you  please  see  that  they  are  returned  to  the 
owners,  as  we  do  not  know  where  to  address  them? 

Very  truly  yours. 

(3rd  day.)  WEDNESDAY,  MARCH  3rd,  1872. 

Messrs.  T.  Lewis  &°  Son,  Box  1213,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  enclose  letter  from  party  in  New  Sharon.  We  have 
sent  him  catalogue  and  referred  him  to  you  for  prices  and  terms. 

Hoping  that  you  may  be  able  to  secure  his  custom,  we  remain, 

Yours  truly. 

Mrs.  Christine  Martin,  Rockland,  Del. 

DEAR  MADAM: — We  are.  in  receipt  of  notice  from  the  American 
Express  Co.,  stating  that  the  package  sent  you  of  laces  and  embroideries  is 
at  their  office  in  your  town  unclaimed. 

Please  oblige  us  by  calling  on  them  for  same. 

(4th  day.)  THURSDAY,  MARCH  4th,  1873. 

Messrs.  Wilson  Bedloe  6°  Son,  Freepert,  Fla. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  received  several  orders  from  local  customers 
for  you.  What  are  your  best  discounts? 

Please  notify  us  and  we  may  give  you  a  trial  order  and  pei'  ps  do 
considerable  business  with  you  if  prices  are  right. 

The  H.  B.  Howe  Co.,  Savannah,  Ga. 

GENTLEMEN: — Goods  ordered  on  the  first  instant  have  been  eceived, 
and  must  say  that  we  are  very  much  surprised  and  disappointed  in  them. 
The  stock  and  finish  is  very  poor  and  we  cannot  use  them  at  ai-y  price. 
They  are  nothing  like  samples  shown  us.  What  shall  we  do  with  them? 


-v 


)^  ..^...1. .>/..!. Jr. 


..TO 


V 


;?.._  J 


The  balance  of  these  letters,  Shorthand  and  Key,  12  more  pages,  will  be  sent  to 
address  on  receipt  of  10  cents.     Address  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  Chicago. 


(5th  day.)  FRIDAY,  APRIL  sth,  1874. 

Messrs.  Bissett  &  Co.,  25  Nattan  St.,  Chicago,  III. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  3d  instant,  and  note  con- 
tents. We  sent  the  seventeen  cases  of  goods  to  the  Indianapolis  parties  as 
directed,  and  forwarded  them  also  the  bill  of  lading. 

They  have  undoubtedly  received  them  before  this. 

Mr.  A.  R.  Johnson,  Memphis  >  Ind. 

DEAR  SIR: — We  have  your  favor  of  the  4th  instant,  ordering  shade 
rollers,  and  have  shipped  same  to-day. 

We  cannot  send  with  them  the  full  assortment  of  brackets  named,  as 
some  of  the  sizes  are  out  of  stock,  but  we  will  have  them  in  a  few  days,  and 
will  forward  them  to  you  then.  Yours  truly.' 

(6th  day.)  SATURDAY,  APRIL  6th,  1875. 

Messrs.  Hanford  6°  Sons,  Limited,  Warerly,  Iowa. 

GENTLEMEN: — Your  favor  of  f'.e  5th  instant,  and  also  sample  brush  at 
hand.  The  brush  apparently  is  well  made,  and  we  shall  be  pleased  to  try 
same.  While  your  price  is  above  what  we  are  paying,  yet  it  is  possible  the 
goods  are  a  little  better.  If  we  so  conclude,  we  may  at  an  early  date  try  a 
sample  gross  of  your  goods.. 

Martin  H.  Green,  Esq.,  Garnett,  Kas. 

DEAR  SIR: — Your  note  for  $100,  due  March  26th,  has  been  sent  to  the 
First  National  Bank  for  collection,  and  returned  endorsed,  "  No  funds." 
We  regret  this  very  much  as  we  need  the  money,  and  shall  be  pleased  to 
have  some  explanation  of  the  reason  you  have  in  not  paying  this  note.  We 
shall  expect  remittance  by  return  mail.  Respectfully. 

(7th  day.)  MONDAY,  MAY  roth,  1876. 

Messrs.  Planchett  6°  Nephew,  4221  z^th  St.,  Louisville,  Ky. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  received  your  letter  in  which  you  state  that 
hereafter  all  of  our  bills  will  be  post-dated  sixty  days.  We  were  not  in- 
formed of  this  fact  by  our  buyer  until  yesterday,  after  we  had  sent  you 
settlement. 

We  are  obliged  to  you  for  calling  our  attention  to  this  fact,  and  here- 
after shall  make  our  settlements  accordingly. 

The  Farwell-P arsons  Co.,  P.  O.  Drawer  391,  New  Orleans,  La. 

GENTLEMEN: — Answering  your  favor  of  the  pth  instant,  we  beg  to 
reassert  that  the  goods  sent  us  were  not  up  to  the  standard,  and  we  cannot 
use  them.  We  do  not  wish  a  discount  on  price,  for  the  goods  are  not 
what  we  want.  We  want  the  goods  we  ordered  and  none  others.  As  you 
gave  us  no  instruction  what  to  do  with  these,  we  have  returned  them  by 
freight  yesterday.  Very  truly. 


BELIEF  FOR  THE  WEARY  TYPEWRITER. 

After  many  years  of  experiment  and  appreciation  of  the  defects  of  all 
previous  writing  machines  there  has  been  at  last  placed  upon  the  market 
one  which  is  free  from  every  objection  applicable  to  other  machines;  one 
which  it  is  a  pleasure  to  operate;  which  does  the  best  of  work;  which  has  a 
touch,  the  ease  and  softness  of  which  is  unapproachable  and  therefore  the 
speed  unlimited;  such  machine  being  the  SMITH  PREMIER,  the  monarch  of 
all  typewriting  instruments  at  the  present  day,  and  destined  to  be  the 
standard  of  the  future  as  it  is  to-day  the  best  in  the  market. 

The  history  of  the  SMITH  PREMIER  TYPEWRITER,  while  a  brief  one,  has 
been  replete  with  successes  from  the  day  it  was  first  introduced.  The 
best  testimony  that  can  be  given  in  favor  of  any  typewriting  machine  is 
that  which  has  practically  no  interest  in  the  success  of  any  particular  ma- 
chine and  which  emanates  from  those  who  have  never  practiced  upon  any. 

Lest  this  last  claim  be  disputed,  let  us  state  that  the  person  who  by 
years  of  practice  has  become  very  familiar  with  the  touch  and  the  plan  of 
using  a  certain  machine  grows  so  accustomed  to  it  that  it  is  apt  to  blind  his 
or  her  eyes  to  the  advantage  of  another  machine,  just  as  persons  who  having 
for  years  held  their  pen  in  a  cramped  position  cannot  see  the  benefit  of  the 
plan  taught  by  the  best  teachers  of  penmanship.  There  seems  to  be  a 
growth  of  the  hand  to  certain  ways  of  doing  certain  things,  and  as  it  is  diffi- 
cult for  a  penman  using  the  cramped  style  of  holding  the  pen  to  change  to 
the  easy  flowing  style,  so  it  is  difficult  for  a  person  familiar  with  an  ancient 
typewriter  to  always  see  the  advantages  of  a  new  one,  but  place  a  number 
of  students,  who  are  unfamiliar  with  any  machine,  at  work  upon  a  number 
of  different  kinds,  allowing  them  to  try  them  all  and  adopt  that  which  they 
may  naturally  be  led  to  prefer,  and  in  such  a  test  the  machine  which  the 
majority  will  select  will  assuredly  be  the  most  convenient,  easiest  operated, 
and  which  does  the  most  perfect  work,  because  beginners,  if  of  mature  age, 
with  their  vision  not  accustomed  to  looking  at  bad  typewriting,  will  criticize 
more  thoroughly  than  one  who  has  become  blind  to  the  defects  of  poor 
typewriting,  therefore  beginners  will  pick  out  naturally  the  machine  which 
does  the  best  work  and  is  the  easiest  to  operate,  the  most  convenient  to 
adjust,  in  fact  the  one  which  in  every  way  would  be  the  best.  Their  judg- 
ment would  be  unprejudiced,  since  in  the  majority  of  cases  they  would  not 
know  which  machine  would  do  them  the  most  good.  In  such  tests  a&  these 
made  in  business  colleges,  notably  the  Underhill  College  at  Rochester,  N.  Y., 
the  Bryant  &  Stratton  College,  at  Buffalo,  and  other  institutions  throughout 
the  country,  where  the  students  have  had  an  opportunity  to  use  the  other 
machines  if  they  desired  to,  they  have  invariably  preferred  the  SMITH 
PREMIER  TYPEWRITER,  both  for  the  kind  of  work,  ease  of  touch  and  other 
particulars  mentioned,  and  when  we  add  to  these  evidences  the  fact  that 
even  experts  on  other  machines  have,  after  investigation,  stated  their  belief 
that  the  SMITH  PREMIER  was  far  in  advance  of  any  other  on  the  market  and 
twenty  years  ahead  of  its  time,  we  must  naturally  conclude  that  this  com- 
bined evidence  means  a  great  deal.  It  is  a  fact  that  the  people  who  are 
buying  new  machines  are  buying  more  SMITH  PREMIER  TYPEWRITERS  than  any 
other  in  the  market,  because,  as  compared  with  all  others,  it  is  just  what 
its  name  implies — the  PREMIER — the  best  in  every  way. 


Copyright  1891,  by  Curtis  Haven. 

ooi-.i-.EOTionsr  INTO.  i. 

OF  HAVEN'S  SELECTED  LISTS  OF 

ACTUAL        BUSINESS        LKXTKRS. 

Containing  all  the  Ordinary  Words,  Terms  and  Phrases  Occurring  in    Actual    Busi- 
ness, Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  Practice,  with 
Words  Counted  and  Numbered 
for  Timing  Speed. 

1OO  Letters— Price  10  Cents. 

^EXPLANATION. — Every  twenty-five  words  are  marked  (25),  (50)  or  (75)  and 
every  hundred  words  are  shown  by  black  figures,  (1),  (2),  (3)  etc.,  representing  10.0, 
200,  300,  etc.,  respectively.  Such  figures  are  not  to  be  read  as  part  of  the  letters.] 

1.  Dear  Sir:  We  cannot  be  guided  by  what  those  houses  maybe  willing  to  do,  as  it 
was   our  option  to   have  you  ship  the  (25)  goods  to  whoever  we  desired,  and  as  said 
once  before,  we  wrote  you  that  we  would  prefer  you  to  turn  them  over  to  someone 
else.  (50)     We  have  done  the  very  best  we  could  for  you  and.  really  see  no  occasion 
for  any  reduction,  or  any  ill  feeling  on  your  part.  (75) 

2.  Gentlemen:  We  still  feel  that  it  would  benefit  your  goods  to  put  them  on  the 
rebate  plan  in  Canada.     We  have  spoken  to  two  or  (1)  three  dealers,  and  find  their 
views  coincide  with  ours  on  this  point.     Our  idea  is  if  you  proposed  it,  all  would  at 
once  cordially  fall  [25]  in  line.     Messrs.  H.  M.  Sweitzer&  Co.  have  not  had  the  slight- 
est  hitch,  since  they  began  it,  that  we    have  heard  of,  and  we  [50]  sell  large  lots  of 
goods  with  perfect  satisfaction,  and    no  trouble  as  to  prices. 

3.  Gents:  We  are  in  receipt  of  a  bill  Oct.  pth,  for (75) goods  amounting  to  $30.00. 
We   are   informed  that  these  goods  were  ordered  by  the  Wright  Mercantile  Co.  of 
your  agent  here  and  there  is  (2)  no  excuse  whatever  for  your  charging  them  to  us. 
The  Wright  Mercantile  Co.  is  a  sub-let  department  in  our  store  and  is  entirely  re- 
sponsible for  (25)  goods  sold  to  them,  but  it  is  of  course  a  great  deal  of  trouble  and 
confusion   to  have  our  accounts  mixed  up  with  theirs  and  (50)  we  will  not  permit  it 
under  any  circumstances.     Very  respectfully, 

4.  Gents:  Enclosed  herewith  we  send  you  the  bill  of  cloaks  delivered  to  your  de- 
partment in  (75)  our  store  and  charged  to  W.  P.&  Co.   We  do  not  see  what  necessity 
there  is  for  doing   any  thing  of  this  kind,  and,  (3)  on  the  other  hand,  it  causes  con- 
fusion in  our  office.     We  have  nothing  to  do  with  this  maker  and  we  trust  you  will 
omit  sending  (25)  us  bills  of  this  sort  hereafter  or  charging  goods  belonging  to  your 
department  in  the  store,  or  buying  goods  in  our  name  to  be  delivered  (50)  to  your 
department.    Respectfully, 

5.  Dear  Sir:  We  have  your  favor  of  the  tenth  inst.,  referring  to  an  order  given 
vou  for  business   cards  of   our  (75)   company,  by  a  man  purporting  to  be  our  agent 
under  the  real  or  assumed  name  of  Cook,  on  receipt  of  which  we  wired  you  his  (4) 
description  and  have  just  a  reply.     We  are  unable  to  identify  the  man  from   the  de- 
scription you  have  kindly  given,  but  from  his  youth  we  (25)  would  judge  him  to  be  a 
new  adventurer  in  the  field,  who  is  getting  up  his  stationery  and  making  other  pre- 
parations to  become  a  professional  (50)  swindler  under  the  guise  of  a  traveling  man 
We  hope  soon  to  be  advised  of  his  detection  and  arrest.     Yours  very  truly, 

6.  Dear  Sir :  In  [75]  order  for  us  to  check  up  the  articles  you  wrote  and  which  are 
unpaid  for,  we  must  receive  from  you  a  list  of  the  titles  [5]  of  the  articles  in  question. 
Please  furnish  us  with  same  promptly  and  oblige. 

7.  Dear  Sir:     We  certainly  must  request  you  to   send  at  once  for  (25)  the  note 
returned  to  you.     Money  is  very  tight  now  and  we  must   make  collections.     Please 
attend  to  this  at  once  and  oblige. 

8.  Dear  Sir:     (50)  I  send  you  by  return  mail  a  catalogue.     The  only  young  stla- 


lion  I  have  for  sale  is   Coxwain:  he  is  verv  speed-promising  and  will  (75)    probably 
be  about  2:15  to  2/4.     He  is  compact  and  sinew v,  of  good  form   and    most  excellent 
quality,  bui't  and  gaited  just  [6]  like  his  sister,  Fanette,  and  doubtless  will  be  . 
as  she  is.     She  was  only  in  four  races  last  season,  getting  a   record  of   (25)  2: 
three-year-old,    an    authentic  trial  of    2:25,    and  will   lower  her  record  this  vear  if 
nothing  happens.  (50)     I  will  sell  him  for  $500.     Yours, 

9.  Dear  Sir:     We  beg  to  call  special  attention  to  our  department  for    the   distri- 
bution of    all  (75)  kinds   of   advertising  matter,  such   as  circulars,  pamphlets,  cards 
calendars,  samples  of  merchandise,  etc.    The  dissatisfactory  manner  in  which  a  great 
deal  of   this  work  [7]  has  been  done  in  the  city  has  prevented  many  firms  from  go- 
ing into  this  branch  of  advertising,  so  we  have  devised  a  system   of   shadowir.  [ 
with  the  employment  of  a  better  class  of   men  than   is  usual,  which  will,  we  think, 
give  satisfaction  to  our  patrons  and  ourselves.     If  vou  (50)  are  in  want  of  anv  distri- 
bution and  will  drop  us  a  line,  we  will  at  once  call  upon   vou  and  give    vou   anv  par- 
ticulars you  (75)  may  desire. 

10.  Gentlemen:     We  enclose,  with  thanks,  receipt  for  $786,  (seven    hundred  and 
eighty-six  dollars)  received  in  yours  of  the  iSth.    Did  you  intend  that  [8]  this  amount 
should  balance  particular  bills?     Please  let  us  know,  and  oblige.     Yours  truly, 

11.  Dear  Sir:  We  must  kno\v  what  you  are  going  to  do  (25)  about  the  Wallace 
contract.     We  shall  certainly  place  the  note  in  an  attorney's  hands  if  not  settled  at 
once.     Yours  truly, 

12.  Gentlemen:  Terms   on  vour  (50)  invoice  of  Oct.  30,  are  not  correct.     Thev 
should  be  as   of    Dec.  3ist,   7  per  cent,  off  30,  90  days  dating.    Please    correc' 
Yours  truly, 

13.  Gentlemen:  The  Railroad  Co.  notified  us  yesterday  that  the  goods  for  B.  M. 
Smith  &  Bro.  arrived  yesterdav.     The  cars  went  forward  on  (9)  Sept.  6.  so  the  goods 
have  arrived  too  late.     What  do  you  wish  us  to  do  with  them?     Please  instruct  by 
return  mail.     Yours  truly,  (25) 

14.  Gentlemen:  In  replv  to  your  favor  of  the  i5th,  the  information  given  vou  bv 
our  Mr.  Land  is  all  the  information  we  have.  Mr.  Silberman  (501  promised  him  to 
settle  at  fortv  cents,  and  to  do  so  immediatelv,  after  Mr.  Land's  visit  upon  him.     lie 
has  failed  to  make  good  his  (1$)  word,  so  that  is  all  we  can  say  about  it.     Yours 
trulv, 

15.  Dear  Sir:  in  order  to  give  our  customers  who  are  interested  in  the  (1O)  paint 
trade  an  opportunity  to  learn  what  others  have  done  with  these  goods,  we  invite 
druggists  who  deal  in    paints   to  write  us  short  letters  (25)  on  their  experience  in 
handling  paints  and  varnishes.     Each  letter  must  be  headed  "Experience  in  Paints." 
It  must  not  be  over  one  column  of  our  [50]  paper  in  length,  and  must  reach  us  before 
March   1st  next.     For  the  best  letter  giving  points  on  this  trade  we  will  pav   the 
writer  (75)  ten  dollars  ($10.00)  in  cash.     Let  us  hear  from  everv  one  who  handles 
these  goods.  We  want  good  common  sense  points  on  how  to  make  this  (11)  branch 
of  the  business  profitable  to  the  druggist.     Do  not  forget  to  mention  the  undesirable 
features. 

16.  Dear  Sir:  We  wrote  to  you  24th  inst.  (25)  for  your  payment  due  July   i9th. 
Please  let  us  have  the  amount. 

17.  Dear  Sir:  What  about  your  note  dated  November  21,  iSSS,  (50)  for  $79.80  due 
April  i,  1889?     Please  let  us  have  remittance. 

18.  Dear  Sir:  We  are  in  receipt  of  a.  (75)  postal-card  from  Mr.  C.  informing  us  that 
Mr.  F.  has  sold  all  the  boxes  in  which  the  pianos  were  sent  to  him.     Can  you  (12) 
account  for  this?     It  strikes  us  very  strangely  that  a  man  who  pretends  to  know 
anything    about    business    should      sell    what     does    not  belong  to  (25)  him.     We 
have  directed  Mr.  C.  to  get  boxes,  and  to  compel  Mr.  F.  to  pay  all  expenses.     Do 
you    know    anything    about   this?     Please    (50)  let  us  know.     Awaiting   reply,  we 
remain.  Yours  truly, 

19.  Dear  Sir :  You  will  oblige  us  very  much  by  remitting  balance  of  Spring  account. 
Respectfully  yours,  (75) 

20.  Dear  Sir:    The  disturbing  element  which  contributed  more  than  anv   thing 


else  towards  the  temporary  suspension  of  business  by  the  Swan  Down  Bed  Quilt 
Co.  (13)  has  been  removed,  and  there  is  now  no  reason  why  the  company  should  not 
resume  business  and  make  money.  I  am  sending  this  letter  to  (25)  the  stockholders 
in  order  to  call  a  meeting  for  Saturday  afternoon,  August  n,  at  the  office  of  the 
company,  at  2:30  p.m.  sharp,  (50)  to  ascertain  their  wishes  in  regard  to  the  advis- 
ability of  continuing.  Your  attendance  at  such  meeting  is  greatly  to  be  desired, 
and  if  you  cannot  (75)  come  in  person,  please  either  send  a  power  of  attorney  in  my 
name  for  me  to  act  for  you,  or  give  it  to  some  other  (14)  stockholder  who  is  to  come, 
that  he  may  vote  according  to  your  wishes.  If  neither  can  be  done  please  drop  us  a 
written  expression  (25)  of  your  opinion  of  the  course  for  the  company  to  take,  with 
any  suggestions  you  may  have  to  make,  so  that  the  letter  may  be  (50)  read  to  those 
present  and  they  may  be  better  able  to  act  advisedlv  The  prospects  are  good  for 
the  coming  season.  Very  truly  yours, 

21.  Dear  [75]  Sir:  Your  note  for  $402.57  (four  hundred  and  two  dollars  and  fifty- 
seven  cents)  was  due  yesterday.     You  are  no  doubt  aware  from  the  reports  in  (15) 
the  papers  how  very  tight  the  money  market  is  at  present,  and  we  really  would  con- 
sider it  a  great  favor  if  you  send  draft  for  (25)  the  above  amount.    Yours  very  truly, 

22.  Gentlemen:  We  have  yours  of  the  first,  with  draft  for  $34.41  (thirty-four  dol- 
lars and  forty-one  cents),  which  has  (50)  been   placed   to  your  credit.     We    enclose 
statement  of  your  account,  showing  a  balance  of  $7.44  (seven  dollars  and  fortv-four 
cents).     As  your  remittance  does  (75)  not  balance  account    as  you   stated,  no   doubt 
you  have  made  an  error.     Yours  trulv, 

23.  Dear  Sir:  As  counsel  for   the  James    White    Oil    Trust,  (16)  we  have   been 
instructed  by  the  trustees  to  make  the  following  report  to  your  committee.     They 
have  examined  the  affairs  of  the  organization  and   find  (25)  that  the   annual  report 
contains  a  correct  statement  of  its  affairs  up  to  August  the  first,  1889,  the  close    of 
the    fiscal   year.  (50).      In  the  conduct    of    the  business  it  has  been  the  custom  of 
the  executive  officers  to  utilize   the  Centennial  Oil    Co.,  N.   Y.,   as    a  (75)   finance 
company  through  the  medium  of  which  they  have  been  enabled   to  facilitate  their 
financial  arrangements.     The  President  and  Treasurer   of  the   Trust   for  the    (17) 
purpose  and  with  the  intent  as  they  state  of  maintaining  and  strengthening  its  credit 
have  deemed  it  necessary  or  desirable  to  support  the  price  of  (25;  the  certificates  in 
the  market  by  conducting  certain  Trust  certificate  account  in  the  name  and  for  the 
account  of  the  Centennial  Oil  Co.  and  without  (50)  the  knowledge  of  the  Trustees  of 
the    Trust  or  the  company.     These  accounts  are  now  closed  with  a  loss  to  the  com- 
pany of  five  millions  (75)  dollars.     Messrs.  Felton  and  Morrison  who  alone  as  officers 
inauugrated  and  managed  these  accounts  have  appeared  before  the  trustees  with 
their  repective  counsel  and  while  (18)  disclaiming  legal  responsibility  in  the  matter 
have  frankly  expressed  a  desire  to  make  a  substantial  contribution  towards  the  same 
aggregating  the  sum  of  two  million  (25)  dollars   of  which    amount   Mr    Felton  will 
contribute   one  hundred   and    fifty  thousand  and    Mr.  Morrison  the   balance.     The 
trustees  recommend  that  the    matter  be  (50)  adjusted  on  that  basis.     Respectfully, 

24.  Dear  Sir:  In  reply  to  your  favor  of  Dec.  ist.,  we  enclose  you   checks  charged 
to  your  account  Aug.  xoth  (75)  and  i6th  and  July  2nd.,  the  only  ones  for  the  amount 
mentioned  in  your  letter.     After  you  have  found  out  just  what  you  want  in  (19)   re- 
gard to  them  please  return  the  same  to  us. 

25.  Dear  Sir:    Having  received  notice  that  through  rates  on  oil  from  points  wes*- 
of  Chicago,  exclusive  (25)  of  Pacific  Coast  points,  heretofore  in  existence  exclusively 
are  to  be  withdrawn  Oct.  loth  from  Findlay  and  Lima  districts  and  Oct.  21  from  Cleve- 
land and  (50)  the  eastern  points,  we  the  undersigned  refiners,  hereby  protest  against 
the  withdrawal  of  these  through  rates  as  being  in  the  interest  of  another  large  shipper 
•(75)and  in  direct  violation  of  section  third  of  the  inter  state  commerce  law.  As  we  un- 
derstand that  through  rates  on  all  other  commodities  still  remain  (20)  in  force,  we  feel 
confident  that  the  withdrawal  of  the  through  rates  on  oil  is  in  the  interest  of  another 
large  refining  company,  and  give  (25)  you  notice  that  we  shall  hold  your  road  respon- 
sible for  any  damage  resulting  therefrom.     We  trust  that  you  will   see  that  this  is 
unlawful  and  (50)  hope  the   matter  will  be  favorably  considered   by    your   freight 
association. 

26.  Dear  Sir:  We  are  in  receipt  of  an  order  for  you  through  Mr.  Swartz.  [71;]  As 


the  Commercial  Agency  docs  not  give  you  a  favorable  report,  we  could  only  ship 
the  goods  on  the  condition  that  you  send  us  Chicago  (21)  Exchange  for  $21.09 
(twenty-one  dollars  and  nine  cents)  the  net  amount  of  the  bill.  Would  ship 
promptly  on  receipt  of  your  draft.  Yours  truly, 

27.  Gentlemen:  (25)  We  have  your  letter  of  the  i6th  and  note  contents.     Yester- 
day we  sent  you  remittance  for  several  of  your  bills  deducting  sixty  days  interest  at 
(50)  six  per  cent  per  annum.     If  not  satisfied  please  return  your  check   and   we    will 
remit  at  the  maturity  of  the  bills.     Respectfully  yours, 

28.  Gentlemen:  (75)  We  have  your  statement  of   our  purchase  of  Aug.  28th  with 
the  request  that  we  remit.     It  is  not  necessary  to  send  us  such   statements  [22]  for 
the  reason  that  an  invariable  rule  of  this  house  requires  all  bills  to  be  settled  each 
Monday  for  all  goods  received  during  the  previous  [25]  week.     Your  goods  were  not 
received  until  last  week  and  were  accordingly  remitted  for  on  Monday  of  this  week. 
Had  they  been  received  the  previous  [50]  week  we  should   have    sent   remittance   a 
week  ago  last  Monday.     Respectfully  yours, 

29.  Gentlemen:  If  you  wish  to  buy  a  full  car  of  goods  we  [75]  will   allow  you  ten 
per  cent,  discount    for   spot    cash    in    ten   days.     This  is  the  very  best  we  can  do  as 
materials  have  advanced.  [23] 

30.  Dear  Sir:  When  we  made  our  contract  with  you  to  advertise  in  the  Herald  it 
was  upon  your  guarantee  that  the  price-2o  cents  per  (25)  line-was  the  lowest  price  that 
any  one  had  with  the  Herald,  excepting  where  contract  had    previously  been   made 
and  which  had  not  expired.    We  (50)  have  before  us  a  bill  rendered  bv  you,  at  15  cents 
a  line  for  advertising  on  Sunday,  Sept.  29th,  for  a  house  that  has  [75]  no  contract  with 
you — that   does    but  little  or    no   advertising  with    you.     Unless    vou  can   explain 
this   matter  to    our    satisfaction,  we    shall  consider   (24)   our  contract  as  cancelled. 
Yours  respectfullv, 

31.  Friend  Louie:  Pardon  me  for  not  writing  you,  but  I  am  sobusv  now  that  I  do 
not  get  (25)  any  time  for  myself.     We  will   be  very  busy  until    about"  November    ist, 
when  trade  slacks  up.     Hoping  yourself  and  familv  are  well,  with  kind  150)  regards, 
I  remain,  Yours  truly, 

32.  Dear  Sir:  Kindly  advise  the  telephone  company  that  you  have  no  telephone  in 
your  office.     You  appear  in  the  book  (75)  as  4734,  and  people  grow  indignant  and  use 
unparliamentary  language  when  they  find  they  have  been  misled  in  their  belief  that- 
you  (25)  were  at  the  end  of  a  wire. 

33.  Dear  Sir:  Your    letter  of  the  tenth   inst.  to    hand    and    contents    noted.     In 
reply  we  would   state  (25)  that   at  present  we   have  not  the  goods  that  you  desire,  in 
stock,  and  do  not  expect  to  have  them  for  at  least  a  week  (50)  or  ten  davs.  Should  vou 
then  desire   to  have  us  fill  you  an  order,  we  will  do  so  promptly,  and  give  our  special 
attention  to  (75)  seeing  that  you  may  receive  goods  in  first  class  condition.     Hoping 
to  hear  from  vou  in  the  near  future,  we  remain, 

34.  Dear  Sirs:  I  have  (26)  to  acknowledge  with  thanks  the  receipt  of  your  further 
order  for  my  enamel  to  the  value  of    five  thousand   pounds  sterling,  which    shall"  he 
delivered  (25)  in  due  course.     I  am  pleased  to  note  that  this  last  order  brings  up  the 
value  of  enamel  ordered  by  you  within   the    past  few  (50)  months  to   £10,000   (ten 
thousand  pounds)  sterling.     With  regard  to  the  advanced  price  you  are  paying  me,  I 
assure  you  that  it  is  impossible,  in  view  (75)  of  the  verr  great  increase   in  the    price 
of  materials,  to  continue  at  the  old  rates.     Yours  faithfully, 

35.  Dear  Sir:     Your  favor   of  the   I5th  (27)  inst.  received.     Thanks    for    sug- 
gestion regarding  safe.     In  reference  to  the  newspaper  scheme   I   think   I   fully  un- 
derstand your  proposition,  but  if  you  will  let  (25)  me  have  a  copy  of  the  prospectus, 
explaining  the  advantages  .of  subscribing,  etc.,  I  will  give  the  subject  careful  con- 
sideration and  write  you  later  as  (50)  to  what  conclusion  I  may  arrive  at.   The  socie- 
ties in  this  town  are  few  and  far  between,  likewise   throughout  the  state;  neverthe- 
less I  will  consider  (75)  the  matter  further  as  above  stated.    Do  you  know  of  any  one 
who  has  a  tvpewriter  in  fair  condition  which  they  would  like  to  dispose  (28)  of  at  a 
reasonable  figure?     With  kind  regards,  I  remain,  Your  Sincere  Friend. 

36.  Dear  Friend:     Enclosed  please   find    20  cents   in  stamps,  which  is   the   (25) 
amount  clue  you  on  books,  which  I  got  the  other  day.    I  forgot  all  about  it  yesterday 


when  you  were  here,  althougn  the  book  which  (50)  I  gave  you  should  have  reminded 
me.  However,  it  is  not  too  late  now,  so  send  you  stamps.  Hoping  this  will  be  sat: 
isfactory,  I  am,  (75)  Respectfully, 

37.  Dear  Sir:     Herewith  please  find  $200,  which  please  credit  upon   my  account, 
and  next  week  or  week  after  next  when  I  am  (29)  down  I  will  pay  the  balance. 

38.  Dear  Sir:  I  have  heard  nothing  from  you   since  last   spring  when  you  were 
changing  your  location.     The  last  [25]  of  April  I  went  to  Denver  and  began  service 
with  the  silver  mining  company,  of  which  my  brother  is  Secretary.     The  middle  of 
July  I  [50]  started  on  an  Eastern  trip,  going  to  Chautauqua — where  I  was  for  about  a 
month — thence  to  New  York  and  Brooklyn  for  two  weeks,  and  [75]  I  have  now  been 
here  a  week  and  expect  to  stay  that  much  longer.     Shall  soon  go  back  to  Denver. 
Have   been    wondering  how  you  [3O]  have  been  getting  along  in  your  work.     It 
seems  to  me  that  you  have  had  a  great  deal   to   discourage  you,  but  your  sanguine 
temperament  [25]  and  your  pluck  seem  to  pull  you  through.     I  hope  your  health    is 
as  good  as   these    characteristic  qualities  you  possess.     I  have  a  friend  [50]  in  New 
York  city  who  desires  the  agency  for  your  books.     Please  let  me  know  if  he  should 
buy  your  books  here    or  of  you.  (75)  Yours  very  truly, 

39.  Dear  Sir:  Your  favor  to  hand.     We  enclose  settlement  of  account.     The  price 
of  the  No.  o  beds  at  Sheboygan  is  one  [31]  dollar  and  fifteen  cents  each. 

40.  Dear  Sir:  Yours  to  hand  and  contents  carefully  noted.     I  think  the  plan  you 
suggest  a  very  good  one,  and  [25]  herewith  return  the  matter  to  you  with  instruc- 
tions to  arrange  the  circular  as  you  think  best.  I  also  enclose  you  check  with  which  to 
pay  [50]  the  printer.     Thanking  you  for  your  promptness,  I  am,  Very  respectfully 
yours, 

41.  Dear  Sir:  Regarding  your  inquiry  in  reference  to  pig  lead,  we  beg  to  [75]  say 
that  although  trade  at  the  several  lead  centers  has  been  quiet  and  dull,  yet  a  strong 
undertone  has  been  visible,  and  while  apathy  on  [32]  part  of  consumers  is  noticeable 
we   attribute   same   more  to   extreme  conservatism   than   any   other    cause.     The 
present  position  of  lead  really  warrants  no  bear  [25]  attitude,  for  as  we  have  already 
outlined  in  our  late  circulars,  consumption  has  been   really  more  than  production, 
and  instead  of  piling  up  lead  as  [50]  in  past  years  we  have  drawn  on  our  surplus  to  a 
very  large  extent.     It  is  generally  admitted  that  our  American  refiners  outside  the 
trust,  (75)  with  possibly  an  exception,  have   decreased  their  product  rather  than  in- 
creased, and  this  with  large  Mexican  imports  prior  to  July  ist.    Respectfully, 

42.  Dear  Sir:  Herewith  (33)  I  beg  to  hand  you  two  duplicate   invoices  asked   for 
as  follows :    Jno.  Clark,  dated  Feb.  loth,  $5.00,  and  Fred  Neal,  dated  Jan.  3oth,  (25)  for 
$20.00;  and  would  advise  that  original  invoices  were  passed  as  follows:  Jno.  Clark, 
invoice  passed  Jan.  loth  leaving  my  No.  21;  Fred  (50)  Neal  invoice  passed  Jan.  loth 
leaving   my  audit  No.  16,  283.     If  these  do  not  agree  with  your  record  please  oblige. 
Very  (75)  respectfully, 

43.  Dear  Sir:  Business  at  Chicago  has  been  quiet  with  but  few  sales.     At  St.  Louis 
the  market  has  ruled   at  3.65  cents  (34)   to    3^   cents  asked,  and   sales   of  several 
hundred  tons  are  reported  at  these  figures.     The  number  of  consumers   here  outside 
the  trust (25)  is  so  small  that  the  amount  of  metal  sold  is  very  limited;   it  seems  as  if 
the  "Future  Great"  had  lost  their  supremacy. 

44.  Dear  Si'.-:  (50)  In  accordance  with  a  price  list  of  yours   in  which  you  quote  spe- 
cial prices   of  fifty  cents  for  type-writer  ribbons,  I  herewith  enclose  that  (75)  amount 
for  a  black  record  ribbon,  which  please  send  me   at   your   earliest  convenience,  and 
oblige.     Very  resp'y. 

45.  Gentlemen:     Enclosed  find  our  cartage  rates  on   (35)  delivered  merchandise. 
Single  articles  of   merchandise,  when  not  included  in   a  general  bill,  in  bbls.  and 
cases,  are  20  cents  each.     In  ordinary  boxes  not  (25)  exceeding  100  Ibs.,  ic  cents  each. 
All  accounts  are  due  and  payable  on  the  first  of  the  month  following  purchase,  and 
if  not  paid  on  (50)  or  before  the  tenth  of  the  month,  interest  will  be    charged  at  the 
rate  of  8  per  cent,  per  annum  from  the  date  the  account  (75)  became  due. 

46.  Dear  Sir:     Answering  yours  of  the  2nd  inst.  at  the  present  writing  there  is 
every  prospect  of  a  large  portion  of  Mexican  ores  (36)   going  abroad,  and  that  the 
London  market  is  being  prepared  for  such  a  move  is  evidenced  by  the  recent  large 


advances-to  which  we  shall  [25]  refer  later  on.  There  is  no  question  but  that  present 
prices  are  affecting  production,  and  were  it  not  for  the  increase  in  value  of  silver 
(50)  many  more  large  producers  would  be  closed  down  than  we  have  record  of. 
The  "  Corroders' Combine"  has  been  the  damper  on  pig  lead,  for  with  (75)  the  old 
regime  removed,  no  one  has  turned  up  to  buy  lead  and  bolster  the  market,  although 
the  opportunities  have  been  many,  for  at  no  (37)  time  have  the  trust  controlled 
enough  surplus  pig  lead  to  remain  out  of  the  market  for  any  length  of  time.  The 
present  price  of  pig  (25  )lead  is  cheap  and  buyers  would  do  well  to  keep  their  weather 
eve  open  for  early  advances  next  year.  Respectfully, 

47.  Dear  Sir:     We  enclose  letter   (50)  received  to-day,  and  cannot  see  how  vou 
came  to  sell  goods  on  those  terms  to  such  a  small  dealer.    We  lose  money  by  it.    We 
[75]  do  not  like  to  have  a   salesman  make  certain   terms   with  a   customer,  and  then 
write  to  us  entirely  differently.     Please  answer  this  and  return  [38]  letter    to  us. 
Yours  truly. 

48.  Dear  Sir:  Yours  of  the   26th  received.     Please  accept   thanks   for  chart   in- 
closed.    I  would  still  like  some  further  information  (25)  on  the   matter.     How  many 
pages  of  finger  indication  does  your  complete  manual  contain?     I    do  not   care   fo 
any  other  feature  of  the  book  (50)  especially,  the  main  consideration  being  to  get  the 
largest  possible  finger  indication.     Does   your  complete  manual  contain   any  more 
finger  indications  than  the  chart?     Hoping  (75)  you  will  pardon  me  for  again    troub- 
ling you  with  this  matter  and  awaiting  your  early  reply,  I  am  yours, 

49.  Dear  Sir :  I  desire  to  get  (39)  a  number  of  copies  of  your  books  for  our  school 
I  saw  one  some  weeks  ago  and  as  near  as  I  can  remember,  I  think  [25]  it  was   a   t\vo 
dollar  book.    It  was  a  large  black  board-covered  volume,  and  had  several  designs    in 
it,  one  in  particular  was  a  (50)  bottle.     If   you  still  have  this  work  for  sale,  you  may 
inform  me  at  your  earliest  convenience,  and  I  will  remit  the  money,  possibly  for  (75) 
fifty  copies.     Awaiting  an  early  reply,  I  am,   Yours,  etc., 

50.  Dear  Sir:  We  enclose  invoices   for   style   2109  recently   ordered.     We   also 
enclose  [40]  a  letter  from  your  territory  and  hope  you  will  succeed  in  selling  to  the 
party.     I  have  been  expecting  to  hear  from  you   with   some  [25]  piano  orders,  and 
hope  vou  will  report  some  at  an  early  date. 

51.  Dear  Sir:    Although    believing    that  every  one  will  immediately  recognize 
his  own  interests  (50)  and  rigidly  maintain  the  prices   quoted  by  the    crushers,  it  is 
still  important  to  advise,  that  upon  the  strict  maintenance  by  all  jobbers  of  the   (75) 
schedule  named  depends  its  continuance  and  further  possible   benefits.     Our  com- 
mittee therefore  urgently  request  your  close  observance  of  prices  and   conditions 
named,  as  they  have  (41)  assured  the  manufacturers  that  such  will  be  the  case.     The 
enclosed  are  prioss  agreed  upon. 

52.  Dear  Sir :  I  received  the  enclosed  postal-card  from  you  [25]  this  morning  but  do 
not  understand  it.     Will  you  tell  me  which  two   dollar  book  you   mean    or  whether 
you  want  our  two  dollar  newspaper?    (50)     We  send  you  our  circulars  in  to-day's  mail 
a.rtd  will  fill  your   order  as  soon  as  we  know  which  publication  you  refer  to. 

53.  Dear  Sir  =[75]  Replying  to  your  postal-card  of  Dec. 23rd,  regarding  3337  shipment 
which  you  say  you  forwarded  about  two  weeks  ago,  will  [42]  state  that  we  would 
like  to  have  you  inform  us  as  to  the  exact  date.     The  receipt  from  the  express  office 
will  tell  you.     Respectfully  [25] 

_54.       Gentlemen:  I  have  not  received  last  issue  of  your  paper,  and  hence  have  not 

been    able    to   check  the  insertion  of  my  advertisement.     Please  send  [50]  copy  of 

last  issue  to  me  and  hereafter  mail  them  to  me  each   week.     It   is   very    difficult    to 

procure   them   here,   as   the   news   [75]   dealers   do   not   sell   single   copies.     Very 

respectfully, 

^5.        Dear  Sir:  The  enclosed  was  received  by  me  in  to-day's  mail,  but  as  it  does  not 

indicate  [43]  the  state  from  which  it  was  sent,  and  as  the  post  mark  on  the  envelope 

is  not  legible,  I  am  sending  this  to  you  on  [25]  a  risk  to- find  out  whether  the  person 

sending    this    to    me    resides    in    your    town.     I   enclose    stamp    for    reply.     Very 

respectfullv, 

56.       Dear  Sir:  [50]  The  enclosed  letter  I  received  from  you  to-day,  accompanied  by 

fiftv  two-cent  stamps.  You  have,  however,  evidently  mistaken  some  other  advertise- 


ment  for  mine,  as  [75]  we  do  not  receive  stamps  in  payment  for  any  of  our  publica- 
tions and  so  state  in  all  our  advertisements.  I  therefore  return  forty-nine  of  [441  the 
two-cent  stamps,  using  one  as  postage  on  this  letter.  Yours  very  respectfully, 

57.  Dear  Sir:  I  enclose  herewith  drawings  of  an  invention  of  mine  [25]  which  I 
desire  to  put  in  the  hands  of  a  capable  machinist  for  manufacturing.     Please  advise 
me  what  you  would  charge  per  gross  for   manufacturing   [50]   these,  same    size    as 
drawings,  though  not  so  heavy.     In  fact,  they  should  be  as  light  as  possible,  and  the 
middle  rod  should  be  of  [75]  wood,  light  ash  or  some  other  wood.     The  rest  to  be  of 
steel.     You  might  estimate  for  me  by  the  dozen,  by  the  gross,  and  [45]  by  the  great 
gross.     An  early  reply  will  greatly  oblige.     Very  respectfullv, 

58.  DeorSir:  We  hand  you  sample  of  material  from   which  we   are   making  [25], 
carriers'  uniforms  at  the  exceedingly  low  price  of   seventeen    dollars.     Considering 
the  material  and  workmanship,  the  price  is  very  low,  and   we    are    only  enabled  [50] 
to  offer  this  price  owing   to   the    large   numbers  we    are    making.     We    would    be 
pleased  to  have  you  communicate  this  to  your  men  and  [75]  any  orders  from  you  or 
them  will  have  our  best  attention.     Very  truly, 

59.  Dear  Sir :  Your  favor  to  hand.  We  are  very  sorry  that  the  [46]  glass  was  broken 
in  shipment,  but  you  are  aware  that  we  are  not  responsible    for   this    damage.     We 
cannot  collect  at  this  end,  so  you  [25]  will  have  to  send  in  your  bill  to  the  company. 
As  we  have  no  claim  on  them,  please  send  draft  for  amount  due.     It  takes  [50]  along 
time  to  collect  a  bill  from  a  Railroad  Co.     They  are  not  as  prompt  in  paying  as  they 
are  in  collecting.     Yours  truly,  [75] 

60.  Gentlemen:  Inclosed  herewith  you  will  find  our  check  for   four  dollars  and 
sixtv-four  cents,  being  extra  discount  charged  by  us  on  your  bill  of  (47)  August  2oth 
for  $116.00.     Excuse  our  error  in  this  matter.     We  did  not  observe  that  it  was  a   net 
bill.     Respectfully  yours. 

61 .  Gents :  [25]Please  ship  us  drip  pans  as  before,  duplicating  our  last  order  if  possi- 
ble. If  you  cannot  ship  the  entire  line  of  sizes  please  aavise  us  (50)  at  once,  as  the  v  are 
important  sizes  to  us  and  it  is  necessary  that  we  have  them.     Yours  truly, 

62.  Gentlemen:  We  have  your  notice  of  [75]  package  lying  in  your  office  at  Janes- 
ville,  Wis.,  addressed  to  Mrs.  Jane  Follefson.     Please  hold  same  a  few  days   longer. 
We  have  notified  the  lady  [48]  to  call  for  them.     We   have  also  from   you   the  en- 
closed notice  of  goods  shipped  to  M.  S.  Neven,  Janesville,  which  is  refused.     Please 
return  [25]  same  to  us  and  oblige.     Yours, 

63.  Dear  Friend:  I  enclose  herewith  what  you  asked  for,  and   beg  that  you    will 
forgive  the  apparent  remissness     in   [50]   not  sending  same  before,  which  you  must 
charge  up  to  the  fact  that  I  have  been  down  to  Old  Point  Comfort,  spending  a  week 
with  [75  J  Mr.  Garrett.     Hoping  that  you  are  quite  yourself  again.     Very  truly  yours, 

64.  Gentlemen:  Kindlv  inform  us  when  you  load  cars  for  Helena,  Mont.     Also 
when  [49]  you  load  for  Springfield,  Mo.,  and  oblige.     Yours  truly, 

65.  Dear  Sir:  Your  invoice  985  at  hand  to-day,  we  notice  has  been  considerably 
(25)  blurred  when  making  press  copy.  We  have  had  great  trouble  lately  in  decipher-  . 
ing  these  invoices,  and  will  be  obliged  if  you  will  see  that  we  [50]  have  distinct  copies 
hereafter. 

66.  Dear  Sir:  We  are  in  receipt  of  your  favor  of   loth  inst.,  enclosing   check  for 
$1000,  which  amount  we  [75]  have  placed  to  credit  of  your  account  for  settlement  of 
bills  of  loth  ultimo.     Please  accept  thanks. 

67.  Dear  Sir:  We  are  to-day  in  receipt   of   [50]   a  copy    of  the  Petroleum  News 
and  note  that  you  have  an  entire  column  advertisement  for  this  house.     We   cannot 
understand  it  at  all,  as  [25]  we  have  given  no  order  for  anything  of  the   kind,  and 
would  therefore  like  to  know  on  whose  authority  it  is  inserted.     Of  course   if    [50] 
it  is  gratis,  we  are  very  much  obliged.     Yours  very  truly, 

68.  Gentlemen:  Herewith  we  enclose  a  special  discount  card  for  your  private  use, 
and  trust  [75]  you  will  see  fit  to  avail  yourself  of  the  advantages  offered.   If  you  have 
any  friends  who  might  like  one  of  these  cards  please  have  [51]  them  call. 

69.  Dear  Sir:  Our  traveling  agent,  Mr.  Briton,  will  be  in  your  town  in   a  day  or 
two  and  we  have  therefore  forwarded  him  [25]  your  favor  of  the  nth  with  instruc- 


tions  to  treat  -\\ith  you  on  the  very  best  terms  possible. 

70.  Dear  Sir:  We  never  deviate  under  any  circumstances  [50]  from  our  published 
advertising  rates.     Not  a  line  ever  went  into  our  columns  for  a  penny  less  than  our 
established  rates;  further  correspondence  on  this  [75]  subject  will  therefore   be   use- 
less. If  you  desire  us  to  insert  your  nine  inch  advertisement  for  one  year  please  send 
us  definite  order  to  that  [52]  effect,  price  to   be  paid  as  before  stated.     Yours   re- 
spectfully, 

71.  Dear  Sir:  There  must  be  a  miscarriage  somewhere,  as  our   shipper  positively 
states    he    sent  [25]  you   the  goods  ordered  and  the  shipping  receipt  reads  for  three 
packages.     Inquire  again  at  vour  end  and  we  will  notify  the  express  company  here. 
[50] 

•J2.  Dear  Sir:  .v  e  have  your  letter  soliciting  advertising,  but  beg  to  say  that  we 
have  concluded  all  our  contracts  for  this  year  or  would  be  [75]  glad  to  try  your 
paper.  We  thank  you  for  the  very  liberal  offer  made  us,  and  shall  keep  it  in  mind 
for  next  year.  Respectfully,  [53] 

73.  Dear  Sir:  You  have  done  very  well  in  your    management   of  our   branch    at 
your  town  and  we  are  glad  to  see  that  it  is  [25]  now  on  a  paying  basis.     You  should 
be  sure  in  making  your  final  settlement  with  W.  E.  H.  and  the  others  to  get  receipt 
in  [50]  full  for  all  past  notes  and  due  bills  as  well  as   all    previous   indebtedness,  as 
several  due  bills  and  notes  are  missing. 

74.  Dear  Sir:  In  [75]  sending  you  catalogue  asked  for  we   believe   you   will    find 
more  unique  items — especially  suitable  for  gifts — in  our  list  than   that  of  any  other 
[54]  house.     The  quality  of  our  Birthday,  Anniversary  and  Holiday  souveniers  are 
superfine  and  the  prices  are  very  reasonable. 

75.  Gentlemen:  As  we  haye  four  general  stores  [25]  up  in  the  woods,  please  send 
your  illustrated  catalogue  to  each  mentioned,  viz.:  Mattoon,  Waukegan,  Alliance 
and  Botney.     Please  give  this  your  immediate  attention. 

76.  Dear  [50]  Sir:  Your  proposition   of  the    4th    inst.    is    satisfactorv,  but   before 
accepting  same  prefer  to  look  somewhat  more  particularlv  into  mv  finances.     I  will 
decide  [75]  within  ten  days  positively,  and  would  like  you"  to   keep"  offer   open  until 
that  date  and  oblige. 

77.  Dear  Sir:  We  would  be  glad  to  favor  [55]  vou  with  the  address  of  a  house  in  this 
citv  manufacturing  the  churns  vou  desire,  if  we  knew  of  one,  but  on  investigation  of 
the  [25]  directory  and  enquiries  made  we  fail  to  discover  any  nearer  than  New  York, 
where  you  have  been  getting  them. 

78  Dear  Sir:  Your  polite  note  of  (50)  the  i5tn  inst.  is  received.  I  do  not  feel  at 
liberty,  however,  to  take  advantage  of  your  offer  at  this  writing. 

79.  Dear  Sir:  Within  the  [75]  last  half  hour  one  of  our  clerks  bought  five  cakes  of 
toilet  soap  and  three  cakes  of  laundry  toap  for  twenty-five  cents  from  a  [56]   manu- 
facturer's own  wagon.    In  addition  to  this  there  is  a  scheme  on  the  wrappers  for  the 
sending  of  a  certain  number  of  the  wrappers  to  [25]   the  house  that  is  behind  the 
scheme,  and  you  will  get  a  certain  article  free  of  charge.     This  scheme  is  worked  by 
one  of  the   [50]  largest,  oldest,  most  respectable  ,  and  high-toned  soap  houses  in  the 
land-a  house  which  uses  magazines   and   papers  for  advertising-  its  soap  to  a  (75)  very 
large  extent.  As  this  is  the  first  time  it  has  come  to  our  notice  that  they  are  peddlers, 
thev  have  evidently  adopted  the  scheme  [57]  with  the  New  Year. 

80.  Madam:  Enclosed  you  will  find  amount  of  85  cents    received    this    a.   in.     We 
regret  to  say  that  we  have  [25]  nothing  at  all  near  the  sample  you  sent  us.    Awaiting 
your  future  orders.  We   remain, 

!Si.  Dear  Sir:  The  rules  governing  the  payment  of  bills  of  [50]  our  firm  is  as 
follows:  i.  We  settle  all  bills  on  Tuesday  of  each  week  for  goods  received  during 
the  week  immediately  preceding,  regardless  (if  [75]  the  time  when  such  bills  mature, 
j.  We  remit  at  the  t'ime  of  settlement  for  all  bills  which  by  the  terms  of  purchase 
should  or  [58]  can  be  paid  in  10  davs  from  date  of  bill,  deducting  the  discount  .al- 
lowed in  case  of  payment  in  ten  days.  3.  We  close  all  [25]  other  bills  at  time  of  settle- 
ment bv  our  note  pavable  at  our  bank  in  Chicago.  4.  We  make  all  remittances  for 
goods  purchased  East  of  [;o]  Ohio  in  New  York  exchange — West  of  Ohio  in  checks 


on  Chicago.  All  notes  given  for  goods  purchased  East  of  Ohio  will  be  made  pay- 
able [75]  at  our  bank  in  Chicago  in  New  York  exchange  and  all  such  notes  will  by 
their  terms,  mature  two  days  prior  to  the  maturity  of  [59]  the  bills  for  which  thev  are 
given.  5.  All  damaged  goods  and  goods  which  do  not  conform  to  the  order  will  be 
returned.  6.  Invoices  [25]  in  which  goods  are  charged  at  prices  in  excess  of  amount 
specified  in  order  for  the  same,  unless  accompanied  by  a  credit  bill  for  the  [50]  amount 
of  the  difference  or  a  statement  to  the  effect  that  the  extra  charge  may  be  deducted 
from  the  bill  on  settlement  of  same,  will  [75]  be  returned  for  correction,  and  in  all 
matters  relating  to  the  settlement  of  such  invoices  the  goods  will  not  be  regarded 
as  having  been  received  [60]  by  us  until  the  return  of  the  corrected  bill,  Respect- 
fully, 

82.  Dear  Sir:  ^four  favor  of   the  i8th  received  and  noted.     Samples  have  not  vet 
arrived,  [25]  but  we  hope  to  receive  them  in  the  next  mail.     Will  -report  promptly  as 
soon  as  samples  come  to  hand,  and  hope  that  we  will  [50]  be  able  to  offer  you   some 
inducement  to  ship  to  our  market.     Respectfully, 

83.  Dear  Sir:  We  have  your  letter  of  yesterday  in  which  you  claim   [75]  that  we 
took  off  %  per  cent  more  than  we  \vere  entitled  to  for  discount  from  your  bill.    The 
extra  1-2  of  one  per  cent  [61]  is  for  thirty  days  interest. 

84.  Dear  Sir:  Please  accept  thanks  for  your  remittance  covering  bill  of  June  6th. 
We  have  credited  it  on  the  enclosed  [25]  statement,  which  leaves  a  slight  balance  of 
$8.18.     In  reference  to  your  footnote  at  the  bottom  of  the  receipted  bill  enclosed,  we 
[50]  beg  to  say  that  we  think,  when  you  examine  our  new  price-list,  you  will  find  it 
such  an  improvement  over  all  competitors,  in  the  [75]  way  of  close  prices  for  correct 
goods,  that  you  will  be  convinced  of  its  advantages  and  like  it. 

85.  Gentlemen:  You  have  thus  far  delivered  to  [62]  us  only  two  styles  of  goods 
ordered.     Our  order  was  given  early,  and  we  have  to  have  two  sample  pieces  each 
in  August  and  balance  [25]  of  goods  in  September  and  October.     We  must  insist  on 
an  immediate  delivery  of  balance  of  goods.     Yours  truly, 

86.  -     Dear  Sir:  We  got  all  your  [50]  goods  down  to  the  car,  and  the  car  had  already 
been  filled  up,  so  they  were  unable  to  take  care  of  them  and  we  had  [75]  to  take  them 
back  to  our  warehouse,  where  we  hold  them  subject  to   your   order.     We    had   the 
goods  down  just  as  you  wanted  them.  [63]     Please  advise  by  return  mail  if  we  shall 
ship  these  goods  by  open  freight.     Yours  truly, 

87.  Dear  Sir:  I  am  informed  that  a  colonization  party  [25]  is  now  being  organized 
in  Allen  Co.,  to  start  for  Dakota  some  time  this  month,  and  would  suggest  that  you 
go  there  at  once  and  [50]  look  into  the  matter.     There  is  no   good    reason    why    we 
should  not  have  this  business  for  we  are  now  in  a  position  to  make  [75]  them  a  good 
through  rate.     Hoping  you  will  secure  the  party,  advising  me  by  wire  as  early  as 
possible  whether  you  have  done  so,  I  [64]  am,  Yours  truly, 

88.  Dear  Sir:  Herewith  find  enclosed  as  follows:  i.  Bill  of  C.  A.  Martinwith  your 
endorsement  thereon,  and  their  letter,  all  of  (25)  which  explain  themselves.     Please 
return  the  bill.     2.     Duplicate  bill  of  the  Joliet  Cover  Co.,  their  letter  to  us  and  our 
statement  to  them  with  (so)check.     Your  bill  says  deduct  freight.     Their  letter  says 
that  they  never  allow  freight.     Please  adjust.     Respectfully  Yours, 

89.  Dear  Sir:  Referring  again  to  your  favor  [75]  of  the  22nd  ult.,  addressed  to  Mr. 
Carl,  and  to  which  your  Mr.  Pleasant  replied  in   the  absence  of  our   manager,  Mr. 
Watson,  would  say  [65]  that  having  submitted  the  same  to  our    New   York   house, 
they  reply, — "Please  have  revised  work  submitted  to  us  and  we  will  consider  the 
proposition  [25]  made".    Yours  very  truly, 

90.  Dear  Sir:  Will  you  kindly  advise  the  writer  by  postal-card  enclosed — if  you 
have  the  knowledge — as  to  the  amount  [50]  of  acreage  in  vour  vicinitv  sown  to  flax 
this  spring?     Is  it  more  or  less  as  compared  to  that  planted  last  spring?     Any  infor- 
mation concerning  [75]  the  present  condition  and  prospects  of  the  flax  crop  will  be 
much  appreciated  by      Yours  respectfully, 

91.  Dear  Friend:  In  accordance  with  your  favor  of  to-day,  [66]  just  received,  I  at 
once  forwarded  you  a  copv  of   book   remitted  for.     Your  checks,  however,  permit 
me  to  say,  facetiously,  are  getting  beautifully  less  [25]  each  time;  that  is,  they  used 
to  be  one-dollar-and-thirtv-seven  cents  per  copy.    The  last  and  previous  one  was  one 


dollar  and  (5o)thirty-three  cents.  Please  do  not  allow  them  to  get  any  .mer,  or  else  we 
won't  have  enough  profit  to  pay  postage.  Please  also  accept  [75]  this  criticism  in  the 
friendly  spirit  in  which  it  is  intended,  but,  at  the  same  time  take  the  hint,  and  oblige. 
Your  sincere  friend, 

92.  Dear  [67]  Sir:  I  write  to  advise  you  that  the  price  of  pig  hams  is   advancing 
so    rapidly  that   it  would   be  advisable   for  you  to  send  [25]  us  rather  a  larger  order 
than  your  usual  weekly  one,  that  we  may  make  our  orders  to  the   curers  sufficient- 
y  large  to  accommodate  you.    Respectfully,  [50] 

93.  Dear   Madam  :    We  sent  your  goods  by  express  yesterday.     The   delay  was 
caused  by  our  being  unable  to  get  the  kind  of  braid  you  desired  [75]  and  we  thought 
best  to  hold  other  goods  until  we  could  send  all  together. 

94.  Dear  Sir:  I  have  your  letter  of    the    23rd    and    note   (68)  contents.     If    Mr. 
Somers  reported  to  you  that  I  declined  to  pay  the  bill   rendered  *  the   rates   you 
charged    he  reported  me  cor/ectly.     What  [25]   I  stated  to  him  was  exactly  what  I 
said  to  you  at  each  and  all  of  my  interviews  with  you  —  that  we  repudiated  the  con- 
tract[5o]  made  between  the  Excelsior  Light  &  Power  Co.  and  Watkins  &  Co.  after  its 
attempted   consignment  to  you   and  claim    that  you   had   no    right  [75]  whatever 
to   occupy    the     premises,     and     that    we    would       do    nothing     to     countenance 
any  such  action  on  your  part,  but,  at  the  same  time,  we  [69]  are  willing  to  treat  with 
you  and  pay  you  for  any  services  rendered  in  this  matter  whatever  is  fair  and  right. 
If  you  are  disposed  [25]  to  settle  the  bill  upon  this  basis,  all  right.     If  not,  take  such 
course  as  to  you  seems  best.     Respectfully  yours, 

95.  Dear  Sir:  The  mackerel  [50]  you  complain  of  are  the  finest  Spanish,  and   are 
considered  a  great  luxury   by  many  people.     They  are  not  as  fat  as  our  American 
mackerel,  [75]  but  they  are  precisely  what  you  ordered,  and   we   do  not    care   to   be 
placed  at  the  expense  of  freight  in  taking  them  back.     Respectfully,  [70] 

96.  Dear  Sir:  Your  letter  of  the  5th  received  and  noted.     We  have   not  yet  been 
advised  of  the  arrival  of  the  balance  of  the  car  (25)  of  flour  to  Petersburg,  and  we  are 
unable  to  say  whether  it  has  been  delivered  or  not,  but  presume  it  has  not  yet  come 
to  (50)  hand,  as  our  party  promised  to  notify  us  immediately  after  its  arrival.     We 
wish  you  would  hunt  this  matter  up  at  once,  as  we   have  (75)  two  lots   more  which 
we  would  like  to  ship  in  a  few  days,  but  unless  we  have  a  more  satisfactory  arrange- 
ment we  think  we  had  (71)  better  send  by  steamer.     Awaiting   your    reply,    which 
we  hope  to  have  at  an  early  date,  we  remain,  Yours  truly, 

97.  Dear  Sir:  The  enclosed  advertisement  (25)  we  clip  from  a  Chicago  daily  and 
therefore,  take   the  liberty  of    presenting  to  you  the  claims  of  our   paper   as    an 
advertising  medium  for  [50]  your  line  of  goods.     Kindly  see  the  columns  of  our  last 
issue.     We   will   insert  this  advertisement  for  ten  cents  per  line  and  are  certain  [75] 
that  you  will  be  profited  thereby.     May  we  not  have  this  for  a  standing  "till  forbid" 
order  on  Saturdays  at  the  above  rates?     Yours  truly,  [72] 

98.  Dear  Sir:  Do  you  intend  draining  water  from  Pottsville  Water  Co.'s  pipes  at 
Old  Boston?     Is  there  not  danger  of  bursting  from  reaction  on  account  [25]  of  pres- 
sure?    Please  answer  by  return  mail  and  oblige, 

99.  Dear  Sir:  We  have  your  letter  of  the  26th  inst.  enclosing  receipts    and    state- 
ment which  we  [50]  have  carefully  examined.     There  seems  to  be  a  complication  of 
errors  in  this  matter.     In  lieu  of  these  receipts,  please  send  us  receipts   for    bills  [75] 
of   i6th   andi7thof  Sept.  and  an  additional  receipt  for  $130.79  to  apply  on  unsettled 
bills.     Resp'y, 

TOO.  Gentlemen:  1  [73]  have  your  letter  of  the  igth  and  have  carefully  considered 
its  contents.  As  I  have  stated  in  my  last  letter,  Mr.  Blank  acted  as  my  [25]  legal  and 
business  adviser  in  this  whole  transaction,  from  the  time  of  my  first  negotiations 
with  Mr.  Parker  down  to  the  close,  and  I  must  (50)  refer  you  to  him  for  the  informa- 
tion you  ask  for.  Respectfully,  [7361  words.] 

J^-These  100  letters    represent  a   supplement  to   Haven's   Complete   Manual  of 
Typewriting,  the  only  complete  work  on  Typewriting.  Price  $2. 

OIF1      JLCTTJ^-Ij      OOTJIRT 


I  A  A  A  A  W-OZR-IDS      OIF1      JLCTTJ^-Ij      OOTJIRT 

1U,UUU  TIESTIIMIOIISnr  \  An 

selected     for    Snorthand    and     Typewriting    practice    with     Words      Counted     and      Numbeed  I       Ml 
for  timing  speed  will  be  sent  by    C.  HAVEX,  Tribune  Building,  Chicago,  Illinois,  on  recelptr  of  J.   V  V 


Copyright,  1891,  by    Curtis  Haven.     This  includes  entire    contents. 
All  rights  reserved. 

THE  MODERN  REPORTER. 


A  Progressive  Monthly  Magazine  of  Practical  Short-Hand  and  Type-Writing  for  the 
Entire  Profession,  all  Teachers  and  their  Pupils,  and  the  Home  Student. 

OUR  AIM:  To  present  in  each  number,  not  merely  current  events,  but  particular  information  as 
new  and  beneficial  to  the  most  experienced  expert  as  to  the  novice. 

SUBSCRIPTION  PRICE,  One  dollar  a  year,  in  advance,  postage  free.    Single  copies  10  cents  each. 

ADVERTISEMENTS  of  an  unobjectionable  character,  inserted  in  display  columns  at  Twenty  Cents 
per  narrow-column  line  each  insertion,  each  inch  of  space  length-wise  of  the  column  counting  as 
twelve  lines.  Advertisements  of  greater  space  than  half  page  not  accepted;  smaller  ones  preferred. 

NEWS  ITEMS  on  BRIEF  PAPERS,  in  reference  to  the  art  we  represent,  will  be  always  gladly  wel- 
comed from  any  member  of  the  profession. 

COMMUNICATIONS,  business  or  otherwise,  should  be  addressed  to 

CURTIS  HAVEN,  ROOM   17,  TRIBUNE  BUILDING,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


TENTH   YEAB.J.  MflRRU        18Q1  j  10c  A  COPY 

.NUMBER  3.  f  MflKUfl,       lOai,  \jl    A.  YEAR 


OUR  MOCK  LETTERS. 

In  this  issue  of  the  paper  we  give  our  readers  the  concluding  eleven  days  of  the 
set  of  "Mock  Letters"  which  are  used  by  Haven  teachers  in  giving  students  who 
are  through  the  theory  the  briefest  legible  short-hand  forms  for  miscellaneous 
mercantile  work. 

We  are  devoting  this  issue  to  this  information  almost  exclusively,  simply  because 
there  is  a  demand  for  it  which  can  scarcely  wait  until  it  should  be  printed  by  the 
slow  plan  of  one  page  a  month  as  was  first  contemplated  and  illustrated  in  October 
and  November  numbers  of  THE  MODERN  REPORTER. 

Our  next  issue,  however,  will  contain  mostly  legal  work; — that  is,  selections 
from  the  Mock  Court  Reader  in  use  by  Haven  teachers.  In  later  numbers  of  the 
paper,  convention  work  and  miscellaneous  short-hand  literature  will  be  the  main 
features. 

The  best  plan  upon  which  to  get  the  most  good  in  the  shortest  time  from  these 
mock  letters,  is  for  students  to  have  some  one  dictate  to  them  only  two  letters  at  a 
time,  the  student  at  once  comparing  his  or  her  short-hand  writing  with  the  printed 
short-hand,  noting  every  deviation  therefrom,  respecting  shading,  slant  or  curva- 
ture of  characters,  size,  position,  phrasing,  etc.,  and  practicing  at  least  twelve  times 
the  proper  form  for  each  deviation.  After  this  has  been  done  with  all  the  charac- 
ters of  one  day's  letters,  the  two  letters  of  the  next  should  be  similarly  taken  from 
dictation,  compared  and  practiced;  and  so  on  throughout  the  entire  course. 

The  letters  contain  the  short-hand  forms  for  each  day  of  the  week  except  Sun 
day,  as  well  as  the  names  of  the  months  and  all  sorts  of  dates;  all  personal  initials, 
the  name  of  nearly  every  state  and  important  city  in  the  Union,  every  style  of 
names  of  firms,  and  street  or  post  office  addresses,  home  or  foreign.  This  list  of 
mock  letters  therefore  gives  students  more  information  in  regard  to  correct  short- 
hand outlines  than  the  mere  title  or  their  appearance  suggests,  and,  on  this  account, 
well  repaying  purchasers  for  the  expenditure  of  the  small  sum  at  which  they  are 
urnished. 

Teachers  of  all  systems  will  find  them  of  great  advantage  in  their  school  work. 


t..,^£..j 

~T~  S~ 

q    <L<  ^  /         (/        =^  ^/    v 

i_, ,\  ...'. »   v 

&L. .  L,..^.^....)  !..,:._. S&Xj^, 

<TN  1^  _  I       *.       ^X^-^      »-!.,, 

rf  _^^  /^-i  ,,,V^, 

^ 

...)...c...  X> A.. 

5L.A~t.Ji 

A»  fT.....\-o 

S  ^>  /~3  C      fv  , 

-••• ^ v-v  l^-^- 

2       3<     * 

.  V   ^-s  c     ^    ^   k~         ./"          I 
I ^ ^ r ^----^ 

•vo 


(8th  day.)  TUESDAY,  MAY  nth,  1877. 


Messrs.  Lewis  Carson  6°  Co.,  89  Franklin  St.,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  loth  instant  returning  our 
statement  and  check,  and  stating  that  your  terms  are  strictly  7-10  or  6-30.  i 

In  reply  we  beg  to  say  that  we  bought  these  goods  of  your  agent  here 
upon  the  following  terms:  "7-10,60  days  dating."  The  extra  i  percent, 
is  for  the  sixty  days'  interest. 

We  therefore  return  the  check  herewith.     Respectfully. 

Mr.  Samuel  Hanson,  Saco,  Me. 

DEAR  SIR: — On  weighing  the  feed  billed  to  us  on  your  invoice  of  the 
8th  instant,  we  make  it  4,125  Ibs.,  which  is  25  Ibs.  less  than  your  invoice 
above  referred  to  makes  it. 

We  do  not  know  whose  scales  are  correct,  but  hereafter,  to  save  trouble, 
please  have  weigher's  certificate  attached  to  all  the  feed  you  supply  us  with, 
and  greatly  oblige.  Respectfully. 

(9th  day.)  WEDNESDAY,  JUNE  iath,  1878. 

Mr.  James  Lane,  Box  9403,  Boston,  Mass. 

DEAR  SIR: — Replying  to  your  letter  of  the  loth  instant,  we  have 
looked  through  our  books  to  find  some  record  of  the  purchase  to,which  you 
refer,  but  find  nothing  of  the  kind. 

From  this  we  presume  it  was  a  cash  purchase,  in  which  case,  in  accord- 
ance with  our  custom,  the  sales  slip  was  inclosed  with  the  goods,  and  it 
would  be  necessary  for  you  to  send  us  the  slip  to  locate  the  purchase. 

Mr.  William  A.  Hopkins,  East  Saginaw,  Mich. 

DEAR  SIR: — I  send  you  herewith  a  blank  form  of  report,  which  I  wish 
made  out  by  you  in  full  and  sent  to  the  superintendent's  office  daily.  You 
will  note  the  word  "time"  at  the  bottom  of  the  page,  and  a  place  to  mark  the 
time  when  you  send  this  to  the  superintendent's  office.  Also  the  time  it  is 
received  there.  This  is  done  to  insure  prompt  delivery.  We  have  had 
several  complaints  of  late  of  cars  not  getting  around  on  time,  and  hope  in 
this  way  to  avoid  it  in  future. 

(loth  day.)  THURSDAY,  J\JNE  i3th,  1879. 

Miss  Dora  Weir,  5918  Hanlon  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 

DEAR  Miss: — In  further  reply  to  yours  of  the  3oth  ultimo,  in  reference 
to  the  third  installment,  we  have  written  to  Mr.  Evans,  and  he  acknowledges 
that  you  paid  him.  The  contract  which  we  hold  from  you  makes  the 
installments  payable  at  this  office,  and  we  do  not  want  you  to  make  any 
further  payments  to  anyone  outside  of  this  office,  as  we  will  not  be 
responsible  for  remittances  made  to  other  parties  than  ourselves.  Hoping 
there  will  be  no  future  misunderstanding,  we  are,  Yours  truly. 


.5...N m 


N 


. ..... ... 


V 


....V..^ — 4 


The  George  J.  Grimm  Co.,  Glendale,  Miss. 

GENTLEMEN: — Replying  to  your  favor  of  recent  date,  we  beg  to  say 
that  we  do  not  object  to  signing  the  contract  sent  us,  provided  you  will 
except  the  clause  which  states  that:  "  We  have  not  sold,"  etc.,  as  we  are  free 
to  admit  that  during  the  present  year  we  have  in  numerous  instances  given 
our  best  discounts  to  parties  buying  in  smaller  quantities  than  one  gross. 
Hence,  it  will,  in  this  case,  be  necessary  to  apply  the  old  adage,  "  Let 
bygones,"  etc.  Very  respectfully. 

(nth  day.)  FRIDAY,  JULY  i4th,   1880. 

Drs.  Q.  6°  E.  Venner,  59  Paternoster  Row,  London,  E.  C.,  England. 

DEAR  SIRS: — I  have  sent  you  by  to-day's  mail  an  electrotype  of  the 
inclosed  copy  of  advertisement,  which  please  insert  in  your  paper  for  one 
month  as  per  your  quotations  of  recent  date,  for  which  I  inclose  check. 

Please,  by  return  mail,  give  me  rates  of  one  year's  insertion  of  this  cut, 
upon  receipt  of  which,  if  satisfactory,  I  will  send  you  contract  for  one  year's 
insertion  instead*  of  one  month. 

Awaiting  your  reply,  we  are,  Most  faithfully  yours. 

M.  Zabrisky  6-  Co.,  Dallas,  N.  C. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  note  of  the  i3th  inst. 

Our  experience  in  sending  out  goods  by  express  without  prepayment 
has  been  unfortunate.  In  so  many  instances  they  are  returned  to  us  and 
we  are  compelled  to  pay  express  charges  both  ways  that  it  makes  the 
business  as  a  whole  unprofitable,  and  we  have  abandoned  it.  If  goods  are 
not  as  represented  by  us,  we  are  always  willing  to  exchange  them  and  make 
them  right,  but  we  must  insist  on  payment  in  advance,  particularly  where 
these  goods  are  to  be  taken  from  a  piece  and  the  value  of  them  very  much 
diminished  by  doing  so.  Respectfully  yours. 

(i2thday.)  SATURDAY,  JULY  i5th,  1881. 

The  Patent  Ramrod  Mfg.  Co.,  Montgomery  City,  Mo. 

GENTLEMEN: — Absence  in  Philadelphia  has  prevented  an  earlier  reply 
to  your  favor  of  the  first  of  May,  received  at  Chicago  a  few  days  after  I 
had  started  for  Philadelphia. 

I  shall  be  pleased  to  form  the  acquaintance  of  your  manager  when  he 
arrives  in  Chicago,  and  to  discuss  arrangements  and  hear  what  you  may 
have  to  say  additional  on  the  subject  stated  in  my  former  letter. 

Whether  I  can  make  any  arrangements  in  reference  to  your  ramrod 
machinery  or  not,  you  are  at  liberty  to  use  any  portion  of  my  letter  as  a 
testimonial  that  you  may  care  to. 

Messrs.  W.  6°  V  O.  Tettler,  Jacksonville,  Ore. 

GENTLEMEN: — Yours  of  the  i3th  inst.  received  and  noted.  We  have 
made  all  entries  to  bring  our  ledger  to  conform  to  yours.  In  regard  to  the 


]•••— -^  ?. 


A.  _;'>S.v.  1 


./-J...Y-. 


.XP. 


two  accounts  of  Johnson  &  Co.  and  F.  C.  Duvall  we  are  not  quite  clear. 
The  Johnson  &  Co.  error  must  have  occurred  in  April,  and  was  carried 
forward  into  next  month's  balance  sheet. 

As  it  appears  to  be  an  error  in  posting,  we  yet  fail  to  see  how  you  could 
fetch  the  May  balance.  Please  itemize  these  errors  and  the  counter  errors 
of  14  cents. 

Your  early  attention  will  oblige. 

(i3th  day.)  MONDAY,  AUGUST  2oth,  1882. 

Mr.  F.  Cecil,  Maysville,  Grant  Co.,  W.  Va. 

DEAR  SIR: — I  gave  Haas  &  Co.  an  order  to-day  for  linen  as  per  inclosed 
list.  You  will  also  perceive  I  bought  sheeting  from  them.  We  compared 
samples  with  those  you  sent,  and  thought  their's  the  better.  If  you  know  of 
any  lower  prices  at  which  any  of  these  numbers  have  been  sold,  try  and 
get  ours  just  as  low. 

Stir  Bernard  Ulman  people  up  about  our  goods.  We  need  everything 
ordered  badly.  Ship  by  express. 

Let  me  know  Berner's  price  for  plaid  cottons,  29  to  30  inch  widths. 
I  buy  here  at  8£.  I  want  a  case  of  one  style  they  have  if  I  can  secure  it. 

Messrs.  P.  Elverson  6*  Nephew,  Lock  Box  R,  Montreal,  Canada. 

GENTLEMEN: — Acknowledging  your  favor  of  the  i6th,  which  has  just 
come  to  hand  on  account  of  its  having  been  directed  to  Chattanooga,  would 
say  that  we  would  be  pleased  to  quote  you  on  sash-weights  in  5,000  or 
10,000  pound  lots  at  $19.50  per  ton,  F.  O.  B.  here;  in  carload  lots  of  15,000 
pounds,  $19,  F.  O.  B.  here. 

We  make  a  large  variety  of  weights  in  sizes,  and  those  with  a  handsome 
and  perfect  eye.  We  have  sold  quite  a  good  many  in  your  territory,  and 
would  be  pleased  to  fill  your  orders  for  such  a  quantity  as  you  may  desire. 

Hoping  to  hear  favorably  from  you  at  an  early  date,  we  remain, 

Respectfully. 

(i4thday.)  TUESDAY,  SEPTEMBER  aist,  1883. 

C.  Naylor,  Esq.,  Box  49,  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah. 

DEAR  SIR: — Yours  at  hand.  Early  in  the  week  values  of  pig  lead 
here  were  weaker,  and  sales  were  made  at  3.75.  Latterly  there  is  a  firmer 
feeling;  3.80  is  freely  bid,  with  3.85,  3.87^,  3.90  asked. 

The  amount  of  lead  offering  is  very  small,  and  it  would  not  surprise  us 
to  see  higher  values  rather  than  lower.  * 

Lead  at  London  still  continues  strong,  and  since  our  last  circular  a  rise 
of  ;£i  per  ton  is  recorded.  There  is  no  question  now  but  what  lead  is  in 
strong  hands  and  £\$  will  be  reached  before  a  halt  takes  place.  The 
general  impression  is  that  lead,  with  other  metals,  is  good  property. 

Messrs.  L.  Ulberman  &  Sons,  Oil  City,  Penn. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  igth  in  which  you  state  that 
you  can  not  allow  8  per  cent,  discount,  and  ask  us  to  remit  what  you  call 
a  balance  of  three  dollars  and  nine  cents  ($3.09)  on  our  bills  of 
August  i gth  and  2ist,  duplicates  of  which  you  have  sent  us. 


i.>.  /..<U....').>.J  _ 

\       ^/-   1  ,      v<\ 
•A -r- U~ -v 

*Jt         Xrt  [ 

-71 v  ^  fj 

C7V  \J 

P  v_x^  ^  Nn?t      «TA_  )  «\/c.  \  Ys  L  /  ^° 

o 
-*    S  <^-J--v^J 

^  t...v.^±? 

..a.i_  L_  i^ k ^ 

x  ^V  \          ^ 
j  ^  v-^j        C  <v  ^  i  vrT>\  C      i        ^" 

""l t'-dlx "*• 


The  terms  of  the  above  bills  are  written  thereon — seven  off,  ten,  sixty 
days  dating.  The  extra  i  per  cent,  charges  in  your  statement  is  for  the 
sixty  days'  interest  for  prepayment.  If  you  are  not  willing  to  allow  interest 
at  the  rate  of  6  per  cent,  per  annum  for  prepayment  of  post  dated  bills,  please 
advise  us,  and  hereafter  we  will  not  remit  until  maturity  of  bill. 

(i5th  day.)  WEDNESDAY,  OCTOBER  22d,  1884. 

Mr.  X.  Idler,  Hortonsville,  Wis. 

DEAR  SIR: — I  received  a  letter  this  morning  inclosing  a  remittance  with 
the  above  name  signed  and  the  town  of  Hortonsville,  but  no  State  named, 
and  the  envelope  was  marked  so  poorly  by  the  postmaster,  from  whose 
office  the  letter  was  sent,  that  I  could  not  get  the  State  name  from  that  source. 

I  find,  however,  there  is  a  town  named  Hortonsville  in  Wisconsin,  and  I 
therefore  send  to  that  town  the  article  desired.  If  it  should  happen  to  reach 
you,  please  remember  in  the  future  not  only  to  write  your  name  plainly  to  every 
communication  you  send  out,  but  be  sure  always  to  give  your  address  in  full, 
including  State  and  county,  especially  when  you  send  money.  This  precau- 
tion will  save  you  and  others  considerable  inconvenience. 


JV.  Smith,  -Esq.,  Fargo,  Dak. 

DEAR  SIR: — The  popularity  of  our  Impervious  Packages  has  induced 
others  to  offer  for  sale  packages  represented  to  be  the  same  as  ours.  All 
Impervious  Packages  made  by  us  are  fully  protected  by  U.  S  patents,  of 
which  we  are  sole  owners,  and  are  the  only  Wood  Packages  that  can  be  so 
prepared  as  to  be  impervious  to  oil  without  infringing  on  our  patents. 

In  all  cases  of  infringements,  dealers,  users,  and  manufacturers  are 
alike  liable  under  the  law.  Therefore,  for  your  own  protection,  we  respect- 
fully caution  you  against  all  Impervious  Packages  represented  to  be  the 
same  as  ours;  also  against  infringements  on  any  of  our  patents. 

See  that  all  Impervious  Packages  offered  you  are  made  by  the  Impervious 
Package  Co.,  and  bear  their  name.  All  others  are  imitations  or  infringe- 
ments. 

(i6th  day.)  THURSDAY,  NOVEMBER  23d,  1885. 

Messrs  Z.  I.  Gypson  &°  Co.,  Box  S,  Melbourne,  Australia. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  dated  November  ipth  acknowledging 
our  remittance  of  $32.87  in  settlement  of  bill  of  September  2d,  signed 
"  Z.  I.  Gypson  &  Co.,  per  Snyder,"  and  in  Snyder's  hand-writing  the 
following : 

"Gentlemen: — You  took  off  more  discount  than  we  allow  for  extra 
dating.  After  this  please  take  off  at  the  rate  of  6  per  cent,  per  annum." 

The  terms  of  payment  endorsed  upon  the  above  bill  are  as  follows: 
"7  off  10  after  Nov.  ist."  This  made  the  bill  due  Nov.  nth.  You  had 
the  money  in  your  hands  on  the  23d  of  September. 

Deduct  Sept.  23  from  Nov.  n  leaves  49  days.  The  face  of  the 
invoice  is  $35.63.  Seven  per  cent,  discount  from  $35.63  leaves  $33.13^. 
The  interest  on  $33. 13^  for  49  days  at  6  per  cent,  per  annum  is  a  fraction 
over  25  cents.  We  remitted  you  $32.87.  Respectfully. 


\   ^ 

..J  ........ 


.  -*f 

s  .....-  J.. 


I   <r\^\ 

.v>  ...d..J    _ 


— O 


i.  ...... 


r  ........  L^...r^A. 


-  —C 


.7.A  ..         .  A 


Rev.  D.  E.  Yorick,  El  Paso,  Texas. 

DEAR  SIR: — Inclosed  you  will  find  a  postal-card  which  I  have  received 
and  sent  circulars  to.  At  the  same  time  I  wrote  to  the  party  giving  your 
name  as  my  Texas  agent.  It  would  probably  be  best  for  you  to  write  to, 
or  call  upon  him  and  see  if  you  can  obtain  his  order.  He  should  at  least 
have  a  set  of  your  circulars. 

Have  )'ou  got  the  copy  ready  yet  for  the  special  circular  you  were  think- 
ing of  getting  out?  You  may  have  it  printed  in  your  town,  but  be  sure 
to  send  us  a  few  copies  of  it,  that  we  may  keep  track  of  what  is  being  done 
in  Texas,  and  place  same  on  file. 

We  think  you  are  making  a  mistake  in  making  special  use  of  the  No.  o 
circular  in  preference  to  the  No.  453,  but  as  you  are  on  the  ground  and  get 
a  better  chance  to  feel  the  pulse  of  the  business  portion  of  your  State  than 
we  do,  we  suppose  you  are  in  a  position  to  know  best. 

Let  us  have  your  weekly  reports  promptly,  and  oblige. 

<i;th  day.)  FRIDAY,  DECEMBER  3oth,  1886. 

Misses  K.  6°  L.  Armour,  Marion  C.  H.,  S.  C. 

MESDAMES: — We  have  the  inclosed  statement  in  which  you  request 
us  to  "  kindly  note  terms  on  invoice." 

You  will  observe  by  the  duplicate  invoice  which  we  inclose  that  these 
goods  were  bought  2  off  10,  as  of  Oct.  15,  making  the  bill  due  Oct.  25.  We 
remitted  for  the  goods  Sept.  23,  deducting  the  2  per  cent,  commission, 
and  a  y2  of  i  per  cent,  for  interest  for  the  thirty  days. 

Would  it  not  be  a  better  plan  for  you  to  note  on  the  page  of  your  ledger 
on  which  our  account  is  inscribed  the  terms  upon  which  you  sell  us  our 
respective  bills,  and  thereby  save  us  the  trouble  and  annoyance  of  looking 
up  these  matters,  only  to  find  that  they  are  settled  correctly  ? 

In  looking  up  this  bill,  however,  we  find  that  there  was  a  charge  of 
$1.80  for  packing-cases  which  was  overlooked  by  us  and  not  deducted 
from  the  bill.  This  amount  we  charge  back  to  you  and  will  deduct  from 
the  next  purchase.  Respectfully  yours. 

G.  U.  Kline,  Esq.,  Mt.  Holly,  N.  J. 

DEAR  SIR: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  agth,  and  note  contents.  We 
regret  the  occurrence  as  much  as  you  do.  We  wanted  the  goods  as  ordered 
because  they  were  cheap,  and  our  trade  needs  them  at  the  present  time. 

It  is,  however,  one  of  the  invariable  rules  of  the  house,  from  which  we 
never  depart  under  any  circumstance  whatever,  to  reject  every  shipment  of 
goods  that  is  not  fairly  within  the  order,  and  particularly  where  there  is  any 
attempt  to  force  upon  us  a  greater  quantity  of  goods  than  we  ordered. 

In  this  case  there  were  nearly  twice  as  many  goods  sent  us  as  we 
ordered  from  your  Mr.  Bach,  and  a  line  of  goods  which  under  no  circum- 
stances do  we  want. 

We  do  not  know  w,here  the  fault  lies,  whether  it  was  in  Mr.  Bach  pre- 
suming that  if  you  sent  the  goods  we  would  keep  them,  or  not. 

Next  time  you  have  any  dealings  with  us  you  will  understand  better, 
and  know  that  it  is  no  use  to  send  us  goods  we  do  not  order.  In  fact  it  is 
worse  than  useless,  as  it  defeats  the  sale  of  the  goods  we  did  order,  which 
we  return  with  the  others  on  principle.  Respectfully. 


2,. .>:./.... 

$£X  "" 

C  "V  <\  f  /  i 

V  >"      I  G/      y,      ^     \  >^      ~ 

•^•/ v»..?c ...... v- 

—:£•*•** 

^ 

/  z 
v...l... 

'"i 

•%^ 
<^*~>  I ,  -       \  ^-v^ 

^•^-\       /T>  *  ^ 

-.>/ O^Jl  v^r.*..r 

«J      A 

r  -«. 

^  'v\^       -  r  ^^    *  °~^ s 


(:8th  day.)  SATURDAY,  DECEMBER  3ist,  1890. 

Mr.  Y.  Otterly,  Jr.,  9314  Broadway^  New  York  City. 

DEAR  SIR: — We  have  y-vir  letter  of  the  28th  and  note  contents.  It 
would  be  a  useless  bother  r*  \  .rouble  for  us  to  keep  a  bank  account  in  New 
York.  If  New  York  mercnaots  would  rather  have  checks  on  New  York  in 
payment  of  our  bills,  it  would  be  much  easier  for  us  to  send  them  the 
drafts  of  our  bank  here  on  New  York  for  payment  of  their  bills. 

We  send  our  own  check  as  a  matter  of  convenience,  and  it  is  all  nonsense 
for  people  in  New  York  to  claim  that  our  checks  on  our  bank  here  are  not 
current  in  New  York,  or  that  they  have  to  wait  until  payment  of  those 
checks  before  the  amounts  are  passed  to  their  credit. 

There  has  not  been  an  hour  since  the  firm  of  Jones,  Doyle  &  Co.  com- 
menced business  that  exchange  on  New  York  has  not  been  from  ten  to  fifty 
cents  on  the  thousand  dollars  discount  at  our  banks  here  in  Chicago,  and 
when  the  merchants  with  whom  we  deal  tell  you  that  a  bank  in  New  York 
will  refuse  to  take  a  check  from  Chicago  on  deposit,  which  is  worth  from 
one-tenth  to  one-half  per  cent,  premium  in  New  York  funds,  it  is  simply 
absurd. 

When  you  take  into  consideration  that  every  bill  of  this  firm  is  settled 
every  Monday  morning,  averaging  less  than  four  days  from  the  time  the 
goods  are  received,  it  ought  to  be  a  satisfactory  method  of  dealing  to  the 
merchants  in  New  York,  and  if  not,  we  can  manage  to  buy  in  Chicago. 

Mr.  S.  Quartermart,  Montpelier,  Vt. 

DEAR  SIR  : — Your  favor  of  the  26th  instant  at  hand;  also  the  news- 
paper. The  article  is  partially  correct.  This  company  has  increased  its 
capital  stock  to  $725,000,  and  bought  out  the  Salt  Lake  City  and  San  Fran- 
cisco owners  of  the  mine. 

The  writer's  interest  was  merged  into  the  present  company,  who  now 
own  and  control  the  mine. 

The  company  is  composed  of  St.  Louis,  Akron  and  Hamburg,  Ger- 
many, stockholders.  Up  to  the  time  of  purchase,  this  company  was  simply 
the  selling  agent.  Col.  Conger,  Thomas  Welch,  Judge  Grant,  and  C.  P. 
Cobbs  are  of  the  members  of  this  company  at  Akron.  We  have  no  idea  of 
forming  a  trust,  but  expect  to  run  our  business  independently  from  any 
other  similar  concern. 

We  have  been  doing  considerable  exporting,  but  expect  to  push  it  still 
more.  Egyptian  Asphaltum,  here  as  well  as  abroad,  has  declined  in  conse- 
quence to  six  and  one-half  cents  per  pound,  and  in  isolated  cases,  even  a 
trifle  lower.  We  have  also  made  practical  tests  lately  in  the  way  of  paving, 
which  have,  so  far,  in  all  cases  proved  a  glorious  success. 

The  price  of  the  mine  is  $111,000;  the  size  of  the  fissure  as  stated  is 
substantially  correct. 

It  is  five  and  one-half  feet  wide,  but  tapers  gently  at  both  ends.  It 
can  be  worked  for  eleven  thousand  feet,  for  it  has  been  opened  at  that 
distance.  The  deposit  is  in  a  true  fissure-vein,  consequently  it  will  prob- 
ably not  be  known  in  our  life-time  how  deep  it  runs.  So  far  the  fissure  is 
vertical,  without  any  indications  of  the  dip.  Very  truly. 


^5 


W 


p 


1 


s^ 


o 

o 


9? 


p 


La 


\ 


!\ 


J 


\ 


J 


J 


J 


^ 


J 


\ 


^cV 


r 


^ 


J 


J 


r 


\ 


( 


U 


\ 


SOIMIE   IPIEIR/TIItTIEJIsrT 

Showing  the  advantages  possessed  by  Haven's  distinct  joined  vowels  over  othe- 
systems  in  making  legible,  without  decreasing  speed,  those  words  wherein  vowels- 
must  be  written,  etc.,  etc. 


GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

LINDSLEY.    CROSS. 

Ape 

\ 

\ 

1            ^7 

Away 

^ 

<! 

^     rr^ 

Iowa 

^ 

| 

g     -^ 

I.  PITMAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Evaporate. 

^ 

V 

\ 

I.  PITMAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Emigrant 

^ 

^s« 

>^ 

InimidVant 

^ 

y-U 

s^ 

B.  PI  THAN, 

I  PITMAN:. 

HAVEN. 

Koo. 

-. 

j^-s 

P^x 

^r 

Leave 

Love 

Will  Have 

You  will  Have  teen 

PITMAN. 

f\_ 

A* 

/TL. 

r\: 

^s 

HAVEN. 

.... 

r^\ 

"IT 

x?^| 

/r~N 

r     » 

Copyright,  1892,  by    Curtis  Haven.     This  includes  entire    contents. 
All  rights  reserved. 

THE  MODERN  REPORTER 


A  Progressive  Monthly  Magazine  of  Practical  Short-Hand  and  Type-Writing  for  the 
Entire  Profession,  all  Teacher*  and  their  Pupils,  and  the  Home  Student. 


ELEVENTH   YEAR.  i.  MARCH       1892  J  10c  A  COPY. 


NUMBER  3.  lYlHnUn,     lOjZ.  1  $1.00  A  YEAR. 


OUR  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

E  of  the  most  important  facilities  possessed  by  Haven  Colleges,  and 
which  has  aided  so  materially  in  the  qualification  of  students  for 
court  reporting  shortly  after  finishing  their  three  months'  course  of  in- 
struction at  above  institutions,  has  been  the  especially  and  carefully  pre- 
pared Court  Reader  which  the  author  compiled  from  cases  in  his  own 
experience  which  he  considered  would  best  cover  most  all  possible  con- 
tingencies in  court  work,  and  include  within  its  compass  every  important 
legal  phrase  used  in  such  reporting. 

Heretofore  the  few  copies  of  this  reader  permitted  to  be  used  were 
written  with  typewriter  and  pen  by  Mr.  Haven  personally,  and  their  use 
limited  to  his  teachers,  but  so  widespread  has  grown  the  book's  reputation 
and  the  request  for  duplicates,  that  the  author,  having  copyrighted  it,  has 
concluded  to  place  it  within  the  reach  of  the  public  by  publication  in  these 
pages,  commencing  on  next  page  of  this  issue.  • 

The  series  of  cases  will  be  complete  in  six  numbers  of  THE  MODERN 
REPORTER — this,  and  the  issues  of  April,  May,  June,  July  and  August.  If 
bought  separately,  the  price  will  be  10  cents  per  copy;  where  the  six  are  pur- 
chased at  one  remittance,  53  cents;  to  those  who,  having  this  issue,  desire 
only  the  other  five,  45  cents  for  those  five. 

Teachers  of  all  systems  will  find  this  series  of  court  cases  of  great 
advantage  in  their  school  work. 


HAVEN'S  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 


z~...> 


'    i  A 


L 


•s- 


JOHN  WILLIAMS 

vs.  COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS. 

DAILY  NEWS  CO.  )   BEFORE  JUDGE  ALFRED  MARSHALL.    CASE  No.  49. 

TRENTON,  N.  J.,  May  3,  1856. 

Ft>r  the  plaintiff  appears  Hon.  J.  L.  Simons. 

For  the  defendant  appear  Messrs.  Black  and  Strong. 

JOHN  WILLIAMS,  the  plaintiff,  sworn  in  his  own  behalf. 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Simons: 

Q.     Mr.  Williams,  you  are  the  plaintiff  in  this  suit,  are  you  not? 

A.     I  am. 

Q.     What  public  position  do  you  hold? 

A.     I  am  Sheriff  of  this  county. 

Q.  The  article  which  caused  the  present  suit — in  what  newspaper  did 
it  appear? 

A.     In  the  Daily  News,  of  this  city,  date  of  February -ioth. 

Q.     Of  what  year? 

A.     This  year. 

To  defendant's  attorneys: 

Do  you  admit  publication;  or,  shall  I  further  prove  it? 
Mr.  Black: 

We  admit  publishing  the  article  in  question. 

To  witness: 

Q.     You  know  the  defendants  well,  do  you  not? 

A.     I  do. 

Q.     Have  you  had  much  intercourse  with  them,  as  a  public  officer? 

A.     I  have  had  up  to  the  first  of  January  of  this  year. 

Q.     Of  what  did  that  intercourse  consist? 

A.  Giving  to  their  paper  the  advertisements  of  the  county  sales  of  this 
county  for  publication. 

Q.     When  did  you  last  authorize  them  to  print  such  sales? 

A.     Some  time  in  December  of  last  year. 

Q.  Then  you  have  given  them  no  public  printing  on,  nor  since,  the  first 
of  January,  of  this  year?  v 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Had  you  no  advertisements  to  give? 

A.     Yes,  sir.     I  had  quite  a  number  since  last  December. 

Q.  Why  did  you  not  give  such  advertisements  this  year,  as  well  as  last, 
to  the  Daily  News? 

Objected  to.     Objection  overruled.     Exception  for  defendant. 


•f^  j  .°r>   p «x°i  c-v..       ../ -A>  VP 

•  / 

o/ 

^ 

I 

"-M ^--H- 

L.fL.7  "^  f  .        1 

•••\S\ 9 <-^     ^  ••"* 

Ti 
^i 

1 

•  •  v  •  * "  • "  o"  v* 

^1 *>^g"          ••••£••   >  •  -^JS 

\-  ^~ 

V 


WILLIAM  JONES  )       COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS. 

vs.  BEFORE  JUDGE  JAMES  PARSONS. 

STATE  INSURANCE  ASS'N.  )  CASE  No.  506. 

CAMDEN,  N.  J.,  January  5,  1821. 

For  the  plaintiff  appears  Samuel  R.  Taylor,  Esq. 

For  the  defendant  appear  Messrs.  Walters  and  Harvey. 

WILLIAM  JONES,  the  plaintiff,  sworn. 

EXAMINATION-IN-CHIEF. 

By  Mr.  Taylor: 

Q.  What  is  your  name  ? 

A.  William  Jones. 

Q.  Are  you  the  plaintiff  in  this  suit  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Where  do  you  reside  ? 

A.  Nineteenth  and  Federal  streets,  this  city. 

Q.  That  is  just  beyond  Cooper's  Creek  Bridge,  is  it  not,  Mr.  Jones? 

A.  Yes,  sir,  in  the  open  country. 

Q.  On  what  is  known  as  the  Moorestown  pike  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  own  property  out  there  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir;  a  farm  of  about  fifty  acres. 

Q.  On  what  side  of  the  road  is  it,  Mr.  Jones  ? 

A.  On  the  right-hand  side,  coming  out  of  Camden;  that  is,  going  east. 

Mr.  Harvey: 

If  it  please  the  Court,  I  would  like  to  make  a  preliminary  request  that  no 
more  time  be  wasted  on  this  case  than  is  necessary.  General  Wharton.  the 
Vice-President  of  the  State  Insurance  Association,  here  present,  desires  to 
leave  the  town  as  soon  as  possible  on  important  business,  to  be  transacted 
to-day,  at  the  office  of  the  Company,  Newark,  N.  J.,  and  desires  me  to  say 
that  the  location  of  Mr.  Jones'  property  is  not  a  matter  of  defense  with  us, 
and  it  is  furthermore  admitted  by  us  that  the  barn  owned  by  Mr.  Jones,  and 
which  was  burned  on  the  night  of  August  14,  1820,  was  located  on  his  prop- 
erty, wherever  that  may  be,  and  was  the  one  insured  by  us  under  Policy  No. 
7501.  We  simply  differ  in  regard  to  the  valuation  of  the  property  de- 
stroyed, and  hope  questions  will  be  confined  to  that  fact. 

The  Court: 

This  being  understood  by  the  plaintiff,  I  have  no  doubt  he  will  be  glad 
to  take  advantage  of  this  opportunity  ot  saving  both  himself  and  the  Court 
valuable  time. 


^ •  / 

....... A.. /...^  ?       l  ^    a     .      v 

i          \  <="* 

•^ o- 

..G  «  ..C.  -c  ..:....7f?...!.  v 

_£  ^a  •••••v-  -*  

^^N      -      S^?—' TXv'... 

.  k_^..  L/....</..  V I 

al 

<>^ 4...\ .^ .TVT — .s> 

•        ^    V     i      "<\  \\-t0 

vVi 1-^ 

•:••;•-< £«f/v**fe-V 

_  %}..-> .^..A r^:..j 

X  ^  Qj)        -<J_^ 

...\  ...  -^ .T\>   rf-.N 


FRANKLIN  B.  MILLS)  COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS. 

vs.  V      BEFORE  JUDGE  WM.  C.  ALBRIGHT. 

JOHN  B.  HENRY.      )  CASE  No.  2506. 

PHILADELPHIA,  Nov.  29,  1831. 

APPEARANCES: 

G.  H.  Lewis,  Esq.,  for  plaintiff. 
Henry  Darcy,  Esq.,  for  defendant. 

FRANKLIN  B.  MILLS,  the  plaintiff,  being  duly  sworn,  testified: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Lewis: 

Q.     What  is  your  name  in  full,  Mr.  Mills? 

A.     Franklin  B.  Mills. 

Q.     Are  you  the  plaintiff  in  this  case? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     State  your  business,  please? 

A.     I  am  in  the  installment  business. 

Q.     That  is,  you  sell  goods  on  installments  or  periodic  payments? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     All  kinds  of  goods? 

A.     Most  all  household  goods. 

Q.     Where  is  your  place  of  business? 

A.     Nine-hundred-and-five,  and  nine-hundred-ancl-seven  Lincoln  Ave. 

Q.     Do  you  know  the  defendant,  John  B.  Henry? 

A.     I  do. 

Q.     Have  you  had  business  transactions  with  him? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  several. 

Q.     What  sort? 

A.     He  has  bought  household  goods  of  me  on  Hie  installment  plan. 

Q.     Did  he  always  pay  for  such  purchases? 

A.     Always,  except  on  the  last  occasion. 

Q.     When  was  that? 

A.  January  i4th,  of  last  year,  he  bought  a  set  of  furniture  of  me  for 
which  he  has  not  paid. 

Q.     Has  he  made  any  payment  on  account? 

A.  I  sold  him  the  set  for  sixty  dollars,  payable  ten  dollars  down  and 
two-dollars-and-fifty-cents  per  week  until  paid.  He  made  the  first  pay- 
ment of  ten  dollars  and  his  first  weekly  installment  of  two-dollars-and-fifty- 
cents,  and  since  then  he  has  paid  me  no  more  money. 

Q.     Did  Mr.  Henry  state  any  reason  for  discontinuing  payments? 

A.     He  gave  me  a  reason;  but  it  is  a  reason  which  I  consider  none. 


y...V... 


.1. 


"T 


....o_/ 


J.. 


._  V 


A 


"5 


, 
~\\ 


.i™. 


"£• 


^ 


UNITED  STATES  )  U.  S.   DISTRICT   COURT,  FOR  THE  NORTH- 

vs.  ERN  DISTRICT  OF  ILLINOIS. 

MURPHY  ET  AL.    )  BEFORE  JUDGE  BEE.     [No  JURY.]  •  CASE  No.  6754. 

CHICAGO,  June  20,  1880. 

SECOND  DAY — MORNING  SESSION. 

MR.  KOST  continuing  his  testimony  of  the  afternoon  before: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     I  gave  you  numbers  of  cars  yesterday — can  you   tell  me  where  the 
grain  in  those  cars  came  from? 

A.     The  numbers  are  mixed  up  on  my  memorandum  here.     I   have  got 
six  of  them. 

Q.     Shall  I  call  the  number  of  the  car? 

A.     I  think  the  last  three  you  called  are  on  that  slip  there,  from  St.  Joe 
elevator. 
The  Court: 

Give  us  the  numbers  of  those  cars. 
Witness: 

4399,  18263,  ^646.     Those  are  Pink   Line  cars  from  Continental  ele- 
vator, billed  October  26.     If  you  will  give  me  some  of  the  other  numbers,  I 
can  tell  better. 
Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     What  numbers  have  you  there? 

A.     4399,  18263,  i5646. 
Mr.  Wallace: 

Does  he  say  those  cars  were  inspected  out  of  the  Pink  Line? 
Mr.  Sling: 

Yes;  will  you  give  the  dates? 

A.     Inspected  October  26. 

Q.     Inspected  October? 

A.     Inspected  out  into  Pink  Line  cars. 

Q.     State  respecting  car  number  35404. 

A.     That  was  inspected  October  27,  from  the  Continental  elevator. 
The  Court: 

Q.     When? 

A.     October  26,  Continental  Fast  Line  cars. 

Q.     12877? 

A.     Just  the  same. 

Q.     8545? 

A.     That  was  the  same. 


0 


•Vv 


X. 


/.,..!. 


* J- 


.W. 


r---- 


The  balance  of  these  Court  Cases  will  appear  In  April,  May,  June,  July  and  August  numbers. 
30  cents  each  or  53  cents  for  all,  including  this  issue;  45  cents  without  this  issue. 


Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     They  were  all  Continental  Fast  Line  cars,  were  they? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  of  Continental  Fast  Line  cars. 
The  Court: 

Q.     What  is  the  next  number?  ' 
Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     I  am  asking  the  witness  now  about  cars  in  bill  of  lading  number 
20,779. 

A.     Continental  Fast  Line  car  number  9784. 
Mr.  Wallace: 

Q.     Is  that  paper  in  evidence  from  which  you  are  reading? 
Mr.  Sling: 

A.     I  am  reading  from  a  bill   of  lading  that  I  before  inquired  of  the 
witness  respecting  the  numbers  of  the  cars. 
Mr.  Wallace: 

Q.     Then  the  paper  you  are  reading  from  is  not  in  evidence? 
Mr.  Sling: 

A.     It  is  not  necessary  for  me  to  have  it  in  evidence. 

Objected  to.     Court  ruled  that  prosecutor  could  ask  a  question  about  it. 

Mr.  Sling:   [To  witness.] 

Q.     I  ask  you  to  look  at  Continental  Fast  Line  car  number  9784,  and  state 
where  it  was  loaded  from.  . 

A.     Continental  Fast  Line  car  number  9784  was  inspected  out  of  Con- 
tinental elevator  November  13. 

Q.     Bill  of  lading  number   22389 — now,  if  you  please,  I   inquire   about 
Pink  Line  car  number  2613,  and  ask  you  to  state  where  it  is  from. 

A.     I  have  it  Erie  Line  car  number  2613. 
The  Court: 

Q.     Erie  Line? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     What  was  the  weight  in  car? 

A.     I  can  not  tell  you  the  weight  of  an  individual  car;  can  only  give  you 
weight  of  the  shipment — seven  cars  there  were. 
Mr.  Sling:  • 

Q.     If  Your  Honor  will  just  leave  that  blank,  I  will  read   it  again  later. 
What  other  numbers  comprise  that  seven-car  shipment? 

A.     12563,  for  one. 
The  Court: 

Q.     Erie  Line  cars? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  all  Erie  Line  cars;  12563  is  the  first  number. 


REVOLUTION  IN  TYPEWRITING  MACHINES. 

Everything  has  to  have  a  beginning,  but  when  away  in  the  year  1700  or  there- 
abouts, one  man  in  England  and  another  in  America,  imbued  with  the  idea  that  the 
art  of  printing  should  be  more  extended  than  it  then  was,  essayed  the  task  of  putting 
together  a  machine  that  would  print  by  hand  and  take  the  place  of  the  labor  of  the 
pen  (the  quill  pen  it  was  then),  each  little  thought  the  other  was  attempting  the 
same  thing  over  5,000  miles  away.  Their  efforts,  however,  were  very  crude,  and  for  a 
long  time  they  practically  amounted  to  nothing,  except  to  incite  others  to  make  like 
attempts,  until  Mr.  Sholes  and  a  couple  of  co-laborers  had  patented  that  which  at  the 
time  they  considered  a  perfect  typewriting  machine,  and  which  was  looked  upon  as  a 
marvel  in  its  way. 

That  it  did  not  at  once  receive  that  recognition  which  was  expected  of  it  was 
the  fault  mostly  of  a  lack  of  appreciation  on  the  part  of  the  public,  although  the 
machine  was  not  at  first  advertised  as  it  should  have  been,  partially  because  of  the  fact 
that  its  inventors  at  first  met  with  more  or  less  cool  receptions  from  those  who  now 
use  it  most.  The  leading  law  firms  thought  that  they  could  not  possibly  use  any  doc- 
uments written  on  the  typewriting  machine,  and  even  law  stenographers  were  slow  in 
adopting  it  because  of  this  legal  objection;  but  a  beginning  was  made  first  among  busi- 
ness men  and  to  them  is  due  the  main  credit  for  the  adoption  of  these  instruments, 
until  now  manufacturers  can  scarcely  furnish  them  fast  enough. 

The  rapid  strides  in  the  use  of  typewriting  machines  brought  them  into  the 
notice  of  a  great  many  mechanical  geniuses,  who  became  such  able  critics  and  made 
so  many  practical  tests  of  the  abilities  of  the  instrument  that  they  soon  proved  that 
the  machines  earlier  on  the  market  would  not  meet  every  necessary  demand  upon 
them,  and  hence  applications  for  patents  on  new  machines  began  to  appear  in  the 
patent  office  at  Washington. 

So  many  persons  have  of  late  years  tried  their  hands  at  the  manufacture  of  new 
machines  or  improvements  upon  those  which  the  public  took  to  best,  that  the  labor  of 
these  inventors  has  materialized  into  what  is  as  near  to  the  perfect  machine  as  the 
present  day  can  conceive  in  such  an  instrument.  The  machine  which  is  the  result  of 
all  these  experiments  is  the  Smith-Premier  Typewriter,  the  only  one  at  the  present 
day  which  is  fulfilling  the  demand  for  an  easy  touch,  giving  the  greatest  possible  speed, 
a  ribbon  having  a  double  motion,  sufficient  weight  of  carriage  to  make  the  writing 
firm,  with  an  arrangement  of  the  type  bearings  insuring  perfect  alignment,  with  the 
strength  to  make  heavy  manifolding  as  neatly  as  writing  on  a  single  sheet,  an  eas\r 
arrangement  for  quickly  inserting  omissions  just  where  such  omissions  should  be  in- 
serted, the  latter  alone  being  a  great  advantage  over  the  cumbrous  plans  of  all  other 
machines,  but  only  one  of  the  hundreds  of  little  conveniences  to  aid  the  operator  in 
securing  rapidity  and  correctness,  as  well  as  the  most  artistic  results,  distinguishing 
this  machine  from  all  others,  and  placing  it  one  hundred  years  ahead  of  any  invention 
of  its  kind. 

It  is  easily  operated,  always  responds  readily,  and  the  good  work  which  business 
and  professional  men  receive  from  its  hands  causes  it  to  be  preferred  by  all  classes  of 
people.  Where  it  is  once  used,  there  is  great  difficulty  in  getting  an  operator  to 
manipulate  any  other,  simply  because  its  many  conveniences  are  so  strikingly  absent 
from  other  instruments. 


TWO    HAPPY  SHORTHANDERS. 

Though  they  are  now  morally  one,  they  still  remain  two  distinct  writers  of  Haven's 
Practical  Phonography.  Writers  of  a  single  system,  but  single  no  longer  except  in 
unison  of  purpose,  future  aims,  and  in  that  bond  which  is  no  bondage,  but  which  merrily 
makes  the  world  go  'round,  making  youth  light-hearted  and  old  age  beautiful— the 
little  word  of  four  letters,  which,  for  the  two  happy  beings  we  have  in  mind,  doubtless 
contains  the  whole  alphabet  of  living — love. 

William  Gleason.  of  Chicago,  and  Jeannette,  nee  Miller,  recently  of  Tower  Hill, 
this  state,  were,  on  February  2nd,  made  man  and  wife,  in  accordance  with  the  law  of 
God  and  the  ordinance  of  this  commonwealth,  and  have  begun  their  new  life  at  No. 
1564  Monroe  street. 

As  students  of  the  Chicago  Haven  College  of  Shorthand  they  were  known  as  reg- 
ular in  attendance,  painstaking,  industrious,  cheerful,  and  knowing  them  also  socially, 
the  writer  feels  assured  that  their  many  good  qualities  of  both  heart  and  hand  will 
continue  with  them  throtigh  life,  making  their  pathway  bright,  helpful,  and  full  of 
sunshine.  That  this  may  be  the  case  and  that  they  may  receive  every  good  they  wish 
for  themselves  is  without  doubt  the  desire  of  all  their  former  fellow-students  and  ac- 
quaintances, as  it  assuredly  is  of  their  teachers. 

ITEMS,  PERSONAL  AND  OTHERWISE. 

Mr.  Ole  Owens,  just  returned  from  a  two  years'  sojourn  east,  Saturday  last  favored 
with  a  call,  the  author  of  the  system  he  writes. 

Mr.  James  Smith,  Jr.,  of '  the  Cleveland  Stenographers' Association,  paid  calls  at 
the  Chicago  Shorthand  Schools  recently. 

A  lady  who  entered  the  Chicago  Haven  College  February  15th  without  previous 
shorthand  knowledge,  finished  all  the  lessons  of  the  theory  by  February  24th.  This  is 
quick  time,  but  it  has  been  done  before  by  us  "many  a  time,  many  a  time",  and  we  ex- 
pect to  go  right  on  until  we  shame  the  teachers  of  old-fashioned  methods  into  the 
adoption  of  a  modern  plan  of  teaching  that  does  not  rob  students  of  the  months  and 
years  of  time  and  money  which  the  old  plans  do. 

"I  like  your  little  paper  because  it  has  in  it  just  what  I  want  a  shorthand  paper 
for  at  all — plenty  of  shorthand  notes.  If  I  want  the  current  news  of  the  day  or  litera- 
ture, why,  the  daily  papers,  my  Harper's  and  other  periodicals  will  furnish  that,  but 
in  the  meantime  I  am  falling  back  in  my  shorthand  unless  I  have  pome  such  models  as 
those  furnished  by  your  'Reporter.'  I  am  still  teaching  your  system  and  like  it  better 
every  year." — Miss  IDA  BOTD,  East  Oregonian  Bldg.,  Pendleton,  Oregon.  ' 

True  and  tried  friends  are  always  welcome,  consequently  "Vick's  Floral  Guide" 
is  sure  of  a  warm  reception,  especially  when  dressed  as  daintily  as  this  year.  The 
"Nellie  Lewis"  Carnation  on  the  front  of  cover,  and  "Brilliant  Poppies"  on  the  back, 
are  unusually  attractive,  and  the  numerous  colored  plates  of  flowers  and  vegetables 
are  certainly  works  of  art  and  merit.  The  first  twenty-four  pages,  printed  in  violet 
ink,  describe  Novelties  and  Specialtifs.  Send  ten  cents  to  JAMES  VICK'S  SONS, 
Rochester,  N.  Y.,  and  procure  a  copy  of  this  attractive  and  useful  catalogue.  It  costs 
nothing,  as  the  ten  cents  can  be  deducted  from  the  first  order. 


"VICK'S  SEEDS 


*' Brilliant"    Poppy,  packet .......' 15c. 

Roses,  Waban  and  DeGraw,  both  for  50c. 
6  Bare  Chrysanthemums,  each  50c.  ? 

set 82.50 

6  Choice  Geraniums,  each  25c. ;  set  1  ,OO 
Sweet  Corn  "  Golden  Nugget,1'  pac" 


Garden  Pea  "Charmer,"  packet 15c. 

Potato  "  American  Wonder,"  per  lb.,   30c. 
Pansies,  our  superb  strain,  look  almost 

human  packet 50c. 

Pansy,  Extra  choice,  packet 25c 

icket  15c. 

Any  one  not  now  a  subscriber  can  have  VICK'S  MAGAZINE  one  year  free,  who  orders  SI 
worth  from  us  before  May  1st. 

riDDAI       PllinC     ICOO     One  writer  says:"  Stands  at  head 
iLUnAL     UU  I  U  L,    lOUZ.  of  all  charmer  catalogues."     Every 

person   interested   in   Plants,    Flowers   or   Vegetables,  should  have  one.     Price  only  ten 

cents,  which  may  be  deducted  from  first  order. 

A  packet  of  40-lb.  Oat  FREE  with  each  order  when  desired. 


44 


TEACHERS'  DEPARTMENT. 


J5|f~Below  we  give  a  fac-simile  of  the  beautiful  diplomas  prepared  for 
Haven  graduates.  They  are  printed  on  heavy,  highly  calendered  paper, 
i  y£  x  22  inches  in  size.  Every  teacher  should  have  them  for  their  graduates, 
as  any  Haven  teacher  can  use  them,  no  matter  what  may  be  the  name  of  the 
school.  Write  for  special  terms.  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune-Building,  Chicago. 


is  a  fac-simile  of  Haven's  College  Rules  of  Order  Card.  They  are  printed 
on  heavy  cardboard,  22x28  inches  in  size.  Every  Haven  teacher  should  have  one.  Write 
for  price  of  this  and  other  teachers'  supplies  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  Chicago. 


INFORMATION  FOR  STUDENTS  OF  HAVEN    COLLEGES. 


PLAN  OF  STUDY  AND  PRACTICE. 

Theory  students  will  of  course  study  and 
practice  the  lessons  in  accordance  with  the  rules 
given  in  their  printed  lessons. 

Students  in  mock  letters  will  compare 
their  short-hand  of  the  mock  letters  with  the  correct 
forms  found  in  the  mock-letter  books,  re-writing 

ing  out  for  mistakes  in  siae  of  characters,  slant,  or 
curve  of  same,  shading  and  position,  as  well  as  proper 

mock  letters  ahead  of  your  day's  work ;  bUC  -if  any 
time  remains  after  the  mock  letters  of  the  day  .are- 

practiced,  then  the  student  in  the  mock  letters  should 
compare  notes  taken  in  speed  class  with  those  of  the 
college  readers,  practicing  every  above-described  error 
twelve  times,  but  making  no  long-hand  memoranda. 
Students  in  actual  work  are  the  only  ones 

short-hand  of  the  college  readers,  their  notes  taken  in 

expected  to  do  so  thoroughly  every  spare  minute  of 
their  sessions  net  taken  up  by  the  actual  work  of  the 
college.  No  long-hand  is  to  be  written  during-  sessions, 
nor  copying  of  words,  phrases,  or  articles  from  books  to 
be  indulged  ia,  but  comparison  of  your  notes  as 
suggested,  and  practice  of  every  mistake  made  in 
student's  own  nctee  as  shown  by  the  short-hand  of  the 
college  readers.  If  done  thoroughly,  in  accordance 
with  plan  explained  in  second  paragraph  under  this 
heading,  students  will  find  no  time  for  leisure. 

The  teacher  in  charge  will  take  pleasure  in 
further  explaining  these  plans  of  practice  to  students 


giving 


uglily 


.ding-    them,    as    well    aa 
for  their  strict  performance. 

IMPORTANT  NOTICE. 
Two  of   the  requirements  stated  in  our 

circulars,  as  being  necessary  to  the  proper  fitting  of 
a  student  for  an  office  position  in  three  months' 
lime,  are,  regular  attendance,  and  the  proper  use  of 
time  while  in  session. 

Regular  attendance  means  six  hours  at- 
tendance daily  each  week,  Monday  to  Friday  inclusive, 
and  four  hours  each  Saturday  during  term;  two  of 
the  hours  of  each  day  being  short-hand  speed  class. 

Proper  use  of  time  while  in  session  means 
individual  and  isolated  study  and  practice  in  the 
manner  prescribed  by  the  teacher;  such  isolated 

the  two  daily  sessions  of  three  hours  each,  except 
when  engaged  with  teacher  in  recitation,  kc. 

With  above  requirements  we  have  fitted 

r-^n   thus  fit  any  one  (who  can  spell  well  and  has 


L£nURE  SUBJECTS 




and  proper  use  of  time  above  indicated. 

Students,   therefore,   who    attend    irregu- 
larly; who  frequently  lose  portions  of  sessions  by 

or  by  leaving  before  the  end  of  their  sessions;  or, 

prescribed  by  us,  while  here,  must  NOT  expect 
to   graduate   In  three   months'   time. 


n  pe  tent 


r i  the  prescribed  time,  seemingly  withoot 

effort,  but  we  do  not  claim  such  results  under  such 
circumstances.    To    graduate    each    scholar    within 

be  spent  as  we  direct,  and  neither  wasted  by  inter- 
ruption of  study  nor  wrong  plans  of  study. 

WE  POSITIVELY  WILL  NOT  BE  RESPONSIBLE 
for  students    who    do/not   follow  out    our 
tiousiy  recommend  eucb  students  for  positions. 

COPYING  MOCK  LETTERS  OR  WORDS  OR  PHRASES 
is  prohibited,  as  it  wastes  time.  Practice 
all  mistakes  yon  fi"**  in  your  writing  twelve  times 
each,  but  do  no  long-band  copying  here. 

MANY  BUSINESS  MEN 

obtain    their    short-hand    and    type-writing 


r  students*  have  procured  situations  by  answering 
advertisements  in  these  "  want "  columns,  we  would, 
therefore,  advise  all  students,  as  soon  as  through  mock 
letters,  to  regularly  watch  such  advertisements  and 

ladies*  and  gents'  columns,  unless  gentlemen   are 
specified. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  wait  for  a  diploma 

before  seeking  a  situation,  nor  even  to  wait  until  in 

students  of  good  deportment  and  educai 


RULES  OF  DEPORTMENT 

only  of  teachers. 

2.  Unnecessary  talk  during  sessions  ma 
pensed  with.  - 

3.  Necessary  remarks  always  to  be  nude 

i  mirth  at  an] 


be  asked 
t  be  djs- 


4.  Load  talk  or  bout 
very  undesirable. 

5.  Politic*  or  religion  are  especially  to  be  excluded 


Dom  most  not  be  indulged  in  here. 
7.  Beading  books  or   newspapers  during'  session 


necessarily  leaving-  rooms  is  particularly  to  be  avoided. 
9.  STUDENTS    BRINGING    LUNCHEON     will 
please    carry    Away    with,  them    the   remnant*,  and 


>  fall  upon  the  fio 


be  placed    in    waste-baskets,   stoves,  nor    elsewhere 

10.  Students  will  please  NOT  entertain  VISITORS 

1 1 .  Scrape  of  paper,  he.  must  not  be  thrown  in 

•  fire-place.    The  waste*asket 

THE  COLLEGE  READERS,  LETTER-BOOKS,  Ac. 
must   not,  at    any    time,  be    hid    in    desk- 
drawers  or  elsewhere,  nor  taken  from  the  building: 


ANNUAL  CALENDAR. 


S.pt  SOU  u  Oct.  tit 


Jannaiv  Utl  to  20th. 
april  Uth  to  Slit 
July  Ifch  to  Slit 
Octobn  14th  to  20th. 


JuuiT  SUt  t»  27th. 
April  KM  to  Nth 
lw>sMi»iM 

Onobu  2  IB  10  27th 


JUL  Mth  u  r*b.  M 

ipnl  S9th  to  Ms;  Sth. 
July  nth  to  4«f  4th. 
Oct.  2M>  u  lor  3d 


Pehnuiy  Uth  to  I7ti 
*ay  13th  to  Uth. 
Input  Uth  U  Uth. 
Koreabtr  Uth  to  171 


.bnttiv  Uth  to  !4lh 
«j  20U  to  26th 
OT"<  l>th  to  Uth 
CoTrab,,  Uth  u  J4th- 


F.b,  Uth  to  1U.  34. 

«»j  «7th  to  Jmu  M. 

Am  :ith  10  s«pt.  ut 
HOT  2*h  to  ita  IK. 


Much  4th  u  10th. 


lurch  llth  to  1714 
June  10th  to  16th. 
feptrobo  >th  to  Uth. 
Bfceember  Sth  to  15ti 


lUnh  Uth  to  S4th. 
Juae  17th  lo  SSd. 
September  19th  u  224. 
December  16th  to  2td. 


•uch  2>th  u  31it 
Jm»  24th  u  30th. 
September  2M  lo  2»t». 
o30th 


PUN  OF  ADVANCEMENT 

Our  lessons  in  short-hand  and  type  writing 
being:  thoroughly  learned  and  practiced,  the  former 
correctly  recited  and  reviewed,  the  student  is  advanced 
to  short- hand  speed  classes. 

While  in  these  speed  classes  the  theory  of 

phonography  is  again  reviewed  by  dictation  of  the 


teacher  in  charge,  omissions  apd  mistakes  of  slant, 
curvatnre,  shading,  petition,  sue,  he.,  being  marked 
for  correction  and  counted  as  errors. 

As  soon  as  students  enter  speed  class,  mock 
letters  are  dictated  to  them:  but  if.  while  in  mock 
letters,  they  make  as  high  as  twelve  errors  per  day. 


w.  they 


for  six     ..._.._... 

will  be  taken  from  mock  letters  until  not  more 

After  the  completion  of  twenty-four  dayi 


perfect  mar 
actual  dicti 


'A  in  the  short-  hand  theory  review  for  six 
days,  the  student  is  then  advanced  to 
iding  attendance  at  speed  claat) 


ABOUT  (MPLOMAS. 
Diploma  of  proficiency   will   be   granted 

each  scholar  of  satisfactory  deportment  and  general 
education,  who  has  learned  the  theory  of  short-hand 

institution  ;  has  completed  the  course  of  mock-letter 
dictation  ;  has  satisfactorily  performed  amanuensis 
duties  in  and  for  our  business  office  :  and  who  shall, 
entirely  unaided,  furnish  an  accurate  report 
of  at  least  one  complete  lecture  of  this  institution. 

Students  unable  to  comply  with  all  of  the 

above  conditions  during  their  term  can  (providing 
their  deportment  has  been  satisfactory  while  here,  and 
their  general  education  as  desired)  obtain  said  diploma 
after  expiration  of  term,  upon  evidence  received  from 
their  employer  to  the  effect  that  they  have  been,  for 
at  least  two  consecutive  months.,  satisfactorily  per- 
forming  short-hand  duties  for  said  employer. 

something  more  than  the  mere  ability  to 

perform  amanuensis  work.    Reporting  our  lectures  is 

d.  therefore,  students  who  do 

ipose 


not  get  their  diploma  while  h 
that  the  lack  of  it  is  »ny  ev 

students  are  competent  to  fill 


bility  i 

trr 

h  posit 

the  other  qualiflca- 


,  and  hav< 


dictation,  providing  they  poe 
attended  speed  class  fjg-ularly. 

HOW  ATTENDANCE  IS  COUNTED, 
Ordinarily,  all  terms  of  one  or  more  fall 

mo.*  UK  expire  upon  the  same  day  of  a  calendar 
month  as  tnat  upon  which  they  began;  and,  except 
upon  Sundays  and  legal  holidays,  or  in  case  of  illness, 
full  attendance  is  expected  throughout  the  term.  Un- 
avoidable absences,  however,  will  always  be  made 
good  to  the  pupil,  providing  such  absences  are 
for  not  lees  than  six  consecutive  days  at  a  time. 

TIME  LOST  AT  SPEED  CUSS 
means   a  loss  of  speed    which    cannot   be 

made  up.  either  by  staying  after  hours  or  working  at 
home.  Our  hours  of  speed  class  are  the  most  import- 
ant of  the  day  to  a  student  through  the  theory,  and 
we  cannot  give  proficiency  in  tim«  advertised  iinlfsHi 
the  pupil  attends  speed  class  two  full  hours  daily, 
Sundays  and  legal  holidays  excepted. 

CARE  Of  TYPE-WRITING  MACHINES 
is  a  very  necessary  part  of  a  type-writer 
operator's  duties,  and  it  is,  therefore,  desired  that  the 
following  rules  for  their   care  and    use   be  strictly 

1.  Upon  taking  place  before  machine  (pre- 
vious to  operating-)  student  will  please  wipe  all  dust 
from  machine  and  shine  the  V-shaped  portion  of  the 
bar  on  which  the  wheels  of  the  carriage  run,  cleaning 
every  particle  of  dirt  from  that  bar.  back  as  well  as 
front.    This  bar  should  be  wiped,  even  if  clean. 

2.  Never  leave  work   in  or  on    the    ma- 
chines.    Remove  your  own  scrape  or  practice  sheets, 
as  well  as  finished  work,  when  done  with  machine. 
Keep  machine  tables  clear  of  work  when  not  used. 

3.  Finished  work  should  always  be  handed 
promptly   to   the  teacher  in   charge.    Practice 


done  with  H 

directs.  If  written  on  both  sides,  practice  sheets 
should  be  placed  in  waste -basket.  Backer*  should  be 
kept  by  themselves  when  not  in  use. 

4.  If  no  one  is  to  take  the  machine  from 

which  the  tttudent  arises,  such  student  shculd  place 


FUN. 

Bull— I  hear  that  Lambkin  made  a  good  thing 
out  of  his  Wall  street  deal. 

Behr— Why,  I  thought  he  lost  all  his  money. 

Bull— He  did.  But  ne  married  the  daughter  of 
the  man  who  got  it.— Puch . 


Tbe  Previous  Words. 

I  do  not  mind  that  last  word  of  my  wife, 
I  like  it,  for  it  shows  the  storm  is  past; 

But  what  a  burden  seems  this  dreary  life, 
While  listening  to  those  words  before  the  last! 
—New  York  Herald. 


The  Art  of  Matrimony. 

"Do  you  expect  your  marriage  to  be  a  happy 
one,  dear?" 

"O,  yes;  I  guess  so.  But  if  it  isn't,  Jack  has 
promised  either  a  divorce  or  suicide,  so  you  see 
I'm  really  not  running  much  risk."— Chicago 
Tribune. 


Typewriters ! 

New  or  Second  hand  of  ay  makes, 
bought,  sold,  exchanged  and  repaired. 
Also  rented  anywhere  in  the  country. 
Largest  Stock  in  America.  Not  run  by 
a  Typewriter  Manufacturer.  Send  for 
New  Illustrated  Catalogue  describing  all 
Machines.  GERBER'S  SUPPLIES. 

NATIONAL  TYPEWRITER  EXCHANGE 

200  LaSalle  Street, 
CHICAGO. 


ADVERTISING. 


IF  you  wish  to  advertise  anything  anywhere  at 
any  time  write  to  GEO.  P.  ROWELL  &  CO., 

No.  10  Spruce  St.,  New  York. 


EVERY  one  in  need  of  information  on  the 
subject  of  advertising  will  do  well  to  obtain 
a  copy  of  "Book  for  Advertisers,"  368  pages,  price 
one  dollar.  Mailed,  postage  paid,  on  receipt  of 
price.  Contains  a  careful  compilation  from  the 
American  Newspaper  Directory  of  all  the  best 
papers  and  class  journals;  gives  the  circulation 
rating  of  every  one,  and  a  good  deal  of  informa- 
tion about  rates  and  other  matters  pertaining  to 
the  business  of  advertising.  Address  ROWELI.'S 
ADVERTISING  BUREAU.  10  Spruce  St..  N.  Y. 


NORTHWESTERN    AGENTS, 

185  Lit  gJLLE  ST,,  CHICAGO. 

Mention  this    advertisement 


TTERS 


MISC  ELL  ANEOUS 
ACTUAL,   BUSINESS 

Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and 
numbered  for  timing  speed,  will  be  sent  to  any  address  by  C.  HAVEN, 
E  BUILDING,  CHICAGO.  ILLINOIS,  on  receipt  of 


WORDS   OF   ACTUAL  COURT 

TESTIMONY 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


10c. 


WORDS    OF    ACTUAL    CONVENTION 

PROCEEDINGS 


Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN.  Tribune  Building, 


CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


lOc. 


ft  I  I  TLJBT  AD/~\\/C-  Letters,  testimony  and  convention  practice,  and  much  more, 
M  L  L.  inc.  MDWVC.  together  with  a  complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching 
300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will  be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete 
Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadelphia  Press,  Boston  Herald,  and 
other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "The  only  complete 
work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind— epistolary,  society, 
legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial  — accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descriptive  of 
each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  etc.,  most  of  the 
points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert  operators.  Whether  you  are 
teacher,  expert,  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting — no  matter  what  make  of  machine  you  favor, 
you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  a  copy. 

Price.— S2.00  to  the  public— but  $1.33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


Copyright,  1892,  by    Curtis  Haven.     This  includes  entire    contents. 
All  rights  reserved. 

THE  MODERN  REPORTER. 


A  Progressive  Monthly  Magazine  of  Practical  Short-Hand  and  Type-Writing  for  the 
Entire  Profession,  all  Teachers  and  their  Pupils,  and  the  Home  Student. 

ELEVENTH  YE  AK.  ?  ADDII      I  OQO  flOcACOPY. 

NUMBER  4.  ArnlL.IOjZ.  I$I.OOAYEAR. 

OUR  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

We  give  another  installment  of  the  Court  Cases  on  following  pages. 
They  will  be  complete  in  six  numbers,  commencing  with  last  month' s.  Price, 
lOc.  each,  or  53c.  for  the  six;  five  numbers,  45c. ;  four  numbers,  37c. ;  three 
numbers,  25c. ;  two  numbers,  18c. 

A  RETORT  IN  KIND. 

"One  of  the  lady  graduates  of  the  Chicago  Haven  College,  in  applying 
for  a  situation,  recently,  was  asked  by  the  gentleman  desiring  such  services, 
where  she  put  her  punctuation  marks  in  a  letter,  adding  with  a  sneer,  "Do 
you  place  them  where  they  belong,  or  in  a  bunch  at  the  end  of  the  letter?" 

"No,"  was  the  reply,  "I  always  put  the  punctuation  marks  on  a  separ- 
ate piece  of  paper,  and  pin  them  to  the  letter." 

While  for  a  moment  startled  at  the  frankness  of  such  a  reply,  the  maH 
nevertheless  evidently  concluded  it  to  be  only  what  he  deserved,  for  he  en- 
gaged the  lady;  and  she  is  giving  excellent  satisfaction. 

ITEMS,  PERSONAL  AND  OTHERWISE. 

Miss  Annie  Able,  who  recently  concluded  a  three  months'  course  at  the 
Chicago  Haven  Shorthand  College,  previous  to  entering  which  she  knew 
nothing  whatever  of  shorthand,  has  been  placed  in  a  lucrative  position  by 
the  principal. 

If  this  girl  was  not  unfortunate,  who  is  ?  Freckled,  red  haired,  cross- 
eyed, left-handed,  and  trying  to  write  Cross'  Shorthand  at  one  of  Dr. 
Thomas'  lectures,  recently — the  poor  girl' s  cup  of  sorrow  seemed  quite  full. 
Under  a  less  heavier  load  many  a  stout  heart  has  faltered  and  failed. 

The  lady  phonographer  of  R.  Connable  &  Sons,  wholesale  fish  mer- 
chants, 269  S.  Water  street,  had  no  knowledge  whatever  of  shorthand  two 
months  ago;  yet,  in  that  time,  by  our  easy,  thorough,  quick-time  methods, 
we  fitted  her  for  the  position  she  now  holds.  We  have  made  the  same 
record  with  others,  and  make  no  failures  with  even  dull  pupils  in  three 
months.  Situations  for  all. 

In  these  days,  when  one  must  have  a  knowledge  of  shorthand  to  get 
almost  any  kind  of  an  office  position,  those  not  expecting  to  follow  it  all  their 
lives  have  no  time  to  learn  the  complicated  systems.  Haven  meets  this  want 
with  a  system  which  can  be  mastered  in  principle  in  a  few  days,  skill  for 
amanuensis  position  obtained  in  a  few  weeks,  and  for  court  and  convention,  or 
speech  reporting  in  a  few  months.  Records  of  300  words  a  minute  have  been 
made  by  the  system;  it  is  as  plain  as  print  when  written,  and  is  the  only 
system  needing  neither  dictionary  nor  phrase  book. 


HAVEN'S  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

(Continued  from  last  issue.) 


MALCOM  JACKSON  )  COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS. 

vs.  >•      BEFORE  JUDGE  D.  D.  SEVERNS. 

DANIEL  C.  KAIN.    )  CASE  No.  61.     JANUARY  TERM,  1874. 

PITTSBURG,  PENN.,  April  2,  1874. 

For  the  plaintiff  appear  Messrs.  Kelly  and  Leach. 
For  the  defendant  appears  Mr.  Bernard  Baker. 

TESTIMONY  FOR  PLAINTIFF. 
MALCOM  JACKSON,  the  plaintiff,  sworn,  testifies  as  follows: 

DIRECT     EXAMINATION. 

Mr.  Kelly: 

Q.     What  is  your  business,  Mr.  Jackson? 

A.     I  am  superintendent  of  a  glass  factory. 

Q.     Are  you  employed  at  present? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  with  James  Whalen  &  Company. 

Q.     Where  were  you  employed  in  1871? 

A.  I  was  employed  from  April,  '71,  to  March,  '73,  by  Mr.  Daniel  C. 
Kain,  trading  under  the  firm  name  of  D.  C.  Kain  &  Company,  Gla^s 
Manufacturers. 

Q.     What  were  your  duties? 

A.     I  was  general  superintendent  of  their  pot-house. 

Q.     What  were  you  to  get  for  your  services? 

A.  Fifteen  hundred  dollars  per  year.  One  hundred  dollars  per  month, 
as  regular  salary.  The  other  three  hundred  dollars  per  year  were  payable  to 
me  at  the  end  of  the  year,  providing  my  services  were  satisfactory. 

Q.     And  in  case  they  were  not,  how  was  that  to  be  determined? 

A.  Mr.  Kain  was  to  decide  that  himself,  and  if  such  was  his  opinion, 
our  contract  was  to  be  terminated  at  such  date. 

Q.     How  long  was  the  contract  made  for? 

A.     For  one  year,  subject  to  renewal  on  same  terms. 

Q.  Did  you  get  your  fifteen  hundred  dollars  at  the  end  of  the  first 
year,  that  is,  your  regular  salary  of  one  hundred  dollars  per  month,  and 
the  three  hundred  bonus? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Did  you  continue  in  service  on  the  same  terms  the  second  year? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  you  get  your  three  hundred  bonus,  the  second  year,  in  addi- 
tion to  your  one  hundred  dollars  per  month? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Why  not? 

Objected  to.     Objection  sustained. 


- 


— f~5 


L,  '- 


J, 


. ..  L 


•\~^~'-™  I 


/  \ 
/.  A 


VX> 


Q.  Did  Mr.  Kain  refuse  to  pay  you  the  three  hundred  dollars  bonus  for 
the  second  year? 

A.     He  did. 

Q.     Did  he  give  any  reason  for  withholding  it? 

A.     Not  to  me. 

Q.     Did  he  say  he  was  dissatisfied  with  your  services  for  the  year? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Did  he  give  you  no  reason  for  terminating  contract? 

A.     No,  sir.     He  did  not  terminate  the  contract. 

Q.     Who  terminated  it? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     For  what  reason? 

A.     I  had  an  opportunity  f-or  getting  better  pay  than  my  present  position. 

Q.  Then,  as  far  as  you  know,  Mr.  Kain  was  perfectly  satisfied  with 
your  services  for  the  last  year  you  were  with  him? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  you  do  not  know  why  he  refused  to  pay  you  the  three  hundred 
dollars  bonus  due  you  for  the  second  year's  salary? 

A.     Not  unless  he  was  angry  on  account  of  my  leaving  his  employ. 

Answer  objected  to,  and  motion  made  to  strike  from  the  record. 
Objection  sustained.  Motion  taken  under  consideration. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  have  any  conversation  with  Mr.  Kain  in  which  he 
stated  that  he  would  send  you  a  check  for  the  second  three  hundred  dollars? 

A.     I  had  such  a  conversation. 

Q.     When  was  that  and  where  was  it? 

A.  It  was  in  the  office  of  Mr.  Kain,  at  Chambersburg,  a  few  days  after 
my  second  year. 

Q.     Did  he  say  that  he  would  send  the  money  to  you? 

A.     He  stated  he  would  send  a  check  for  the  amount. 

Q.     Who  was  present  at  that  time? 

A.     I  think  his  son,  John  Kain,  Jr.,  was  present. 

Q.     Do  you  know  how  he  came  to  be  in  the  office  at  the  time? 

A.     He  was  bookkeeper  for  his  father,  at  the  Chambersburg  factory. 

Q.     Who  is  the  bookkeeper  now,  John  Kain,  Jr.? 

A.  Yes,  sir;  he  is  bookkeeper  for  his  father,  John  C.  Kain,  trading  as 
John  C.  Kain  &  Co. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

Mr.  Baker: 

Q.     When  was  this  contract  entered  into  between  you  and  Mr.  Kain? 

A.     Late  in  March,  1871. 

Q.     Where  was  it  made? 

A.     In  Mr.  Kain's  office,  at  Chambersburg. 


IN  THE    MATTER    OF   THE    PROBATE    OF " 

A  PAPER  PROPOUNDED    AS    A    CODI-  SURROGATE'S  COURT, 

CIL  TO  THE  LAST  WILL  AND  TESTA-  I     County  of  Camden,  State  of  N.  J. 
MENT  BEFORE  HON.  H.  M.  PINTER, 

OF  SURROGATE. 

CHARLES  CARTER,  Deceased.     J 

CAMDEN,  N.  J.,  May.  15,  1852. 

For  the  proponent  appears  Mr.  Peter  Day. 

For  the  contestants  appear  Messrs.  Wide  and  Wake. 

DR.  JAMES     LELAND,  a  witness  on  behalf  of  the  proponent,  being  duly 
sworn,  testified: 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Day: 

Q.  Dr.  Leland,  did  you  ever  attend  the  testator,  Mr.  Charles  Carter 
professionally  ? 

A.  Yes;  I  was  his  family  physician  for  twenty  years  prior  to  his  death. 

Q.  Where  did  he  reside  during  his  last  illness  ? 

A.  At  1405  Walnut  Street. 

Q.  You  attended  him  until  the  day  of  his  death  ? 

A.  Yes. 

Q.  I  have  a  paper  here  which  I  wish  you  would  look  at  carefully,  and 
tell  me  if  you  ever  saw  it  before  ?  [Hands  paper  to  witness.] 

A.  Yes.   [Examining  paper.]     This  is  a  codicil  to  Mr.  Carter's  will. 

Q.  Is  that  your  signature  ?     [Pointing  to  the  paper.] 

A.  Yes. 

Q.  Did  you  sign  this  document  in  the  presence  of  the  other  witnesses, 

whose  names  are  thereunto  attached  ? 

A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  did  they  sign  in  your  presence  on  the  same  occasion  ? 

A.  Yes;  we  all  signed  our  names  in  the  order  shown  on  the  document, 
one  signing  immediately  after  the  other. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Carter  sign  first  or  last  ? 

A.  First. 

Q.  In  the  presence  of  those  witnesses  ? 

A.  Yes;  that  is,  he  made  his  mark,  he  was  too  weak  to  write. 

Q.  Was  the  codicil  read  over  to  him  before  he  signed  it  ? 

A.  It  was. 

Q.  The  entire  document  ? 

A.  Yes;  every  word  of  it. 

Q.  In  the  presence  of  yourself  and  the  other  witnesses? 

A.  Yes. 


v° 


.ZXTvTT^>. 


V 

•o >-       \    o 


\ 


L 


'i<r..i 


Tliese  Court  Cases  began  in  last  issue;  the  balance  will  appear  in  May,  June,  Jul}'' 
and  August  numbers.  lOc.  for  each,  or  53c.  for  all,  including  this  issue;  45c.  without 
1his  issue:  87c.  for  four  numbers;  2oc.  for  three;  18c.  for  two  numbers. 


CROSS     EXAMINATION 

By  Mr.   Wake. 

Q.     You  were  Mr.  Carter's  family  physician  for  how  long  ? 

A.     About  twenty  years. 

Q.     What  was  the  nature  of  his  last  illness  ? 

A.     Paralysis — cerebral  hemorrhage. 

Q.     Had  he  any  previous  attacks  of  this  malady  ? 

A.     Yes;  several. 

Q.  How  long  was  he  sick  with  this  last  attack — the  one  from  which  he 
died  ? 

A.     About  five  weeks. 

Q.     Was  he  not  unconscious  when  this  codicil  was  signed  ? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     He  had  been  unconscious  a  few  days  before,  had  he  not  ? 

A.     Not  for  ten  days  before. 

Q.  The  first  time  you  saw  him  after  his  last  attack  of  paralysis,  he  was 
unconscious,  was  he  not  ? 

A.     Certainly;  it  was  but  a  few  hours  after  the  attack. 

Q.     Did  he  not  remain  unconscious  for  several  days  ? 

A.  Not  entirely  unconscious;  his  consciousness  gradually  returned 
after  the  day  of  attack. 

Q.  Do  you  recollect  the  date  and  circumstances  attending  the  signing 
of  this  codicil  ? 

A.     Perfectly  well;  the  date  was  the  4th  of  June,  1849. 

Q.     Who  asked  you  to  subscribe  to  this  paper  ? 

A.     Mr.  Carter. 

Q.     How  ? 

A.  I  supposed  he  wished  me  to  sign  the  paper,  and  I  asked  him  the 
question  and  he  nodded. 

Q.  Was  Mr.  Carter  able  to  articulate  at  a'ny  time  after  his  last  paralytic 
stroke  ? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Then  you  volunteered  to  act  as  witness  to  the  will  ?, 

A.     I  did. 

Q.  Had  you  any  particular  reason  for  supposing  that  you  would  be 
desired  as  witness  ? 

A.  I  was  present  when  the  paper  was  brought  into  the  room  by  Mr. 
Strong,  and  I  think  the  time  for  signing  the  codicil  was  arranged  so 
that  it  should  be  done  when  I  was  present,  in  order  to  have  my  opinion 
about  Mr.  Carter's  mental  ability  at  the  time  of  signing,  and  also  that  I 
might  act  as  witness.  I  am  not  sure  that  anybody  asked  me  to  be  a  witness 
to  it,  but  I  received  the  impression  somehow  that  I  was  to  be  one. 


CHAMPION    OF    THE    WOKLIX 


A  SYKA< ISAX  BKATS  THK    l(l.<  Oitlt   FOR    FAST  TYPKWRITIX*,;. 


Wonderful    Work    by    Mi*s    Katherine    V.  Curry,  of  that   City— She  Write*    1*2 
Pel-feet  Word*  in  a  Minute  011  a  Smith  Premier  Typewriter. 

An  event  that  had  been  looked  forward  to  with  considerable  interest  by 
local  stenographers  and  typewriters,  says  the  Syracuse  Journal,  occurred  la-t 
night  at  the  Henley  Shorthand  College  in  the  Everson  block.  In  the  presence 
of  about  seventy  persons,  Miss  Katherine  V.  Curry,  of  402  Jackson  street, 
that  city,  attempted  .to  break  the  world's  record  of  fast  typewriting,  and  she 
succeeded  beyond  all  expectations.  The  timekeepers  were  Oramel  G.  Jones, 
President  of  the  Board  of  Fire  Commissioners,  and  J.  A.  Dakin,  professor  of 
stenography  at  Wells'  Business  College.  The  judges  were  District  Attoruey 
Theodore  E.  Hancock,  Giles  Stillwell,  President  of  the  Board  of  Education, 
and  Cyrus  L.  Hasbrouck,  Secretary  of  the  Business  Men's  Association.  Among 
those  present  were  Attorney  Lawrence  T.  Jones,  Fred.  C.  Eddy,  Cashier  of 
the  Bank  of  Syracuse;  Attorney  Donald  McLennan,  Alderman  E.  J.  Mack,  L. 
A.  Eddy.  Superintendent  of  Bradstreet's  Mercantile  Agency;  a  Journal  re- 
porter, and  a  number  of  well  known  stenographers  and  typewriters. 

It  is  said  that  the  fastest  sworn  record  of  typewriting  is  172  words  a 
minute.  Miss  Curry  last  night  made  a  record  of  182  words  a  minute,  and  the 
timekeepers  and  judges  made  affidavit  to  it.  She  used  the  test  sentence,  "Now 
is  the  time  for  all  good  men  to  come  to  the  aid  of  the  party,"  which  is  one  of 
the  fairest  criterions  of  fast  work.  The  typewritist  operated  a  Smith  Premier 
typewriter,  which  worked  perfectly,  and  showed  a  wonderful  capacity  for 
speed.  Miss  Curry  first  undertook  to  write  160  perfect  words  a  minute, 
and  succeeded  in  rattling  off  172  words;  but  some  of  them  were  not  perfect. 
Then  she  attempted  to  write  180  words  in  a  minute.  On  the  first  trial  she 
wrote  176,  all  perfect  save  one.  Then  she  succeeded  in  getting  180  words  on 
the  paper,  but  some  of  them  were  not  perfect.  On  the  third  trial,  however, 
she  wrote  180  words:  all  of  which  were  perfect.  This  was  greeted  by  applause. 
Miss  Curry  then  endeavored  to  break  her  own  record.  On  the  first  trial  she 
made  180  words  in  a  minute;  next  she  fell  off  a  little,  and  only  got  179:  but 
on  the  third  trial  attained  the  unprecedented  speed  of  182  words  in  sixty  sec- 
onds. Those  persons  who  witnessed  the  exhibition  were  simply  astounded, 
and  they  most  heartily  congratulated  Miss  Curry. 

The  young  lady  has  run  a  typewriter  for  the  last  five  years,  but  it  was 
only  last  July  that  she  began  to  practice  for  speed  work.  She  has  charge  of 
the  "practical"  department  of  the  Henley  College.  It  would  seem  that  now 
is  the  time  for  fast  typewriters  of  the  country  to  come  to  the  aid  of  their  pro- 
fession, and  beat  Miss  Curry's  remarkable  record  if  they  can.  She  proposes 
to  hold  the  world's  championship  against  all  professional  stenographers  and 
typewriters,  and  no  test  will  be  considered  by  her  that  is  not  under  affidavit 
by  rapa'ib  le  people. 


TEACHERS'  DEPARTMENT. 

On  this  and  the  next  four  pages  we  give  specimens  of  the  Records  used  at  Haven 
Colleges,  full  explanation  of  which  is  given  in  Haven's  Shorthand  Teacher's  Companion,  - 
a  treatise  every  teacher  of  any  system  should  have.     For  particulars,  address  C.  Haven, 
Tribune  Bldg.,  Chicago. 

The  dotted  lines  shown  in  the  Records  indicate  BED  INK  lines. 


•       ATTENDANCE    RECORD 

No. 

NAME. 

H 

0 
(J 

1 
n 

fat^VtMXSurf--,    •/#~$1f. 

c^ 

a 

3 

4 

J 

£ 

<? 

10 

// 

/2 

/3 

/I 

'? 

/f 

^ 

to 

ti 

w 

^^ 

ti 

*; 

^ 

Al 

/ 

^ 

5 

/ 

f&T&rwJffi; 

//• 

/2> 

X 

v  t 

X 

v 

X 

Y 

X 

V 

/ 

V 

X 

X 

X 

v* 

* 

X 

Y 

X 

*/ 

x, 

?' 

xj 

X 

V" 

X 

X 

X 

x 

X 

x 

x 

X 

.'. 

X 

X 

X 

z 

'•' 

•,- 

•.; 

•.- 

V 

•/. 

#-s 

.- 

,\ 

X 

X 

;.; 

V 

Y 

,- 

^ 

^ 

;.; 

X 

X 

x 

X 

X 

x. 

x 

a 

X 

x 

4. 

®OMl&4irH&4 

V 

;.; 

•/ 

* 

X 

•.' 

/•. 

X 

:;. 

ft 

-..- 

.\ 

ro 

:•; 

V 

x 

•-• 

'.- 

V 

'.- 

ft 

V 

-*. 

rr 

y 

'.' 

X 

V 

-.- 

•-• 

/y. 

X, 

\ 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X, 

X 

x 

X 

X 

X 

X 

x 

x 

X 

y 

X 

s 

/ 

:/ 

.-•'• 

X 

;.' 

V 

X 

Y 

X 

X 

X 

n. 

*.*, 

••• 

X 

x 

'.-.' 

3 

V~S 

y^ 

* 

X 

X 

X 

x 

X 
X, 

30 
X 

X, 

X 

x 

x 

X, 

4> 

x 

'-'. 

'••• 

£ 

fylM.$MMn. 

9 
(0 

^ 

/J 

••> 

-j- 

.-. 

... 

~y 

.-, 

fl 

;<• 

.'>; 

V 

V 

.; 

v 

;._' 

.'•' 

v 

\' 

•: 

V 

•«• 

:•• 

(*, 

Y 

)(. 

H 

X 

X 

X 

g 

X 

K 

K 

X 

k 

s 

X 

x: 

1 

V 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

.'• 

— 

3 

1 

V. 

•  • 

-..-. 

V 

•;:-. 

V--S 

\* 

Ij 

• 

x, 

X 

x 

x 

X 

2 

to 

/! 

ft- 

1 

i 

J 

^-5 

2 

/o 

ft 

/2- 

/ 

z. 

1 

l^-S 

9 

/o 

ff 

fl- 

/ 

7- 

3 

ff.-S 

<? 

ff) 

MEMBERSHIP    RECORD 


No. 


KAME. 


5-treet 


Town-.      County:  State 


4 


"7 


7 


{7 


-  C^T  Uj 


MEMBERSHIP    RECORD. 


TERM. 


PAID. 


3 


/I         ft     e, 


GP 


t/HMn*  (ac, 


< 


// 


& 


CORRESPONDENCE  SOL.K  ITKI)  RKSI»K<'TIX««  THKSE  RK<  Oltl>S. 


LESSONS     RECORD. 


No. 


KAME. 


3 


/o 


A.M 


Ji 


J 


7 


f 


fo 


H 


AM. 


3 


A.M 


T.2VL 


A.M 


AM 


AM 


FWI. 


AM 


AM. 


AM 


?M. 


AM 


AM 
?M. 
AM 
TM 


For  all  information  address  1'.  II  A  V  i:\.  Tribune  Bltlg..  CHICAGO. 


LESSONS     RECORD. 


// 

•r- — tr— ; 


S3 

r~rr 


/£ 


.£X 


*¥ 


i  v 

-/t^- 


gT^T 


7 


A 
//S~ . 


Z> 


J 


-2 


J 


£ 


7 


16 


/  /2 


/ 


^^ 


FUN. 

(From  Puck.) 

Kind  Son  (back  from  the  city) — I  didn't 
know  exactly  what  to  bring  you.  mother, 
but  here  is  the  material  for  a  new  silk 
dress. 

Loving  Mother  (opening  package) — Oh, 
George,  this  would  be  just  what  I  wanted 
if  I  had  only  bought  it  myself. 


ADVERTISING. 


Ah.  when  the  sunny  tresses  grow 
Out  from  the  scalp  and  we  behold 

Two  different  colors,  then  we  know 
That  all  that's  blondined  is  not  gold. 


IF  you  wish  to  advertise  anything  anywhere  at 
any  time  write  to  GEO.  I'.  ROWELL  &  CO., 
No.  10  Spruce  St.,  New  York. ____ 

EVERY  one  in  need  of  information  on  t In- 
subject  of  advertising  will  do  well  to  obtain 
a  copy  of  "Book  for  Advertisers,''  308  pages,  price 
one  aollar.  Mailed,  postage  paid,  on  receipt  of 
price.  Contains  a  careful  compilation  from  the 
American  Newspaper  Directory  of  all  the  best 
papers  and  class  journals;  gives  the  circulation 
rating  of  every  one,  and  a  good  deal  of  informa- 
tion about  rates  and  other  matters  pertaining  to 
the  business  of  advertising.  Address  i;o\vi-:i.i,'s 
ADVERTISING  BURKAT,  Hi  Spnice  St.,  N.  V. 


Typewriters !  * h  .e  can 


New  or  Second  hand  of  all  makes, 
bought,  sold,  exchanged  and  repaired. 
Also  rented  anywhere  in  the  country. 
Largest  Stock  in  America.  Not  run  bv 
a  Typewriter  Manufacturer.  Send  for 
New  Illustrated  Catalogue  dascribing  all 
Machines.  GERBER'S  SUPPLIES. 

NATIONAL  TYPEWRITER  EXCHANGE 

200  LaSalle  Street, 
CHICAGO. 


WANT  :0: 


TKACHKlt 
OR  STUDKXT 

As  PERMANENT  OFFICE  ASSISTANT. 
Either  Gentleman  or  Lady.    No  preference.qual!- 
cattong  being  equal.  Salary  $750.  and  Railway  tare 

paid  to  Office  if  engaged.    Enclose  reference  Tind 
self-addressed  stamped  envelope  to 

HENRY  JONES,  SECRETARY, 

CHICAGO,  ILLV 


SEND  FOR  CATALOGUE.  - 


NORTHWESTERN    AGENTS, 

135  LK  8KLLE  8T,  GHICIGO, 


LETTERS 


MISCELLANEOUS 
ACTUAL    BtSINESS 

Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and 
numbered  for  timing  speed,  will  be  sent  to  any  address  by  C.  HAVEN, 
TRIBUNE  BUILDING,  CHICAGO.  ILLINOIS,  on  receipt  of 

WORDS    OF   ACTUAL  COURT 

TESTIMONY 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 

WORDS    OF    ACTUAL    CONVENTION 

PROCEEDINGS 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN.  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


lOt. 


ALL  THE    ABOVE 


Letters,  testimony  and  convention  practice,  and  much  more, 
together  with  a  complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching 
300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will  be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete 
Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadelphia  Press,  Boston  Herald,  and 
other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "The  only  complete 
work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind— epistolary,  society, 
legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial— accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descriptive  of 
each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  etc.,  most  of  the 
points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert  operators.  Whether  you  are 
teacher,  expert,  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting— no  matter  what  make  of  machine  you  favor, 
you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  a  copy. 

Price.— '2.00  to  the  public— but  $1.33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bidg.,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


Copyright,  1892,  by    Curtis  Haven.     This  includes  entire    contents. 
All  rights  reserved. 

THE  MODERN  REPORTER. 


A  Progressive  Monthly  Magazine  of  Practical  Short-Hand  and  Type-Writing  xbr  the 
Entire  Profession,  all  Teacher*  and  their  Pupils,  and  the  Home  Student. 


ELEVENTH  YEAR.  I  MAY        I  8Q9  t  lOc.  A  COPY. 


NUMBERS.  J  ITIHl,     IOOZ.  '/$1.00  A  YEAE. 


OUR  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

We  give  another  installment  of  the  Court  Cases  on  following  pages.  They  will 
be  complete  in  six  numbers,  commencing  with  March  issue.  Price,  lOc.  each,  or  53c. 
for  the  six;  five  numbers,  45c. ;  four  numbers,  36c. ;  three  numbers,  27c. ;  two  num- 
bers, 18c. 

ITEMS,   PERSONAL  AND    OTHERWISE. 

Miss  Emma  Burlingame  is  probably  one  of  the  lighest  hearted  and  industrious 
ladies  in  the  short-hand  profession.  Of  course,  she  is  a  Haven  writer. 

There  are  fjew  better  caligraph  operators  and  Haven  short-handers  than  Miss 
Christina  Paulson,  amanuensis  for  Nusbaum  &  Co.,  230  and  232  Adams  Street. 

The  Mercantile  Publishing  and  Advertising  Co.,  238  and  240  Fifth  Ave.,  have  a 
worthy  young  lady  short-hander  and  typewritist  in  the  person  of  Miss  Josephine 
Schmitt. 

A  high  rate  of  speed  and  good  work  are  two  characteristics  of  Miss  Bertha 
Usborne,  the  pleasant  little  lad}'  Haven  short-hander  and  typewritist  of  Patrick's 
Importing  Dry  Goods  Specialty  House,  226  and  228  Adams  Street. 

Miss  Grace  Dow  is  the  capable  lady  stenographer  and  typewritist  of  the  Practical 
Art  School  Co.,  Bort  Building.  Miss  Dow  is  a  three  months  Haven  graduate,  and 
while  at  college  a  month  before  the  termination  of  above  course  did  as  good  work  as 
many  stenographers  of  several  years' experience.  She  had  no  previous  knowledge  of 
the  art  when  she  began  her  course  at  the  Chicago  Haven  College. 

Miss  Cassie  J.  Lincoln,  a  recent  three  months  Haven  graduate,  after  being  but  one 
week  in  her  position,  taken  at  expiration  of  her  course,  had  her  salary  materially 
advanced,  and  has  been  given  as  her  future  task  the  most  difficult  work  of  the  office, 
because,  during  that  first  week  she  proved  herself  to  be  superior  to  the  two  other 
short-hand  writers  in  same  office,  although  they  had  long  experience. 

In  these  days  when  one  must  have  a  knowledge  of  short-hand  to  get  almost  any 
kind  of  an  office  position,  those  not  expecting  to  follow  it  all  their  lives  have  no  time 
to  learn  the  complicated  systems.  Haven  meets  this  want  with  a  system  which  can 
be  mastered  in  principle  in  a  few  days,  skill  for  amanuensis  position  obtained  in  a 
few  weeks,  and  for  court  and  convention,  or  speech  reporting,  in  a  few  months. 
Records  of  300  words  a  minute  have  been  made  by  the  system;  it  is  as  plain  as  print 
when  written,  and  is  the  only  system  needing  neither  dictionary  nor  phrase  book. 


HAVEN'S  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

(Continued  from  Last  Issue.) 


.y. 


COMMONWEALTH    )  COURT  OF  OVER  AND  TERMINER. 

vs.  >    COUNTY  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  PENN. 

GEORGE  BECKETT  ETAL.  )  SAMUEL  CAMPBELL,  P.  J. 

PHILADELPHIA,  PENN.,  October  n,  1855. 

Prosecutor  William  Matlackfor  the  Commonwealth. 
A.  Carpenter  and  R.  L.  Kerr,  Esqs.,  for  prisoners. 

FIRST    DAY— AFTERNOON  SESSION. 
AUGUST  SCULL,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Matlack: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? 

A.  August  Scull. 

Q.  What  is  your  business? 

A.  My  business  is  brass  finishing. 

Q.  Where  do  you  live? 

A.  At  No.  277  South  Street. 

Q.  Did  you  know  Mr.  Charles  Hill  in  his  lifetime? 

A.  I  knew  him  well,  sir. 

Q.  How  well,  or  intimately,  did  you  know  him? 

A.  As  intimately  as  a  man  could  by  having  six  or  seven  years  knowl- 
edge. 

Q.  Where  were  you  in  the  habit  of  meeting  him? 

A.  Up  in  his  office. 

Q.  How  frequently  did  you  see  him  there? 

A.  Well,  for  the  last  year,  I  saw  him  twice  a  week. 

Q.  Where  else  were  you  in  the  habit  of  meeting  him?  Did  you  ever 
meet  him  at  his  place  of  residence? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  About  how  frequently? 

A.  Every  Sunday  for  a  year. 

Q.  That  was  at  Watts',  was  it? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  On  South  Street? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  you  .ever  meet  him  on  the  street? 

A.  Very  seldom,  except  by  appointment. 

Q.  About  how  often  were  you  in  the  habit  of  meeting  him,  putting  all 
your  meetings  together? 

A.  Two  or  three  times  a  week. 


V  O 

**V*"  '••"0"' 

^  o- 

f       fc  c    ,<-/"     s-' 

\   f^^~/  /  ^7>   /^° 

A o../ \  6 

£7 

°  1    *^  |       o      \ 

•••vuc/"" 

<?     j  u       ^^     0    - 

'6'"  '  ...^y.  ..   <  ..^ 

^>T  °  ^ 
' ^ »">......„     .^../...p 

b' 

o 
\ 


Q.     And  for  how  long  a  period  of  time? 

A.     For  the  last  year. 

Q.     You  knew  him  intimately  and»well,  did  you  not? 

A.     Yes;  and  for  six  years  previous,  but  the  last  year  was  most  intimate. 

Q.     Did  you  see  the  body  lying  at  the  morgue  in  the  month  of  May? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Was  that  on  the  same  day  of  the  discovery,  or  was  it  the  day  fol- 
lowing? 

A.     It  was  the  day  following. 

Q.     At  what  time  of  the  day? 

A.     At  eleven  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Q.     With  whom  did  you  go? 

A.     With  Samuel  Garrison. 

Q.     Did  you  see  more  than  one  body  lying  there? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Whose  body  was  it  you  saw  lying  there? 

A.     Mr.  Charles  Hill's. 

Q.     What  satisfied  you  that  it  was  his? 

A.  Its  general  appearance  and  contour  and  outline;  I  was  satisfied  it 
was  his  beyond  all  question,  the  moment  I  saw  it;  I  could  not  be  mistaken. 

Q.     What  did  you  know  it  by — specify  what  it  was? 

A.  I  saw  the  small  imperial  under  his  lip,  which  I  knew  he  always 
wore  while  alive;  but  the  body  was  his,  and  I  was  so  satisfied  with  the  gen- 
eral appearance  that  I  had  no  doubt  it  was  the  remains  of  Charles  Hill,  my 
friend. 

Q.     Were  there  any  other  peculiarities  which  you  noticed? 

A.  Well,  he  had  a  peculiarity,  while  living,  a  broken  finger  on  his  right 
hand.  I  noticed  his  hand  lying  across  his  stomach — his  right  hand  was 
lying  across  his  stomach — and  I  noticed  his  finger. 

Q.     How  about  his  hair? 

A.     The  hair  was  a  dark  brown,  and  I  was  satisfied  it  was  Hill's  hair. 

Q.     And  as  to  the  shape  of  the  forehead? 

A.  The  shape  of  the  forehead  was  his.  It  was  unquestionably  the  body 
of  Charles  Hill. 

CROSS  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Kerr: 

Q.     Have  you  taken  an  active  part  in  the  prosecution  of  the  case? 

A.     Well,  I  believed  I  should  do  so. 

Q.     You  have,  have  you? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  I  have. 

Q.     You  have  given  money  for  this  prosecution? 


v          IA  ~y    v 

•    I 

C..;^0.! 7. 

<S     ' 

•f~- °<TH-=  •        L^^..^.^... 

I-,-/- Jv-Vx-"" 

/ 

'•••/•"£•••  •"\~ 

'/'"o 

l 

1 

.6.. 


A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     You  have  simply  given  your  time  and  attention? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     What  was  the  size  of  the  body  you  saw? 

A.     The  size  of  the  body? 

Q.     Yes,  sir. 

A.     His  height? 

Q.     The  size;  that  calls  for  more  than  the  height. 

A.     He  was  a  large  man. 
The  Court: 

You  misunderstood  the  question;  he  is  talking  about  the  body  as  seen 
in  the  morgue.  Describe  that  body. 

A.     It  was  a  large  body;  it  seemed  to  be  about  6  feet  long. 
By  Mr.  Kerr: 

Q.  I  will  get  at  it  in  this  way.  What  was  the  size  of  Mr.  Hill  in  his 
lifetime — -how  high  was  he? 

A.     About  5  feet  u. 

Q.     How  broad  shouldered;  how  was  his  chest,  etc.? 

A.     I  couldn't  give  you  his  width. 

Q.     What  was  his  weight? 

A.     He  weighed  about  180  pounds. 

Q.     About  5  feet  n  in  height? 

A.     Yes;  he  would  weigh  about  180  or  185. 

Q.     What  was  the  size  of  the  body  at  the  morgue? 

A.     Well,  I  should  say  it  was  a  body  of  about  that  size. 

Q.  Do  you  think  you  can  approximate  the  height  of  a  man  by  the 
body  when  it  is  reclining? 

A.     I  think  so. 

Q.     That  is  all. 

The  Court  [addressing  the  State's  Attorney]:  Is  this  your  last  witness? 

Mr.  Matlack:  It  is  the  last  in  order  to-night,  and  it  is  the  hour  of 
adjournment. 

Mr.  Kerr:  May  I  ask  the  prosecution  what  branch  of  the  case  they  will 
be  likely  to  take  up  to-morrow? 

Mr.  Matlack:  I  can  not  tell  yet.  There  will,  however,  be  more  on  this 
line. 

Mr.  Kerr:  I  put  the  question  because  there  are  things  we  want  here 
when  certain  witnesses  are  cross  examined,  and  we  do  not  want  to  keep 
them  here.  * 

The  Court:  They  will  keep  on  this  line  for  some  time,  and  undoubtedly 
give  you  notice  when  they  get  through.  We  will  now  take  a  recess  until 
ten  o'clock  to-morrow  morning. 


.*£. 


-S- 


.£.. 


..L 


^  i 

'  .........  ! 

"  } 


PHILADELPHIA,  Oct.   12,  1855. 
SECOND    DAY—MORNING    SESSION. 
MR.  GEORGE  E.  KROUSE  sworn. 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Matlack: 

State  your  residence  and  business,  Mr.  Krouse. 

A.     I  live  at  474  North  Street,  and  am  a  wholesale  wine  and  liquor  mer- 
chant at  No.  319  Division  Street. 

Mr.  Kerr:  Did  we  receive  the  name  of  this  witness  in  the  list  that  was 
given  us? 

Mr.  Matlack:  Yes,  sir;  I  think  so. 

Mr.  Kerr:  I  think  not. 

Mr.  Matlack:  I  understand  so.     I  think  the  name  is  there,  though  I  am 
not  sure. 

The  Court:  On  what  line  is  he  to  testify? 

Mr.  Matlack:  On  identification. 

The  Court:  Then,  I  will  let  him  testify. 

Mr.  Kerr:  We  have  no  objection  if  it  is  on  that  line. 
Mr.  Matlack: 

Q.     Did  you  know  Charles  Hill  in  his  lifetime? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     For  how  many  years  did  you  know  him? 

A.     For  about  five  years. 

Q.     Intimately,  or  otherwise? 

A.     Very  intimately. 

Q.     In  what  connection  did  you  know  him? 

Mr.  Kerr  [interrupting]:  I  object.     It  is  not  material. 

Mr.  Matlack:  Did  you  know  him  in  a  business  way,  or  socially,  or  how? 

A.     Socially;  in  society. 

Q.     How  often  did  you  see  him  during  that  time? 

A.     Very  often;  a  couple  times  a  week  in  society  and  meetings. 

Q.     Did  you  see  him  elsewhere? 

A.     Yes,   sir;    entertainments,   and   one  thing  and    another.  .  We  were 
intimate  friends. 

•  Q.     In  the  month  of  May,  of  this  year,  did  you  see  the  body  of  a  dead 
man  in  the  city  morgue? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     Do  you  remember  the  day  of  the  month? 

A.     No,  sir;  it  was  the  day  after  the  body  was  found. 

Q.     What  time  of  the  day? 


}  «  ^    c    " 

o 
J..J \ .....A..    !?.J.. 

e 

\ 

..,..*:....:..( r\C 

'  c^ 

•3,. ..../ IT 

...\*.1...L^...:  xr .\^..L... 

'....L..l:.^. ^.../ 

o  ^^  I     / 

\ 

; ^..-I-.-VB 

_  ^  ^ 

'v" 
^  ^  L 

c~ 
^    v"" 


A.  Just  previous  to  the  post-mortem  examination.  It  was  in  the 
morning. 

Q.     Were  you  alone? 

A.     No;  there  were  five  or  six  of  us  together. 

Q.     Who? 

A.  James  Smith,  Doctor  Forrest,  and  several  of  the  other  doctors; 
and  I  think  you,  Mr.  State's  Attorney,  came  at  the  same  time. 

Q.     Did  you  see  more  than  one  body? 

A.     No,  sir;  that  was  all. 

Q.     In  what  condition  was  that  body? 

A.  The  body  was  in  a  condition  that  as  soon  as  I  looked  at  it  I 
recognized  it  to  be  Mr.  Charles  Hill. 

Q.     Did  you  observe  any  peculiarities  that  attracted  your  attention? 

A.  The  shape  of  his  forehead  and  general  features  and  general  appear- 
ance, because  I  was  so  frequently  with  the  man  and  knew  him  so  well  that  I 
identified  him  as  soon  as  I  looked  upon  him. 

Q.     That  is  all. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Kerr: 

Q.  How  much  hair  was  there  on  his  head? 

A.  Very  little. 

Q.  Indicate  to  the  jury  in  some  way  how  much. 

A.  I  can  not  tell. 

Q.  What  part  of  the  head  was  covered  with  hair? 

A.  Part  of  the  forehead,  I  think;  but  I  didn't  take  much  notice. 

Q.  Generally,  the  head  was  stripped  of  hair,  was  it  not? 

A.  Pretty  much. 

Q.  You  didn't  notice  whether  there  was  any  or  not? 

A.  Yes;  you  could  see  a  few  hairs  remaining. 

Q.  How  about  the  mustache? 

A.  There  was  a  little  part  of  it  on  one  side  yet. 

Q.  How  about  the  eyes? 

A.  You  could  identify  the  eyes. 

Q.  Could  you  see  the  color  of  his  eyes — were  the  eyes  open? 

A.  I  could  not  tell  that  now. 

Q.  Did  you  identify  the  color  of  his  eyes? 

A.  No;  I  did  not. 

Q.  How  about  the  ears? 

A.  I  don't  know,  as  I  didn't  much  notice  his  ears. 

Q.  How  about  the  neck? 

A.  By  his  general  appearance  I  recognized  the  body,  as  I  said  before. 

Q.  What  was  the  condition  of  the  neck,  please? 


J — -^ 


^ 

No 


-A 
r*.vas 


These  Court  Cases  began  in  March  issue;  the  balance  will  appear  in  June,  July 
and  August  numbers.  lOc.  for  each,  or  53c.  for  all  including  this  issue;  45c.  without 
this  issue;  36c.  for  four  numbers;  27c.  for  three;  18c.  for  two  numbers. 


A.  Pretty  sloped  down,  and  pretty  well  used  up,  the  same  as  the  body. 

Q.  You  looked  at  the  body  closely? 

A.  I  did;  I  walked  around  it. 

Q.  You  looked  at  it  very  closely? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  You  base  your  testimony  on  that  kind  of  a  view? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  That  is  all. 

FRANK  WATTS,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Matlack: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? 

A.  Frank  Watts. 

Q.  Where  do  you  live? 

A.  At  present  I  live  at  237  Park  Street. 

Q.  Where  did  you  live  before  you  moved  to  your  present  residence? 

A.  No.  470  North  Street. 

Q.  On  which  side  of  North  Street  was  that  place? 

A.  On  the  east  side. 

Q.  Did  you  know  Charles  Hill  in  his  lifetime? 

A.  Yes;  intimately. 

Q.  For  how  many  years? 

A.  Between  ten  and  eleven  years. 

Q.  Where  did  you  know  him? 

A.  He  was  a  member  of  my  family  during  that  entire  time. 

Q.  In  what  place? 

A.  In  St.  Louis,  and  afterward  here. 

Q.  You  may  state  whether  or  not  he  was  a  member  of  your  family  in 
the  month  of  May  of  the  present  year. 

A.  He  was. 

Q.  State  whether  or  not  in  that  month  you  saw  the  body  of  a  dead  man 
in  the  city  morgue. 

A.  I  did. 

Q.  When? 

A.  Between  seven  and  eight  o'clock  on  the  22d  of  May. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  the  day  of  the  week? 

A.  On  Wednesday. 

Q.  Who  was  present  when  you  saw  that  body? 

A.  James  Smith,  Dr.  Forrest,  I  think,  and  a  number  of  others,  among 
them  John  Hill,  Charles  Hill's  brother. 

Q.  State  whether  or  not  you  recognized  that  body. 


A  WONDERFUL,  MACHINE. 

A  person  who  may  have  lived  in  the  time  of  Benjamin  Franklin,  could 
not  have  been  made  to  understand  how  it  would  be  possible  to  travel  across 
this  continent,  a  distance  of  say  3,000  miles,  in  a  week  or  ten  days,  particu- 
larly when  it  used  to  take  in  his  day  half  that  time  to  go  from  Philadelphia 
to  New  York,  a  distance  now  covered  in  two  hours. 

The  users  of  the  old  tallow  dips  could  not  be  made  to  understand  the 
radiance  and  economy  of  the  electric  lights  of  to-day,  or  the  possibility  of 
speaking  from  continent  to  continent  with  the  loss  of  perhaps  only  a  minute 
or  two.  It  is  difficult  for  persons  to  understand  what  does  not  come  within 
their  experience,  and  so  operators  on  an  old  make  of  type-writing  machine, 
no  matter  what  its  number  or  date,  so  long  as  it  is  made  on  the  old  plan, 
are  so  accustomed  to  the  awkwardness  and  incongruities  of  these  old  instru- 
ments that  they  cannot  imagine  anything  better,  at  least  not  until  they  have 
themselves  demonstrated  the  difference. 

It  is  therefore  very  amusing  to  watch  the  countenance  of  an  operator  on 
the  older  makes,  after  he  has  sat  down  before  the  Smith  Premier  and  used 
it  for  a  few  minutes;  and,  if  this  use  be  extended  to  a  day,  and  he  attempts  to 
go  back  to  the  old  key-board,  and  the  old  inconveniences  generally,  he  for  a 
time  wonders  how  he  could  ever  have  gotten  along  without  certain  things 
which  the  Smith  Premier  type- writer  possesses  and  all  others  lack — a  full 
and  rational  key-board,  perfect  alignment,  the  easiest  sort  of  touch,  the 
neatest  of  printing,  the  ease  in  which  the  matter  can  be  referred  to  and  an 
omission  inserted  without  loss  of  time;  all  these  and  many  other  little  con- 
veniences that  we  have  not  time  to  describe  in  this  space,  are  sure  to  appeal 
to  the  good  sense  of  every  operator  who  tries  the  Smith  Premier. 

Of  course,  one  becomes  accustomed  to  awkward  methods  of  doing  things 
when  one  knows  no  better,  but  the  manner  of  inserting  corrections  or  look- 
ing at  the  work  is  so  cumbrous  on  the  other  machines,  so  injurious  to  the 
eyesight,  and  the  plan  of  their  manipulation  is  so  awkward,  comparatively 
speaking,  preventing  the  speed  which  is  attainable  by  the  Smith  Premier, 
that  it  has  ceased  to  be  a  question  as  to  which  machine  is  the  leading  one. 

And  now  one  word  as  to  the  wear  of  old  machines.  Salesmen  of  old 
machines  are  very  apt  to  attempt  to  make  sales  by  frightening  purchasers  in 
reference  to  the  wearing  qualities  of  a  new  instrument,  claiming  that  an  old 
machine  has  stood  the  test  of  time,  and  a  lot  of  other  bosh  of  the  same 
sort.  When  an  architect  is  building  a  new  house,  he  does  not  have  to  fear 
that  certain  steel  beams  or  other  building  material  may  not  wear  because 
it  has  not  been  put  in  use  before.  And  just  as  certainly  as  we  know  that 
two  and  two  make  four,  the  architect  knows  that  the  material  he  uses  in  his 
building  will  stand  the  same  strain  or  test  of  time  as  the  same  sort  of  mat- 
erial did  in  other  buildings  hundreds  of  years  ago.  And  the  mechanic  knows 
just  as  well  how  long  the  steel  and  other  elements  of  a  type-writer  will  last 
whether  it  is  in  a  new  machine  or  an  old  one.  The  matter  of  wear  and  tear 
is  one  of  simply  the  material  used  and,  of  course,  if  a  new  one  has  the  same 
or  better  material,  it  will  wear  just  as  long  or  longer  than  the  old  makes. 
The  Smith  Premier,  therefore,  using  even  better  material  in  its  construction 
than  others,  is  by  all  odds  the  best  machine  in  this  respect  as  well. 


is  the  ONLY  system  of 

SHORT-HAND 

requiring  NO  dictionary  or  phrase  book;  the  only 
system  available  for  every  purpose  for  which 
PHONOGRAPHY  or  PENMANSHIP  are  em- 
ployed; the  ONLY  system  by  which  the  notes  of 
one  writer,  when  correctly  written,  can  be  read 
with  CEKTAINTY  by  ANY  other  writer  of  the  sys- 
tem; and  the  onlv  system  which  one  has  time  to 
learn  these  busy  days. 

INDORSED  BY  THE  LEGAL  FRATERNITY,  COLLEGE  FAC- 
ULTIES, THE  PRESS  AND  THE  PROFESSION  AS  THE 

"MOST  RAPIDLY  READ  AND 

WRITTEN  AND  EASIEST  LEARNED 

of  any  system."  Some  students  have  even  learned 
to  use  it  and  satisfactorily  till  short-hand  posi- 
tions within  the  brief  space  of  one  to  two  months'1 
time,  without  any  previous  knowledge  of  any 
short-hand.  ANYONE  can  learn  it  in  three 
months  if  the  directions  in  the  book  are  followed. 

This  short-hand  writing  >s  as  legible  as  print 
when  learned,  and  records  of  over  300  words  a 
minute  have  been  made  by  it. 

Send  for  circular  of  testimonials  and  free  first 
lesson.  

THE  COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOK  OF 

Haven's   Practical    Phonography 

Contains  Self- Teaching  Lessons,  together  with  a 
number  of  Short-Hand  Reading  Paires,  including 
Correspondence,  Court  and  Convention  Report- 
ing, with  Key  in  common  print,  making  this  book 
the  only  treatise  on  Short-Hand  Writing  com- 
plete in  one  volume.  Price,  $2,  free  of  postage 
to  any  address.  Order  of 

CURTIS    HAVEN, 

Room  37,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  teacher  of  the  system. 

Whether  you  are  Teacher.  Expert,  Learner,  or 
about  to  learn  Type-Writing— no  matter  wkat 
make  of  machine  you  favor— you  cannot  afford 
to  be  without  a  copy  of 

Haven's  Complete  Manual 

OF 

Type-Writing 

A  Self-Instructor  for  the  Home  Student,  a  Book  <vi 

Reference  for  the  Expert,  a  Guide  to  the  Teacher, 

and  a  Text-Book  for  all  Schools  and  College.,. 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of 
type-writer  work  of  every  kind— epistolary, 
society,  legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial- 
accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations 
descriptive  of  each  specimen,  its  execution  in 
detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  con- 
trast, etc.,  most  of  the  points  being  found  to  be 
both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert 
operators. 

Endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadel- 
phia Press,  Boston  Herald,  and  other  leading 
Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  prac- 
tical operators. 

"The  only  complete  work  on  Type-Writing 
published." 

Price,  $2,  free  of  postage,  to  any  address. 

Orderof  CURTIS    HAVEN, 

Room  17,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  Haven  teacher.  • 


ANYONK     CAN 

QAIN 

Short-Hand 


TYPE-WRITING 

SKILL  IN  THREE  MONTHS 

BY  HAVEN'S  SYSTEM. 
NO  FAILURES. 

No  previous  knowledge  of  either  art  required. 

Haven  teachers  insure  all  students  speedy  and 
thorough  tuition  in  both  Short-hand  and  Type- 
writing. qualifying  many  students  in  as  short  a 
time  as  one  to  two  months,  and  requiring  no 
longer  time  than  three  months  for  even  the 
dullest,  so  long  as  they  possess  a  common-sehool 
education  and  study  and  practice  as  directed. 
INSTR  UCTION  PERSON  ALL  YORB  Y  MAIL 

SPECIAL  NOTICE. 

As  there  are  a  few  teachers  of  other  systems 
who,  being  able  to  qualify  in  three  to  t-ix  months 
an  occasionally  bright  student  who  has  had  pre- 
vious study  at  home,  and  which  schools  are  on 
that  score  advertising  that  they  can  graduate 
students  in  three  months'  time  (meaning  of 
course,  not  all  their  students),  it,  is  necessary  that 
•we  call  attention  to  the  difference  between  such 
misleading  advertisements  and  our  own  claims, 
as  follows: 

We  qualify  ALL  students  within  three  months 
—the  bright  ones  in  much  less  time  . 

Students  who  can  by  any  possibility  master 
and  gain  speed  in  three  to  six  months  by  other 
systems,  can  be  given  such  skill  by  the  Haven 
system  in  one  month. 

Stud  ents  who  require  from  six  to  twelve  months 
to  gain  skill  in  other  systems  require  no  longer 
than  two  months  by  the  Haven  plan. 

Those  who  can  NOT  learn  other  systems 
under  any  conditions,  can  succeed  by  the  Haven 
plan  in  the  guaranteed  three  months'  time. 
Haven's  is  the  only  system  within  the  compre- 
hension of  everyone. 

As  before  stated,  we  make  NO  FAILURES 
where  our  instructions  are  followed. 

Teachers  who  cannot  meet  these  claims  by  the 
system  they  teach  should  investigate  Haven's, 
and  change,  if  they  desire  to  be  up  with  the  times. 

Students  not  successful  at  other  shools,  as  well 
as  all  persons  desirous  of  learning  in  shortest 
possible  time  the  fastest  written  and  easiest  read 
system,  should  correspond  with  the  Haven  Col- 
lege nearest  their  address. 

HAVEN  COLLEGES 

-  —  OF  - 

Short-Hand  and  Type-writing 

are  located  in  a  number  of  principal 

cities.     The  one  conducted  by  Mr. 

and  Mrs.  Curtis  Haven  in  per- 

son is  in  the  Tribune  Build- 

ing, S.  E.Cor.  Madison 

and  Dearborn  Sts., 


CHICAGO, 


Evolution  ot  the  Suburbanite. 

"Yes.  it's  a  great  change!"  gasped  Mr. 
Engle  Wood,  as  he  sat  down  breathless!}' 
in  the  last  seat  of  the  last  car  and  fanned 
his  heated  face  with  his  hat.  "A  few 
years  ago  it  took  me  an  hour  and  a  half  to 
drive  the  old  sorrel  team  to  the  city. 
Now  it  takes  twenty-five  minutes  and  a 
foot-race.  It's  a  great  change!  From  the 
farm  wagon  to  the  railway  car — from  the 
trace-chain  to  the  chase  train!'  And  he 
felt  in  all  his  pockets  in  vain  for  the  ten- 
ride  ticket  he  hadn't  had  time  to  buy.— 
Chicago  Iribune. 

Typewriters ! 

New  or  Second  hand  of  all  makes, 
bought,  sold,  exchanged  and  repaired. 
Also  rented  anywhere  in  the  country. 
Largest  Stock  in  America.  Not  run  by 
a  Typewriter  Manufacturer.  Send  for 
New  Illustrated  Catalogue  describing  all 
Machines.  GERBER'S  SUPPLIES. 

NATIONAL  TYPEWRITER  EXCHANGE 

200  LaSalle  Street, 
CHICAGO. 


ADVERTISING. 


IF  you  wish  to  advertise  anything  anywhere  at 
any  time  write  to  UEO.  P.  ROWELL  &  CO., 
No.  10  Spruce  St.,  New  York. 

EVERY  one  in  need  of  information  on  the 
subject  of  advertising  will  do  well  to  obtain 
a  copy  of  "Book  for  Advertisers,"  ;w.s  pages,  price 
one  dollar.  Mailed,  postage  paid,  on  receipt  of 
price.  Contains  a  careful  compilation  from  the 
American  Newspaper  Directory  of  all  tl 
papi-rs  and  class  journals;  gives  the  circulation 
rating  of  every  one,  and  a  good  deal  of  informa- 
tion about  rates  and  other  matters  pertaining  to 
the  business  of  advertising.  Address  i;o\VKI.I.'S 
ADVERTISING  BUREAU,  in  Spruce  St..  N.  V. 


WANTED: 


TEACHER 
OR  STIDEXT 


AS  PERMANENT  OFFICE  ASSISTANT. 
Either  Gentleman  or  Lady.    No  preference,  quali- 
1  flcations  being  equal.  Salary  $750.  and  Railway  fare 
I  paid  to  office  if  engaged.    Enclose  reference  and 
I  self-addressed  stamped  envelope  to 

HENRY  JONES,   SECRETARY, 

CHICAGO,   ILL 


NORTHWESTERN    AGENTS, 

135  LI  8SLLE  8Tf,  CHICAGO, 

Mention  this    advertisement 


TTERS 


MISCELLANEOUS 
ACTUAL   BUSINESS 

Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and 
numbered  for  timing  speed,  will  be  sent  to  any  address  by  C.  HAVEN, 
TRIBUNK  BUILDING,  CHICAGO.  ILLINOIS,  on  receipt  of 

WORDS    OF   ACTUAL  COURT 

TESTIMONY 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 

WORDS    OF    ACTUAL    CONVENTION 

PROCEEDINGS 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN.  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


10t. 


MII  TUC"  AD  f\  \/  F  Letters,  testimony  and  convention  practice,  and  much  more, 
M  LU.  inc.  MDWVC.  together  with  a  complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching 
300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will  be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete 
Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald.  Philadelphia  Press,  Boston  Herald,  and 
other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "The  only  complete 
work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind— epistolary,  society, 
legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial—  accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descriptive  of 
each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  err.,  most  of  the 
points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert  operators.  Wnether  you  are 
teacher,  expert,  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting— no  matter  what  make  of  machine  you  favor, 
you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  a  copy. 

Price.—  S2.00  to  the  public— but  -Si .33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


Copyright,  1892,  by    Curtis  Haven.     This  includes  entire    contents. 
All  rights  reserved. 

THE  MODERN  REPORTER. 


A  Progressive  Monthly  Magazine  of  Practical  Short-Hand  and  Type-Writing  ibr  the 
Entire  Profession,  all  Teachers  and  their  Pupils,  and  the  Home  Student. 

ELEVENTH  YEAH.  ?  IHKIC       I  QQO  f  lOc.  A  COPY. 

NUMBERS.  JUIlL,    I  0  jZ.  /  $1.00  A  YEAR. 

OUR  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

We  give  another  installment  of  the  Court  Cases  on  following  pages.  They  will 
be  complete  in  six  numbers,  commencing  with  March  issue.  Price,  lOc.  each,  or  53c. 
for  the  six;  five  numbers,  45c. ;  four  numbers,  36c. ;  three  numbers,  27c. ;  two  num- 
bers, I8c. 


ITEMS,  PERSONAL  AND  OTHERWISE. 

Miss  Lucie  Weil  is  the  accomplished  Haven  shorthander  and  typewritist 
of  the  Chicago  Rawhide  Manufacturing  Co.,  75  and  77  Ohio  street. 

Miss  Christina  Johnson  is  the  capable  young  lady  stenographer  and 
typewritist  of  Carl  C.  Shepard  Co.,  interior  furnishings,  302  Michigan 
avenue. 

The  Star  Eubber  Company,  Auditorium  building,  have  a  cultured  and 
lady-like  little  stenographer  in  the  person  of  Miss  Maud  Shepard,  a  three 
months'  graduate  of  the  Chicago  Haven  College. 

Miss  Kittie  Cribben  carries  a  cute  little  chatelaine  watch,  the  gift  of 
her  employers,  Messrs.  A.  &  L.  Felsenthal,  wholesale  jewelers,  in  recog- 
nition of  the  excellence  of  her  shorthand  and  typewriting  services. 

Miss  Ella  Wright,  a  recent  three  months'  graduate  of  the  Haven  short- 
hand, is  one  of  the  most  careful  phonographers  and  typewritists  in  the 
profession.  Her  legal  transcriptions  are  marvels  of  neatness. 

Mrs.  Alice  Kiley,  a  three  months'  Haven  graduate,  has  charge  of  the 
correspondence  department  of  the  Pearl  Baking  Powder  Company.  This 
company  employ  a  number  of  operators  in  Mrs.  Kiley' s  department,  under 
her  charge. 

In  these  days  when  one  must  have  a  knowledge  of  short-hand  to  get  almost  any 
kind  of  an  office  position,  those  not  expecting  to  follow  it  all  their  lives  have  no  time 
to  learn  the  complicated  systems.  Haven  meets  this  want  with  a  system  which  can 
be  mastered  in  principle  in  a  few  days,  skill  for  amanuensis  position  obtained  in  a 
few  weeks,  and  for  court  and  convention,  or  speech  reporting,  in  a  few  months. 
Records  of  300  words  a  minute  have  been  made  by  the  system;  it  is  as  plain  as  print 
when  written,  and  is  the  only  system  needing  neither  dictionary  nor  phrase  book. 


HAVEN'S  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

i  Continued   from  Last  Issue. 


.t-V./.r. 

.h t 


^ 


Vx 


•>>  -, 


""*/"'*  "  "(L/ 

,..L^/x -,.u.v- 1 


.....  e...        .. 

) 


GEORGE  BINDER   }  COMMON  PLEAS  CpURT. 

vs.  V  BEFORE  JUDGE  JAMES  ATKINSON'.     CASE  No.  309. 

HENRY  T.   NAGLE.  )  NEW  YORK,  N.  Y.,  Nov.  6,  1845. 

Samuel  S.  Stover,  for  plaintiff. 

Charles  Willard  and  Marcus  Tooler,  for  defendant. 

TESTIMONY  FOR  PLAINTIFF. 
GEORGE  BINDER,  the  plaintiff,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover: 

Q.     What  is  your  business,  MF.  Binder? 

A.     Wholesale  dealer  in  telegraphic  outfits. 

Q.     Did  Henry  T.  Nagle,  the  defendant,  ever  purchase  goods  of  you? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  for  many  years  prior  to  January  29,  1843. 

Q.     Why  did  he  stop  buying  of  you  at  that  date? 

Objected  to.     Objection  sustained. 

Q.     He  stopped  buying  of  you  at  that  date,  did  he? 

A.     He  did. 

Q.     Was  his  account  square  with  you  then? 

A.  It  was  not.  He  then  owed  me  a  balance  of  two  hundred  and  ninety- 
eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents. 

Q.     How  was  this  balance  settled? 

A.     By  a  note  drawn  for  that  amount,  payable  thirty  days  from  date. 

Q.     Is  this  the  note,  Mr.  Binder? 

A.     It  is. 

Q.     Was  it  ever  paid? 

A.  It  was  not,  or  the  protest  would  not  be  written  on  the  back  of  it, 
and  I  would  not  now  be  in  possession  of  it. 

Q.     WTas  no  amount  whatever  paid  on  account  of  that  note  after  protest? 

A.     There  was  not. 

CROSS  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard: 

Q.  Mr.  Binder,  what  does  this  amount,  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight 
dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents,  represent,  and  how  far  back  does  it  date? 

A.  It  dates  back  about  two  years,  or  a  little  over,  and  it  represents, 
what  Mr.  Nagle  owes  me. 

Q.  I  understand  that  the  last  bill  was  bought  a  few  weeks  previous  to 
the  making  of  this  note — is  that  so? 

A.     Possibly  it  was. 


..ex  •.•«-. '..Vs..  /»  ..ravas \ 

S  •"£/  *> i>->. — V_ 

~"\o' 

\ 

! 

A    ~v          ^    I 
.......A  ....  /C7N  ....... 

/vfTSp..  J  ...A v»  —3\u />. * 

..X  ~.l _ 

o                                                      u> 
...I  

/        v-O 

-^/  .  .—  1 

O          '  V  0 

^s...  o.^C-^-.X) 

^V^I(VN  ^d"  "\ 

....   .    ,.......».    *X^    ..  ..X    .  ».   -J.  .  .../*.  •  -^    *  .  ..  •   ^X   V>. ».....•..      ^      ....O. 

*~\ -^ 


Q.  And  that  the  goods  were  delivered  on  the  day  that  the  note  was 
made? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  I  think  they  were. 

Q.     Has  there  been  no  payment  made  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  have  no  recollection  of  any. 

Q.  Do  you  not  recollect  of  one  day  in  January,  of  this  year,  receiving 
twenty-five  dollars  from  Mr.  Nagle  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  do  not. 

Q.     Nor  twenty  dollars? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     And  you  called  for  the  money  several  times,  did  you  not? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  I  did. 

Q.  Did  not  Mr.  Nagle,  on  a  certain  day  in  January,  of  this  year, 
promise  to  pay  twenty-five  dollars  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.  Maybe  so.  He  used  to  make  about  six  promises  a  week  of  a  similar 
kind. 

Q.  Did  he  not  meet  you  at  Desbrosses  Street  Ferry,  one  day  in  that 
month,  of  that  year,  and  pay  you  twenty-five  dollars  on  account  of  this 
note? 

A.  I  remember  meeting  him  several  times  at  that  ferry,  but  I  never 
received  any  money  from  him  at  any  time  on  account  of  this  note. 

Q.  You  are  positive  that  you  do  not  remember  receiving  any  money 
from  Mr.  Nagle  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  know  I  never  did. 

Q.  I  believe  you  said  in  your  direct  examination  that  the  note  was  for 
thirty  days? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     This  is  the  note,  I  believe? 

A.     It  is. 

Q.     This  note  reads  "  one  month  from  date  " — which  is  correct? 

A.     The  note,  of  course. 

Q.     Then  you  admit  that,  in  this  instance,  your  memory  was  at  fault? 

A.     Well,  as  to  the  thirty  days,  yes. 

Q.  But  not 'as  to  having  received  payment  on  account  of  this  note  from 
Mr.  Nagle? 

A.     No;  as  to  that,  I  am  positive. 

Q.     Of  what?    • 

A.     Of  never  having  received  any  money  on  that  note. 

Q.  Now,  Mr.  Binder,  do  you  not  remember,  upon  another  occasion, 
in  January  of  this  year,  when  you  called  upon  Mr.  Nagle,  as  he  was  about 
leaving  his  office  upon  an  important  business  engagement,  on  which  occasion 


-3\1S -  J     

V*"  ~°    

.^..r.^X.^.r...^..:. ..  -~V..: 

--~1 ; --** 

a  ^  *N          tv^  ^  ^  ;» 

fx       ^    V-       ..       ^     -  v 

w. (2. ^*  •" 

I    ^  '    ' — '  ^   — I    S* 

....(..,X ...~ <.-C. 

0 

V 

\ 


he  paid  you  money  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  do  not. 

Q.  'What  sort  of  telegraphic  instruments  was  this  last  bill  for — this  bill 
for  goods  delivered  on  the  day  the  note  was  made — what  sort  of  instru- 
ments? 

A.  There  were  some  relays  and  sounders,  and  some  small  articles  which 
I  do  not  now  remember. 

Q.  How  many  of  the  articles  included  in  that  bill  were  returned  to  you 
by  the  defendant? 

A.     None  of  them. 

Q.  Did  not  Mr.  Nagle  come  to  you  on  that  day,  after  the  note  was  given 
y*ou,  and  notify  you  that  the  goods  you  sent  him  were  not  as  represented  and 
that  he  intended  to  return  them  or  some  of  them  to  you  the  next  day? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Did  he  not  return  them  to  you? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  to  say  you  never  received  back  from  Mr.  Nagle  any 
portion  of  the  goods  sent  him  by  you  on  the  day  this  note  was  signed? 

A.  I  most  emphatically  mean  to  say  I  did  not  receive  any  of  my  goods 
back  from  Mr.  Nagle,  after  the  signing  of  that  note. 

Q.     And  never  received  any  complaint  about  them? 

A.  '  No,  sir;  not  that  I  remember. 

Q.  Ah,  not  that  you  remember.  But  it  might  have  happened,  you 
think? 

A.     No,  sir;  I  do  not  think  so. 

RE-DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover: 

Q.  Mr.  Binder,  are  you  positive  that  you  never  received  any  payment 
on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  am  very  positive  that  I  did  not. 

Q.  Do  your  books  or  any  memoranda  of  yours  contain  any  such 
entries,  affecting  this  note? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Would  they,  if  such  payment  had  been  made? 

A.     They  certainly  would. 

RE-CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard: 

Q.  Are  you  positive  that  Mr.  Nagle  never  complained  about  your  last 
sale  to  him? 

A.     I  am  very  positive  that  he  never  did,  and  he  never  returned  any  of 

these  goods  to   me. 

PLAINTIFF    RESTS. 


h  ........ 


1. 


A  A.x  .„. 


I...L ^>..C       .........  . 

Ao    I  J 


\ 


J 

4—f\ 


j '..U^A- 


.1. 


SECOND  DAY. 

NEW  YORK,  N.  Y.,  Nov.  6,  1845. 
TESTIMONY  FOR  THE  DEFENSE. 
HENRY  T.  NAGLE,  the  defendant,  sworn  in  his  own  behalf. 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard: 

Q.  This  promissory  note,  for  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight  dollars 
and  fifty-seven  cents,  which  you  gave  Mr.  George  Binder,  for  goods  pur- 
chased, did  you  pay  it  when  it  became  due  ? 

A.     I  did  not. 

Q.     Why  not  ? 

A.  Because  I  found  out,  after  giving  the  note,  that  Mr.  Binder  had  not 
sent  me  the  kind  of  goods  ordered,  and  the  goods  were  inferior  to  the 
ones  I  had  previously  bought  at  same  price. 

Q.     Did  you  ever  speak  to  Mr.  Binder  of  this  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir,  repeatedly,  and  sent  the  goods  back  to  him,  but  he  would 
not  receive  them. 

Q.     Did  he  give  you  any  reason  for  not  taking  the  goods  back  ? 

A.     Only  that  he  would  not  receive  them. 

Q.     You  are  positive  that  he  never  gave  any  reason  ? 

A.     I  am  positive  he  never  did  to  me. 

Q.  When  did  you  first  complain  personally  to  Mr.  Binder,  in  relation  to 
the  goods  bought  of  him,  January  29,  1843  ? 

A.  It  was  either  the  first  or  second  or  third  day  of  February,  1843.  I 
received  the  goods  a  day  or  two  after  the  note  was  given,  and  I  called  on 
Mr.  Binder  the  very  day  I  received  the  goods,  but  he  was  out,  so  I  left 
word  for  him  to  call  on  me,  which  he  did  on  either  the  first,  second,  or  third 
of  February,  1843,  and  I  then  complained  personally  about  them.  He  then 
said  he  would  not  receive  them  back. 

Q.     You  asked  him  to  take  them  back,  did  you  ? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     And  he  positively  refused,  you  say  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  positively. 

Q.     Giving  what  reason  ?  • 

A.     No  reason,  only  that  he  would  not  take  them  back. 

Q.  And  you  say,  because  the  goods  were  not  as  represented  you  refused 
to  pay  this  note  of  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven 
cents  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  offer  to  pay  Mr.  Binder  what  you  claim  you  rightly 
owed  him  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  if  he  would,  from  the  amount  of  the  note,  deduct  twenty 


.^. 


.'..1 


. 
<—  ^ 


.      -^  1        "^w, 

.........    ................  So  -o  ....Tlp 

^^ 


V        O  1  J 


V" 


)*' 


These  Court  Cases  began  in  March  issue;  the  balance  will  appear  in  July  and 
August  numbers.  lOc.  for  each,  or  53c.  for  all,  including  this  issue;  45c.  without 
this  issue;  86c.  for  four  numbers;  27c.  for  three;  18c.  for  two  numbers. 


dollars,  the  price  of  the  instruments  I  desired  to  return,  I  was  willing  to 
pay  the  balance. 

Q.  Did  you  offer  this  money  personally  to  Mr.  Binder  on  or  before  the 
day  the  note  became  due? 

A.  I  offered  it  several  times  before,  and  on  the  day  the  note  became 
due,  also. 

Q.     Did  he  accept? 

A.     He  did  not;  he  positively  refused  to  accept  the  money. 

Q.     Giving  you  no  reason? 

A.     None  whatever. 

Q.  Did  you  offer  him  the  money  at  any  time  after  the  note  was 
protested? 

A.  I  offered  him,  some  days  after  the  note  was  protested,  the  same 
amount  as  I  had  offered  him  before,  but  I  refused  to  pay  the  protest  on  the 
note,  and  also  refused  to  pay  for  the  goods  I  didn't  want. 

Q.     And  you  tried  to  return  the  goods? 

A.  I  did,  several  times,  before  and  afterward,  and  am  willing  to  return 
them  yet,  as  I  have  them  in  the  same  condition  as  when  bought. 

Q.  Has  Mr.  Binder,  at  any  time,  received  any  money  from  you  on 
account  of  your  indebtedness  to  him? 

A.  Twice  on  account;  and  he  was  willing  to  receive  the  amount  I 
offered  him  before  the  note  was  due,  but  he  would  only  receive  that  money 
as  an  account  payment.  He  declined  to  receive  it  with  the  instruments,  as 
a  full  payment,  returning  me  the  note. 

Q.     You  say  you  offered  to  pay  that  note  after  it  was  protested? 

A.  I  offered,  after  the  note  was  protested,  to  pay  Mr.  Binder  two 
hundred  and  seventy-eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents  cash,  and  return  the 
goods  not  ordered,  if  he  would  give  me  the  note.  But  I  would  not  pay  the 
protest,  and,  of  course,  I  refused  to  pay  for  goods  that  were  not  the  ones 
ordered.  I  made  this  offer  before  the  note  came  due,  and  the  day  the 
note  was  due,  but  only  once  after  it  was  due — a  few  days  after. 

Q.     Was  your  offer  accepted? 

A.     It  was  not. 

Q.     Did  you  ever  pay  Mr.  Nagle  any  money  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     When? 

A.  On  one  occasion — it  was  January  of  this  year — I  paid  him — Mr. 
Binder  —  twenty-five  dollars,  and  again,  on  the  230!  of  same  month,  I 
paid  him  twenty  dollars,  both  amounts  on  account  of  the  bill. 

Q.     Was  that  all? 

A.     That  was  all  that  I  paid  him  on  account  of  the  bill. 

Q.     Did  you  get  receipts  for  these  amounts? 


THE  GOVERNMENT  ENDORSES  THE  SMITH  PRE3IIER 
TYPEWRITER. 

The  war  department  of  the  government  having  occasion  for  150  type- 
writing machines,  solicited  tests  from  the  different  manufacturers  which,  it 
is  understood,  were  more  severe  than  those  required  in  previous  type- 
writing tests,  the  result  being  that  the  Smith  Premier  was  awarded  the 
order  by  the  government,  which  thereby  practically,  though  unofficially, 
endorses  that  machine  as  the  most  perfect  instrument  on  the  market. 

This  endorsement  is  something  more  than  that  which  might  be  made 
by  any  firm,  for  the  government  has  a  wider  range  of  experience  in  type- 
writing work  of  every  description ;  it  employs  a  great  many  operators,  and  it 
has  among  its  employes  in  different  departments  many  mechanics  of  skill, 
whose  judgment  in  respect  to  the  working  qualities  of  machines  is  of  the 
highest  order,  no  matter  whether  it  be  in  respect  to  typewriting  or  other 
machines. 

It  is,  therefore,  to  be  expected  that  the  government  has  not  failed  to 
avail  itself  of  the  skill  in  typewriting  and  general  mechanics  which  these 
employes  have,  and  the  giving  of  such  a  large  order  to  the  Smith  Premier, 
the  largest  order  ever  given  by  the  government,  is  pretty  clear  evidence 
that  that  machine  is  the  best  in  use,  a  decision  which  is  of  still  greater 
value  when  it  is  considered  that  they  have  had  in  use  in  their  different 
departments  every  known  make  of  typewriting  machines  that  are  more  than 
a  mere  toy. 

The  growth  of  this  machine  in  popular  favor  has  been  a  wonderful  one. 
Although  not  more  than  a  few  years  before  the  public,  it  has  demonstrated 
its  fitness  for  all  kinds  of  work  and  the  many  conveniences  of  which  it  is 
possessed  over  all  other  machines,  having  crept  into  favor  so  rapidly  and  so 
surely,  that  it  bids  fair  at  a  veiy  early  date  to  eclipse  them  all  in  popularity 
in  every  civilized  city  on  the  globe. 

The  Smith  Premier  Manufacturing  Co.,  who  own  this  wonderful  ma- 
chine, is  presided  over  by  a  gentleman  who  has  the  reputation  of  doing  well 
with  every  thing  he  undertakes,  and  spares  no  pains  or  money  to  make  his 
undertaking  not  only  superior  for  the  time  being,  but  permanently  so.  In 
the  case  of  the  Smith  Premier  typewriter,  it  is  twenty  years  ahead  of  its 
time,  so  that  it  is  impossible  for  any  of  the  old  machines  or  new  ones,  to 
very  well  compete  with  it  in  advantages,  as  all  its  important  points  are 
well  secured  by  patent  rights,  and  the  company  have  sufficient  capital  to 
see  that  these  rights  are  respected.  It  is  a  matter  of  pure  enterprise  and 
superiority  that  has  enabled  this  company  to  successfully  compete  with 
other  machines  that  have  for  years  held  the  balance  of  power,  which  they 
are  fast  relinquishing  to  the  inimitable  Smith  Premier. 


MAN'S    INCONSTANCY. 

(Exchange.) 

Pillbury — I    hear    Partington's    pretty    young  lady  typewriter  has    left   him. 
What  was  the  reason? 

Knowall — I  believe  she  caught  him  kissing  his  wife. 


If  you  want    the  address    of    any  stenog- 
rapher in  the  United  States  or  Canada,  send  for 

How's  Directory  of  Stenographers 

of  the    United     States,    handsomely   bound    in 
cloth  and  gold,  SI.  00. 

THE  HOW  PUBLISHING  COMPANY, 

Tribune  Bldg.,  NEW  YORK,  N.  Y. 


COPYRIGHTED  1890. 
ALL     RIGHTS    RESERVED. 


THK 

Short-Hand  Teacher's 
Companion. 

A  handy  volume  of  information  of  value  to  every 

Teacher  of 
SHORT-HAND  AND  TYPE-WRITING, 

Containing  Review  Exercises,  a  full  set  (in  synopsis)  of 

Lectures  to  Students,  together  with  a  detailed 

explanation  of  the  means  bv  which 

EVEN    DULL  STUDENTS 

Are,  by  the  Haven  plan  of  instruction,  in  use  at  Haven 

Colleges, 
IN  ONE  TO  THREE   MONTHS, 

Without  any  previous  knowledge  of  these  arts  on  the 

Student's  part, 
FITTED   FOR   POSITIONS 

Requiring  skill  in  both  Short-Hand  and  Type-writing; 
minutely  describing  the  Student's  duties  and   pro- 
gress, step  by  step,  from  the  taking  of  first  lesson 
to  graduation,  with  the  reason  for  each  step  ; 

Together  with  much  other  information  of  value  to 
Teachers  of  any  system. 


BY  CURTIS  HAVEN, 

Expert  Short-hand  Reporter  and  Type-writist,  Founder  of  the  Ha- 
ven Colleges  of  Practical   Phonography  and  Type-writing, 
Author  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography, "Haven's 
Complete  Manual  of  Type-writing,  Etc.,  Etc. 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  AUTHOE, 

Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO. 


"Sho\ving  the  advantages  possessed  by  Haven's  distinct  joined  vowels  over  othe' 
systems  in  making  legible,  without  decreasing  speed,  those  words  wherein  vo\veh> 
must  be  written,  etc.,  etc. 


GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

LINDSLEY    CROSS. 

Ape 
i 

\ 

V 

1            ^ 

Away 

^ 

< 

^        ^ 

Iowa 

2 

^ 

^         ^ 

I.  PITMAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Evaporate. 

^ 

V 

\ 

I.  PITMAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Emigrant 

^ 

^ 

^^ 

Immigrant 

^ 

v-j. 

^« 

B.  PI  THAN. 

I  PITMAN. 

HAVEN. 

ivoom 

^ 

.^ 

Prx 

^ 

^ 

Leave 

Love 

Will  Kave 

You  will  Kave  teen 

PITMAN. 

r\^ 

/a  . 

/v 

/V, 

•  f  \^ 

^^ 

HAVEN. 

r\ 

^^ 

^^-^ 

/—  ^ 

T       i 

is  the  ONLY  system  of 

SHORT-HAND 

requiring  NO  dictionary  or  phrase  book;  the  only 
system  available  for  every  purpose  for  which 
PHONOGRAPHY  or  PENMANSHIP  are  em- 
ployed; the  ONLY  system  by  which  the  notes  of 
one  writer,  when  correctly  written,  can  be  read 
with  CERTAINTY  by  ANY  other  writer  of  the  sys- 
tem; and  the  onlv  system  which  one  has  time  to 
learn  these  busy  days. 

INDORSED  BY  THE  LEGAL  FRATERNITY,  COLLEGE  v  AC- 
ULTIES,  THE  PRESS  AND  THE  PROFESSION  AS  T.1E 

"MOST  KAPIDLY  READ  AND 

WRITTEN  AND  EASIEST  LEARNED 

of  any  system."  Some  students  have  even  learned 
to  use  it  and  satisfactorily  fill  short-hand  posi- 
tions within  the  brief  space  of  one  to  two  months'1 
time,  without  any  previous  knowledge  of  any 
short-hand.  ANYONE  can  learn  it  in  three 
montht  if  the  directions  in  the  book  are  followed. 

This  short-hand  writing  's  as  legible  as  print 
•when  learned,  and  records  of  over  300  words  a 
minute  have  been  made  by  it. 

Send  for  circular  of  testimonials  and  free  first 
lesson.  

THE  COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOK  OF 

Haven's   Practical    Phonography 

Contains  Self-Teaching  Lessons,  together  with  a 
number  of  Short-Hand  Reading  Pages,  including 
Correspondence,  Court  and  Convention  Report- 
ing, with  Key  in  common  print,  making  this  book 
the  only  treatise  on  Short-Hand  Writing  com- 
plete in  one  volume.  Price,  $2,  free  of  postage 
to  any  address.  Order  of 

CURTIS    HAVEN, 

Room  17,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  teacher  of  the  system. 

Whether  you  are  Teacher.  Expert,  Learner,  or 
about  to  learn  Type-Writing — no  matter  wbat 
make  of  machine  you  favor— you  cannot  afford 
to  be  without  a  copy  of 

Haven's  Complete  Manual 

OF 

Type-Writing 

A  Self -Instructor  for  the  Home  Student,  a  Book  oi 

Reference  for  the  Expert,  a  Guide  to  the  Teac-wj. 

and  a  Text-Book  for  all  Schools  and  Colleger. 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of 
type- writer  work  of  every  kind— epistolary, 
society,  legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial- 
accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations 
descriptive  of  each  specimen,  its  execution  in 
detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  con- 
trast, etc.,  most  of  the  points  being  found  to  be 
both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert 
operators. 

Endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadel- 
phia Press,  Boston  Herald,  and  other  leading 
Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  prac- 
tical operators. 

"The  only  complete  work    on  Type-Writing 
published." 
Price,  $2,  free  of  postage,  to  any  address. 

Orderof  CURTIS    HAVEN, 

Room  17,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  Haven  teacher. 


ANYONE     CAN 

QAIN 

Short-Hand 


TYPE-WRITING 

SKILL  IN  THREE  MONTHS 

BY  HA.VEN'8  SYSTEM. 
NO  FAILURES. 

No  previous  knowledge  of  either  art  required. 

Haven  teachers  insure  all  students  speedy  and 
thorough  tuition  in  both  Short-hand  and  Type- 
Writing.  qualifying  many  students  in  as  short  a 
time  as  one  to  two  months,  and  requiring  no 
longer  time  than  three  months  for  even  the 
dullest,  so  long  as  they  possess  a  common-school 
education  and  study  and  practice  as  directed. 
INSTRUCTION  PERSONALLY  OR  BY  MAIL 

SPECIAL  NOTICE. 

As  there  are  a  few  teachers  of  other  systems 
who,  being  able  to  qualify  in  three  to  six  months 
an  occasion  ally  brignt  student  who  has  had  pre- 
vious study  at  home,  and  which  schools  are  on 
that  score  advertising  that  they  can  graduate 
students  in  three  months'  time  (meaning  of 
course,  not  all  their  students),  it  is  necessary  that 
we  call  attention  to  the  difference  between  such 
misleading  advertisements  and  our  own  claims, 
as  follows:  * 

We  qualify  ALL  students  within  three  mouths 
—the  bright  ones  in  much  less  time. 

Students  who  can  by  any  possibility  master 
and  gain  speed  in  three  to  six  months  by  other 
systems,  can  be  given  such  skill  by  the  Haven 
system  in  one  month. 

Students  who  require  from  six  to  twelve  months 
to  gain  skill  in  other  systems  require  no  longer 
than  two  months  by  the  Haven  plan  . 

Those  w,ho  can  NOT  learn  other  systems 
under  any  conditions,  can  succeed  by  the  Haven 
plan  in  the  guaranteed  three  months'  time. 
Haven's  is  the  only  system  within  the  compre- 
hension of  everyone. 

As  before  stated,  we  make  NO  FAILURES 
where  our  instructions  are  followed. 

Teachers  who  cannot  meet  these  claims  by  the 
system  they  teach  should  investigate  Haven's, 
and  change,  if  they  desire  to  be  up  with  the  times. 

Students  not  successful  at  other  shools,  as  well 
as  all  persons  desirous  of  learning  in  shortest 
possible  time  the  fastest  written  and  easiest  read 
system,  should  correspond  with  the  Haven  Col- 
lege nearest  their  address. 

HAVEN  COLLEGES 

-  OF  - 

Short-Hand  and  Type-writing 

are  located  in  a  number  of  principal 

cities.     The  one  conducted  by  Mr. 

and  Mrs.  Curtis  Haven  in  per- 

son is  in  the  Tribune  Build- 

ing, S.  E.Cor.  Madison 

and  Dearborn  Sts., 

CHICAGO,   ILL. 


Funny-graphs  from  Exchanges. 

The  girl  stood  on  the  burning  deck, 

And  calmly  met  her  fate; 
She  feared  not  death  because  she  knew, 

She  had  put  her  hat  on  straight. 


ADVERTISING. 


Uncle  Jerry  Rusk  says  he  is  not  so  much 
afraid  of  being  struck  by  Presidential 
lightning  as  he  is  of  having  a  brand  of 
baking  powder  named  after  him. 


Kate  Field's  remark  that  Congressman 
Bolivian's  excessive  economy  leads  him 
to  talk  through  his  nose  to  save  his  throat 
is  almost  as  unparliamentary  as  was  the 
allegation  made  concerning  another  parsi- 
monious person  who  wore  a  wart  on  the 
back  of  his  neck  to  save  the  expense  of  a 
collar  button. 

Typewriters ! 

New   or   Second   hand  of    all  makes, 

bought,   sold,   exchanged   and   repaired. 

Also   rented   anywhere   in  the  country. 

Largest  Stock  in  America.     Not  run  by 

a  Typewriter   Manufacturer.     Send   for 

New  Illustrated  Catalogue  describing  all 

Machines.     GERBER'S  SUPPLIES. 

NATIONAL  TYPEWRITER  EXCHANGE 

200  LaSalle  Street, 

CHICAGO. 


IF  you  wish  to  advertise  anything  anywhere  at 
any  time  write  to  GEO.  P.  ROWELL  &  CO., 
No;  10  Spruce  St.,  New  York. 

EVERY  one  in  need  of  information  on  the 
subject  of  advertising  will  do  well  to  obtain 
a  copy  of  "Book  for  Advertisers,"  36S  pages,  price 
one  (foliar.  Mailed,  postage  paid,  on  receipt  of 
price.  Contains  a  careful  compilation  from  the 
American  Newspaper  Directory  of  all  the  best 
papers  and  class  journals;  gives  the  circulation 
rating  of  every  one,  and  a  good  deal  of  informa- 
tion about  rates  and  other  matters  pertaining  to 
the  business  of  advertising.  Address  RO  WELL'S 
ADVERTISING  BUREAU,  10  Spruce  St..  N.  Y. 


jp  he 


SEND  FOR  CATALOGUE. — 

>.  1.  f  ©well  *  G©., 

NORTHWESTERN    AGENTS, 

185 II  SILLE  8T,,  GHICIGO. 

Mention  this   advertisement 


TTERS 


MISCELLANEOUS 
ACTUAL   BUSINESS 

Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and 
numbered  for  timing  speed,  will  be  sent  to  any  address  by  C.  HAVEN, 
TRIBUNE  BUILDING,  CHICAGO.  ILLINOIS,  on  receipt  of 

WORDS   OF   ACTUAL  COURT 

TESTIMONY 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


10c. 


WORDS    OF    ACTUAL    CONVENTION 

PROCEEDINGS 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


Iflt. 


ALL  THE    ABOVE 


Letters,  testimony  and  convention  practice,  and  much  more, 
together  with  a  complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching 
300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will  be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete 
Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadelphia  Press,  Boston  Herald,  and 
other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "The  only  complete 
work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind— epistolary,  society, 
legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial— accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descriptive  of 
each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  etc.,  most  of  the 
points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert*operators.  "Whether  you  are 
teacher,  expert,  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting— no  matter  what  make  of  machine  you  favor, 
you  cannot  afford. to  be  without  a  copy. 

Price.—  •*2.00  to  the  public— but  $1.33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


Copyright,  1892,  by    Curtis  Haven.     This  includes  entire    contents. 
All  rights  reserved. 

THE  MODERN  REPORTER. 


A  Progressive  Monthly  Magazine  of  Practical  Short-Hand  and  Type-Writing  for  the 
Entire  Profession,  all  Teacher*  and  their  Pupils,  and  the  Home  Student. 

ELEVENTH  YEAH. )  Ml  IV       I  QQO  (  lOc.  A  COPY. 

NUMBER  7.  JULl,    lOOZ.  1  $1.00  A  YEAB. 

OUR  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

We  give  the  concluding  installment  of  the  Court  Cases  on  following  pages. 
They  are  complete  in  five  numbers,  commencing  with  March  issue.  Price,  lOc.  each, 
or  45c.  for  the  five;  four  numbers,  36c. ;  three  numbers,  27c. ;  two  numbers,  18c. 


ITEMS,  PERSONAL  AND  OTHERWISE. 

Mr.  Victor  Benson  is  the  courteous  shorthander  and  typewritist  of  the  Inter- 
national Mortgage  Syndicate,  Washington  Block,  108  Fifth  avenue. 

Miss  Christina  Hannah  is  the  capable  young  lady  stenographer  and  typewritist  of 
Carl  C.  Shepard  Co.,  interior  furnishings.  302  Michigan  avenue. 

The  receipt  is  gratefully  acknowledged  of  a  crate  of  luscious  Texas  peaches  from 
friend  and  former  pupil,  Mr.  Jeff.  D.  Ellis,  of  Tyler,  that  State. 

There  is  no  stenographer  and  typewritist  in  the  business  that  does  neater  and 
more  exact  woik  than  Miss  Annie  Abels,  the  charming  little  lady  Haven  shorthander 
of  the  Redpath  Lyceum  Bureau.  She  was  ready  for  a  position  within  two  months 
after  taking  first  lesson. 

Miss  Xora  Conley  is  the  efficient  Haven  shorthander  and  typewritist  of  the  whole- 
sale clothing  firm  of  Spitz,  Landauer  &  Co.,  152  Market  street.  Miss  Conley  has  also 
done  some  very  difficult  work  in  the  way  of  taking  from  dictation  editorial  matter  for 
a  leading  Chicago  daily. 

Mr.  J.  G.  Sprankle  has  been  engaged  by  the  editor  and  publisher  of  the  Inland 
Printer,  as  his  shorthand  and  typewriting  private  secretary.  This  is  a  difficult  posi- 
tion to  hold,  and  as  there  were  many  competitors  for  the  place,  Mr.  Sprankle's 
selection  speaks  well  for  his  ability  as  a  Haven  writer. 


In  these  days  when  one  must  have  a  knowledge  of  short-hand  to  get  almost  any 
kind  of  an  office  position,  those  not  expecting  to  follow  it  all  their  lives  have  no  time 
to  learn  the  complicated  systems.  Haven  meets  this  want  with  a  system  which  can 
be  mastered  in  principle  in  a  few  days,  skill  for  amanuensis  positions  obtained  in  a 
few  weeks,  and  for  court  and  convention,  or  speech  reporting,  in  a  few  months. 
Records  of  300  words  a  minute  have  been  made  by  the  system;  it  is  as  plain  as  print 
when  written,  and  is  the  only  system  needing  neither  dictionary  nor  phrase  book. 


HAVEN'S  POPULAR  COURT  READER. 

(Continued  from  Last  Issue.) 


jr../, 

^    o 

1-7 
"I  ^'t-  -y- 

.1 

t0 

•^ 

J           -i                     7    V^  I          b 

(6-  />   ;j_.\..../ r^..^-.. 

.llJi  "    i^ 

r.^ .( 

(o 

^  > 

"  lo 

t 

""     I 

-^  ^_^^  f~^'  "~  (.  _(*  ° 

"/"o"  6 

- p..t..n..v.7 

«> 


A.     I  did  not.     He  promised  to  send  me  receipts,  but  never  did. 

Q.  Why  did  you  not  get  receipts  at  the  time  these  two  payments  were 
made? 

A.  Because  they  were  made  under  circumstances  which  made  it 
impossible  to  get  them. 

Q.     How  was  that? 

A.  The  first  amount  of  twenty-five  dollars  was  paid  in  Desbrosses 
Street  Ferry,  upon  my  meeting  him  there,  and  the  second  amount  just  out- 
side of  my  office  door,  when  I  was  starting  out  to  fulfill  an  important  engage- 
ment, and  had  only  just  time  to  catch  the  train. 

Q.     What  makes  you  so  positive  about  paying  these  amounts? 

A.  Well,  I  remember  the  transactions  distinctly,  and  the  entries  are  in 
my  cash-book  for  those  days. 

Q.     Is  this  the  cash-book  you  refer  to?  [Showing  book.] 

A.     It  is. 

Q.     Can  you  point  out  the  entries  you  refer  to? 

A.  Yes,  sir;  there  they  are.  [Indicating.]  This  is  the  first  entry. 
[Reading.]  January  13,  1845,  Pa^  to  George  Binder,  on  account,  twenty- 
five  dollars.  And  here  is  the  other,  in  same  words,  under  date  of  23d, 
same  month  and  year,  twenty  dollars. 

Q.     In  whose  handwriting  are  those  entries? 

A.     They  are  in  my  own  handwriting. 

Q.     You  kept  your  own  books  at  that  time,  did  you? 

A.     I  did — yes,  sir;  have  always  kept  them  and  do  now. 

Cash-book  offered  in  evidence  and  marked  Exhibit  A. 

Q.  Have  you  no  other  corroboration  of  your  memory,  excepting  this 
book? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  a  salesman  of  mine,    Mr.   Long, •  witnessed  both  payments. 

Q.     How  was  that? 

A.  He  was  with  me  at  Desbrosses  Street  Ferry  when  twenty-five  dol- 
lars were  paid  to  Mr.  Binder,  and  he  stood  at  the  window  of  my  place  of 
business  when  I  handed  twenty  dollars  to  Mr.  Binder  on  the  23d  of  January. 

Q.     Did  he  see  both  payments? 

A.     He  says  so — yes. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover: 

Q.  Mr.  Nagle,  you  admit  signing  this  note  for  two  hundred  and  ninety- 
eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  by  that  act  you  really  .admitted  at  the  time  that  you  owed  Mr. 
Binder  the  sum  of  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven 
tents,  did  you  not? 


: L...._..C 

P 

.c..5...!i.^ .7?..-..*.!: 

L.  N 

o>../ 

&rr. 

i 

^      '-\  ^V"*\ 

« :..^i / 

-> 

V 

...-, c..i^ 

\  3  -* 


V  X 


A.  I  thought  that  amount  was  correct,  then,  because  I  presumed  the 
goods  were  all  right. 

Q.     Did  you  not  know  they  were  all  right,  Mr.  Nagle? 

A.     No,  sir;  I  did  not. 

Q.     Then  why  did  you  sign  the  note? 

A.     Because  I  thought  the  goods  were  all  right. 

Q.  Now,  do  you  mean  to  say,  Mr.  Nagle,  that  you  would  have  signed 
that  note,  if  you  had  not  had  positive  evidence  that  the  goods  were  all  right? 

A.  I  mean  to  say  that  I  did  sign  that  note  without  such  positive 
knowledge. 

Q.     Do  you  go  about  signing  notes  in  that  way,  Mr.  Nagle? 

A.     No,  sir;  not  generally.     Especially  not  since  then. 

DEFENSE    RESTS. 

REBUTTAL. 

JAMES  WILSON,  a  witness  for  the  plaintiff,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  : 
By  Mr.  Stover  : 

Q.     James,  where  do  you  reside  ? 

A.     1132  Franklin  Street,  this  city. 

Q.     In  whose  employ  are  you  ? 

A.     Messrs.  Bridge  &  Close. 

Q.     In  whose  employ  were  you  in  January,  1843  ? 

A.     I  was  in  Mr.  George  Binder's  employ. 

Q.     In  what  capacity  ? 

A.     I  was  delivery  clerk  for  Mr.  Binder. 

Q.     Do  you  remember' this  last  order  of  Mr.  Nagle's? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Did  you  attend  to  its  delivery? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     In  what  way  ? 

A.  I  packed  the  goods  and  gave  them  to  the  drayman  to  deliver  to 
Mr.  Nagle'. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Nagle  ever  complain  about  receiving  the  wrong  goods 
on  this  occasion  ? 

A.     Not  that  I  know  of. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard  : 

Q.     What  is  your  age  ? 

A.     Nineteen. 

Q.     Then  you  were  about  sixteen  when  this  transaction  occurred  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 


•> 


.u 


.No 


Q.  You  would  not  have  known  if  Mr.  Nagle  had  complained  about 
his  goods,  would  you  ? 

A.     Not  unless  I  heard  him  complain. 

Q.     Such  complaints  were  not  usually  brought  to  you,  were  they? 

A.     No,  sir. 

SURREBUTTAL. 

HENRY  T.  NAGLE,  the  defendant,  recalled: 

By  Mr.  Willard  : 

Q.  You  have  said,  in  your  examination-in-chief,  that  you  complained 
frequently  to  Mr.  Binder  about  sending  you  the  wrong  telegraph  instru- 
ments —  were  these  complaints  made  verbally,  or  in  writing  ? 

A.     Both. 

Q.     On  what  occasions  were  they  made  in  writing  ? 

A.  On  the  day  I  received  the  wrong  goods.  I  stopped  in  to  see 
Mr.  Binder;  and,  as  he  was  not  in,  I  left  a  note  on,, his  desk  in  reference 
to  the  matter. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover  : 

Q.  Who  was  present  when  you  left  that  note  ? 

A.  I  think  James  Wilson  was. 

Q.  You  think  !     Are  you  positive  ? 

A.  I  am  not  positive  ;  it  might  have  been  someone  else. 

Q.  Did  you  call  anyone's  attention  to  it  ? 

A.  I  think  not. 

EVIDENCE  CLOSED. 

CHARGE  OF  THE  COURT. 

GENTLEMEN  OF  THE  JURY — This  is  an  action  of  Assumpsit,  brought  by 
George  Binder,  the  plaintiff,  against  Henry  T.  Nagle,  the  defendant.  The 
plaintiff  seeks  in  this  action  to  recover  from  the  defendant  a  sum  of  money 
which,  the  plaintiff  claims,  is  due  him  and  owing  him  from  the  defendant  for 
merchandise  delivered  by  the  plaintiff  to  the  defendant  on  the  defendant's 
order.  The  principal  contention  between  the  parties  in  the  present  suit  is 
as  to  the  amount  actually  due  by  the  defendant  to  the  plaintiff,  for  the  order 
and  delivery  are  admitted  by  each. 

The  only  witnesses  in  this  case,  with  the  exception  of  James  Wilson, 
whose  testimony  is  unimportant,  are  the  parties,  the  plaintiff  and  the  defend- 


O*-£ 


o     0    o  \         I  I 

fe  ....\..\J  s...  b ....v.  V|. 


!.•.*»...  J..L 


ant,  themselves.  So  far  as  this  evidence  shows,  there  have  been  no  other 
witnesses  brought  forward  corroborative  of  their  testimony.  The  law  makes 
the  parties  to  the  suit  competent  witnesses.  You  are  the  judges  of  their 
credibility,  and  where  they  differ  in  their  statements,  you  may  determine 
which  of  them  is  correct. 

The  plaintiff  contends  that  he  delivered  the  goods  ordered,  that  settle- 
ment was  made  by  a  promissory  note  on  which  no  money  was  paid  when 
due  at  the  bank  nor  since.  The  defendant,  on  the  other  hand,  swears  that 
the  goods  received  were  not  those  ordered,  that  he  endeavored  to  return 
them,  and  that  he  paid  forty-five  dollars  on  the  note,  for  which  he  has 
received  no  credit. 

Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  here  you  have  these  statements  of  these  two 
parties,  and  it  is  for  you  to  determine  which  is  correct.  The  burden  rests 
upon  the  plaintiff  to  show  you,  by  the  weight  of  evidence,  that  his  statements 
are  true  in  every  particular,  and  he  must  satisfy  you,  by  the  evidence,  that 
they  are  so  before  he  can  recover  the  amount  claimed. 

The  dispute,  therefore,  of  the  plaintiff's  claims,  is' limited  to  the  validity 
of  the  order  and  the  possibility  of  the  payments  which  the  defendant  says 
he  made  the  plaintiff. 

The  defendant  claims  that  he  settled  with  the  plaintiff  by  means  of  this 
promissory  note  before  he  had  examined  all  the  goods  for  which  the  note 
was  given  in  settlement,  and  that  he  afterward  paid  twenty  dollars  and 
twenty-five  dollars,  respectively,  on  account  of  that  note.  In  relation  to  this 
note,  we  have  to  say  that,  in  the  absence  of  any  evidence — that  is,  if  there 
was  no  other  evidence  in  this  case — relating  to  the  settlement  by  this  note, 
then  it  would  be  conclusive  upon  this  plaintiff. 

The  presumption  is,  that  at  the  time  the  note  was  given  they  had  a  just 
settlement  of  their  matters,  and  that  the  note  was  given  for  the  true  balance 
known  to  be  due  on  such  settlement  by  both  parties. 

The  defendant,  however,  contending  that  the  note,  in  point  of  fact,  was 
not  in  true  settlement  of  the  amount  he  really  owed  the  plaintiff — that  it  was 
made  before  the  goods  concerned  were  examined — the  said  plaintiff  has  a 
right  to  dispute  the  amount  of  said  note,  and,  therefore,  we  have  to  say  to 
you,  as  a  matter  of  law,  that  while  such  a  note,  like  a  receipt  in  full,  is 
generally  conclusive,  yet,  if  it  may  be  shown  that,  at  the  settlement  made 
when  such  note  was  given,  a  mistake  was  made — that  there  was  an  error  in 
the  account — then  the  amount  on  the  note  would  not  be  conclusive,  but  it  is 
incumbent  upon  the  party  claiming  error,  to  show  that  there  was  an  error 
and  mistake  and  to  show  that  error  by  satisfactory  and  unmistakable 
evidence.  This  note  was  given  to  and  accepted  by  the  plaintiff  as  a  settle- 
ment, and,  therefore,  the  defendant  is  bound  by  that  note  unless  he  can 
prove  error.  But,  as  we  have  already  said  to  you,  the  plaintiff  may  explain 


These  Court  Cases  bewail  in  March  issue;  five  numbers  in  all.  lOc.  for  each, 
.or  45c.  for  all,  including  tliis  issue;  :56c.  without  this  issue;  27c.  for  three  num- 
bers; 18c.  for  two  numbers. 


the  note,  and,  if  he,  by  clear  and  satisfactory  evidence,  has  satisfied  you 
that  there  was  a  mistake  made  at  the  time,  or  that  he  made  it  under  a  mis- 
apprehension, then  this  paper  does  not  bind  him. 

Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  I  do  not  know  that  it  is  necessary  for  me  to  say 
anything  further  in  my  general  charge.  The  only  items  of  dispute  between 
these  parties  are  the  two  alleged  payments,  on  account  of  the  note  given, 
and  the  value  of  the  goods  which,  it  is  claimed  by  the  defendant,  he  never 
ordered,  tried  to  return,  and  has  no  use  for,  facts  for  your  judgments  alone 
to  decide. 

Now,  Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  something  has  been  said  during  the  trial 
of  this  case,  in  relation  to  the  pecuniary  ability  of  the  plaintiff  and  the 
defendant.  I  simply  have  to  say,  that  whatever  may  be  their  standing  and 
their  pecuniary  ability,  it  can  not  effect  the  rights  of  the  one  or  the  other  in 
this  case. 

You  will  take  this  case,  Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  apply  to  the  evidence 
the  rules  of  the  law,  as  I  have  stated  them,  and  render  such  a  verdict,  under 
your  oaths,  according  to  the  evidence  of  the  case,  as  your  consciences  will 
approve. 

AUTHOR'S  NOTE. — The  above  concludes  our  exercise  in  Court  Reporting, 
and  if  the  student  has  practiced  each  of  the  cases  contained  in  the  entire  series  in 
accordance  with  the  rules  for  such  practice,  given  elsewhere  in  these  pages,  he  or 
she,  as  the  case  may  be,  will  have  gained  a  certain  amount  of  facility  in  writing 
not  possessed  before,  and,  in  addition,  will  have  learned  more  respecting  the  natural 
plan  of  phrasing,  which  best  comes  with  practicing  such  exercises  as  these  Court 
Cases  and  the  Business  Letters.  At  first  the  student  may  find  it  more  difficult  to 
phrase  than  to  write  words  separately,  and  may  think,  because  the  same  words  are 
found  phrased  on  some  occasions,  and  not  in  others,  that  there  is  no  set  rule  or 
necessity.  The  explanation  of  the  variation  in  phrasing  is,  that  words  should  be 
phrased  as  they  are  sounded,  that  is,  when  words  are  run  together  by  the  voice, 
write  them  together,  providing  the  simple  rules  for  phrasing,  given  in  our  lessons, 
are  not  violated;  and,  where  there  is  hesitation  between  uttered  words,  then  do  not 
phrase,  as  it  is  advisable,  if  possible,  that  phonography  represent  what  is  known  as 
voice  punctuation,  on  which  is  really  based  type  punctuation,  both  of  which  often 
furnish  the  exact  meaning  of  written  words. 


A  GREAT  SUCCESS. 


I  M,  \  H<-  l.^l  I  VI    OF  THK  «.M  I  I  II   PRKM1KR  TYTPKWRITKR  WORK*  A 

XJEOESSITY. 


For  some  time  the  manufacturers  of  the  Smith  Premier  typewriter 
have  contemplated-  the  erection  of  an  additional  building  to  accommodate 
their  rapidly  increasing  business.  The  company  is  now  in  the  twenty- 
seventh  month  of  its  existence,  having  been  organized  in  February,  1890, 
and  at  present  is  shipping  in  the  sixteen  thousands.  AY  hen  the  present 
five-story  building  was  erected,  Lyman  C.  Smith,  the  general  manager, 
believed  that  he  was  making  provisions  for  many  years  to  come,  but  al- 
ready they  have  outgrown  their  present  quarters,  and  ground  has  been 
broken  for  a  new  building  adjoining  the  -present  one.  E.  W.  Baxter,  the 
architect,  prepared  the  plans,  and  work  will  be  pushed  as  rapidly  as  possi- 
ble. It  is  expected  that  the  new  building  will  be  ready  for  occupancy  by 
September  1st,  at  the  latest.  The  building  will  be  130x60  feet,  and  eight 
stories  high.  A  part  of  the  old  Gun  Works  building  will  be  utilized.  The 
company  is  now  fully  2,000  machines  behind  orders,  and  this  fact,  to- 
gether with  the  constantly  increasing  business  makes  additional  room  neces- 
sary. It  is  estimated  that  the  increase  of  the  last  year  over  the  business  of 
1890,  was  more  than  100  per  cent.  There  are  employed  at  present  between 
350  and  400  men,  and  when  the  new  building  is  completed  the  number 
will  be  increased  to  800  or  900.  The  company  has  been  in  existence  only 
twenty-seven  months  and  is  manufacturing  a  new  machine. 

The  company  has  fifteen  branch  offices  employing  more  than  100  peo- 
ple. Between  seventy  and  eighty  salesmen  are  sent  out  from  the  factory 
and  the  branch  offices.  It  has  recently  secured  an  order  from  the  Gov- 
ernment for  150  machines  to  be  used  in  the  War  department,  after  an 
expert  examination.  Three  of  the  five  daily  newspapers  in  the  city  are 
using  the  Smith  machine  in  their  editorial  rooms.  The  present  monthly 
output  is  between  1,000  and  1,500  machines,  and  this  number  will  be 
doubled  when  the  new  building  is  completed. — Evening  Herald,  Syracuse, 
N.  Y.  ' 


COULDN'T  REPLY  TO  HIS  THOUGHTS. 

Mr.  Littleton — Well,  it  takes  two  to  make  a  quarrel,  so  I'll  shut  up. 
Mrs.  Littleton— Just  like  you,  you  mean,  miserable   man!    You'll  just  sit  there 
and  think  ugly  things! — Puck. 


If  you  want    the  address    of    any-  stenog- 
rapher iu  the  United  States  or  Canada,  send  for 

How's  Directory  of   Stenographers 

of  the    United    States,    handsomely    bound    in 
cloth  and  gold,  $1.00. 

THE  HOW  PUBLISHING  COMPANY, 

Tribune  Bldg.,  NEW  YORK,  N.  Y. 


COPYRIGHTED  1890. 
AiL     RIGHTS    RESERVED. 


THK 

Short-Hand  Teacher's 
Companion. 

A  handy  volume  of  information  of  value  to  every 

Teacher  of 
SHORT-HAND  AND  TYPE-WRITING, 

Containing  Review  Exercises,  a  full  set  (in  synopsis)  of 

Lectures  to  Students,  together  with  a  detailed 

explanation  of  the  means  by  which 

EVEN    DULL  STUDENTS 

Are,  by  the  Haven  plan  of  instruction,  in  use  at  Haven 

Colleges, 
IN  ONE  TO  THREE   MONTHS, 

Without  any  previous  knowledge  of  these  arts  on  the 

Student's  part, 

FITTED   FOR   POSITIONS 
Requiring  skill  in  both  Short-Hand  and  Type-writing ; 
minutely  describing  the  Student's  duties  and   pro- 
gress, step  by  step,  from  the  taking  of  first  lesson 
to  graduation,  with  the  reason  for  each  step  ; 

Together  with  much  other  information  of  value  to 
Teachers  of  anv  svstem. 


BY  CURTIS  HAVEN, 

Expert  Short-hand  Reporter  and  Type-writist,  Founder  of  the  Ha- 
ven Colleges  of  Practical   Phonography  and  Type-writing, 
Author  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography,  Haven's 
Complete  Manual  of  Type-writing,  Etc.,  Etc. 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  AUTHOR, 

Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO, 


SOIMIIEJ 

Showing  the  advantages  possessed  by  Haven's  distinct  joined  vowels  over  othe" 
systems  in  making  legible,  without  decreasing  speed,  those  words  wherein  voweh 
must  be  written,  etc.,  etc. 


GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

LINDSLEY.    CROSS. 

Ape 

\ 

S 

1            ^ 

Away 

^> 

< 

V         ^ 

Iowa 

^ 

; 

^         ^ 

I.  PI  THAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Evaporate. 

v^ 

V 

•\ 

I.  PITMAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Emigrant 

^ 

-s-> 

- 

Xrt 

^n 

Immigrant 

s~ 

-^ 

V^ 

^ 

B.  PITMAN. 

I  PITMAN. 

HAVEN. 

J^oom 

^ 

,^ 

l^ 

i*_ 

Leave 

Lovfi 

Will  Kave 

You  will  Kave  teen 

PITMAN. 

A^ 

/a.. 

A^ 

./x 

TV 

t       _S  

HAVEN. 

Q 

^ 

^—  ^ 

f—^ 

T        i 

is  the  ONLY  system  of 

SHORT-HAND 

requiring  MO  dictionary  or  phrase  book:  the  only 
system  available  for  every  purpose  for  which 
PHONOGRAPHY  or  PENMANSHIP  are  em 
ployed;  the  ONLY  system  by  which  the  notes  of 
one  writer,  when  correctly  written,  can  be  read 
with  CERTAINTY  by  ANY  other  writer  of  the  sys- 
tem; aud  the  onlv  system  which  one  has  time  to 
learn  these  busy  days. 

INDORSED  BY  THE  LEGAL  FRATERNITY,  COLLEGE  *  AC- 
ULTIES,  THE  PKESS  AND  THB  PROFESSION  AS  T.H8 

"MOST  RAPIDLY  READ  AND 

WRITTEN  AND  EASIEST  LEARNED 

of  any  system."  Some  students  have  even  learned 
to  use  it  and  satisfactorily  fill  short-hand  posi- 
tions within  the  brief  space  of  one  to  two  month? 
time,  without  any  previous  knowledge  of  any 
short-hand.  ANYONE  can  learn  It  in  three 
months  if  the  directions  in  the  book  are  followed. 

This  short-hand  -writing  's  as  legible  as  print 
when  learned,  and  records  of  over  300  words  a 
minute  have  been  made  by  it. 

Send  for  circular  of  testimonials  and  free  first 
lesson.  

THE  COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOK  OF 

Haven's   Practical    Phonography 

Contains  Self- Teaching  Lessons,  together  with  a 
number  of  Short-Hand  Reading  Pages,  including 
Correspondence,  Court  and  Convention  Report- 
ing, with  Key  in  common  print,  making  this  book 
the  only  treatise  on  Short-Hand  Writing  com- 
plete in  one  volume.  Price,  $2,  free  of  postage 
to  any  address.  Order  of 

CURTIS    HAVEN, 

Room  17,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  teacher  of  the  system. 

Whether  you  are  Teacher.  Expert,  Learner,  or 
about  to  learn  Type- Writing— no  matter  wkat 
make  of  machine  you  favor— you  cannot  afford 
to  be  without  a  copy  of 

Haven's  Complete  Manual 

OF 

Type-Writing 

A  Self-Instructor  for  the  Home  Student,  a  Book  01 

Reference  for  the  Expert,  a  Guide  to  the  Teacher, 

and  a  Text-Book  for  all  Schools  and  Colleger. 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of 
type-writer  work  of  every  kind — epistolary, 
society,  legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial- 
accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations 
descriptive  of  each  specimen,  its  execution  in 
detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  con- 
trast, etc.,  most  of  the  points  being  found  to  be 
both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert 
operators. 

Endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadel- 
phia Press,  Boston  Herald,  and  other  leading- 
pastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  prac- 
tical operators. 

"The  only  complete  work  on  Type-Writing, 
published. " 

Price,  $2,  free  of  postage,  to  any  address. 

Orderof  CURTIS    HAVEN, 

Room  17,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  Haven  teacher. 


ANYONK     CAN 

GAIN 

Short-Hand 

AND 

TYPE-WRITING 

SKILL  IN  THREE  MONTHS 

BY  HAVEN'S  SYSTEM. 
NO  FAILURES. 

No  previous  knowledge  of  either  art  required. 

Haven  teachers  insure  all  students  speedy  and 
thorough  tuition  in  both  Short-hand  and  Type- 
Writing,  qualifying  many  students  in  as  short  a 
time  as  one  to  two  months,  and  requiring  no 
longer  time  than  three  months  for  even  the 
dullest,  so  long  as  they  possess  a  common-school 
education  and  study  and  practice  as  directed. 
IXSTX  UCTION  PEBSONALL  TORE  YMAIL. 

SPECIAL  NOTICE. 

As  there  are  a  few  teachers  of  other  systems 
who,  being  able  to  qualify  in  three  to  six  months 
an  occasion  ally  bright  student  who  has  had  pre- 
vious study  at  home,  and  which  schools  are  on 
that  score  advertising  that  they  can  graduate 
students  in  three  months'  time  (meaning  of 
course,  not  all  their  students),  it  is  necessary  that 
we  call  attention  to  the  difference  between  such 
misleading  advertisements  and  our  own  claims, 
as  follows: 

We  qualify  ALL  students  within  three  mouths 
—the  bright  ones  in  much  less  time . 

Students  who  can  by  any  possibility  master 
and  gain  speed  in  three  to  six  months  by  other 
systems,  can  be  given  such  skill  by  the  Haven 
system  in  one  month. 

Students  who  require  from  six  to  twelve  months 
to  gain  skill  in  other  systems  require  no  loager 
than  two  months  by  the  Haven  plan. 

Those  who  can  NOT  learn  other  systems 
under  any  conditions,  can  succeed  by  the  Haven 
plan  in  the  guaranteed  three  months'  time. 
Haven's  is  the  only  system  within  the  compre- 
hension of  everyone. 

As  before  stated,  we  make  NO  FAILURES 
where  our  instructions  are  followed. 

Teachers  who  cannot  meet  these  claims  by  the 
system  they  teach  should  investigate  Haven's, 
and  change,  if  they  desire  to  be  up  with  the  times. 

Students  not  successful  at  other  shools,  as  well 
as  all  persons  desirous  of  learning  in  shortest 
possible  time  the  fastest  written  and  easiest  read 
system,  should  correspond  with  thi>  Haven  Col- 
lege nearest  their  address. 

HAVEN  COLLEGES 

OF 

Short-Hand  and  Type-writing 

are  located  in  a  number  of  principal 
cities.     The  one  conducted  by  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Curtis  Haven  in  per- 
son is  in  the  Tribune  Build- 
ing, S.  E.Cor.  Madison 
and  Dearborn  Sts., 

OH  10  AGO,   IL/L. 


Not  Much. 

Do  you  see    the  man  with  the  big  bass 

drum 

And  a  drum-stick  in  his  hand? 
Well,  he  makes  more  noise  than  all  the 

rest, 
But  he  doesn't  lead  the  band. 

— Detroit  Free  Press. 


Mr.  Wickwire — What  seemed  to  be  the 
trouble  next  door  last  night? 

Mrs.  Wickwire— Oh,  it  was  just  a  ques- 
tion as  to  who  had  the  floor.  He  wanted 
to  tell  her  of  the  fish  he  had  caught, 
while  she  wanted  to  tell  him  of  the  smart 
things  the  baby  had  done  while  he  was 
gone. — Indianapolis  Journal. 

A  pair  in  a  hammock 

Attempted  to  kiss, 
And  in  less  than  a  jiffy 

•sim  aiin  pspnisi  jfaqj, 

N.  T.  Evening  Sun. 

Typewriters ! 

New  or  Second  hand  of  all  makes, 
bought,  sold,  exchanged  and  repaired. 
Also  rented  anywhere  in  the  country. 
Largest  Stock  in  America.  Not  run  by 
a  Typewriter  Manufacturer.  Send  for 
New  Illustrated  Catalogue  dsscrfbing  all 
Machines.  GERBER'S  SUPPLIES. 

NATIONAL  TYPEWRITER  EXCHANGE 

200  LaSalle  Street, 
CHICAGO. 


ADVERTISING. 


IF  you  wish  to  advertise  anything  anywhere  at 
any  time  write  to  GEO.  P.  ROWEL 


No.  10  Spruce  St.,  New  York. 


L  &  CO., 


EVERY  one  in  need  of  information  on  the 
subject  of  advertising  will  do  well  to  obtain 
a  copy  of  "Book  for  Advertisers,"  368  pages,  price 
one  dollar.  Mailed,  postage  paid,  on  receipt  of 
price.  Contains  a  careful  compilation  from  the 
American  Newspaper  Directory  of  all  the  best 
papers  and  class  journals;  gives  the  circulation 
rating  of  every  one,  and  a  good  deal  of  informa- 
tion about  rates  and  other  matters  pertaining  to 
the  business  of  advertising.  Address  ROVVELL'S 
ADVERTISING  BUREAU,  10  Spruce  St..  N.  Y. 


sp  he 


O 
'  S>. 


SEND  FOR  CATALOGUE. 

1.  ¥  ©well  £< 

NORTHWESTERN    AGENTS, 

185  LR  8ILLE  ST.,  CHICAGO, 

Mention  this    advertisement 


£ TTERS 


MISCELLANEOUS 
ACTUAL   BUSINESS 

Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and 
numbered  for  timing  speed,  will  be  sent  to  any  address  by  C.  HAVEN, 
TRIBUNE  BUILDING,  CHICAGO.  ILLINOIS,  on  receipt  of 

WORDS    OF  ACTUAL  COURT 

TESTIMONY 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  he  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


10t. 


WORDS    OF    ACTUAL    CONVENTION 

PROCEEDINGS 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN.  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL.,  on  receipt  of 


10t. 


ALL  THE    ABOVE 


Letters,  testimony  and' convention  practice,  and  much  more, 
together  with  a  complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching 
300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will  be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete 
Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadelphia  Press,  Boston  Herald,  and 
other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "  The  only  complete 
work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind— epistolary,  society, 
legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial — accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descriptive  of 
each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  etc.,  most  of  the 
points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert  operators.  Whether  you  are 
teacher,  expert,  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting— no  matter  what  make  of  machine  you  favor, 
you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  a  copy.  . 

Price.— .$2.00  to  the  public— but  $1.33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


Copyright  1891,  tyy  Curtis  Haven. 


3sro.  i 


OF  HAVEN'S  SELECTIONS  OF 

ACTUAL    -    COURT  =    TESTIMONY, 

Containing  the  Ordinary  Words,  Terms  and  Phrases  used  in  General  Court  Trials 
Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  Practice,  with  Words 
Counted  and  Numbered  for  timing  speed. 

10,000  Words-Price  10  Cents. 

[EXPLANATION.  —  In  this  printed  court  testimony  only  such  omissions  and 
changes  have  been  made  as  were  considered  necessary  to  disguise  the  identity  of  the 
parties  to  the  suit.  Each  25  words  are  numbered  [25],  [50]  and  [75];  every  hundred 
words  being  indicated  by  the  black  figures  [1],  [12],  [3],  etc.  Such  figures  are  not  to 
be  considered  as  any  part  of  the  reading  matter.] 


MORNING  SESSION. 

B.  C.  STARR,  a  witness  for  the  prosecu- 
tion, being  duly  sworn,  testified  as 
follows: 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  U.  S.  Attorney  Winn:  Mr.  Starr' 
[25]  what  is  your  business?  A.  I  am  an 
employe  of  Clarence  Carter. 

Q.  Do  vou  know  S.  F.  Markham?  A. 
I  do. 

Q.  What  was  his  business  at  that  [50] 
time?  A.  He  was  also  employed  by 
Mr.  Carter. 

Q.  Do  you  know  Mr.  Smith,  the  assist- 
ant general  freight  agent  of  the  Minne- 
sota Railroad?  A.  I  do. 

Q.  And  [75]  Mr.  Winters,  who  was 
the  Carmine  line  agent?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  was  his  official  title?  A. 
Agent  of  the  Carmine  Line  and  Minne- 
nesota  Railroad. 

Q.  And  Mr.  [1]  Norton,  did  you  know 
him?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.     And  Mr.  Green?     A.     Yes  sir. 

The  Court.  Whose  employ  was  Nor- 
ton in?  A.  He  was  local  agent  of  the 
[25[  Minnesota  Railroad. 

Mr.Winn:  What  was  Green's  position? 
A.  Contracting  agent  of  the  Minnesota 
Railroad. 

Q.  What  was  Carter's  business?  A. 
Grain  business. 

Q.  Well,  in  what  way?  What  ]5o] 
was  he  doing  with  grain?  A.  He  was  a 
shipper  of  grain. 

Q.  Did  he  own  anv  elevators  or 
operate  any?  A.  Yes,  sir. 


I  Q.  What  elerators?  A.  He  was  [75] 
manager  of  the  St.  Paul  elevator. 

Q.  Where  is  that  elevator  located? 
A.  Near  Corwith,  on  the  St.  Paul  road 

Q.  Where  is  that?  A.  I  could  not 
say  [2]  exactly  where  it  is.  It  is  about 
five  miles  out  of  Chicago. 

Q.  Will  you  state  to  the  court 
whether  at  any  time  along  in  the  [25] 
fall  of  iSSS  you  ha<i  any  conversation 
with  Smith  or  any  of  the  other  defend- 
ants in  this  case — Mr.  Winters  or  Mr. 
Norton  [50] — -respecting  the  shipping  of 
grain  belonging  to  Carter  from  New- 
York?  A.  Yes,  sir;  I  did. 

Q,  Just  tell  the  jury  in  your  own 
way  briefly,  the  [75]  history  of  that 
whole  conversation  or  arrangement, 
whatever  it  was  you  had  with  these  men 
or  any  of  them?  A.  The  arrangement 
that  we  had  with  [3]  Mr.  Smith,  who  was 
assistant  general  freight  agent  of  the  Min- 
nesota Railroad,  was  simply  to  haul  grain 
from  Chicago  on  what  would  be  their  pro- 
portion [25]  of  the  through  rate. 

Q.  On  what?  A.  On  th^ir  propor- 
tion of  the  through  rate. 

Q.  Through  rate  from  where?  A. 
Their  proportion — 

Q.  Well,  through  rate  from  where? 
A.  From  [50]  New  York — from  no  per 
cent,  points. 

The  Court:  From  what  points ,v  A. 
Any  Eastern  point  that  their  line  made. 

Mr.  Winn:  At  their  proportion  [75]  of 
the  through  rates  from  no  per  cent, 
points?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  grain  did  that  refer  to — grain 
originating  where?  A.  Grain  originat- 
ing in  Chicago  [4] — in  elevators,  on 


track,   or   grain    originating   at    no   per 
cent,  points. 

Q.  That  is,  take  anv  grain  that  Carter 
&  Co.  had  here  on  [25]  the  track  or  in 
elevators  and  through  to  New  York  as  if 
it  had  originated  at  no  per  cent,  points? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  You  made  [50]  up  the  Minnesota 
Railroad  Co.'s  freight — their  own  pro- 
rata  of  that  through  rate?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Who  did  you  have  that  talk  with? 
A.  Mr.  Smith. 

Q.     Where?  [75]     A.     In  his  office. 

Q.  Who  was  with  you  at  that  time? 
A.  Mr.  Markham. 

Q.     Mr.  Markham?     A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Who  else  was  present?  A.  Mr. 
Green. 

Q.  With  whom  if  [5]  anybodv,  did 
you  go  into  Smith's  office?  A.  Mr. 
Green. 

Q.  Did  vou  have  more  than  one  con- 
versation with  Smith  in  regard  to  this 
grain?  A.  Yes,  sir.  [25] 

Q.  You  are  speaking  of  the  first  con- 
versation now — the  first  interview  you 
had  when  Green  was  present?  A.  Not 
all  of  the  time. 

Q.  State  to  the  [50]  court,  if  you 
please,  how  you  came  to  go  to  Mr. 
Smith's  office  to  talk  about  this  matter? 
A.  I  do  not  recollect  exactly  the  circum- 
stances. [75] 

Q.  Was  it  you  suggested  it,  if  anybody 
did?  A.  Suggested  what? 

Q.  Suggested  your  going  to  see 
Smith?  A.  Mr.  Green. 

Q.  Did  you  have  any  talk  with  Mr. 
(6)  Green  before  going  to  see  Mr.  Smith 
about  what  arrangement  you  were 
making?  A.  Not  to  amount  to  any- 
thing. 

Q.  What  kind  of  an  arrangement  was 
made?  [25]  What  was  said  as  to  the 
manner  in  which  vou  would  carry  out 
this  agreement — Oh,  did  Mr.  Smith  agree 
to  take  the  grain  at  [50]  the  Minnesota 
Railroad  prorate  of  the  through  rate? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  arrangement  was  made,  if 
any,  carrying  out  that  agreement  before 
you  were  to  do  [75]  it?  A.  The  principal 
instructions  were  in  regard  to  some  rub- 
ber stamp  for  which  he  gave  us  a  word- 
ing. 

Q.  Rubber  stamps  for  what?  A.  For 
billing  instructions.  [7] 

Q.  State  what  they  were?  A.  The 
rubber  stamps — one  I  think  contained 
something  about  like  this:  "Pay  charges 


to  St.  Paul  Elevator  and  Dock  company 
only."  [25] 

Q.  What  was  that  affiixed  to — that 
stamp?  A.  That  was  stamped  right  on 
these  shipping  instructions  in  red  ink. 

Q.  What  were  these  shipping  in- 
structions? A.  What  were  (50)  they? 

Q.  Yes ;  what  form  were  the  shipping 
instructions  in?  A.  I  do  not  understand 
that  question  exactly. 

Q.  You  say  it  was  to  be  attached  to 
some  [75]  papers?  A.  Yes;  billing  slips. 

Q.  Have  you  one  of  those  billing  slips 
here?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.     Any  of  them?     A.     No,  sir. 

Q.  Didn't  I  give  notice  for  (8)  the 
billing  slips  and  the  expense  bills?  Have 
you  them  with  you?  A.  (producing 
papers.)  Do  you  mean  like  these? 

Q.  Yes;  these  are  blank  forma  of  [25] 
the  expense  bills?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  They  are  papers  similar  to  that? 
A.  Similar  to  that. 

Q.  (Handing  witness  paper)  That  is  a 
paper  directing  where  the  grain  [50] 
should  be  shipped  to — in  whose  name? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  the  point  of  origin  of  the 
grain?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  the  rate  at  which  it  [75]  is  to 
be  shipped?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Mr.  White:  What  are  you  inquiring 
about — contents  of  what  paper? 

Mr.Winn:  lam  inquiring  about  the 
notice  (9)  to  produce  the  contents  of  a 
way  bill. 

The  Court:  (To  witness:)  Does  this 
paper  show  the  exact  point  of  origin  of 
the  freight?  A.  Yes,  [25]  sir. 

The  Court:  Pass  me  one  of  them. 
(Paper  handed  the  court.) 

Mr.  White:  That  is  not  a  copy  of  the 
paper  he  has  been  [50]  enquiring  about. 

Mr.  Winn  :    No,  that  is  simply  a  blank. 

The  court:  He  said  there  was  to  be  a 
rubber  stamp  to  stamp  something  on  [75] 
these  papers. 

Mr.  Winn :  Yes,  sir ;  that  is  what  I  am 
getting  at. 

Mr.  White:  Is  that  the  paper  vou  are 
talking  about? 

Mr.  Winn:  (10)  No,  sir;  this  is  a  copy  of 
the  agent's  paper  that  was  sent  over  by 
the  Chicago  and  Green  Island  office  to 
the  Minnesota  Railroad.  [25]  The  paper 
I  am  now  talking  about  really  was  a 
counterfeit  paper  of  this,  some 
form  that  was  made  up  bv  some- 
one in  Mr.  Carter's  (50)  office  as 
an  expense  bill  saying  same  thing 
substantially  except  giving  it  «  n  origin 


of  no  per  cent,  points,  and  that  was 
stamped  with  (75)  a  red  stamp  indicating 
that  these  back  charges  were  to  be  paid 
to  Carter  &  Co.  instead  of  to  the  road. 
(To  the  witness)  Is  (11)  that  not  the 
case?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q-  Were  those  expense  bills  that  you 
spoke  of  to  be  so  stamped,to  be  substituted 
for  the  genuine?  A.  Substituted  (25) 
for  those?  No,  sir. 

Q.  They  were  to  be  delivered  to  the 
road  as  giving  the  origin  of  the  grain  at 
no  per  cent,  points  [50]  and  from  which 
they  were  to  make  up  their  way  bills, 
were  they  not?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  I  will  ask  you  if  there  was 
anything  [75]  said  at  the  time  of  this  in- 
terview between  you  and  Mr.  Smith  as 
to  the  way  in  which  you  were  to  get 
the  blanks  for  (12)  making  up  those 
expense  papers — where  were  you  to  get 
them?  A.  Mr.  Green  said 'he  would 
furnish  them. 

Q.     Did  he  furnish  them?  A.  Yes,  sir 

Q.  Who(25)did  he  give  them  to,  do  you 
know?  A.  I  do  not  know  who  he  deliv- 
ered them  to. 

Q.  Did  anyone  else  furnish  any  of 
these  blanks  (50)  for  other  roads?  A.  I 
do  not  know. 

Q.  Mr.  Winters  or  Mr.  Norton?  A. 
Not  that  I  know  of . 

Q.  What  was  said  at  the  time  of  this 
(75)  conversation  with  Mr.  Smith  as  to 
where  and  how  these  expense  bills  were 
to  be  made  out?  A.  Mr.  Smith  instructed 
us  as  to  what  he  (13)  wanted  on  them. 

Q.  But  where  were  the  bills  themselves 
made  up?  A.  The  shipping  notice  was 
made  up  in  our  office. 

Q.  What  did  Smith  allow  on  (25)  them  ? 
A.  "Pay  advance  charges  to  Si.  Paul 
Elevator  and  Dock  companv  onlv.  No 
card  has  been  or  will  be  issued  for  this 
property." 

Mr.  White:  (50)  Had  you  those  direc- 
tions in  writing? 

Mr.  Winn:  A  stamp  was  vised  on  the 
paper  and  there  were  a  number  of  those 
expense  bills — a  (75)  great  many  of  them 
—600  of  them — that  were  sent  through 
the  office  and  I  have  given  you  notice  to 
produce  them,  but  I  (14)  have  not  yet  re- 
ceived them.  I  did  not  suppose  they 
would  be  absent. 

Mr.  White:  Where  is  the  notice? 

The  Court:  So  far  I  understand  the 
(25)  arrangement  was  that  the  blank 
billing  slips  were  to  be  obtained  from  the 
different  roads  and  furnished  at  Carter's 
office  and  (addressing  witness)  you  were 


(50)  to  do  them  up  as  if  the  grain  that 
you  had  there  in  Chicago  shipped  to  east- 
ern points  had  come  from  no  per  cent 
(75)  points? 

Witness:  Substantially  that — to  that 
effect. 

Mr.  Winn:  But  did  Carter  &  Co.  get 
any  benefit  by  shipping  grain  through 
here  as  if  originating  (15)  at  no  per 
cent  points?  A.  The  point  was  this: 
they  were  to  have  the  grain — that  was 
our  contract  with  Mr.  Smith.  They 
were  (25)  to  haul  the  grain  at  their  pro- 
portion of  the  through  rate — that  their 
proportion  to  New  York  would  be  about 
18  2-10  as  against  (50)  twenty  cents  which 
were  the  local  rates. 

Q.  What  were  the  through  rates  from 
which  this  grain  was  shipped  from  1 10  per 
cent,  points?  A.  At  (75)  that  time  some 
roads  were  charging  from  no  per  cent 
points  22  cents;  others  27  1-2. 

Q.  That  was  the  rate  of  the  (16)  Min- 
nesota Railroad  — 22  cents?  A.  From 
no  per  cent,  points  it  (was  22  cents. 

Mr.  English:  If  you  mean  the  joint  tar- 
iff rates  (25)  there  is  no  objection  for  we 
have  agreed  to  admit  the  joint  tariff 
rates. 

The  Court:  (To .witness)  Twenty-two 
cents  per  100  pounds? 

Q.  What  (50)  was  their  proportion  of 
that  22  cents?  A.  That  would  depend 
upon  the  destination.  To  New  York  it 
would  be  about  18  2-10  to  (75)  my  recol- 
lection. 

Mr.  White:  We  want  it  understood 
by  the  court  that  the  joint  tariff,  the  pub- 
lished tariff,  is  not  brought  in.  There  is 
a  (17)  rate  from  Chicago  to  New  York 
of  18  2-10  cents  the  part  coming  to  the 
Minnesota  Railroad — the  balance  goes  to 
the  connecting  line.  (25) 

The  Court:  I  so  understood  it.  I 
understand  that  the  Minnesota  Railroad 
gets  its  proportion  of  the  rate,  but  it  is 
not  the  through  rate  (50)  from  Chicago 
to  New  York  by  the  Minnesota  Railroad 
line. 

Mr.  Winn  to  witness :  I  want  you  to  ex- 
plain to  the  court  exactly  how  the  (75)  rate 
paid  by  you  was  reduced  from  22  cts  to,  18 
2-10 — how  did  you  get  the  money  back? 
A.  They  paid  it  to  (18)  us. 

Q.  Paid  it  to  you  on  what — these  ex- 
pense bills  that  were  to  be  settled  by 
vou?  A.  Yes;  paid  sometimes  in  check 
—sometimes  in  currency  (25). 

Q.  The  difference  between  the  22  cents 
and  the  18  2-10?  A.  No,  sir;  difference, 


between  18  2-10 — or,  ves,  sir;  that  is 
right.  (50) 

Q.  Now  what  proportion  of  that  was 
your  profit — how  much  on  the  one  hun- 
dred pounds  did  parter  &  Co.  save.  A. 
We  would  have  the  difference  (75)  be- 
tween 1 8  2-10  and  the  22,  but  we  paid  the 
two  cents  additional.  It  was  practically 
between  18  2-10  and  20  cents.  (19) 

Q.  That  was  your  reduction  on  the 
freight?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  was  the  purpose  then  of 
putting  this  stamp  on  the  billing  you 
spoke  oi: 

The  [25]  Court:  The  billing  slip.  Wit- 
ness: What  was  Mr.  Smith's  purpose? 

Mr.  Winn:  Yes;  what  was  the  object 
— what  did  Mr.  Smith  say  about  it?  A. 
It  [50]  was  in  order  that  the  monev 
should  not  go  through  the  auditor's  office 
and  from  there  to  the  Western  lines 
where  it  did  not  belong  [75]  but  should 
go  to  us. 

Q.  If  it  had  not  been  for  the  red  stamp 
put  on  these  billing  slips,  when  the 
grain  had  passed  through  [20]  the  divi- 
sion made  at  the  Eastern  line,  the  Minne- 
sota Railroad  would  have  settled  with 
the  railroads  upon  which  this  grain  pur- 
ported to  originate,  would  they?  [25] 

Mr.  White:  Does  he  know? 

Mr.  Winn:  Well,  I  am  asking  him  if 
that  is  the  usual  course  of  business.  Wit- 
ness: Do  you  mean  that  [50]  the  money 
would  go  to  some  Western  line? 

Mr.  Winn:  Yes;  if  it  had  not  been  for 
the  red  stamp?  A.  I  presume  so.  I  do 
[75]  not  know,  but  I  presume  so.  The 
regular  course  of  business  seemed  so. 

Q.  Tell  to  the  court  who  paid  these 
checks  to  you — who  delivered  [21]  them 
to  you.  A.  Mr.  Norton. 

Mr.  English:  Ask  him  if  he  knows  of 
his  own  knowledge. 

Mr.  Winn:  You  can  get  that  out  oi 
cross  [25]  examination.  (To  witness) 
How  much  grain — how  many  cars  of 
grain  did  the  Minnesota  Railroad  ship 
under  this  arrangement?  A.  I  could 
not  say. 

Q.  In  the  [50]  neighborhood?  A.  I 
could  not  say  that. 

Q.  How  long  did  this  arrangement 
continue  from  its  inception  to  the  end? 
A.  That  I  could  not  sav  either. 

Q.  About  [75]  what  time?  A.  Well, 
I  should  say  two  or  three  weeks. 

Q.  Now  I  wish  you  would  state  to 
the  court  as  nearly  as  you  can  about  [22] 
the  number  of  cars?  A.  Shipped  under 
the  contract? 


Q.  Yes;  under  that  arrangement.  A. 
That  I  could  not  state. 

Q.  You  could  state  whether  it  was 
ten  or  [25]  a  hundred  cars?  A.  25  cars 
— it  might  be  50 — or  might  be  500 — I 
do  not  know. 

Q.  Can't  you  come  a  little  nearer  [50] 
than  between  25  and  500?  A.  No,  sir; 
I  cannot. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  just  about  the 
time  this  arrangement  was  made — was  it 
in  [75]  the  latter  part  of  September?  A. 
The  latter  part  of  September  is  my 
recollection  of  it. 

Q.  Did  it  last  till  the  first  of  December? 
A.  I  do  [23]  nol  think  it  did. 

Q.  How  long  do  you  think  it  did  last? 
A.  Possibly  a  month. 

Q.  Why  "was  it  stopped— why  did  they 
quit?  A.  *  Why  did  [25]  they  quit? 

Q.  That  arrangement — yes.  A.  I 
was  not  there  when  they  quit. 

Q.  Did  vou  have  any  talk  with  Smith 
or  with  Winters  or  any  of  [50]  those 
railroad  men?  A.  Not  when  they  quit. 
I  was  not  in  the  city.  I  was  East. 

Q.  Did  vou  have  any  talk  with  them 
after  they  [75]  quit?  A".  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Whom  did  vou  talk  with?  A.  In 
a  general  way  with  Mr.  Smith. 

Q.  Did  you  talk  with  Mr.  Norton  and 
Mr.  Winters  and  [24]  Mr.  Marshall?  A. 
Not  that  I  remember. 

Q.  What  did  Mr.  Smith  say  was  the 
reason  they  quit?  A.  He  never  gave 
me  any  reason.  I  was  not  [25]  in  the 
city  at  the  time. 

Q.  I  will  ask  you  to  state  to  the  court 
if  there  \vas  anything  said  to  Mr.  Smith 
at  one  [50]  time  about  Carter  &  Co.  ex- 
changing 25  cars  of  local  grain  on 
the  Peoria  Railroad  track  for  25  cars  in 
elevator  or  on  [75]  other  tracks.  State 
to  the  court  what  that  arrangement  was. 
A.  We  had — I  cannot  say  exactly  how 
many  cars — we  had  a  number  of  cars  [25] 
on  the  Peoria  Railroad  tracks  that  had 
come  in  on  the  Peoria  Railroad — the 
rate  over  the  Peoria  Railroad  to  New 
York  was  higher  than  [25]  the  sum  of  the 
two  locals  would  be — 

Q.  The  Peoria  Railroad  did  not  pro- 
rate with  the  Minnesota  Railroad?  A. 
Did  not  prorate  on  the  low  rates.  [50] 
We  went  to  Mr.  Smith  for  the  purpose 
of  getting  those  cars  out  on  their  propor- 
tion of  the  through  rate  of  22  cents. 

Q.  Well,  [75]  how  did  you  do  it  if  you 
did  it:  A.  We  called  it" a  substitute — 
that  was  his  suggestion — that  we  call  it  a 
substitute. 


Q.  Substitute  [26]  for  what?  A.  He 
instructed  us  to  call  them  substitute  as 
being  substituted  for  another  equal  num- 
ber of  cars. 

Q.  Equal  number  of  cars  where?  A. 
Equal  number  [25]  of  cars  from  no  per 
cent,  points,  based  on  the  20  per  cent, 
rate. 

Q.  I  wish  you  would  give  in  detail  a 
conversation  you  [50]  had  with  Mr. 
Smith  at  that  time ;  whether  he  consulted 
anybody  about  it  and  if  so  who,  and  what 
was  said.  A.  He  consulted  Mr.  [75] 
Marshall. 

Q.  What  was  said?  A.  He  explained 
the  matter  to  Mr.  Marshall  from  our 
standpoint. 

Q.     What  did  Mr.  Marshall  say? 

Mr.  White:  Were  you  present  at(27) 
the  conversation  with  Mr.  Marshall  ?  A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Mr.  Winn:  What  did  he  say?  A. 
He  stated  the  case  to  Mr.  Marshall  and 
explained  that  he  wanted  (25)  in  a  gener- 
al way — he  didn't  recommend  it — that  he 
wanted  to  substitute  25  cars  that  were 
then  on  the  Peoria  railroad  track  (50) 
for  25  cars  that  were  to  come  in  on  the 
St.  Paul. 

Q.  What  did  Mr.  Marshall  say  to  him 
to  do?  A.  Mr.  Marshall  after  (75)  some 
conversation  said — turned  in  his  chair 
and  said  "Go  ahead,  if  you  can  keep  your 
skirts  clear" — something  to  that  effect- — 
he  was  busy  (28)  at  the  time. 

Q.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  did  you  have 
any  cars  that  those  were  to  be  substituted 
for,  coming  in?  A.  No, sir;  not (25) that 
I  know  of. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Smith  know  at  that  time 
that  this  was  the  case?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  he  explain  to  Mr.  Marshall  just 
(50)  what  you  and  he  had  talked  about? 
A.  Explain  it? 

Q.    Yes.     A.     Not  that  I  heard. 

Q.  How  many  cars  did  you  ship  under 
that  arrangement?  A.  I  think  (75)  it 
was  25  or  50. 

Q.  And  where  did  that  grain  come 
from — out  of  the  St.  Paul  or  Peoria  Rail- 
road elevator?  A.  Not  of  that  (29)  lot. 

Q.  Did  they  of  any  lot — did  you  ship 
any  out  of  the  Peoria  Railroad  on  that 
arrangement?  A.  I  think  we  did. 

Q.  Did  you  know  (25)  how' much? 
A.  Six  or  seven  cars. 

Q.  At  the  time  you  had  the  conversa- 
tion with  Mr.  Smith  about  shipping  grain 
on  the  track  here  or  from  (50)  your  eleva- 
tor as  if  from  no  per  cent,  points  and 
these  expense  bills  with  the  red  stamp  as 


you  suggested,  was  there  anything  said 
(75)  by  him  or  by  anyone  there  as  to  the 
danger  of  using  such  a  paper  purporting 
to  come  from  a  railroad  companv?  A- 
No. 

Q.     That  is  (30)  all. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION". 

By  Mr.  White:  Mr.  Starr,  I  want  to 
call  your  attention  to  your  conference 
with  Mr.  Smith;  afterwards  to  your  con- 
ference with  (25)  Smith  and  Marshall  re- 
lative to  the  substitution  of  cars  that  you 
have  spoken  of.  I  understand  you  to  say 
that  those  cars  came  direct  from  (50)  the 
Peoria  Railroad  company  to  some  point 
on  that  line?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  you  explained  it  to  Mr.  Smith 
when  you  went  to  him?  A.  Yes.  (75) 

Q.  You  explained  to  Smith  where 
those  cars  came  from,  Peoria  Railroad 
cars  from  the  St.  Paul  line,  and  you 
wanted  to  arrange  so  that  you  (31)  could 
ship  the  Peoria  Railroad  cars  on  to  New 
York  and  secure  the  benefit  of  the  22 
cent  rate.  A.  Yes. 

Q.     Is  that  correct?     A.     Yes,  (25)  sir. 

Q.  That  you  explained  to  Smith?  A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  you  explain  that  in  the  sam 
way  to  Mr.  Marshall?  A.  Not  that  I  re- 
member. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  (50)  Smith  in  your  pres- 
ence or  hearing?  A.  That  I  could  not 
say. 

Q.  I  will  ask  you  if  you  do  not  re- 
member that  Mr.  Smith  represented  to 
(75)  Mr.  Marshall  that  Carter  &  Co.  had 
an  order  for  a  certain  quality  of  oats, 
that  they  had  those  oats  in  elevator  here 
that  had  (32)  been  run  through  the  ele- 
vator, but  that  the  oats  which  came  from 
the  no  per  cent. points  would  not  fill  that 
contract  and  could  (25)  not  be  delivered 
on  that  order,  and  that  they  wanted  to 
take  the  oats  from  the  elevator  and  ship 
them  through  in  the  place  of  (50)  the 
other  oats?  A.  I  do  not  know  any- 
thing of  the  kind. 

Q.  *Do  you  not  remember  what  was 
told  Marshall?  A.  Directly;  no. 

Q.  Do  you  not  remember,  (75)  Mr. 
Starr,  that  Mr.  Marshall  told  Smith  at 
the  time,  and  you  at  the  time,  that 
the  cars  must  be  standing  on 
the  track — that  (33)  is,  that  25  or  50 
cars  to  be  delivered  on  the  Minnesota 
Railroad  simultaneously,  as  part  were  to 
go  through  at  the  20  cent  (25)  rate 
from  Chicago  and  the  other  part  to 
go  through  at  the  no  per  cent,  rate — 
practically  something  of  that  sort?  That 


is,  that  (50)  the  1 10  per  cent  cars  should  be 
standing  on  the  track  ready  to  go  for- 
ward and  that  the  cars  from  the  elevators 
containing  this  (75)  should  also  be  ready 
to  go  forward ;  that  the  cars  at  the  eleva- 
tors should  go  to  the  consignee  at  the 
no  per  cent,  rate  (34)  while  the  25  cars 
which  were  substituted  should  go  for- 
ward at  the  20  cent  rate?  A.  Some- 
thing of  the  kind. 

Q.  There  was  a  mere  substitution 
(25)  of  one  car  for  another,  both  cars 
went  equally  forward?  A.  Yes, sir. 

Q.  All  cars  should  go  forward — part 
paying  the  20  cent  rate  and  part  [50]  pay- 
ing the  22  cent  rate — that  all  should  go 
forward  at  the  time — is  not  that  the  fact 
as  you  remember  it?  A.  Yes,  sir.  [75] 

Mr.  English:  Q.  You  stated  in  your 
direct  examination  that  Mr.  Norton  paid 
what  we  might  call  a  rebate  to  Carter  & 
Co.  Do  you  know  (35)  that  of  your  own 
knowledge?  A.  Yes,  sir;  I  do. 

Q.  How  many  payments  did  he 
make,  do  you  know?  A.  No,  I  do  not 
know.  I  would  (25)  like  to  say  that  two 
Mr.  Nortons  are  there — one  cashier  and 
one  agent. 

Q.  We  are  talking  about  the  defen- 
dant. A.  I  could  not  say  I  [50]  ever 
received  anv  money  from  him. 

Q.  You  cannot  say  of  your  own 
knowledge  that  it  was  this  Mr.  Norton? 
A.  No,  sir. 

RE-DIRECT     EXAMINATION. 

Mr.  Winn:  [75]  Defendant  Nor- 
ton here,  is  he  not  the  head  of  the  office 
of  which  the  other  Norton  is  cashier? 
A.  Yes,  sir;  as  I  understand. 

Q.  The  cashier  [36]  who  paid  you  the 
money  is  the  agent  or  employe  under 
Mr.  Norton  the  defendant?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Now,  in  answer  to  Mr.  White  a 
while  (25)  ago,  Mr.  Starr,  were  you  stat- 
ing what  Mr.  Smith  said  to  Mr.  Marshall? 
Do  you  remember  the  representations 
that  Mr.  Smith  made  to  Marshall  when 
[50]  you  had  the  talk  with  him  about  the 
exchange  of  these  cars?  A.  My  recol- 
lection is  that  he  stated  the  case,  that 
he  had  so  many  (75)  cars  that  he  wanted 
substituted  for  a  like  number. 

Q.  You  did  not  make  any  represen- 
tations at  all  about  this  matter?  A.  Not 
that  I  remember. 

Q.  State  (37)  to  the  court  if  you  can, 
just  what  Smith  said  to  Mr.  Mar- 
shall about  that  exchange,  the  cars  and 
what  they  were?  A.  I  could  not  [25] 
remember  what  he  did  say. 

Q.     (To  the  Court)     This  is  a   matter 


which  perhaps  I  should  have  brought  in 
in  chief,  but  I  overlooked  it.  [50]  To  wit- 
ness.] Do  you  remember  a  number  of 
cars  of  grain  which  were  shipped  under 
this  arrangement  as  if  under  no  per 
cent,  points,.  [75]  shipped  from  your  ele- 
vator on  the  tracks  here,  that  were  after- 
wards discovered  and  the  rate  raised  at 
Buffalo? 

The  Court:  Wait  so  that  I  can  (38) 
get  this  matter  correct  as  I  go  along. 
Am  1  to  understand  that  in  regard  to  the 
Peoria  railroad  cars  that  the  un- 
derstanding really  is  (25)  that 
the  twenty-five  cars  under  the  invoice 
were  to  go  forward  under  the  no  per 
cent,  arrangement  and  the  equivalent 
number  of  cars  [50]  were  to  be  placed  on 
the  transfer  in  place  of  these  Peoria  rail- 
road cars  to  go  forward?  The  witness: 
Finally  it  was  that  the  Peoria  [75]  Rail- 
road cars  were  to  go  on  the  proportion 
of  the  through  rate. 

Q.  The  other  was  simply  a  talk  which 
you  had  about  the  matter?"  A.  Yes,  (39) 
sir. 

Mr.  White:  Does  the  court  under- 
stand now  that  the  final  arrangement  was 
not  communicated  to  Marshall,  or 
whether  it  was  communicated  at  the  time 
[25]  that  both  were  there?  The  arrange- 
ment, it  seems,  was  made  by  Smith  and 
Mr.  Starr  representing  Carter;  then 
they  went  to  Marshall. 

The  Court:  I  [50]  understand  how  far 
this  might  implicate  Mr.  Marshall  in  re- 
gard to  the  final  arrangement  as  it  was 
carried  out.  (To  the  witness)  Was  that 
final  [75]  arrangement  communicated  to 
Mr.  Marshall  at  the  time  Mr.  Smith 
called  upon  him?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Mr.  Winn:  (To  the  court)  I  want  to 
ask  him  (40)  about  a  number  of  cars 
billed  as  if  from  no  per  cent,  points  but 
stopped  at  Buffalo  and  the  rate  of  freight 
raised.  (To  [25]  witness)  Do  you  re- 
member such  an  occurence?  A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  about  the  num- 
ber of  cars?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Have  you  not  some  idea  about  [50] 
the  number?"  A.  I  should  say  most  all 
of  them. 

Q.  Well,  how  many?  A.  I  could 
not  say;  I  have  not  the  least  idea. 

Q.  "You  do  not  [75]  mean  most  all 
that  you  shipped  under  the  arrangement? 
A.  Yes,  sir.  Well,  I  should  say  most 
all  of  them. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  what  time  the 
[41]  rate  was  raised  on  those  cars?  A. 


I  think  it  was  in  the  latter  part  of  Novem- 
ber or  in  December. 

Q.  Had  not  your  arrangement  with 
Mr.  (25)  Smith  been  running  from  Sep- 
tember up  to  that  time  without  detection  ? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  How  long  does  it  take  a  car  to  get 
through  from  here  (50)  to  New  York? 
A.  Eight  or  ten  days. 

Q.  How  many  cars  were  you  shipping 
on  the  average  per  day?  A.  That  I 
could  not  say. 

Q.  Well,  about  (75)  how  many?  A. 
I  cannot  say  about.  Some  days  we  did 
not  ship  any,  other  days  a  great  many. 
Q.  Cannot  you  give  some  kind  of  an 
(42)  average  on  that — 2  or  10  or  20  per 
day?  A.  I  could  not  tell. 

The  Court:  I  do  not  see  the  point  of 
those  questions  (25;  — what  they  lead  to. 
You  say  this  grain  never  went  to  New 
York  at  all? 

Mr.  Winn:  Yes,  sir;  it  did  go.  What 
I  am  (50)  seeking  to  do  is  this:  That 
after  tins  arrangement  had  been  running 
for  some  time  and  a  great  many  cars 
shipped  under  the  arrangement  and  (75) 
the  rebate  paid  to  Carter  &  Co.,  the 
scheme,  if  I  may  call  it  so,  was  detected 
by  the  Central  Traffic  Association,  and  a 
large  (43)  number  of  cars  that  were 
shipped  under  this  arrangement  were 
stopped  at  Buffalo  and  the  rates  raised  to 
the  full  local  rate  from  Chicago. 

Mr.  (25)  White:  By  whose  direction? 
Mr.  Winn:  By  the  direction  of  the 
Central  Traffic  Association.  By  some 
contract  with  the  road  that  association 
has  that  right.  (50)  Now,  the  point  I  de- 
sire to  make  in  this  case  is  that  after 
that  was  done,  Mr.  Starr,  in  conver- 
sation with  Mr.  Smith,  called  attention 
(75)  to  the  fact  that  Smith  told  him  that 
would  make  no  difference,  for  him  to 
pay  the  freight  and  put  in  a  voucher  and 
he  (44)  would  pay  the  money  back  to 
him.  (To  witness)  YOU  remember  the 
fact  of  the  rate  being  raised  on  a  number 
of  cars?  A.  Yes,  sir.  (25) 

Q.  Did  you  have  a  conversation  with 
Mr.  Smith  or  any  of  the  defendants  after 
that  raise  in  regard  to  those  rates?  A. 
No,  sir. 

Q.  Remember  anv  (.50)  conversation 
about  it  at  all?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Anything  about  the  raise?  A. 
No,  sir. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Smith  say  anything  to 
you  about  paying  back  difference  to  (75) 
you?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.     Mr.  Starr,  I  would  like  you  to  re- 


fresh your  memory  a  little  about  that  if 
you  can.  I  can  refer  you  to  (45)  your 
testimony  before  the  Board  of  Trade.  A. 
1  do  not  remember  anything  of  the  kind. 
I  would  like  to  see  it. 

Q.  (To  counsel  for  the  (25)  defence) 
If  there  is  no  objection  I  would  like  to 
hand  the  witness  the  testimony  that  he 
gave  before. 

Mr.  White:  Gave  where? 
Mr.   Winn:   (50)   It   is   the   testimony 
made  before  the  Board  of  Trade. 

(There  being  no  objection  the  tran- 
script of  testimony  in  question  is  handed 
to  witness). 

Mr.  (75)  Winn:  I  want  to  ask  you  if, 
in  that  first  interview  vou  had  with  Mr. 
Smith — the  first  arrangement  you  were 
making  about  the  grain,  (46)  if  before 
he  concluded  the  arrangement  with  you 
he  went  anywhere  to  consult  about  it? 
A.  I  could  not  swear  to  that. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  his  (25)  going 
into  anybody's  office?  A.  No,  sir;  I  do 
not  remember. 

Q.  (To  counsel  for  defence)  For  the 
purpose  of  expediting  this  matter,  gen- 
tlemen, I  have  a  (50)  list  here  of  some  50 
odd  cars  that  Mr.  Ireland,  who  has  ex- 
amined the  books  in  the  various  railroads 
of  the  Central  Traffic  Association  has(75) 
compiled,  and  traced,  giving  the  point  of 
origin  of  the  grain  shipped  under  this  ar- 
rangement as  so  stated  in  the  fictitious 
way  bills  and  also  (47)  giving  the  actual 
origin  of  it.  For  the  purpose  of  paving 
time,  can  we  agree  that  this  is  a  history 
of  the  actual  origin  of  (25)  these  cars? 
Mr.  White:  What  is  it? 
Mr.  Winn :  That  is,  if  I  can  prove  these 
by  Mr.  Ireland? 

Mr.  White:  How  many  infractions  of 
(50)  law  do  you  want  to  prove  so  that  we 
may  agree  upon  a  certain  base? 

Mr.  Winn:  I  propose  in  this  to  select 
from  this  (75)  number  of  cars  a  few — 
that  is,  if  all  agree— one  is  as  good  as 
twenty.  If  that  is  conceded,  we  can  se- 
lect from  these  (48)  a  few  cars. 

The  Court:  What  is  this  compilation? 
Is  it  compiled  by  an  expert  from  the  va- 
rious railroad  companies,giving  what  cars 
were  shipped  (25)under  this  arrangement? 
Mr.  Winn:  Yes,  sir;  giving  the  true 
history  of  the  cars,  taking  up  the  way 
bills  as  given  on  the  grain  shipped  (50) 
by  Carter  &  Co.,  purporting  to  orig- 
inate from  no  per  cent,  points  and  giv- 
ing its  actual  origin.  1  thought  this 
would  save  a  deal  (75)  of  time.  We  only 
select  a  few. 


s 


Mr.  White :  We  can  have  a  conference 
at  recess  in  regard  to  the  matter. 

The  Court:  Have  you  (49)  any  more 
testimony  that  bears  upon  unv  other  por- 
tion of  the  case  that  could  be  put  in  be- 
fore the  recess? 

Mr.  Winn:     Not  just  ready  (25). 
The  Court:    Then  we  will  take  a  recess 
now  until  two  o'clock.    The  Court  stands 
adjourned  until  that  time. 

AFTERNOON   SESSION. 
SAMUEL  F.   MARKHAM,  second  (50) 
witness  for  the  people,  being  duly 
sworn,  testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

Bv  Mr.  Winn:  Mr.  Markham,  what 
was"  vour  business  in  the  fall  of  (7$)  1888? 
A.  Grain. 

Q.  Were  you  employed  then  by  Mr. 
Carter?  A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  going  alone 
or  with  Mr.  Starr  at  any  time  to 
(50)  see  Mr.  Smith,  the  then  assistant 
general  freight  agent  of  the  Minnesota 
Railroad,  about  some  business?  A. 
I  do. 

Q.  Did  vou  make  any  arrangement 
with  Mr.  (25)  Smith  or  any  of  the  defend- 
ants in  this  case  about  the  transportation 
of  grain  from  Chicago,  local  grain  here, 
to  New  York?  A.  I  made  such  (50) 
contract  with  Mr.  Smith. 

Q.  I  wish  you  would  tell  the  Court 
what  arrangements  you  made?  A.  The 
arrangement  briefly  *was  this:  They 
were  to  take  this  (75)  grain  from  Chicago 
at  their  proportion  of  the  through  rate. 

Q.  Will  you  state  to  the  Court  in 
what  manner  that  was  to  be  accom- 
plished? A.  We  (51)  were  to  take  for 
all  freight  out  of  Chicago — whether  on 
track  at  Chicago  or  elevator  Chicago 
— and  it  was  to  be  billed  from  those  [25] 
various  points  at  different  rates. 

Q.  As  if  it  originated  from  no  per 
cent,  points?  A.  Yes,  sir;  some  did 
and  some  did  not. 

Q.  But  when  [50]  it  did  not  it  was 
billed  as  if  it  did?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  arrangement  did  you  make 
about  billing?  A.  WTe  made  the  ar- 
rangement with  Mr.  [75]  Smith  to  take 
stuff  in  that  wav. 

Q.  Who  was  to  make  the  bill?  A. 
Bills  are  made  in  the  office  of  the  railway 
company. 

Q.  From  what  [52]  were  they  to 
make  up  their  bills?  A.  From  the  ship- 
ping instructions  furnished  them  by  us. 

Q.     In  what  form  were  your  shipping 


instructions?      A.     I  do  not  [25]  under- 
stand that  question. 

Q.  What  was  the  given  form  of  vour 
shipping  instructions?  A.  On  the  ship- 
ping slip. 

Q.  Is  it  something  like  that  [showing 
witness  papers  shown  [50]  to  previous 
witness]?  A.  Yes.  This  is  not  the  ex- 
act form,  but  they  would  cover  it.  Yes: 
practically  that  same  thing. 

Q.  In  these  shipping  instructions  that 
[75]  you  gave,  did  you  state  the  point  of 
origin  of  this  grain  or  supposed  point  of 
origin?  A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  whether  it  was  taken  from 
the  [53]  track  here  or  an  elevator,  you 
gave  the  origin  in  the  bill  of  instructions 
as  if  from  some  outside  point — some  no 
per  cent.  [25]  point?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Was  there  any  stamp  to  be  placed 
upon  these  instructions  that  vou  gave 
them — what  vou  call  your  billing  instruc- 
tions? A.  Yes;  there  [50]  were  two 
stamps  used  under  instructions. 

Q.  What  were  those  stamps?  A.  I 
do  not  know  exactly  the  words.  One  of 
them  was  to  pay  back  charges  [75]  to  the 
St.  Paul  elevator  and  dock  charges  onlv, 
and  the  other  was:  "  No  bill  of  lading 
has  been  issued  for  this  property  ." 

Q.  What  was  [54]  the  object  and  pur- 
pose of  these  stamps?  A.  That  was  the 
object,  I  think. 

Q.  Well,  explain.  A.  The  object 
was  that  the  charges  were  to  be  paid  [25] 
to  us  of  the  St.  Paul  Elevator  and  Dock 
Company,  and  not  to  some  western  road. 

Q.  The  charges  that  would  have  gone 
to  the  Western  (50)  road  from  which  the 
grain  purported  to  have  come  would  be 
paid  to  you  instead  of  to  the  road?  A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  But,  were  they  paid?  (75)  A.  Yes; 
paid  bv  the  Minnesota  Railroad  Co. 

Q.    "Who  paid  them?   A.  The  cashier. 

Q.  Of  what  department?  A.  Cashier 
of  the  road. 

Q.  Were  the  checks  endorsed  bv  anv- 
bodv  (55)  in  the  freight  department?  A. 
Sometimes  we  got  it  in  checks  and  some- 
times in  cash.  We  got  it  in  both  ways. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  (25)  the  cashier? 
A.  Mr.  Norton — a  brother  of  the  de- 
fendant Norton. 

Q.  Is  he  employed  in  Mr.  Norton's 
department?  A.  I  do  not  know — I  sup- 
pose he  is,  (50)  but  I  do  not  know  him. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  anvthing  about 
a  large  number  of  cars  of  grain  belong- 
ing to  Carter  &  Co.  and  shipped  (75) 
under  this  arrangement  being  stopped 


at  Buffalo  and  the  rate  raised?  A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  how  many  cars 
there  were  about?  A.  I  do  not.  (56) 

Q.  Did  you  have  any  conversation 
with  Mr.  Smith  or  Mr.  Norton  or  Mr. 
Winters  or  Mr.  Marshall  about  the  rais- 
ing of  the  rate  on  those  (25)  cars?  A.  I 
had  a  conversation  with  Mr.  Smith  in 
regard  to  that ;  yes,  sir. 

Q.  How  long  after — soon  after  the 
rate  was  raised?  A.  I  do  (50)  not  know. 

Q.  What  was  your  conversation?  A. 
Mr.  Smith  remarked  in  the  presence  of 
Mr.  Carter  and  myself  in  our  office  for 
us  to  go  ahead  (75)  and  pay  those  charges 
which  occurred  naturally  of  course  from 
the  other  end  from  the  setting  up  of  this 
bill  of  lading,  and  then  bring  (57)  him  a 
statement  of  it,  and  we  would  have  a 
voucher  for  it. 

Q.  The  raised  amount?  A.  Yes,  sir; 
the  difference  between  our  rate  and 
whatever  (25)  the  rate  was  at  Buffalo  sus- 
pension bridge. 

Q.  Where  were  these  shipping  in- 
structions that  you  speak  of,  that  carry 
this  red  stamp — where  were  they  pre- 
pared? (50)  A.  In  our  office. 

Q.     Carter  &  Co.?     A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Where  did  you  get  blanks  upon 
which  to  prepare  them?  A.  They  were 
brought  to  vis. 

Q.     By  whom?  (75)     A.     Mr.  Green. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  have  any  conversa- 
tion with  Mr.  Norton  or  Mr.  Winters 
about  this  business?  A.  No,  sir;  not  to 
my  knowledge.  I  do  (58)  not  recollect 
any  conversation  about  it. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  have  a  conversation 
with  anyone  else  in  the  presence  of  these 
gentlemen  about  it — either  of  (25)  them? 
A.  You  will  have  to  get  that  conversa- 
tion a  little  different— in  the  presence  of 
all  of  them  or  some  of  them? 

Q.  I  mean  either  (50)  of  them.  A. 
Yes,  sir;  I  had  a  conversation  with  Mr. 
Smith  in  the  presence  of  Mr.  Green  and 
Mr.  Starr. 

Q.  I  mean  in  the  presence  (75)  of  Mr. 
Norton  or  Mr.  Winters  or  Mr.  Marshall? 
A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Do  vou  remember  whether  during 
the  first  conversation  you  had  with  Mr. 
Smith  in  (59)  regard  'to  this  matter,  he 
left  his  office  or  room  to  go  for  consulta- 
tion with  anyone  else?  A.  He  may 
have  gone  out — I  do  not  (25)  recollect  any 
special  going  out. 

Q.     Do   you    remember    whether     he 


went  in  to  talk  with  Mr.  Marshall?  A. 
Not  to  my  knowledge. 

Q.  Were  you  present  at  (50)  any  time 
when  Mr.  Marshall  and  Mr.  Smith  had  a 
conversation  about  this  business?  A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Will  you  state,  if  you  please,  what 
was  said  (75)  at  that  time  by  any  of  you 
and  by  either  of  you  and  by  Mr.  Mar- 
shall? A.  Mr.  Starr  and  myself  went 
into  Mr.  Marshall's  office  (60)  along  with 
Mr.  Smith  in  regard  to  certain  Peoria 
Railway  oats  which  we  then  wished  to 
send  out  from  here  and  which  we  could 
not  (25)  naturally  do  because  the  Peoria 
Railroad  did  not  then  prorate. 

Q.  That  is,  you  mean  you  could  not 
send  it  out  on  the  regular  tariff?  A. 
Yes,  (50)  sir;  and  we  went  in  to  see  Mr. 
Marshall  in  regard  to  that,  and  Mr.  Mar- 
shall flatly  refused  to  allow  those  oats  to 
go  forward  ("75)  in  the  way  we  suggested, 
but  he  did  say  if  we  could  substitute  a 
like  number  of  certain  cars  to  corres- 
pond with  the  Peoria  Railway  (61)  oats 
and  have  it  there  side  by  side  with  the 
other,  then  they  could  go;  but  he  refused 
to  allow  the  oats  to  go  out  (25) otherwise. 

Q.  What  was  it  that  he  refused  to  do 
— what  was  your  proposition?  A.  The 
proposition  was  one  that  I  stated  a 
few  minutes  ago,  namely :  (50)  That  the 
Peoria  Railroad  did  not  at  that  time  pro- 
rate with  the  Eastern  lines  on  the  basis 
of  20  cents,  but  they  did  on  the  (75)  basis 
of  25 — consequently  of  course  their  rate 
would  be  more. 

Q.  What  was  it  then  you  proposed  to 
Mr.  Marshall  there  that  he  declined?  (62) 
A.  That  very  fact  that  I  just  stated — that 
we  wanted  to  get  those  oats  out  on  the 
basis  of  the  then  Chicago  rate. 

Q.  There  was  (25)  no  trouble  about 
sending  them  out  on  the  Chicago  rate 
without  consulting  him,  was  there?  A. 
What  was  that? 

Q.  Could  you  not  have  sent  them  out 
(50)  by  the  Chicago  rate?  A.  They 
were  on  other  billing,  but  this  Peoria 
Railroad  did  not  prorate. 

Q.  Now,  were  you  then  trying  to  get 
them  on  (75)  some  other  road?  A.  The 
object  was  to  get  out  of  Chicago  on 
the  basis  of  the  20  cents  rate. 

Q.  There  was  no  other  way  to  (63) 
do  this  but  to  assume  they  were  from  the 
Peoria  Railway?  A.  Probably  not. 

Q.  Then  what  you  wanted  to  do  was  to 
deliver  these  oats  as  (25)  if  they  originated 
on  some  other  road — you  say  that  he  de- 


clined  to  do  it?  A.  Yes.  sir;  he  declined 
to  do  that. 

Q.  Mr.  Markham,  when  these  (50) ex- 
pense bills  or  shipping  directions  you 
speak  of,  bearing  this  red  stamp — where 
were  those  papers  sent  when  made  out 
in  your  office — to  whom?  (75)  A.  I  sup- 
pose they  were  sent  to  the  local  office.  I 
do  not  know  because  from  there  the  line 
offices  get  their  rate. 

Q.  That  is  to  (64)  Mr.  Norton?  A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Suppose  the  oats  were  being  ship- 
ped by  the  Carmine  Line  where  would 
they  go?  A.  All  bills  of  lading  are  fur- 
nished down  (25)  town  here. 

Q.  They  all  come  from  Mr.  Norton? 
A.  No;  they  all  come  from  their  offices. 

Q.  Who  has  charge  of  that  office  from 
which  all  bills  (50)  of  lading  come?  A. 
Carmine  and  Montreal  Fast  Line,  I  think 
Mr.  Winters;  and  Mr.  Norton  Minnesota 
Railroad. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  put  red  stamps  on 
your  (75)  shipping  directions  or  any  other 
freight  than  that  sent  under  this  arrange- 
ment you  made  with  Mr.  Smith?  A. 
Not  to  my  knowledge. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  make  (65)  up  any 
bills  of  that  kind  of  shipping  directions 
on  any  other  freight  than  that  to  be 
shipped  this  way?  A.  That  is  all. 

Q.  In  the  (25)  regular  course  of  busi- 
ness, none  of  those  directions  were  made 
up  in  your  office,  were  they  ?  A.  Direc- 
tions are  always  given  from  our  office. 

Q.  These  expense  (50)  bills?  A.  As 
far  as  the  form  goes — no. 

Q.  Of  course  you  would  direct  when 
or  how  to  ship?  A.  Yes. 

Q.  Did  or  did  not  these  expense  (75) 
bills  bearing  the  red  stamp  purport  to 
come  from  the  railroad  from  which  it 
was  alleged  the  grain  was  billed — that  is, 
originated?  A.  I  do  (66)  not  catch 
that. 

Q.  I  asked  if  the  shipping  directions 
you  spoke  of  or  the  expense  bills  that 
bear  the  red  stamp — did  they  or  not  (25) 
purport  to  be  signed  or  issued  by  the 
railroad  company  from  which  the  grain 
came?  A.  I  do  not  know — I  never  saw 
any  of  them  (50)  signed  and  do  not  be- 
lieve any  were  signed. 

Q.  Not  with  a  pencil  mark?  A.  I  do 
not  remember  seeing  any  of  them  at  all. 

Q.  You  do  (75)  not  remember  about 
seeing  them?  A.  No,  sir. 

The  Court:  Were  any  directions  given 
b\-  Mr.  Smith  as  to  how  the  difference  of 
the  20  cent  (67)  rate  and  the  actual  rate 


they  would  receive  was  to  be  settled?    A. 
It  was  to  be  settled  here. 

Q.  How — on  what  sort  of  vouchers? 
A.  It  [25]  was  paid  through  the  cash- 
ier's office. 

Q.  What  did  you  present  in  order  to 
get  it?  A.  We  simply  went  to  the  office 
with  the  cashier's  check  [50]  that  was 
taken  from  the  cashier,  and  a  blank  was 
exchanged  with  the  cashier's  check — the 
paymaster's  check. 

Q.  Was  there  any  paper  or  mem.  in- 
dicating [75]  that  this  grain  had  come  in 
from  some  point  within  the  no  per  cent. 
limit?  A.  I  do  not  think  there  were  any 
such  papers  (68)  at  all.  1  think  I  remem- 
ber just  a  mem.  or  card.  As  I  remem- 
ber it  now  there  was  a  little  slip  5  or  6 
inches  [25]  wide  with  the  amount  to  be 
refunded  opposite  on  each  card. 

Q.  That  came  from  Mr.  Smith's  of- 
fice? A.  I  suppose  it  was  made  up  in 
the  [50]  building. 

Mr.  Winn:  Did  not  this  paper  that 
you  call  the  shipping  directions — did  not 
that  give  all  the  information — the  num- 
ber of  cars,  the  [75]  amount  of  grain  in 
them  and  point  of  origin  and  the  rate?  A. 
Yes,  sir;  but  that  has  nothing  whatever 
to  do  with  it. 

Q.  Let  as  [69]  see  whether  it  has  not. 
Would  not  that  slip  itself  then  be  evi- 
dence to  you — could  you  not  by  referring 
to  them,  tell  what  was  [25]  shipped  or 
rebates  would  be?  A.  No;  because  it 
was  simply  a  form  showing  the  point  of 
origin  and  car  number. 

Q.  And  the  amount  of  grain  [50]  and 
the  rate?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  That  shows  the  amount  of  grain? 
Could  you  now  at  anytime  tell  how  much 
it  should  be?  A.  No,  sir;  [75]it  would  not 
be  the  wav  that  I  would  get  it. 

The  Court:  The  question  is  how  did 
you  get  at  it?  A.  If  the  car  (70)  had 
28,000  pounds  and  came  to  the  point  of 
taking  the  22  cent  rate  and  the  Chicago 
18  2-10  then  there  [25]  would  be  a  differ- 
ence of  3  8-10  cents  a  hundred  on  the  28,- 
ooo  pounds,  but  the  expense  bills  or 
what  Mr.  Winn  [50]  calls  the  shipping 
instructions  would  not  show  that — that 
would  not  be  a  form  that  we  would  use. 

Q.  No  matter  what  machinery  you 
used  under  [75]  these  arrangements  you 
expected  to  get  the  rate  of  18  2-10  instead 
of  20  cents.  A.  Yes. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  White:  Mr.  Markham, you  (71) 
speak  of  a  voucher — or  rather  in  relation 
to  those  directions  that  Mr.  Smith  gave 


you  when  the  rates  were  raised,  you 
said  a  voucher  (25)  would  be  made 
and  paid  to  Mr.  Carter,  do  you  know  that 
a  voucher  was  made  at  all  in  favor  of 
Mr.  Carter?  A.  No,  sir;  [50]  it  never  was 
paid. 

Q.  Neverwaspresented?  A.  Never 
was  presented. 

Q.  You  have  spoken  of  the  arrange- 
ment made  with  Mr.  Smith  for  the  bill- 
ing of  Carter's  [75]  grain  from  Chicago 
East,  and  you  have  also  spoken  of  an  in- 
terview that  you  have  had  with  Mr. 
Marshall  when  you  called  on  Mr.  Smith, 
(72)  relative  to  this  Peoria  Railroad  bus- 
iness. Will  you  please  state  about  how 
long  that  was  after  the  first  arrangement 
with  Smith?  A.  I  do  not  believe  [25]  I 
can. 

Q.     Do  not   remember?     A.     No,  sir. 

Q.  Was  it  after  the  first  arrangement 
with  Smith  had  been  made?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  It  wanted  some  weeks  after  [50] 
that?  A.  That  I  can  not  remember. 

Q.  You  do  remember  that  it  was  after ; 
you  don't  remember  how  long?  A.  No 
sir.  ' 

Q.  Did  you  have  many  interviews  [75] 
about  this  matter  with  Smith  before  you 
went  to  Mr.  Marshall?  A.  About  this 
one  matter? 

Q.  These  matters  generally?  A. 
Yes,  we  had  frequent  interviews  about  it 


The  Court:  You  say  that  the  rate  was 
raised — do  you  mean  that  when  the  cars 
reached  Buffalo  the  way  bill  or  expense 
bills  were  [25]  changed  so  as  to  indicate  a 
higher  rate  than  was  to  be  paid?  A. 
Raised  the  tariff. 

Q.  On  the  assumption  that  there  was 
a  mistake  or  [50]  simply  an  arbitrary 
raise,  or  had  to  pay  a  higher  rate  to  get 
freight  at  New  York?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Mr.  Winn :  That  was  only  part  [75]  of 
the  grain  that  you  had  shipped  under  the 
arrangement — some  did  go  through  un- 
der the  original  rate?  A.  Quite  a  large 
number  of  shipments  were  [74]  raised — 
the  tariff  was — we  are  even  paying  them 
still. 

Q.  But  some  of  the  grain  did  go 
through  as  originally  shipped?  A.  That 
I  do  not  [25]  know. 

Q.  Don't  you  know  about  Carter  get- 
ting their  rebate  on  it?  A.  That  would 
not  make  any  difference. 

Q.  Well,  it  might  not — I  can  conceive 
of  [50]  their  paying  it  back.  It  made  a 
difference  to  the  extent  of  what  you  got 


ii 

here?  A.  Yes,  sir;  when  it  got  to  des- 
tination. 

Q.  When  it  [75]  came  to  this  destina- 
tion, suppose  a  rate  had  indicated  there 
could  be  collected  at  24  cents  or  22  cents, 
you  had  received  a  [75]  cent  and  8-ioths 
here;  it  made  that  difference  to  vou  any- 
how? A.  Yes. 

Mr.  White:  When  it  was  raised  in 
New  York  you  paid  that  [25]  back  at 
New  York,  so  that  you  paid  the  full  20 
cent  rate?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  So  when  the  transportation  on  it 
was  raised  you  paid  [50]  the  full  20  cents? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

ANSON    PACKER,  being  duly  sworn, 
testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION'. 

By  Mr.  Winn:  I  hand  vou  a  paper 
dated  [75]  Chicago,  October  29,  1888, 
signed  by  L.  C.  Winters— will  you  tell 
the  Court  what  it  is?  A.  That  is  an  of- 
ficial copy  [76]  of  a  bill  of  lading  of  the 
Minnesota  Railroad  Company. 

Q.  On  what?  A.  On  six  cars  of 
oats. 

Q.  Give  the  car  numbers,  please.  A. 
Carmine  Line  cars  [25]  numbered  35,204, 
10,459,  10,477,  18,545,  13,545,  11,145 
[5oJ- 

Q.  Where  did  the  grain  come  from 
as  stated  on  that  bill?  Where  did  the 
grain  originate  according  to  that  bill  of 
lading?  A.  Collins,  St.  Paul  [75],  and 
Mexican  Railroad  Company. 

Objected  to  on  the  ground  that  there 
is  nothing  on  the  paper  by  which  the 
witness  can  identify  it. 

Q.  I  will  [77]  ask  the  witness  that 
question?  A.  It  is  impossible  to  see 
whether  this  is  a  press  copy  of  the  origi- 
nal, because  there  is  no  print  here  [25]. 

Q.  Is  that  Mr.  Winters'  signature? 
A.  The  clerk's  name  is  torn  off.  It  is 
not  Mr.  Winters'  own  writing.  I  sup- 
pose it  is  his  clerk's.  It  [50]  looks  like  it. 

Q.  Do  you  recognize  the  writing? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Know  whose  it  is?  A.  I  think  it 
is  D.  A.  Ralston's. 

Q.  You  have  stated  that  [75]  there  is 
a  letter  press  copy  of  the  bill  of  lading 
for  these  cars?  A.  That  is  the  way  it 
appears  to  me — the  writing  looks  [78]  a 
good  deal  like  it,  but  there  is  nothing  of 
the  printed  form  on  here. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  the  Court  from  what 
data  that  bill  [25]  of  lading  was  obtained? 
A.  What  is  that? 

Q.     Where  did   you  get   the  data   for 


12 

making  that?  A.  I  get  it  from  the  St. 
Paul  expense  bill  [50]. 

Q.     Where  did  the  grain  come   from? 

Mr.  English:  Does  this  witness  say 
he  made  this  himself?  Witness:  No; 
I  did  not  make  this. 

Q.  Were  you  [75]  present  at  the  time 
it  was  made?  A.  Not  when  this  was 
made.  t 

Mr.  Winn:  Well,  I  will  ask  you  about 
the  regular  course  of  business  [79]. 
Where,  in  due  course  of  business  in  your 
office,  would  the  information  come  from 
on  which  that  bill  of  lading  was  made? 
A.  At  the  Minnesota  [25]  Railroad  local 
freight  office. 

Q.  And  what  is  that  receipt  made 
from?  A.  From  the  St.  Paul  expense 
bill  or  any  other  road's  expense  bill. 

Mr.  White  [50]:  Anyroad?  Not  from 
the  St.  Paul  alone,  but  any  road?  A. 
Yes,  sir;  any  road. 

Mr.  Winn:  From  what  station  does 
the  freight  mentioned  in  (75)  that  bill  of 
lading  purport  to  come?  A.  Purports  to 
come  from  Dana,  111. 

Q.  If  the  cars  in  which  that  grain  was 
loaded  had  been  sent  (80)  to  any  elevator 
to  be  loaded,  who  would  send  it  in  the 
regular  course  of  business?  A.  I  don't 
just  exactly  get  that. 

Q.  If  that  grain  (25)  was  loaded  in 
vour  cars  that  are  numbered  there  at  an 
elevator  here  in  Chicago,  who  would 
send  the  cars  or  by  whose  direction  would 
(50)  the  cars  be  sent — from  the  elevator? 
A.  They  may  have  picked  the  cars  up 
somewhere,  mav  have  had  them  them- 
selves or  may  have  ordered  them  (75) 
from  us. 

Q.  If  thev  were  sent  from  vour  road 
to  the  elevator  to  receive  the  grain,  who 
would  direct  what  cars  would  be  sent? 
A.  Who  (81)  orders  the  cars? 

Q.  The  Peoria  Railroad  elevator  I 
am  talking  about.  A.  If  they  went  in 
cars  of  the  Minnesota  Railroad  do  you 
mean? 

Q.  If  vour  (25)  road  gives  an  order  for 
a  carload  of  grain  from  the  Peoria  Rail- 
road elevator — tells  you  to  get  it — by 
whose  direction  would  the  cars  (50)  over 
your  road  be  sent  out?  A.  Agent 
Norton. 

Q.     Sent  by  him?     A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Then  would  or  would  not  Mr. 
Norton  know  where  the  grain  in  (75)  that 
car  came  from? 

Objected  to.     Question  withdrawn. 

Q.  Here  is  another  bill  of  three  cars — 
you  can  tell  about  that.  A.  It  appears 
to  be  a  (82)  tissue  copy  of  a  bill  of  lading. 


Q.     Issued   by  what   roads     Give   the 
road's  name  and  the  agent.   A.   Carmine 
Line,    Winters,   agent.     Carmine    Line 
cars   (25)  numbered   4399,    15646, 
This  is  dated  November  second,  iS8S. 

Q.  (Handing  witness  papers)  Will  (50) 
you  look  at  these  papers  and  state  to  the 
Court  what  they  are?  A.  Well,  they 
are  just  what  I  said  before.  They  seem 
to  be  (75)  tissue  copies  of  bills  of  lading 
issued  by  the  Carmine  Line  office,  signed 
by  Mr.  Winters.  Some  do  not  seem 
to  have  any  signature  on  (83)  them  at  all. 

Q.  Sho\v  me  one  that  has  no  signa- 
ture on  it?  A.  (Handing  paper)  That 
one. 

Q.  I  think  that  has  a  signature  on 
it.  I  (25)  will  now  show  the  witness 
other  papers  purporting  to  be  tissue 
copies  of  way  bills  of  Minnesota  Railroad 
dated  November  13  and  21.  I  will  (50) 
ask  the  witness  to  state  what  they  are? 
A.  These  are  not  Carmine  Line.  These 
look  to  me  to  be  tissue  copies  of  Minne- 
sota Railroad  local  (75)  bills  of  lading, 
signed  by  P.  M.  Green,  countersigned  bv 
the  railroad's  contracting  agent. 

The  Court:  Issued  by  the  Minnesota 
Railroad?  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Mr.  Winn  :  (84)  Is  what  you  have  said 
in  reference  to  the  source  of  information 
upon  which  these  way  bills  were  made 
up  as  to  the  point  of  (25)  origin  of  the 
grain,  etc.,  in  the  first  batch  true  of  all 
the  way  bills  I  have  shown?  A.  What 
do  you  mean  to  say — receipts  (50)  issued 
by  Norton  per  my  name?  That  is  what 
they  are.  They  are  made  of  expense 
bills  sent  out  by  the  Wisconsin  road. 

CROSS  EXAMINATION.  (75) 

By  Mr.  English:  Mr.   Packer,  what  is 
your  business?     A.    Head  way  bill  clerk,  ' 
Minnesota  Railroad. 

Q.  Do  you  have  anything  to  do  with 
the  makingout(85)of  the  bills  of  lading? 
A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Either  thi-  Minnesota  Railroad  or 
the  Carmine  Line?  A.  They  are  not  made 
out  in  the  office  where  I  (25)  am. 

Q.  You  have  nothing  to  do  with  mak- 
ing them  out?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  receive  tissue  copies  of 
the  bills  of  lading  made  up?  A.  No, 
(50)  sir. 

Q.  Did  vou  ever  see  one  of  those 
copies  before  you  saw  them  in  court  to- 
dav  ?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Do  vou  of  vour  own  knowledge 
know  (75)  where  those  copies  were  made? 
A.  No,  sir. 

Q.     Do  you  know  if  they  are  copies  of 


any  bills  made  by  the  Minnesota  Rail- 
road or  the  Carmine  (86)  Line?  A.  I 
did  not  make  them. 

Q.  Is  it  not  simply  this:  that  you  are 
judging  by  the  appearance  of  them?  A. 
That  is  what  I  say — (25)appear  to  be  tissue 
copies. 

Q.  From  what  you  saw  on  the  face? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Your  opinion  of  them  lies  in  the 
handwriting  of  Mr.  Winters?  (50)  A. 
Not  Mr.  Winters'  handwriting. 

Q.  Is  anyone  in  the  handwriting  of 
Mr.  Norton?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Then  when  vou  say  they  appear 
to  be  copies  of  the  (75)  bills  of  lading  you 
simply  say  that  judging  from  their  ap- 
pearance as  seen  here  in  court?  A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Q.  You  have  no  knowledge  of  your 
own  (87)  as  to  when  thev  were  made  or 
what  they  are?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Now  you  have  said  something  about 
the  source  of  information  from  which 
these  [25]  particular  bills  of  lading  were 
made  up.  Do  you  know  anything  as  to 
where  the  information  as  to  anyone  of 
these  bills  came  from,  or  [50]  do  you  sim- 
ply testify  as  to  the  general  course  of 
business  in  the  office?  A.  Just  from  the 
general  appearance. 

Q.  You  simply  know  just  from  the  [75] 
.course  of  business  that  information 
comes  from  certain  sources?  A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Q.  You  do  not  propose  to  testify  in 
regard  to  anything  in  regard  to  the  (88) 
actual  facts  of  these  particular  bills  of 
lading?  A.  I  could  not  do  that. 

Q.  You  said  something  about  the 
bills  of  lading  issued  by  the  Carmine[25] 
Line  being  made  up  from  information 
furnished  by  a  receipt  You  said  that  that 
receipt  was  issued  by  Mr  Norton  from 
the  Minnesota  Railroad  office  [50]  Do 
you  mean  to  suv  they  are  issued  by  Mr. 
Norton  personally?  A.  No,  by  me  for 
Mr.  Norton. 

Q.  Originating  in  his  office?  A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Q.  Do  [75]  vou  know  whether  Mr. 
Norton  always  issues  the  receipts  from 
that  office  or  not?  A.  Never  does. 

Q.  You  were  asked  as  to  who  sends 
cars  when  (89)  they  are  ordered  of  the 
Minnesota  Railroad — for  instance,  a  car 
ordered  from  a  certain  elevator— you  were 
asked  who  actually  sends  the  car  from  [  25] 
that  elevator — who  gives  the  directions. 
Are  thev  given  bv  Mr.  Norton  in  person? 


A.  No,  sir ;  when  I  say  him  I  mean 
through  his  office.  [50] 

Q.  But  not  by  him  personally?  A. 
No,  sir;  I  mean  Mr.  Norton's  office — not 
personally  by  him. 

Q.  As  a  matter  of  fact  the  orders  for 
cars  [75]  are  left  on  books  for  that  pur- 
pose, are  they  not?  A.  Yes. 

RE-DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

Mr.  Winn:  All  these  bills  of  lading 
have  the  name  of  Mr.  (9O)  Winters  or 
Mr.  Green  signed  on  them?  A.  Are 
they  signed  by  Mr.  Green  or  Mr.  Win- 
ters, do  you  mean? 

Q.  No;  I  say  their  names  are  [25] 
signed  on  them  as  such  papers  are  usual- 
ly issued  from  chose  offices.  A.  Ap- 
pears to  be  ;  yes,  sir.  I  have  no  knowledge 
of  their  business  at  [50]  all. 

S.  F.  MARKHAM,  recalled. 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Winn:  Will  you  look  at  the 
papers  I  now  show  you;  they  are  dated 
Chicago,  October  [75]  22nd,  1888,  and 
October  26th,  1888,  and  purport  to  be  bills 
of  the  Minnesota  elevator  company  to 
Clarence  Carter  (91)  cSi  Co. — will  you  look 
at  them  and  state  to  the  court  what  they 
are?  (Handing  witness  papers.)  A. 
They  appear  to  be  bills  signed  by  [25] 
the  Minnesota  elevator  company  u> 
Clarence  Carter  &  Co.  I  do  not  know 
whether  they  have  ever  been  in  our  of- 
fice or  not. 

Q.  Who  asked  [50]  you  whether  they 
had  ever  been  in  your  office  or  not?  You 
will  oblige  me  by  simply  answering  the 
questions  I  ask  you.  The  bill  [75]  is  sent 
by  the  elevator  company  to  Clarence 
Carter  &  Co.  for  what?  A.  One  of 
them  seems  to  be  for  storage  on  some 
oats  and  (92)  the  other  also  appears  to 
be  for  storage  on  oats. 

Q.    Now  can  you  tell  me  from  anything 
that  appears  on   those  bills — either  face 
or  (25)   the  back — upon    what  oats   that ' 
storage  was   for?      A.     I    do    not    know 
from  these  bills. 

Q.     From  the  face  or  back  I  said? 

The  Court:  (50)  From  anything  that 
is  on  the  bills  can  you  tell?  A.  There 
is  a  notation  on  the  bottom  of  one  of 
them — M.  R.  cars,  no  (75)  numbers  or 
anything  to  correspond  with  them,  but 
there  seems  to  be  some  numbers  on  the 
back.  I  suppose  the  numbers  refer  to 
loads  in  (93)  Carmine  Line  cars. 

Q.  Then  it  is  three  cars — 15646,  18263, 
4,399 — and  you  will  find  receipted  (25) 
there  on  the  back  of  the  other  some  fig- 
ures? A.  On  the  back  of  the  other  bill 


ness  of  the  Carmine  Line  company  was 
exercised  and  conducted  by  the  (97) 
Minnesota  Railroad  Company.  It  is 
simply  a  freight  line  of  that  companv. 

Mr.  White:  That  you  will  have  to 
prove. 

Mr.  Winn:  I  intend  to  (25)  try  to  prove 
all  that.  (To  witness)  I  will  show  you  this 
bill  and  ask  you  whether  these  cars  were 
loaded  from  the  Peoria  Railroad?  (50) 

Mr.  White:  I  understand  that  the 
question  is  as  to  whether  he  has  exam- 
ined his  records.  A.  Yes,  sir. 

Mr.  Winn:  That  is  your  answer?  A. 
Yes,  (75)  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  keep  a  record  of  all  the 
grain  that  is  loaded  in  cars  out  of  eleva- 
tors? A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Who  keeps  that  record?  A.  It 
(98)  is  kept  in  my  office. 

Q.  What  is  your  office?  A.  The  grain 
inspection  office  of  the  State. 

Q.  I  will  ask  you  to  state  for  what 
purpose  (25)  this  record  is  kept?  A.  The 
record  is  made  for  the  purpose  of  show- 
ing certificates  of  the  work  done  by  the 
office  and  for  the  date  (50)  for  the  collec- 
tion of  fees  for  doing  the  work,  and  is 
kept  for  the  information  of  the  public. 

Q.  Is  that  a  record  that  is  required 
(75)  by  law  to  be  kept?  A.  I  am  not 
sure  whether  or  not  there  is  any  legal  re- 
quirement. It  is  necessary  in  the  course 
of  our  (99)  business  to  keep  it. 

The  Court:  You  do  keep  such  a  re- 
cord? A.  Yes,  sir. 

Mr.  Winn:  You  have  made  examina- 
tion. State  what  you  know  about  (25) 
this. 

Objected  to  on  the  ground  that  it  has 
not  been  shown  that  it  is  a  record  to  be 
kept  by  law;  that  it  is  (50)  not  shown 
that  he  kept  the  record  himself. 

The  Court:  He  can  state  the  manner 
in  which  it  is  done.  A.  I  have  the 
original  reports  (75)  made  byt>ur  inspec- 
tors. 

The  Court:  Your  record  is  made  up 
by  reports  of  deputy  inspectors?  A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  is  copied  bv  vourself  or  your 
(lOO)clerks?  A.  My  clerks. 

Q.  You  have  brought  to  the  court  the 
reports  of  those  inspectors?  A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Adjourned.     (10,017  words) 

fourteen  pages  of  court  testimony  represent  a  supplement  to  Haven's 
Complete  Manual  of  Typewriting,  the  only  complete  work  on  typewriting.   Price,  $2. 


cars  35204,  figure  32  [50]  opposite;  13556, 
32  opposite;  11145,30430,8545—32  oppo- 
site; 10459,  [75]  32  opposite. 

Q.  What  do  those  figures  opposite  in- 
dicate? A.  The  weight  of  the  cars,  1 
suppose. 

Q.     32,000  pounds?     A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  I  will  ask  you  (94)  what  the  first 
figures  represent?  A.  They  appear  to 
represent  car  numbers. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  to  the  Court  then 
whether  that  is  not  a  bill  for  (25)  storage 
upon  the  oats  in  those  various  cars?  A. 
It  is. 

Q.  Is  that  the  ordinary  way  in  which 
the  elevator  company — the  Minnesota 
elevator  company — make  [50]  out  their 
bills?  A.  It  appears  so  from  that  bill. 
I  am  not  familiar  with  storage  bills. 

Q.  Who  in  Mr.  Carter's  employ  is 
familiar  with  it?  [75]  A.  There  is  a 
storage  man  in  every  office  who  attends 
to  such  things. 

CROSS  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  English:  Do  vou  know  of  your 
own  knowledge  (95)  what  they  are?  A. 
No,  sir. 

Q.  Know  anything  about  where  they 
purport  to  get  their  information — that  is, 
of  vour  o\vn  knowledge?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q  Know  who  (25)  put  the  figures  on 
those  papers?  A.  No,  sir. 

Q.     You  simply  interpret  then  what  it 
shows  on  the  face?     A.     Yes,  sir. 
P.  B.  FRANKS,  being  duly   (50)  sworn, 
testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Winn:  What  is  your  business, 
Mr."  Franks?  A.  I  am  chief  inspector 
of  grain. 

Q.  I  will  ask  you  (75)  to  state  whether 
as  chief  inspector  of  grain  you  have  ex- 
amined the  records  of  your  office  for  the 
purpose  of  determining  what  cars  were 
loaded  (96) — whether  cars  numbered 
35,204,  10,454,  12,877,  8,545,  13,556,  (25) 
11,145,  cars  4,399,  15,646,  18,263  were? 

The  Court:  Of  what  road  are  they?  (50) 

Mr.  Winn:  This  is  the  Minnesota 
Railroad,  Carmine  Line  cars. 

Mr.  White:  Do  you  assume  that  the 
Carmine  Line  cars  are  Minnesota  Rail- 
road cars? 

Mr.  Winn:  Yes,  sir;  I  certainly  assume 
that  the  Carmine  Line  cars  and  the  busi- 


100 


MISCELLANEOUS 

ACTUAL      BUSINES  S 

Arranged  for  Shorthand  and   Typewriting    Practice,   with   words 
counted  and  numbered  for  timing  speed,  like  above  testimony,  will 
be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Room  17,  Tribune  Building,  Chicago,  Illinois,  on    receipt  of 


SO:M::E 

Showing  the  advantages  possessed  by  Haven's  distinct  joined  vowels  over  other 
systems  in  making  legible^  without  decreasing  speed,  those  words  wherein  vo\vt.!s 
must  be  written,  etc.,  etc. 


GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

LINDSLEY 

CROS3. 

Ape 

\ 

V 

1 

^x? 

Away 

^ 

d 

e^ 

^ 

Iowa 

^\ 

J 

^ 

^ 

I.  PITMAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Evaporate. 

^ 

V 

\ 

1 

I.  PITMAN., 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Emigrant 

^, 

^ 

j~* 

Immigrant 

^, 

•^ 

_^ 

B.  PITMAN, 

I  PITMAN. 

HAVEN. 

Ivooin 

i 

-. 

^-^ 

l^s 

^ 

^r 

Leave 

Love. 

Will  Kave 

You  will  Kave  teen 

PITMAM 

n^ 

/"I 

(\-  

7v 

-/•  v 

^^ 

HAVEN 

f~^ 

/  N 

Y^\ 

/^ 

T  l 

1 

IN 

PREPARATION. 

es 


Copyrighted    1890. 
All   Rights  Reserved 


THE 

Short-Hand  Teacher's 
Companion. 

A  handy  volume  of  information  of  value  to  every 

Teacher  of 
SHORT-HAND  AND  TYPE-WRITING, 

Containing  Review  Exercises,  a  full  set  (in  synopsis)  of 

Lectures  to  .Students,  together  with  a  detailed 

explanation  of  the  means  by  which 

EVEN    DULL  STUDENTS 

Are,  by  the  Haven  plan  of  instruction,  in  use  at  Haven 

Colleges, 
IN  ONE  TO  THREE   MONTHS, 

Without  any  previous  knowledge  of  these  arts  on  the 

Student's  part, 
FITTED   FOR   POSITIONS 

Requiring  skill  in   both  Short-Hand  and  Type-writing ; 
minutely  describing  the  Student's  duties  and   pro- 
gress, step  by  step,  from  the  taking  of  first  lesson 
to  graduation,  with  the  reason  for  each  step  ; 

Together  with  much  other  information  of  value  to 
Teachers  of  anv  svstem. 


BY  CURTIS  HAVEN, 

Expert  Short-hand  Reporter  and  Type-writist,  Founder  of  the  Ha- 
ven Colleges  of  Practical  Phonography  and  Type-writing, 
Author  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography,  Haven's 
Complete  Manual  of  Type-writing,  Ktc.,  Etc. 


T.  "  *i>Ki.rruA  AND  CHICAGO: 
PUBLISHED    BY    THE    AUTHOR. 


Copyright  IM'1.  by  Curtis  Havi-u. 

P^jOLlXEIRIHILET  3STo.   1 

OF  HAVEN'S  SELECTIONS  OF 

ACTUAL   CONVENTION   PROCEEDINGS, 

Containing  the  Ordinary  Words,  Terms  and  Phrases  used  in  General  Public  Assem- 
blies, Oratory,  Etc.     Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice, 
with  words  Counted  and  Numbered  for  timing  speed. 

1O.OOO    NA/ords—  Rrioe,   1Oc. 

(Explanation: — Every  twenty-five  words  are  marked  [25],  [50]  or  [75]  and  every 
hundred  words  are  shown  by  black  figures,  [1],  [2],  [3],  etc.,  representing  100,  200, 
300,  etc.,  respectively.  Such  figures  are  not  to  be  read  as  part  of  the  proceedings.) 

Meeting  called  to  order  at  8:15  p.  m. 

President  VanShaack:  In  calling  the  Convention  to  order,  I  will  detain  you  but  a 
moment  [25]  while  expressing  the  great  pleasure  which  I  experience  in  meeting 
with  you  once  more  face  to  face,  and  permit  me  to  add  that  I  trust  [50]  there  will  be 
a  full  and  free  discussion  of  every  subject  which  comes  before  this  Association  and 
upon  which  there  is  any  difference  of  opinion.  [75]  It  has  been  my  experience,  gentle- 
men, as  well  as  that  of  others  who  have  occupied  this  chair,  that  after  adjournment 
some  gentleman  has  remarked  "that  [1]  he  did  not  think  it  good  policy"  though 
we  never  had  the  pleasure  of  hearing  his  voice  during  the  discussion.  We  wish  a 
free  discussion  [25]  and  a  full  one  as  to  the  expediency  of  every  move  we  make. 
There  are  gentlemen  on  this  floor  who  are  able  to  teach  us  [50]  much,  but  their  in- 
herent modesty  and  the  unsteadiness  of  their  legs — the  infirmities  which  the  speaker 
himself  experiences— prevent  us  hearing  from  them  as  we  [75]  should.  Let  there  be 
a  reform  in  this  regard.  If  there  are  any  gentlemen  present  representing  any  of  our 
sister  associations  they  will  kindly  send  [U]  their  names  to  the  chair.  The  first  order 
of  business,  gentlemen,  is  the  roll  call. 

Mr.  J.  M.  Peters — I  move  that  the  calling  of  [25]  roll  be  dispensed  with  until  a 
later  session;  many  of  the  members  are  absent  as  yet.  [It  was  so  ordered.] 

The  President  It  is  in  [50]  order  to  hear  from  the  representatives  of  the  different 
Associations.  I  see  that  the  A.  P.  A.  have  appointed  the  following  named  gentlemen 
as  delegates:  [75]  Mr.  Wm.  Thompson,  Mr.  John  A.  Milburn,  Mr.  I).  M.  R.  Culbreth. 
None  of  those  gentlemen  responding,  we  would  lik«*|D  hKir  from  the  Ohio  [3]  State 
Association,  Mr' J.  N.  Reed,  of  Toledo,  or  Mr.  C.  E.^B^  of  Columbiana,  or  from  the 
Mass.  Association,  Mr.  J.  W.  Colcord,  Mr.  [25]  E-  WaWb  Cutler  or  Mr.  F.  E.  Carter. 
I  see  Mr.  Carter  is  present. 

Mr.  Carter — I  am  sure  some  of  those  men  are  on  [50]  hand  to  do  their  duty.  It  was 
expected  that  the  Mass.  State  Association  would  send  a  retail  member  of  their  Asso- 
ciation instead  of  being  represented  [75[  by  a  member  of  the  National  Association. 
That  member  will  not  be  here  until  to-morrow,  and  will  therefore  have  to  present  his 
case  later  on.  [-tj  He  had  some  remarks  which  he  wished  particularly  to  make. 

The  President — I  see  the  New  Jersey  Association  has  appointed  the  following  as 
delegates:  Mr.  [25]  Henry  O.  Ryerson,  Alfred  S.  Marshall  and  Wm.  N.  Townley. 
There  being  none  of  them  present,  if  any  person  is  here  representing  any  sister  Asso- 
ciations [50]  I  trust  he  will  comply  with  the  wish  of  the  Chair  by  forwarding  his 
name  to  us  at  once. 

Mr.  M.  N.  Kline — It  has  [75]  usually  been  my  misfortune  to  misrepresent  the 
Penn.  Pharmaceutical  Association  on  the  floor  of  this  convention,  but  this  year  I 
happen  to  know  that  we  [o]  have  present  a  proper  and  real  representative  in  Mr. 
J.  B.  Duble,  of  Williamsport,  Pa. 

Mr.  Duble — Mr.  President  and  gentlemen  of  the  Association,  I  [25]  have  the  honor 
to  represent  the  Penn.  State  Pharmaceutical  Association,  although  T  think  that  friend 


Kline  has  made  a  mistake  when  he  speaks  slightly  of  [50]  the  feeling  \ve  have  always 
experienced  to  have  him  represent  us.  I  had  hoped  that  before  I  had  presented  my- 
self and  my  claims,  that  we  [75]  could  hear  from  the  A.  P.  A.;  whom  we  recognize  as 
the  parent  organization  of  the  retail  trade  of  this  country.  I  am  here  Mr.  [<5]  Chair- 
man, I  presume,  under  peculiar  circumstances.  I  had  expected  when  I  came,  to  enjoy 
what  I  had  always  heard  and  what  is  generally  known  as  [2o]  the  courtesy  and  kind- 
ness usually  shown  our  representatives.  I  came  expecting  a  good  time,  and  I 
expect  to  have  it,  but  unfortunately  I  am  sent  [50]  here  this  time  on  a  business  mission 
and  I  feel  like  acting  loyal  to  the  organization  sending  me.  I  propose  to  bring  before 
this  association  [To]  a  question,  not  at  all  new  to  you,  and  yet  one  in  which  we  claim 
the  retailer  to  be  directly  interested  and  also  the  wholesaler,  [7]  and  at  the  proper 
time  and  in  the  proper  place  I  should  like  very  much,  so  far  as  the  State  of  Penn.  is 
concerned  and  [25  J  as  being  her  representative,  to  give  you  whatever  thoughts  I 
might  have  upon  this  question.  It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  for  years  the  [50]  retail 
trade  has  been  laboring  under  a  tremendous  burden.  And  as  the"  National  Organiza- 
tion is  interested  in  our  welfare  as  retailers,  we  come  to  you  [75]  because  we  feel 
naturally  that  you  are  our  friends.  This,  however,  is  not  the  proper  time  and  for  the 
present  I  am  very  glad  for  [8]  your  attention. 

President  VanShaack — Mr.  Horace  Benton,  will  you  be  kind  enough  to  respond. 

Mr.  Benton— It  is  so  long  since  I  have  been  [25]  here  that  I  am  not  in  the  spirit  to 
respond.  I  came  here  to  catch  the  spirit.  I  dropped  out  and  dropped  behind.  I 
came  [50]  here  to  catch  up.  I  am  very  glad  that  the  retailers  are  in  touch  with  the 
wholesalers  of  the  United  States.  I  remember  when  this  [75]  Association  began,  that 
we  had,  to  a  certain  extent,  the  jealousy  of  the  retailers.  It  was  supposed  then  that  the 
wholesale  drug  association  intended  to  [i)]  freeze  out  the  retailers  of  the  United 
States.  That  belief  has  long  since  passed  away,  and  now  in  these  meetings  the  retail- 
ers are  welcome  and  [25]  they  come  here  and  tell  you  that  they  look  on  the  whole- 
sale association  of  this  country  as  their  warm  friends.  This  I  believe,  is  a  [50]  truth. 
I  think  we  all  in  our  hearts  respond  to  this — that  we  are  the  friends  of  the  retailers. 

The  President — I  notice  with  much  [75]  pleasure  that  we  have  with  us  to-night  the 
President  of  the  Proprietors'  Association,  Dr.  R.  V.  Pierce,  of  Buffalo,  and  would  be 
very  glad  to  [1O]  hear  from  the  Doctor. 

Dr.  Pierce — Mr.  President,  the  Proprietors'  Association  have,  I  believe,  a  represent- 
ative appointed  to  represent  them  at  this  meeting,  but,  inasmuch  [25]  as  I  have  been 
called  upon  to  respond  for  the  Association  I  would  say,  that  the  Proprietors'  Associa- 
tion are  glad  to  be  here  to  meet  [50]  with  you  on  this  occasion,  and  the}-  have  great 
cause  for  thankfulness,  especially  during  the  past  year,  for  the  valuable  services  ren- 
dered them  by  this  [75]  association  and  its  representative,  through  their  Committee 
on  Legislation.  Mr.  Jones  of  Philadelphia,  I  believe  is  the  Chairman,  and  Mr.  Kline 
and  several  other  gentlemen  [11]  the  able  representatives.  Certain  matters  thought 
to  be  inimical  to  the  proprietary  interest  were  brought  forward  for  legislative  action, 
and  those  gentlemen  volunteered  very  promptly  [25]  to  fight  the  battles,  .  which  it 
was  thought  they  could  do  better  than  the  proprietors  could  do  themselves.  Our  as- 
sociation is  in  a  very  flourishing  [50]  condition,  so  far  as  numbers  are  concerned, 
having  added  very  largely  thereto  during  the  past  year.  They  feel  that  their  inter- 
ests are  identical  with  your  [75]  own  in  many  respects,  and  they  are  also  aware 
that  there  are  many  interests  wherein  the  retail  dealers  are  interested  as  well,  and  it 
does  [1  —  ]  not  require  very  much  stress  of  the  imagination  to  divine  the  evil  which 
the  gentleman  from  Pennsylvania  has  briefly  alluded  to  here  this  evening.  \Ve,  [25] 
as  proprietors,  only  hope  that  in  the  combined  wisdom  of  the  various  associations 
auxiliary  to  the  National  Wholesale  Druggists'  Association,  some  plan  will  be  devised 
[50]  whereby  this  growing  evil  may  be  obliterated.  Thanking  you  for  your  kind 
consideration,  I  will  not  take  up  the  time  of  the  Association  further  at  [75]  present. 

The  President — I  will  call  upon  Mr.  J.  C.  Eliel  to  respond. 

Mr.  Eliel — Mr.  President  and  gentlemen,  if  there  is  one  thing  more  [13]  than 
another  that  would  bring  about  a  movement  in  the  right  direction,  it  seems  to  me 
to  be  the  encouraging  words  that  Dr.  Pierce  has  [25]  just  uttered.  I  believe  we  all 
recognize  the  evils  to  which  the  gentleman  from  Penn.  refers.  I  believe  we  are  all 
suffering  from  the  same  [50]  evil;  I  believe  that  many  of  us  have  tried  honestly  to 
devise  some  plan  that  would  overcome  it,  and  I  want  to  re-echo  the  words  [75]  of  Dr. 
Pierce,  that  I  trust  the  combined  wisdom  of  these  associations  may  find  some  way  in 


which  this  can  be  affected.  I  kiiow  that  [14]  in  our  own  section  of  country  we  are 
all  suffering  from  that  great  and  growing  evil,  and  I  also  know  that  as  yet  we  have 
['25]  found  no  way  to  curtail  or  hinder  its  growth.  It  seems  to  me  that  the  two  great 
questions  which  confront  our  association  today  are  the  [50]  cutter  and  the  jobber, 
the  member  of  our  association  who  persists  not  only  in  making  no  profit  for  himself, 
but  who,  like  the  dog  in  [75]  the  manger,  objects  to  his  neighbor  making  a  profit. 
I  am  one  of  those  who  leaves  his  desk  and  comes  here  year  after  year  not  [15]  mere- 
ly to  utter  words  that  sound  well,  but  who  comes  here  for  a  purpose.  That  is,  in  the 
nature  of  our  business  we  can  subserve  [25]  our  business  and  interests  better  by  com- 
ing together  upon  these  annual  occasions  than  we  can  individually  at  our  desks  at 
home,  and  I  believe  most  [50]  earnestly  that  we  should  not  get  together  here  without 
each  one  of  us  saying  to  himself  and  to  his  neighbor,  "let  some  good  come  out  [75] 
of  this  meeting;  let  us  at  each  annual  meeting  eradicate  some  evil,  some  abuse,  that 
has  crept  into  our  business,"  then  we  can  all  go  [16]  home  feeling  that  our  time  has 
not  been  lost.  If  we  get  together  here  merely  to 'hear  each  other  talk  or  for  social 
amusement  and  [25]  then  go  home  to  cut  each  other's  throats,  I  ask  you  what  are  we 
here  for?  I  will  not  take  up  more  time,  and  thank  [50]  you  Mr.  President  for  the 
opportunity  of  saying  a  \vord. 

The  President — I  hold  in  my  hand  a  certificate  from  the  Mass.  Pharmaceutical  As- 
sociation, in  [75]  which  it  announces  that  our  esteemed  friend,  E.  Waldo  Cutler  is 
one  of  the  delegates.  We  never  knew  of  an  instance  before  when  he  shirked  [17]  his 
duty,  and  he  did  not  respond  when  \ve  called  upon  Massachusetts. 

Mr.  Cutler — Mr.  President,  this  is  the  first  intimation  that  I  have  [25]  of  the  honor, 
and  am  therefore  not  prepared  to  respond. 

The  President — I  understand  that  we  have  representatives  here  from  the  Minn. 
State  Pharmaceutical  Association,  Mr.  [50]  J.  P.  Allen  and  Mr.  H.  G.  Webster.  I  see 
,Mr.  Allen  is  present.  We  would  be  glad  to  have  him  come  forward  and  let  [75]  us 
look  at  him,  hear  him  and  welcome  him. 

Mr.  Allen — Mr.  President,  Mr.  Webster  and  myself  have  come  here  to  represent 
the  Minn.  State  [18]  Pharmaceutical  Association,  and  while  thanking  you  for  the 
kindness  extended  to  us  will  not  detain  you  with  any  lengthy  remarks  tonight,  but 
will  be  happy  [25]  to  say  at  the  proper  time,  a  few  words  touching  upon  a  matter 
which  we  believe  is  for  the  mutual  advantage  of  the  manufacturers,  the  [50]  whole- 
sale druggists  and  the  retail  druggists.  At  the  proper  time  we  will  be  pleased  to 
present  it. 

The  President — This  would  seem  at  opportune  time.      [75.] 

Mr.  Allen — We  are  hardly  prepared  to-night,  Mr.  President. 

The  President — Mr.  Duble,  could  we  not  hear  from  you  this  evening  on  the  sub- 
ject you  [It)]  spoke  of?  This  is  probably  as  good  an  opportunity  as  any. 

Mr.  Duble — I  am  perfectly  willing  to  abide  by  the  rules  of  this  asssociation,  [25] 
and  I  want  to  preface  whatever  I  may  say,  by  saying  that  whatever  evils  I  may  speak 
about  I  have  no  particular  plan  to  suggest  [50]  as  a  remedy.  I  simply  thought  it 
would  be  possible  for  this  association  in  its  wisdom  to  appoint  a  committee  on  this 
question,  and  if  [75]  that  committee  were  appointed,  I  would  much  prefer  presenting 
our  views  to  it.  However,  I  am  perfectly  satisfied,  if  it  is  the  wish  of  the  [2O]  con- 
vention, to  state  all  I  propose  stating  to  that  committee  right  here. 

Mr.  President — I  think  probably  that  would  be  the  best  course  to  pursue,  [25]  and 
then  if  any  member  should  choose  to  refer  the  matter  to  one  of  our  standing  com- 
mittees, it  would  be  quite  in  order.  I  do  [50]  not  know  of  any  opportunity  better 
than  the  present,  to  lay  the  matter  before  the  entire  association;  then  they  would 
better  understand  matters  when  the  [75]  committee  make  their  report. 

Mr.  Duble — Mr.  President  and  gentlemen:  I  am  sorry  that  what  I  may  have  to  say 
and  the  manner  in  which  [21]  I  will  say  it,  would  hardly  entitle  me  to  such  a  con- 
spicuous position,  but  I  desire  to  say  that  at  the  last  meeting  of  the  [25]  Pennsyl- 
vania Pharmacutical  Association,  the  question  of  cut  prices — probably  you  may  have 
heard  of  that  before — was  very  fully  discussed  and  the  fact  was  shown  [50]  conclu- 
sively that  for  the  last  few  years  the  retail  trade  has  suffered  very  much  from  this 
thing,  I  want  to  say  here  that  so  far  [75]  as  I  am  concerned  personally,  I  cannot 
enter  into  the  spirit  of  the  thing,  as  I  should  like  to  do,  from  the  fact  that  in  [22]  our 
own  town  we  do  not  suffer  from  such  consequences.  It  started  out  in  our  town  at 
one  time  but  we  fought  fire  with  fire — [25]  we  cut  the  cutter  until  he  was  unable 


to  continue  the  cutting  any  longer.  But  unfortunately  that  is  not  the  condition  of 
affairs  throughout  our  [50]  state,  and  in  fact  throughout  the  country — on  the  contra- 
ry, the  evil  instead  of  reducing  is  gradually  growing.  At  this  meeting  of  our  associa- 
tion it  [75]  was  insisted  upon,  that  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  that  association  as 
a  matter  of  courtesy  had  already  been  ably  represented  here  by  members  of  the  [2  J?] 
National  Association,  yet  it  was  insisted  upon  that  some  one  should  be  sent  to  repre- 
sent the  retail  dealers,  and  unfortunately  for  them  I  think  I  [115]  was  the  party  select- 
ed; and  I  am  here  before  you  to-night  to  prove  loyal  to  my  friends,  and  whatever  in 
that  spirit  I  may  say  [50]  here  to-night — acknowledging  the  fact  that  I  am  simply 
heard  out  of  courtesy  of  this  association — whatever  I  may  say,  while  I  may  speak 
plainly,  [75]  I  trust  you  will  take  it  in  that  light.  I  remember  some  few  years  ago 
when  the  wholesale  trade  of  this  country  was  suffering  from  [24]  the  same  cause. 
I  remember  the  time  when  there  were  many  wholesale  pharmacists  who  had  bank- 
ruptcy staring  them  in  the  face,  from  the  simple  fact  [25]  that  a  large  proportion  of 
the  goods  that  they  sold,  were  obliged  to  be  sold  without  any  profit*whatever.  I 
think  that  you  will  agree  [50]  with  me  that  such  was  the  case'before,  in  your  wisdom 
Mr.  President  and  gentlemen,  you  perfected  a  plan  by  which  you  are  secured  at  [75] 
least  a  fair  profit  for  the  goods  you  sell  in  that  line.  Now  if  it  can  be  done  among 
wholesalers,  I  ask  you  in  all  [2o]  justice  and  in  all  reason,  why  cannot  it  be  done  among 
the  retailers?  Now,  I  want  to  show  you — it  has  been  an  expression  that  [25]  I  have 
heard  made — that  the  retailers  are  not  the  only  ones  that  will  suffer  from  this  curse. 
No  man  can  afford  to  do  business  [50  J  and  sell  goods  without  realizing  at  least  a 
sufficient  profit  from  the  goods  to  pay  for  making  the  sale.  You  will  admit  with  nit- 
that  [75]  at  least  fifty  or  sixty  per  cent,  of  the  gflods  that  are  sold  by  the  retailers  to- 
day in  a  great  number  of  localities  are  sold  [26]  without  any  profit.  What  is  to  be 
the  result  when  I  have  to  conduct  the  sale  of  one-half  the  goods  without  a  profit?  If 
[25]  I  have  a  certain  line  of  goods  which  I  sell  without  any  profit,  the  sooner  I  elimi- 
nate those  articles  from  my  business,  the  better  for  [50]  me.  When  I  was  appointed 
to  this  convention  I  made  it  a  point  to  ask  a  number  of  the  retailers  in  our  state  what 
they  [75]  would  eventually  do,  when  we  found  that  it  was  absolutely  impossible  to 
bring  about  any  change  in  this  matter.  With  scarcely  a  single  exception,  that  [27] 
\vastheviewthat  was  taken  of  it.  Now,  Mr.  President  and  gentlemen,  if  such  a 
state  of  affairs  should  be  brought  about  by  this  [25]  cutting  business,  I  ask  you  in 
all  reason  if  the  wholesalers  will  not  have  to  take  their  share  of  the  losses.  We  can- 
not sell  goods  [50]  without  realizing  a  profit — if  we  do  not  buy  goods  you  cannot  sell 
them.  Then  I  would  like  to  ask  the  manufacturers  of  proprietary  preparations  [75] 
if  the  drug  stores  of  this  country  do  not  handle  their  goods,  whether  in  their  judg- 
ment they  would  have  the  same  sale  for  them  in  [28]  the  dry  goods  and  the  notion 
stores  and  in  the  boot  and  shoe  stores.  The  patent  medicine  business  of  this  country, 
Mr.  President  and  gentlemen,  [25]  is  not  of  the  dry  goods  and  notion  store  creation. 
I  want  to  say  with  all  justice  to  the  gentlemen  who  are  here  to  represent  [50]  the 
proprietary  interests  of  this  country  that  we  as  retail  pharmacists  do  not  think  the 
dry  goods  stores  are  necessary  to  the  sale  of  proprietary  [75]  medicines.  We  do  not 
think  they  are  necessary.  The  proprietors  have  advertised  them,  and  kn< 
what  is  a  fact,  that  those  preparations  which  were  most  [29]  widely  advt-v 
were  the  most  likely  to  be  called  for  we  have  bought  them  and  sold  them.  The 
demand  for  them  has  been  made  through  [25]  the  drug  stores.  It  has  not  been 
through  the  dry  goods  stores.  And  just  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of  business  done 
by  proprietors  and  [50]  the  amount  of  advertising—  just  in  the  proportion — ha\ 
number  of  drug  stores  also  increased.  Where  we  had  1,000  to  2,000  or  [75]  3 
and  sometimes  4,000  or  5,000  inhabitants,  we  have  now  almost  one  drug  store  to 
every  thousand  population.  This  has  been  simply  [3O]  brought  about  by  this  one- 
thing — the  increase  of  preparations.  Why,  I  remember  when  I  was  an  appn 
that'a  little  case  about  ten  feet  [25]  in  length  would  hold  all  the  proprietary  pn 
tions  in  the  country — to-day  it  takes  one-half  an  ordinary  pharmacy  to  hold  them  all. 
These  things  [50]  have  to  be  kept  now  though  they  are  sold  without  a  profit.  The 
drug  stores  are  the  place  to  keep  them.  And  they  do  it.  [75]  But  I  want  to  see  if 
something  cannot  be  done.  I  want  to  go  back  to  the  Pennsylvania  Pharmaceutical 
Association  feeling  that  I  have  not  [31]  been  here  for  no  purpose.  I  want  to  go 
back  there  to  tell  them  one  thing  or  the  other.  Either  to  say  that  there  is  [25]  no 
question  about  it ;  that  something  can  be  done.  Or  else  to  say  to  them  that  there  is 


no  use  trying  to  kick  against  the  [50]  pricks;  you  must  submit  to  it  or  eliminate  it 
from  your  business.  It  is  not  my  business  to  say  how  it  can  be  done.  I  [75]  can  sub- 
mit no  plan.  But  I  want  to  ask  one  question.  If  there  are  any  manufacturers  of  pro- 
prietary medicines  in  this  hall  I  want  to  [3ii]  ask  this  one  question  of  them:  Sup- 
pose, for  instance,  that  you  knew  for  a  certainty  that  the  sale  of  your  goods  at  certain 
low  prices  ['25]  was  an  injury — or  rather  an  injury  to  their  sales — to  other  sales — 
would  not  you  stop  it?  I  will  warrant  you  would.  Cases  are  [50]  on  record  where 
goods  are  sold  just  in  that  way.  I  can  mention  one  business  house — 

Mr.  Geo.  J.  Seabury — You  can  put  our  house  [75]  in  there. 

Mr.  Duble — It  can  be  done,  gentlemen,  if  you  desire  to  do  it.  There  is  no  question 
about  that.  But,  we  want  the  [33]  wholesale  men  and  the  manufacturers  of  pro- 
prietary preparations  to  work  together  in  this  matter.  \Ve  want  to  accomplish 
something  or  else  we  want  to  know  [25]  that  we  cannot.  I  want  to  say  right  here 
while  I  am  on  the  floor,  and  I  think  it  is  a  very  important  thing,  in  [50]  my  own 
city  there  is  not  a  single  article  sold  below  the  regular  prices.  To-day  you  can  trav- 
erse the  city  from  beginning  to  end,  and  [75]  you  will  not  find  a  secret  preparation 
on  sale  by  any  druggist  below  the  regular  prices — not  one.  (Applause).  It  is  not  a 
question  whether  [3-t]  the  manufacturers  of  each  preparation  are  doing  a  business 
that  justifies  their  expenditures  or  not — and  that  man  who  is  wise  will  look  still  fur- 
ther ['25]  than  simply  as  to  whether  his  advertising  is  bringing  in  the  required  result. 
It  is  not  what  they  are  doing  so  much  as  it  is  [50]  what  they  might  do.  The  biggest 
losers  are  the  cutters.  Go  into  any  establishment  that  does  a  cutting  business  and 
you  will  find  the  preparations  [75]  they  are  offering  are  those  known  to  the  public. 
That  is  a  question  that  I  simply  want  to  bring  more  particularly  to  the  manufacturers 
of  [35]  patent  proprietary  preparations.  I  feel  that  while  I  could  go  on  still  further, 
yet  I  see  that  the  chairman  of  my  committee  is  here  and  [25]  I  will  give  way  to  him. 

Mr.  Allen — Mr.  President  and  gentlemen  :  I  am  glad  as  a  delegate  of  the  Minne- 
sota Pharmaceutical  Association,  to  confirm  [50]  all  that  the  gentleman  has  said. 
I  have  been  in  a  position  to  look  into  the  subject,  and  as  far  as  I  can  gather  they  [75] 
are  the  sentiments  of  the  entire  pharmacists  of  this  country.  As  I  said  to  you  a  few 
minutes  ago,  we  have  a  plan  that  we  [36]  can  offer  the  convention,  but  must  ask 
you  to  have  the  kindness  to  excuse  us  till  to-morrow,  because  it  is  not  here.  I  have 
sent  [25]  for  it.  It  is  a  definite  plan. 

The  President — Mr.  Lord,  will  you  respond  to  Mr.  Duble's  remarks? 

Mr.  Thomas  Lord — I  am  not  prepared  [50]  to  respond  fully,  but  I  am  very  much  in 
sympathy  with  what  he  has  said  on  the  subject,  and  I  believe  from  my  own  experi- 
ence [75]  and  observation,  ever  since  the  formation  of  the  National  Wholesale  Drug- 
gists Association,  that  there  has  been  adopted  a  prominent  feeling  in  this  direction. 
I  know  [37]  that  for  many  years  the  committee  which  had  in  mind  a  change,  felt 
the  necessity  for  relief  from  the  condition  which  is  referred  to  by  [25]  the  gentleman 
who  has  just  spoken,  and  in  every  single  case  where  the  proprietors  were  approached 
in  reference  to  the  matter  that  has  been  adopted  [50] — known  as  the  rebate  contract 
plan — that  in  every  case  the  committee  presented,  recommended,  urged  and  entreated 
that  the  necessities  of  the  retail  dealers  be  [75]  consulted.  In  testimony  of  this  we 
can  refer  to  every  member  of  the  proprietors'  association  that  was  approached  and 
who  entered  into  the  rebate  plan.  [38]  Iwould  say  further,  not  having  expected  to  be 
called  upon  and  having  no  arrangements  of  thought,  it  seems  to  me  that  if  the  retail 
[25]  druggists  will  formulate  a  plan  that  is  reasonable  and  proper  and  practicable, 
they  will  find  a  very  strong  backing  on  the  part  of  the  members  [50]  of  the  National 
Wholesale  Druggists'  Association  to  carry  it  through  and  make  it  a  power  for  good  to 
them  as  well  as  ourselves.  We  are  [75]  appreciative  of  the  fact  that  the  retail  drug- 
gists are  our  friends  and  customers  and  we  want  to  protect  them  as  far  as  possible, 
and  I  [3i>]  believe  it  has  been  the  feeling  and  spirit  and  purpose  of  this  association 
ever  since  its  commencement,  to  hold  this  in  mind,  and  I  know,  [25]  from  personal 
observation  and  experience,  that  practically  it  has  been  attempted  to  be  carried  out; 
but  we  would  say  to  the  retail  gentlemen  that  if  [50]  they  will  present  a  feasible  and 
practicable  plan,  that  I  think  we  will  all  be  very  happy  indeed  to  put  our  shoulders 
to  the  plan  [75]  and  get  under  the  curtain  and  help  lift  it  up.  (Applause.) 

The  President — Gentlemen,  Mr.  Thompson  of  Washington,  is  present.  We  would 
be  glad  to  [4O]  hear  from  him  upon  the  subject. 

Mr.  Wm.  H.  Thompson — Mr.  President  and  gentlemen  of  the  Wholesale  Druggists' 


Association:  Coming  in  late,  I  have  not  [25]  been  able  to  catch  the  whole  drift  of 
the  gentlemen  who  have  preceded  me,  but  from  what  I  understand,  the  matter  before 
you  is  for  [50]  some  protection  to  the  retail  druggist.  Of  course  we  are  very  glad  to 
have  this  matter  under  consideration.  We  are  here  as  a  delegation  representing  [75] 
the  American  Pharmaceutical  Association  with  instructions  to  co-operate  with  this 
association  and  with  that  of  the  manufacturers  in  any  measure  that  )-ou  may  suggest  or 
[41]  undertake,  looking  towards  the  elevation  of  the  standards  of  the  qualities  of 
medicines,  to  co-operate  wTith  yon  in  any  thing  that  looks  toward  improvement  in 
[25]  methods  of  doing  business;  to  assist  in  any  way  possible  to  correct  what  is  now 
complained  of  by  all  the  retailers  at  least,  as  a  [50]  very  serious  evil.  It  has  been 
suggested  by  the  gentleman  who  just  spoke  on  the  other  side  that  some  plan  should 
come  from  the  retailers,  [To]  that  you  are  perfectly  willing  to  endorse  or  recommend 
or  aid  us  in  any  plan  we  may  suggest;  but  I  suggest  to  you,  gentlemen,  it  [412]  is  not 
in  our  power  to  put  such  a  plan  in  operation,  that  the  remedy  must  come  from  the 
source,  that  the  manufacturers  of  proprietary  [25]  medicines  have  the  complete  con- 
trol of  that,  and  it  is  for  them  to  suggest  a  remedy  for  the  evil  complained  of.  We 
stand  ready  and  [50]  willing  to  co-operate  with  this  or  any  other  association  with  any 
plan  that  may  be  proposed. 

Mr.  George  J.  Seabury — Mr.  President,  I  may  disagree  (75)  with  some  of  our  emi- 
nent speakers  in  this  association,  but  I  think  before  we  are  many  years  older,  we  will 
have  to  adopt  some  plan  [43]  similar  to  that  of  the  American  Pharmaceutical  Asso- 
ciation, whereby  we  will  be  obliged  to  do  our  work  by  sections.  I  have  spoken  of 
this  method  [25]  before.  I  do  not  believe  this  is  the  proper  time  to  bring  up  this 
subject.  We  all  have  diverse  opinions  Mr.  President.  I  think  it  [50]  should  be 
treated  in  sessions  to  come,  and  that  now  we  should  be  prepared  to  hear  the  address 
of  our  worthy  president  and  officers  instead  [75]  of  allowing  the  general  business  to 
interfere,  and  before  we  disperse  from  this  meeting  I  shall  bring  before  the  associa- 
tion a  resolution  to  that  effect,  [44]  because  I  believe  we  waste  time.  We  have  done 
it  ever  since  I  have  been  a  member  of  this  association,  and  for  that  reason  we  [25] 
.are  having  questions  sprung  upon  us  here,  at  the  beginning  of  our  meetings,  that 
will  take  many  hours  to  debate.  I  disagree  writh  our  friend,  [50]  Mr.  Thompson, 
that  our  remedy  must  come  from  above.  My  remedy  has  always  been  from  the  bot- 
tom—from the  retailer.  When  they  will  stand  together  [75]  as  the  wholesalers  do, 
then  they  will  dictate  and  tell  you  what  you  shall  and  must  not  do.  And  not  only 
that.  The  plan  which  [45]  Mr.  Duble  wants  is  also  an  honest  one — and  a  scientific 
one — and  that  is,  that  every  manufacturer  in  this  country  that  manufactures  an  arti- 
cle [25]  of  genuine  merit  be  protected  against  the  sale  of  substitutions,  and  I  am  in 
hopes  to  see  them  driving  the  wholesalers  to  do  the  same  [50]  thing.  That  is  one 
reason  I  did  not  go  to  Indianapolis  last  year.  I  would  have  given  you  something  on 
substitution  if  I  had.  We  [75J  have  gentlemen  who  come  here  year  after  year — who 
come  here  with  platitudes  and  stand  up  here  and  plead  for  a  straight-forward  practice, 
and  [46]  know  they  do  not  practice  it.  I  have  got  the  proofs  against  them.  They 
are  worse  substitutors  than  even  the  retailers.  I  have  tried  to  [25]  keep  ourselves 
like  a  family  for  years,  but  I  guess  a  good  many  of  you  who  would  not  speak  to  me 
when  you  meet  me,  [50]  find  that  I  am  not  afraid  to  speak  the  truth  nevertheless.  I 
state  it  now  :  The  wholesale  druggists  are  just  as  largely  responsible  for  substitution 
[75]  as  the  retailers  that  you  want  to  help  to  gain  a  profit.  Now,  that  is  about  the 
size  of  this  whole  discussion,  and  I  would  [47]  like  to  have  one  of  our  sections  take 
and  discuss  this  straight.  I  will  give  you  some  knowledge  internally,  and  you  may 
depend  upon  it  [25]  that  every  statement  I  will  make  I  will  prove.  I  never  yet  made 
a  statement  that  I  could  not  prove,  and  therefore  I  think  the  [50]  time  will  come 
when  one  of  these  sessions  will  be  set  aside  for  this  business — because  it  involves  the 
wholesaler,  the  manufacturer  and  the  retailer.  [75]  The  time  is  coming  when  you 
\\  .11  not  be  able  to  collect  your  debts  from  your  customers — you  will  not  have  money 
enough  to  hold  [48]  them  out  of  bankruptcy.  I  can  see  that  very  well.  There  is 
many  a  wholesale  druggist  to-day  that  is  carrying  fifty  per  cent,  of  his  [25]  customers, 
including  those  in  New  York,  Brooklyn,  Boston,  Philadelphia,  and  other  cities,  and 
I  think  it  is  a  question  that  is  not  to  "be  sniffed  [50]  at  by  anybody,  not  even  by  the 
manufacturer  or  the  retailer ;  and  if  they  will  stand  together  in  a  solid  phalanx  they 
can  get  fair  [75]  prices,  and  they  will  say  to  you,  "You  must  not  sell  the  dry  goods 
men  or  other  tradesmen  a  dollars'  worth  of  these  goods."  I  [4D]  have  not  done  it 


on  principle  and  I  will  not  do  it  so  long  as  I  live.  That  is  one  reason  I  object  to  this 
[25j  gentleman's  plan.  They  go  to  work  and  boycott  the  honest  manufacturers.  Sup- 
posing  yon  place  ray  goods  in  the  hands  of  a  dry -goods  man  in  [50]  St.  Paul.  Any- 
body knows  I  will  not  sell  to  a  dry  goods  man.  The  dry  goods  business  can  take  care 
of  itself.  How  do  you  [75]  know  they  cannot  get  hold  of  these-  goods  ?  Is  that  any  reas- 
on I  should  boycott  anybody  else  ?  \ou  do  not  do  justice  to  the  honest  [5O]  manu- 
facturer. If  we  are  to  have  any  reforms,  let  us  do  it  if  we  can  by  a  tripartite  scheme 
— manufacturers,  retailers,  wholesalers.  I  will  do  [25]  it  for  one.  You  will  have 
shorter  bills  to  pay.  You  won't  have  to  wait  six  months  for  your  money.  That  is 
why  the  retail  [50]  trade  is  in  such  a  miserable  condition  to-day  financially. 

Mr.  Allen — As  the  gentleman  has  seen  fit  to  refer  to  our  plan,  I  will  simply  [75] 
say  that  it  is  not  our  time  to  discuss  it  yet,  and  we  will  refrain  from  making  any  re- 
marks from  the  fact  that  our  plan  [51]  has  not  been  submitted.  We  will  reply  to 
that  after  it  is  submitted. 

Mr.  M.  N.  Kline — Mr.  Chairman,  I  desire  to  say  that  the  [25]  suggestion  made  by 
our  friend  Mr.  Seabury  in  reference  to  sections  is  not  only  a  very  good  one,  but  one 
which  has  been  in  successful  [50]  operation  in  this  association  for  many  years,  and  I 
think  anyone  who  comes  to  our  meetings  will  testify  that  our  business  is  done  expedi- 
tiously.  We  [75]  have  a  committee  on  every  subject  which  has  commonly  come  be- 
fore this  body,  and  I  think  that  those  committees  have  generally  considered,  digested 
and  brought  [52]  before  the  association  everything  of  this  nature  which  the  associa- 
tion cared  to  consider.  Now,  we  have  a  committee  on  this  subject  under  discussion, 
the  Committee  [25]  on  Proprietary  Goods,  and  unfortunately  I  happen  to  be  at  this 
time  its  chairman,  and  I  think  we  can  save  a  great  deal  of  time  [50]  by  having  any 
propositions  that  might  be  brought  before  that  committee  given  it  first,  and  after  it  is 
passed  upon  by  that  committee  to  have  [75]  it  brought  before  this  association.  I  have 
prepared,  as  you  probably  have  anticipated,  a  report  of  that  committee,  and  I  think  I 
have  not  been  [53]  asleep  during  the  year,  as  to  what  has  been  going  on  and  what  has 
developed  in  connection  with  this  subject,  and  I  hope  you  will  [25]  say  when  this  report 
is  brought  to  your  notice,  that  I  will  have  covered  all  the  questions.  I  think  we  can 
get  along  more  expeditiously  [50]  and  very  much  more  to  their  taste  and  comfort, 
if  these  matters  were  submitted  to  the  proper  committees  and  are  thus  passed  to  this 
association.  [75].  That  is  what  I  call  doing  our  business  through  sections,  or,  as  we 
call  it,  through  committees. 

Mr.  Seabury — Mr.  President,  I  will  make  this  [54]  statement  which  I  made  before. 
You  remember,  as  we  all  do,  that  these  reports  are  read  by  the  different  chairmen,  then 
reported  to  the  Board  [25]  of  Control.  The  best  time  to  debate  reports  of  the  chair- 
man is  right  here  when  everybody  is  primed  with  the  subject  and  has  ideas  on  [50]  it, 
instead  of  debating  it  over  twice.  That  is  the  only  point  I  have  made. 

Mr.  Eliel — I  think  there  is  a  way  to  do  [75]  these  things  and  do  them  properly. 
We  must  concede  that  to  undertake  to  discuss  a  question  like  this  at  the  opening  of  a 
convention  is  [55]  improper.  We  have  a  committee  on  proprietary  goods,  a  very 
able  committee  having  a  very  able  chairman,  having  done  in  the  past  much  yeoman- 
work  for  [25]  the  association,  and  I  think  it  only  proper  for  these  various  associations 
to  present  their  plans  to  that  committee  and  have  them  debated  in  committee,  [50] 
and  brought  to  us  in  their  proper  order.  Certainly  these  things  should  not  be  dis- 
cussed ahead  of  that  report.  I  have  just  this  one  suggestion  [75]  to  make — that  is 
that  after  that  course  has  been  pursued,  if  it  is  the  will  of  this  convention,  that  the 
gentlemen  whom  we  have  [56]  here  representing  the  various  associations  will  be 
given  not  only  the  courtesy  of  the  floor,  but  given  also  free  and  full  permission  to 
meet  here  [25]  ever}'  day  and  help  us  discuss  these  questions.  They  are  practical 
men.  They  have  come  here  with  ideas  on  these  subjects.  If  we  have  objections, 
[55 1  then  they  ought  to  hear  our  side  of  the  question,  when  they  can  go  home  feeling 
that  we  have  worked  together  with  them,  whatever  the  [75]  result  may  be.  I  move 
you,  Mr.  Chairman,  that  this  matter  take  its  proper  course  and  be  referred  to  the 
committee  on  proprietary  remedies. 

Seconded  [57]  and  so  ordered. 

On  motion,  adjourned  until  next  morning  at  10  o'clock. 

SECOND  DAY— MORNING  SESSION. 

The  Convention  was  called  to  order  by  the  President  [25]  at  10:25,  a.  m. 

The  secretary  called  the  roll  of  the  active  Membership. 


The  President — Gentlemen,    we   have   a   communication    from   the   Delaware  [50] 
State  Pharmaceutical  Society.     The  Secretary  will  please  read  it,  and,   if  there  is  no 
objection,  it  will  be  referred  to  the  Committee  on  Proprietary  Articles. [75] 
REPORT    OF     COMMITTEE    APPOINTED    TO    EXAMINE    THE     "FRENCH'S  PLAN"    FOR 
THE   SALE   OF   PROPRIETARY   MEDICINES. 

WILMINGTON.  DEL.,  Sept.  IGth,  isoo. 
Mr.  President  and  Gentlemen,  [58]  N.  W.  D.  A. 

Resolved,  That  this  committee  commend  to  the  attention  of  the  National  Wholesale 
Druggists'  Association,  and  the  Association  of  Manufacturers  and  dealers  [25]  in  Pro- 
prietary articles  of  the  United  States,  a  consideration  of  the  so-called  "French's  plan," 
for  the  sale  of  Proprietary  Medicines;  that  while  we  do  [50]  not  endorse  the  plan  in 
its  entirety,  we  feel  that  it  possesses  some  good  features  that  can  be  incorporated  in  a 
final  plan  for  the  [75]  amelioration  of  the  retail  druggist. 

We,  moreover,  strongly  demand  the  adoption  of  some  plan  for  this  purpose. 

O.  C.  SPEAR. 
Z.  JAMES  BELT. 

N.   DANFORTH.[5i>] 

J.  M.  HARVEY. 
E.  E.  BOSTICK. 

Committee. 

There  being  no  objection,  the  communication  was  referred  to  the  Committee  on 
Proprietary  articles. 

The  President — Gentlemen,  I  [25]  have  pleasure  in  announcing  that  Mr.  John  A. 
Dadd,  of  Milwaukee,  Wis.,  is  a  delegate  from  the  Wisconsin  State  Pharmaceutical 
Association.  We  will  be  glad  [50]  to  have  Mr.  Dadd,  who  I  see  is  present,  step  forward 
and  address  the  association. 

Mr.  Dadd — Although  not  a  man  of  many  words,  nor  [75]  accustomed  to  speak  in 
public,  still  I  am  very  happy  to  be  here  as  a  representative  of  the  Wisconsin  State  As- 
sociation. Being  familiar  with  the  [6O]  interests  of  the  retailer,  and  having  been 
myself  some  22  years  a  jobber,  as  well  as  for  the  past  19  years  a  retailer,  I  [25]  un- 
derstand the  difficulties  of  both  sides  of  the  question.  I  trust  this  question  will  be 
handled  with  moderation  and  writh  satisfaction  to  both  sides,  and  [50]  knowing  as  I 
do,  a  large  number  of  the  wholesalers,  I  have  no  doubt  full  justice  will  be  done  to 
the  interests  of  the  retailers  [75]  as  far  as  lies  in  your  power.  Gentlemen,  I  thank 
you 

The  President — Mr.  Hinchman,  of  Detroit,  will  kindly  reply  to  the  remarks  of 
the  [61]  gentleman  from  Wisconsin,  Mr.  Dadd. 

Mr.  Hinchman — I  am  very  happy  to  respond  to  the  gentleman  from  Wisconsin.  I 
can  say  little  in  obedience  to  [25]  your  request,  but  I  can  say  somewhat  more  of 
Michigan  than  I  can  of  Wisconsin.  I  attended  the  meeting  of  the  Michigan  Associ- 
ation. There  was  [50]  quite  an  enthusiastic  and  pleasant  gathering.  The  matters 
under  discussion  were  similar  to  those  which  engage  the  attention  of  other  associ- 
ations. The  "cutting"  business  was  [75]  discussed,  and  the  solution  of  that  question 
seemed  as  difficult  with  them  as  with  us,  if  not  more  difficult.  They  did  not  appear 
to  have  [62]faith  in  the  Wholesale  Association's  stand  in  the  matter,  and  I  also,  in  a 
measure,  admit  my  incredulity  in  that  direction.  Another  matter  of  some  [25]  discus- 
sion before  that  association  was  the  difficulty  of  disposing  of  excess  stock  that  had  accu- 
mulated, and  for  which  there  was  no  sale.  Their  first  impression  [50]  was  that  the 
wholesalers  could  relieve  them  of  the  excess  of  stock,  but  that  solution  of  the  ques- 
tion was  found  most  difficult.  It  was  suggested  [75]  that  their  own  salvation  de- 
manded that  the  goods  be  advertised,  but  their  funds  were  not  sufficient  for  that  pur- 
pose. Finally,  the  matter  was  referred  to  [63]  a  committee.  Your  delegate  to  that 
association  very  politely  invited  them  to  send  a  delegate  to  this  meeting,  but  their 
action  with  respect  to  that  [25]  I  did  cot  wait  to  hear.  I  presume,  however,  that  they 
failed  to  act  upon  it;  and  therefore,  as  a  member  of  that  association,  I  [50]  take  the 
liberty  of  announcing  myself  as  a  delegate  from  the  Michigan  Retail  Association,  as 
well  as  being  a  member  of  this. 

The  President — We  [75]  have  with  us  to-day  Mr.  L.  F.  Chalen,  who  represents  the 
Louisiana  Pharmaceutical  Association,  as  wrell  as  the  New  Orleans  Association.  I 
should  be  pleased  [64]  to  have  the  gentleman  step  forward  and  address  the  associa- 
tion. 


Mr.  Chalen — Mr.  President,  as  the  representative  of  the  Louisiana  and  New 
Orleans  Pharmaceutical  Association,  [25]  I  ought  to  say  a  few  words  expressive  of  our 
feelings  and  views  relative  to  the  cutting  of  prices  of  proprietary  medicines,  and  the 
sale  [50]  of  them  by  dry  good  stores  and  bazaars,  for  almost  no  price,  but  merely  for 
the  purpose  of  advertising.  And  in  the  first  place,  I  [75]  desire  to  say,  that  I  experi- 
ence no  ordinary  ^pleasure  in  finding  myself  in  the  company  of  so  many  distinguished 
gentlemen  composing  the  U.  S.  Association  [65]  of  manufacturers  and  dealers  in 
Proprietary  Articles,  the  National  Wholesale  Druggists'  Association  and  the  many 
members  of  the  different  Pharmaceutical  Associations  of  the  I".  S.  [25]  I  feel,  in  ad- 
dition to  the  usual  sentiments  of  friendship  inspired  by  congeniality  of  tastes,  and 
mutual  business  relations  for  many  here  present,  that  esteem  [50]  which  is  due  to 
them,  not  only  as  successful  business  men,  but  for  men  of  science  as  well.  The 
thriving  pharmacist  must  be  not  only  [75]  a  good  business  man  but  a  scholar  and 
chemist  besides;  he  is  admitted  into  the  secret  chambers  of  Nature  and  has  revealed 
to  him  the  [OO]  causes  of  the  wonderful  changes  of  substances  which  result  from 
molecular  attractions  and  repulsions.  Upon  his  knowledge  and  skill  depends  the 
health  and  lives  of  [25]  his  fellow-men,  and  therefore  the  business  of  pharmacy  holds 
a  high  place  in  the  minds  of  all  appreciative  persons.  I  have  been  delegated,  gentle- 
men [50]  of  the  Association  of  Manufacturers  and  Dealers  in  Proprietary  Articles  and 
the  National  Wholesale  Druggists'  Association,  by  my  colleagues  of  Louisiana,  to  say 
to  you  [75]  all  that  the  retail  druggists  of  Louisiana  re-echo  the  sentiments  contained 
in  the  joint  address  of  the  Ramsey  county  Pharmaceutical  Association  and  the  Minne- 
apolis Pharmaceutical  [67]  Association.  We  denounce  the  invasion  of  our  business 
by  men  who  almost  give  away  proprietary  medicines,  perfumery  and  proprietary  arti- 
cles, only  for  the  sake  of  [25]  advertising  and  drawing  customers  to  purchase  their 
dry  goods,  toys  and  baby  carriages,  thus  using  the  legitimate  business  of  pharmacy 
as  a  pole  to  shake  [50]  down  the  persimmons  of  their  own  fortune — this  we  consider 
degrading  to  the  character  of  our  business  and  highly  improper  on  its  face,  not  less 
[75]  so  than  it  would  be  for  the  retail  druggist  to  sell  gentlemen's  neckties  and 
ladies'  hose.  But  we  would  say  little  about  the  mere  external  [68]  impropriety  of  the 
thing  were  it  not  for  the  internal  injustice  it  works  upon  us.  To  some  retail  drug- 
gists the  sale  of  these  articles  is  [25]  of  no  little  importance,  in  healthy  localities  and 
other  localities  at  healthy  periods,  the  sale  of  them  often  help  to  fill  up  the  void  in 
[50]  the  prescription  business,  and  it  is  unjust  that  they  who  serve  as  the  medium  of 
introducing  these  articles  to  the  public  by  commending  them  orally  [75]  or  by  printed 
bills,  should  not  only  be  deprived  of  their  benefits,  but  made  the  laughing  stock  of 
cutters  in  the  dry  goods  stores. 

How  [6t>]  are  we  to  continue  to  handle  goods  which  cost  us  the  full  price,  while 
the  notion  bazaars  who  have  bought  them  at  reduced  rates,  use  [25]  them  only  for 
bait  to  catch  customers  for  other  goods,  whose  rich  profits  reward  them  for  the  ruse? 
Gentlemen,  these  cut  rates  will  first  banish  [50]  proprietary  articles  out  of  the  retail 
drugstore  and  afterwards  out  of  the  market  entirely .  We  are  not  so  ready  to  become 
dry  goods  merchants  [75]  and  grocers  as  they  are  to  become  drug  vendors.  Will  a 
sensible  person  put  any  trust  in  the  articles  claiming  to  benefit  him  externally  or  [7O] 
internally,  which  have  so  little  financial  value?  Cannot  druggists  place  themselves  on 
a  par  with  these  rivals  by  decrying  such  goods,  and  making  a  cheap  [25]  substitute  of 
their  own?  Whatever  success  an  article  may  have  had  in  the  past — may  it  not  be 
deprived  of  it  by  the  united  action  [50]  to  those  to  whom  it  mainly  owes  its  original 
success?  Have  we  not  the  chemical  abilities  to  decompose  articles  in  our  line,  and  use 
their  [75]  elements  to  purposes  of  our  own?  In  speaking  thus  I  voice  the  sentiments 
of  the  retailers  of  the  city  and  state  which  I  represent  on  [71  this  occasion.  At  the 
same  time  I  entertain  a  belief  that  the  manufacturers,  proprietors  and  wholesale  agents 
of  the  proprietary  medicines  in  our  country  will  [25]  feel  it  to  their  own  interests  as 
well  as  ours  to  take  such  measures  as  will  at  once  extinguish  this  evil,  by  withhold- 
ing their  goods  [50]  from  cutters  of  every  kind,  and  selling  them  only  to  regular 
pharmacists  of  known  standing  and  honor. 

"Fiat  justitia,  ruat  coelum" 

"Though  Heaven  should  totter  [75]  to  its  fall, 

"Let  justice  be  done  to  one  and  all." 

The  President — Are  there  any  more  associations  that  desire  to  be  heard  from?  If 
[7  —  ]  not,  gentlemen,  I  deeply  sympathize  with  the  Association  that  the  time  has 
arrived,  in  the  regular  order  of  business,  for  the  affliction  upon  you  of  [251  the  Presi- 


dent's  address.     The  chair  will  cheerfully  entertain  a  motion  to  relieve  yon  of  that 
punishment.     Laughter — Cries  of  "address,"  give  it  to  us,"  etc. [50] 

ADDRESS   OF   PRESIDENT   VAX  SCHAACK. 

Gentlemen  of  the  Convention: 

The  old  German  proverb  says,  "Speech  is  silver,  but  silence  is  golden;"  yet  the 
revolving  wheel  [75]  of  time  marks  the  close  of  each  year  of  our  Association's  history 
as  an  epoch  which  well  demands  a  careful  review  of  the  past,  in  [73]  order  that, 
profiting  by  its  experiences,  we  may  strengthen  our  bulwarks  for  the  future.  Look- 
ing back  over  fifteen  years — a  period  far  longer  than  that  [2o]  commonly  devoted  by 
men  to  any  one  mercantile  pursuit— we  can  recall  no  time,  in  the  history  of  our 
organization,  when  such  a  review  could  [50]  have  afforded  us  more  profound  satisfac- 
tion or  more  intensely  convinced  us  of  the  wisdom  and  expediency  of  our  coming 
together,  than  the  present.  Never  before  [75]  have  we  been  able  to  grasp  one 
another's  hands  in  heartier  mutual  congratulations,  or  in  a  more  earnest  resolve  to 
stand  firm  on  the  solid  [7-t]  foundation  upon  which  our  Association  is  built. 

Born  in  an  era  of  local  jealousies,  so  intensely  bitter  that  its  sponsors  were  forced 
to  concede  that  [25]  its  future  at  best  was  uncertain  and  its  success  problematical,  our 
Association  was  .called  into  existence  by  the  exigencies  of  the  situation.  A  business 
conducted  [50]  by  men  of  otherwise  signal  ability  had  drifted  into  a  whirlpool  of 
unmercantile,  ruinous  and  excessive  competition,  an  especially  striking  instance  of 
which  was  afforded  [75]  by  the  utter  demoralization  in  prices  of  proprietary  articles 
which  day  by  day  were  unfortunately  increasing  in  number.  This  unhappy  state  of 
affairs  gave  birth  [7**]  to  the  Rebate  Plan — a  system  which,  though  not  affording  us 
all  the  relief  we  could  desire,  has  met  the  approval  of  almost  the  entire  [25]  jobbing 
drug  trade  and  the  leading  proprietary  medicine  manufacturers  of  the  United  States. 
I  need  hardly  say,  gentlemen,  that  upon  its  faithful  maintenance  depends  the  [50] 
very  perpetuity  of  the  system. 

The  history  of  individuals,  communities  and  associations  make  up  the  history  of  a 
nation.  How  well  each  of  us  shall  [75]  act  his  part  is  the  question  that  most  con- 
cerns us,  and  upon  the  answer  may  in  some  degree  depend  the  prosperity,  the  wel- 
fare, and  the  [7(5]  greatness  of  our  beloved  country 

Gathered  together  as  we  are  literally  from  the  four  quarters  of  the  Union;  from  the 
frozen  Lake  of  the  North,  [25]  drained  by  the  mighty  Mississippi,  to  the  sunken 
bayous  that  skirt  its  delta;  from  the  shores  of  the  Atlantic  to  the  Golden  Gate,  the 
feet  [50]  of  whose  pillars  are  kissed  by  the  waves  of  the  Pacific — this  large  assemblage 
is  a  most  interesting  event  in  the  history  of  our  organization;  [75]  meeting  as  we  do 
here  to-day  in  the  capital  of  the  greatest  nation  on  the  face  of  the  globe — a  nation 
whose  public  credit  we  [77]  can,  in  no  spirit  of  vain-glorious  boasting,  claim  stands 
first  to-day  among  the  nations  of  the  world — a  country  which  was  baptized  in  the  [25] 
blood  of  the  Revolution,  shed  during  the  eight  years  of  heroic  struggle,  has  since  seen 
its  perpetuity  forever  assured — a  Republic  which  has  successfully  solved  [50]  the  great 
question  of  "self-government"  which  has  afforded  under  the  protecting  aegis  of  its 
free  institutions  an  asylum  for  the  oppressed  of  every  clime  [75]  and  tongue — a 
country  that  gives  promise  of  as  magnificent  achievements  in  literature,  in  science 
and  in  arts  as  it  has  already  attained  in  agriculture,  [78]  in  mechanics,  and  in  its 
inventive  skill,  and  all  that  goes  to  make  up  a  great  and  prosperous  people  in  the 
world's  history,  a  power  [25]  that  will  shortly  welcome  as  its  guests  the  nations  of 
the  earth  at  that  great  entrepot  of  commerce,  the  queen  of  the  mighty  inland  seas, 
[50]  the  second  city  of  the  union,  to  celebrate  a  discovery  as  matchless  as  it  has 
proved  beneficent,  so  that  to-day  the  future  of  America  is  [75]  so  positively  assured, 
that  the  whole  of  Christendom  intently  watches  its  progress — and  whether  we  look 
back  over  the  past,  or  turn  our  glances  forward  [79]  into  the  dim  vista  of  the  future, 
we  can  proudly  claim  that  we  have  taken  the  first  position  in  the  community  of 
nations,  and  thank  [25]  God  in  the  words  of  St.  Paul  that  "we  are  citizens  of  no 
mean  country."  (Great  Applause.) 

The  fierce  struggle  of  the  day  is  between  [50]  the  vast  concentration  of  capital  and 
brains  on  the  one  hand,  and  individual  effort  on  the  other.  The  dissonant  voice  of 
complaint  is  heard  on  [75]  every  side  —on  the  street,  in  the  workshop,  in  the  fields 
and  in  the  mines,  and  from  a  laudable  desire  to  remove  the  cause  of  [8O]  this  dis- 
content have  sprung  many  of  the  tentative  and  erratic  efforts  of  the  legislative  bodies 
of  the  Union.  The  problem  remains  yet  unsolved  and  still  [25]  commands  the  closest 


attention  of  the  profoundest  sociologist  and  the  most  astute  political  economist  of 
the  land. 

Gentlemen,  we  can  fairly  claim  that  the  cause  [50]  of  true  pharmacy  has  advanced 
under  the  auspices  of  our  Association.  We  have  seen  schools  for  education  in  the 
noble  science,  spring  up  in  almost  [75]  every  State  and  Territory,  and  whatever  effort 
has  lain  in  our  power  for  the  betterment  of  the  condition  of  the  retail  drug  trade  of 
the  [81]  country — whose  friends  and  allies  we  rightly  are— has  been  promptly,  earn- 
estly and  faithfully  put  forth. 

In  accordance  with  the  time-honored  custom  of  our  [25]  body,  I  have  appointed 
delegates  to  attend  the  annual  meeting  of  the  American  and  every  State  Pharma- 
ceutical Association  during  the  past  year,  to  extend  our  [50]  cordial  greetings  with 
the  hope  of  cementing  the  friendly  relations  of  the  past,  and  forming  new  ones  for 
the  future.  We  have  invited  each  and  [75]  all  of  them  to  send  a  representative  to  the 
meetings  to  make  such  suggestions  as  they  thought  might  tend  to  strengthen  the 
bond  of  interest  [82]  which  should  exist  between  us. 

The  successful  battle  which  we  fought  for  the  removal  of  the  odious  stamp  pn  per- 
fumery, bay  rum,  etc. — the  struggle  [25]  in  which  we  are  to-day  engaged  to  secure  a 
reduction  if  not  a  total  repeal  of  the  war  tax  on  alcohol  as  used  in  pharmacy  [50] 
and  the  arts,  as  well  as  the  recent  defeat  of  the  iniquitous  Senate  Bill  279,  we  have 
reason  to  believe  have  been  fully  [75]  appreciated  by  them. 

To  these  delegates  we  extend  the  right  hand  of  fellowship.  We  bid  them  welcome 
— thrice  welcome — to  share  in  our  deliberations  and  [83]  to  join  in  our  festivities. 
Their  presence  with  us  to-day  is  the  best  evidence  of  their  appreciation  of  those  fra- 
ternal feelings  which  our  Association  has  [25]  always  aimed  to  cultivate. 

What  more  powerful  argument  can  be  adduced  to  prove  the  far-reaching  influence 
and  the  inherent  value  of  our  Association  than  [50]  its  energetic  and  successful  effort 
to  secure  the  defeat  of  the  obnoxious  Senate  Bill  279  ?  It  is  indeed  a  cause  for  the 
most  [75]  profound  surprise  and  regret  that  there  is  a  member  of  the  jobbing  drug 
trade  of  the  country,  or  a  proprietor  of  a  medical  compound  who  [84]  fails  to 
appreciate  the  importance  of  our  organization,  or  that  any  one  of  either  class  can  be 
found  so  selfish  as  to  participate  in  all  [25]  the  benefits  resulting  from  an  association 
without  being  willing  equally  to  share  Us  expenses,  its  labors,  and  its  responsibilities. 

The  Association  -cannot  but  recognize  at  [50]  their  true  worth  the  faithful  services 
rendered  and  the  signal  ability  displayed  by  the  chairman  of  the  Committee  on 
Legislation,  whose  absence  to-day  we  all  [75]  regret,  and  whose  onerous  duties,  have 
been  performed  with  the  same  energy  and  devotion  which  he  has  in  other  years 
brought  to  the  service  of  [85]  the  Association  in  the  same  capacity.  His  exhaustive 
argument,  appearing  in  pamphlet  form  on  the  Excise  Tax  and  Customs,  was  a  most 
comprehensive  presentation  of  [25]  the  issues  involved.  The  first  bill  reported  by 
the  committee  on  agriculture — as  absurd  as  the  Pope's  bull  against  the  comet — 
entitled  a  bill  for  [50]  the  "Prevention  of  Adulteration  of  Food  or  Drugs,  and  the 
Prevention  of  Poisonous  Adulteration  and  for  other  purposes,"  a  caption  alike  cap- 
tivating and  false,  received  [75]  from  this  committee,  the  Association  of  Proprietors 
and  the  Drug  Exchange  of  Philadelphia,  the  first  among  our  craft  to  sound  the  note 
of  warning — the  [8(5]  most  prompt  and  determined  opposition  which  happily 
resulted  in  its  ignominious  defeat.  (Applause.) 

The  title  of  the  bill  was  a  misnomer.  The  measure  should  have  [25]  been  headed: 
"A  bill  to  increase  the  importance  of  the  cabinet  office  of  Commissioner  of  Agricul- 
ure  and  for  other  purposes.'1''  Gentlemen,  what  were  the  "other  [50]  purposes?" 

To  rob  the  drug  trade  of  the  United  States  of  honestly  acquired  rights! 

To  impose  upon  it  annoyance  and  expense  to  which  no  other  [75]  branch  of  trade 
in  the  country  is  subjected! 

To  provide" lucrative  offices  to  the  cormorants  who  hover  around  the  legislative 
halls  of  the  country,  always  [87]  ready  and  eager  to  aid  in  enforcing  any  policy, 
however  onerous  and  unjust,  providing  it  be  inquisitorial  in  its  character! 

To  subject  to  expensive  delays  [25]  a  legitimate  branch  of  business! 

To  enact  a  inea sure  whose  absurd  provisions  were  demanded  by  neither  the  popular 
will  nor  its  exponent,  the  press. 

To  [50]  throw  open  labratories  and  private  premises  of  the  drug  trade  for  unwar- 
ranted and  unjustifiable  inspection  and  surveillance,  and  to  divulge  the  process  of 
manufacture — many  [75]  of  them  attained  at  a  vast  outlay  of  money  and  scientific 


research  and  experiment — of  men  engaged  in  an  honorable  business;  an  inquisition 
into  private  [88]  business  too  high  handed  and  too  dastardly  to  be  tolerated  by  any 
civilized  country  on  the  face  of  the  earth.  These,  gentlemen,  are  a  few  [2.}]  of  the 
charges  upon  which  we  frame  our  indictment  against  the  authors  of  that  iniquitous 
bill. 

The  bill  elicited  the  earnest  protest  of  the  entire  [•">'>]  drug  trade  of  the  country,  as 
one  which  would  work  irreparable  confusion  and  damage,  and  which  was  in  its  very 
essence,  a  violent  fraud  upon  [7-")]  many  valuable  interests. 

The  deep  indignation  on  the  part  of  the  druggists  and  proprietary  medicine  manu- 
facturers, who  have  been  our  faithful  allies,  did  not  spring  [84)]  so  much  from  any 
disposition  to  oppose  an  honest  effort  to  legislate  against  adulterated  goods,  though 
they  saw  no  necessity  for  any  bill,  as  from  [25]  a  conviction  that  the  bill  was  defec- 
tive, pernicious  and  unjust;  and  was  based  upon  the  most  unfair  imputation  that 
adulterations  in  our  branch  of  business  [50]  were  general:  not  as  we  claim,  and  are 
prepared  to  prove — exceptional.  Gentlemen,  I  have  dwelt  on  this  subject,  because  I 
firmly  believe  the  enemy  [75]  is  only  sleeping,  and  our  antagonists  will  renew  their 
efforts  in  the  next  Congress  to  further  embarrass  us  by  the  passage  of  another  bill, 
and  [t)O]  we  should  ever  remember  "To  be  forewarned  is  to  be  forearmed." 
(Applause. ) 

Probably  since  the  organization  of  our  Association,  no  committee  has  heretofore 
achieved  fewer  [25]  practical  results  than  that  on  transportation,  and  it  is  with  un- 
qualified regret  that  I  learn  from  its  chairman  that  so  little  interest  was  manifested 
in  [50]  its  proposition  to  establish  a  freight  bureau,  and  that  responses  of  any  charac- 
ter was  not  received  from  more  than  5  per  cent,  of  our  members  [75].  I  have  faith 
to  believe,  gentlemen,  that  this  will  not  always  be  so,  but  that  the  Association  will 
wake  up  to  the  necessity  and  possibility  [91]  of  attaining  our  rights  in  the  direction 
of  securing  a  thorough  revision  of  the  existing  outrageously  inconsistent  freight 
classification — and  the  institution,  therefore,  of  a  [25]  schedule  .honestly  based  on 
the  value  of  the  goods  and  the  risks  of  transportation — and  I  strongly  urge  upon  the 
Association  renewed,  vigorous  and  persistent  [50]  effort  in  this  important  matter. 

Nothing  in  the  history  of  our  organization  has  been  to  me  a  cause  for  greater 
disappointment,  deeper  chagrin  or  keener  [75]  regret  than  the  apparent  apathy 
which  some  of  our  members  have  shown  toward  placing  the  Druggists'  Mutual 
Insurance  Company  on  a  substantial  and  enduring  basis  [952].  There  are  gentlemen 
on  this  floor  who  were  present  at  Minneapolis  when  the  Association  committed 
itself  to  the  formation  of  the  company,  who,  at  the  [25]  time  raised  no  voice  in  dis- 
proval  of  the  project,  and  cast  no  vote  against  our  corporate  endorsement  of  the 
enterprise;  yet  who,  while  to-day  undoubtedly  [50]  enjoying  their  fair  share  of  the 
benefits  arising  from  the  organization  of  this  company,  have  not  subscribed  a  single 
dollar  towards  its  capital.  I  say  [75]  "enjoy  a  portion  of  its  benefits,"  because  it 
must  be  conceded  were  it  not  for  its  existence,  we  would  to-day  be  at  the  mercy  of 
[93]  the  Board  of  Underwriters,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  rates  with  have 
been  materially  increased.  Indeed,  I  have  heard  from  the  lips  of  [25]  insurance  men 
themselves,  that  the  dissolution  of  the  Druggists'  Mutual  Insurance  Company  for 
lack  of  our  support,  would  be  regarded  as  a  tacit  admission  on  [50]  our  part  that  our 
risks  were,  as  they  have  always  claimed,  and  as  we  have  always  denied,  with  equal 
strenuousness,  "extra  hazardous,"  and  would  prove  [75]  the  signal  for  the  exaction  of 
higher  premiums  from  the  jobbing  drug  trade  of  the  country. 

The  question  stares  us  in  the  face.  Are  we  [9-t]  voluntarily  to  run  into  the  very 
jaws  of  the  danger  which  menaces  us?  I  am  frank  to  say  I  cannot  understand  how 
any  dealer  in  [25]  drugs,  and  least  of  all,  any  member  of  this  Association,  the  very 
corner-stone  of  which  is  mutual  protection,  can  be  indifferent  to  an  issue  [50]  which 
so  vitally  concerns  us  all,  or  can  fail  to  recognize  the  manifold  loss  that  must  accrue 
to  each  individual  if  the  company  is  not  [75]  heartily  sustained. 

The  problem  that  presents  itself  to  us  is:  Should  this  burden  be  borne  by  a  few 
liberal,  enterprising  and  public  spirited  members  of  [95]  our  Association,  while  the 
accruing  benefit  is  reaped  by  the  entire  trade?  Should  not  all  place  their  shoulders 
to  the  wheel  for  the  advancement  of  [25]  the  common  welfare  ?  The  officers  of  the 
company  have  discharged  their  duties  with  scrupulous  and  unswerving  fidelity,  and 
have  given  to  their  work  their  very  [50]  best  efforts.  Is  their's  to  be  "love's  labor 
lost?"  or  shall  they  receive  the  encouragement  and  co-operation  which  their  enter- 


prise  deserves? 

I  trust  their  report  [75]  will  receive  your  most  careful  attention,  aiid  that  their 
recommendation  will  command  the  substantial  approval  which  they  so  eminently 
merit,  because  of  their  untiring  devotion  [i)O]  to  the  interests  of  the  cause. 

But,  gentlemen,  ignoring  the  consideration  of  self-interest,  are  we  not  bound  in 
honor  to  support  this  company,  whose  [25]  officers  will  to-day  clearly  demonstrate  to 
you  not  only  that  they  have  done  a  successful  business,  but  that  they  are  worth}-  of  your 
unreserved  confidence  [50]  and  cordial^  co-operation.  I  do  not  hesitate  to  say  that  I 
should  esteem  it  a  stain  upon  our  good  name  should  we  fail  heartily  to  [75]  stand  by 
this  Child  of  our  Association. 

The  favorable  decision  rendered  by  Judge  Hammond,  in  the  United  States  Circuit 
Court  in  Western  Tennessee,  in  April  [i)7]  last,  after  a  third  trial,  in  the  case  of  the 
Mansfield  Drag  Company  vs.  three  eastern  companies,  is  of  vital  interest  to  the  entire 
drug  [25]  trade  of  the  country,  involving  as  it  did,  the  hitherto  untried  issue  of  the 
liability  of  insurance  companies  for  proprietary  or  compounded  medicines  prepared 
by  [50]  druggists.  The  trade  is  certainly  under  no  small  obligations  to  Messrs. 
Mansfield  &  Co.  for  their  tireless  efforts  in  bringing  the  question  to  a  final  [75]  test, 
and  it  is  sincerely  hoped  that  the  decision  will  prove  to  the  insurance  companies  at 
once  a  rebuke  and  a  lesson.  It  is  due  [t)J$]  to  the  Druggists'  Mutual  Insurance 
Company  to  say,  that  it  paid  its  loss  promptly  in  this  case  as  in  every  other. 

The  report  of  the  [25]  Committee  on  Proprietary  Goods,  always  one  of  the  most 
important,  will  naturally  elicit  your  closest  attention.  Even  the  man  who  was  once 
arbiter  of  the  [50]  destines  of  Europe,  the  great  Napoleon  himself,  met  his  Waterloo; 
but  defeat  is  a  word  unknown  in  the  vocabulary  of  the  able  and  vigilant  chairman  [75] 
of  that  Committee,  to  whose  unwearied  energy  we  may  attribute  the  comparatively 
few  complaints  of  violation  of  the  contract  plan.  Sincere  gratitude  is  also  due  [SK)J 
to  the  proprietors  who  have  so  faithfully  stood  by  the  committee,  aiding  it  by  both 
word  and  work.  The  few  leading  manufacturers  who  are  still  [25]  without  the  fold 
we  hope  will  yet  see  the  fairness  of  the  plan,  and  I  respectfully  recommend  the  in- 
coming committee  to  persevere  in  the  effort  [50]  to  secure  the  co-operation  of  the  few 
recalcitrants  not  now  committed  to  the  contract  plan — a  system  which,  while  it 
scarcely  affords  even  a  fair  [75]  profit  for  handling  their  goods,  considering  the  great 
expense  in  conducting  the  business,  not  only  affords  a  just  protection  to  the  manu- 
facturer, but  at  the  [1OO]  same  time  results  in  good  alike  to  the  consumer  and  the 
dealer.— (10,012  words.) 

giifThe  foregoing  10,000  words  of  convention  report  represent  a  supplement  to 
Haven's  Complete  Manual  of  Typewriting.     See  advertisement  below. 

4  r\  f\      MISCELLANEOUS       I      nTTTDO     4  r\ 

If  II  I  ACTUAL  BUSINESS  Lt.  I     I    CLPiO    If  1 

I   Arranged  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted    I          I  r\ 
m    and  numbered  for  timing  speed,  like  above  convention  report,  will  be    II      llv 
[  \J    \J    sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Room  17,  Tribune  Bldg.,  Chicago,  111.,  on  receipt  of   1   \S  U» 


Il),UUU  I  t-^=>  I   MVK^MM  Y 

Selected  for  Shorthand  and  Typewriting  practice,  with  words  counted  and  numbered  for  If/ 
timing  speed  will  be  sent  by  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Building,  Chicago,  Illinois,  on  receipt  of  I  \J[ 


/\  I       I  T™  l__J  p^"         y\  I     >  /""N  \  I  C^       letters,  testimony  and  convention  prac- 

f*^-  I—  I—          I     I      I  C«—       f*^.^^J\^J  V   I  tice,  and  much   more,  together  with   a 

complete  set  of  Haven's  easy  and  self-teaching  300  Words  a  Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  will 
be  sent  FREE  to  every  purchaser  of  Haven's  Complete  .Manual  of  Typewriting,  endorsed  by  the  New 
York  Hcnilil,  Philadelphia  Press,  Boston  Hrrald,  and  other  leading  Eastern  and  Western  dailies, 
and  hosts  of  practical  operators,  as  "The  only  complete  work  on  Typewriting  published." 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of  typewriter  work  of  every  kind  —  epistolary, 
Society,  legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial— accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations  descrip- 
tive of  each  specimen,  its  execution  in  detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  contrast,  etc., 
most  of  the  points  being  found  to  be  both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert  operators. 
Whether  you  are  teacher,  expert',  learner,  or  about  to  learn  typewriting— no  matter  what  make  of 
machine  you  favor — you  cannot  afford  to  be  without  a  copy. 

Price.— $2.00  to  the  public  —but  $1.33  to  anyone  who,  when  they  send  the  money,  will  tell  where 
they  saw  this  advertisement.  Remit  to  C.  HAVEN,  Tribune  Bldg.,  Chicago,  111. 


SOIMIIE] 

Showing  the  advantages  possessed  by   Haven's  distinct    joined    vowels  over  othe- 
systems  in  making  legible,  without  decreasing  speed,  those  words  wherein 
must  be  written,  etc.,  etc. 


GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

LINDSLEY.    CROSS. 

Ape 

* 

V 

1            ^ 

Away 

* 

* 

"        ^ 

Iowa 

2 

| 

tX         ^ 

I.  PI  THAN. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Evaporate. 

^ 

V 

\ 

I.  PITMAN.. 

GRAHAM. 

HAVEN. 

Emigrant 

^~ 

->o 

^, 

^ 

Immigrant 

<— 

-Vj 

v-T, 

_^ 

B.  PI  THAN. 

I  PITMAN. 

HAVEN. 

Room 

-. 

s-^ 

t^x 

^ 

Leave 

Love 

Will  We 

You  will  Have  been 

PITMAN. 

A^ 

/v 

..../^ 

rt 

^ 

HAVEN. 

f^\ 

/  N 

^-^ 

/~^ 

T  1 

\ 

NORTHWESTERN    AGENTS, 

185  LK  8ILLE  8TP,  CHICAGO, 

Mention  this   advertisement 


IB<A.C3X£.    3XT  TJ  IVL  ^  E IEI.  SI 

OF    THE 

MimERN  HEPDRTEH 

Containing  all  the  Short-hand  and  Type- 
writing Lessons,  Full  Sets  of  Mock  Letters, 
Shorthand  and  Key,  and  numerous  other  plates 

for  shorthand  speed  or  reading  practice $0  90 

Same  bound  in  cardboard 1  20 

Typewriters ! 

New  or  Second  hand  of  all  makes, 
bought,  sold,  exchanged  and  repaired. 
Also  rented  anywhere  in  the  country. 
Largest  Stock  in  America.  Not  run  by 
a  Typewriter  Manufacturer.  Send  for 
New  Illustrated  Catalogue  describing  all 
Machines.  GERBER'S  SUPPLIES. 

NATIONAL  TYPEWRITER  EXCHANGE 

200  LaSalle  Street, 
CHICAGO. 


COPYRIGHTED 

1890. 
ALL  RIGHTS  RESERVED. 


THK 

Short-Hand  Teacher's 
Companion. 

A  handy  volume  of  information  of  value  to  every 

Teacher  of 
SHORT-HAND  AND  TYPE-WRITING, 

Containing  Review  Exercises,  a  full  set  (in  synopsis)  of 

Lectures  to  Students,  together  with  a  detailed 

explanation  of  the  means  bv  which 

EVEN    DULL  STUDENTS 

Are,  by  the  Haven  plan  of  instruction,  in  use  at  Haven 

Colleges, 

IN  ONE  TO  THREE   MONTHS, 
Without  any  previous  knowledge  of  these  arts  on  the 

Student's  part, 

FITTED   FOR   POSITIONS 

Requiring  skill  in  both  Short-Hand  and  Type-writing ; 
minutely  describing  the  Student's  duties  and   pro- 
gress, step  by  step,  from  the  taking  of  first  lesson 
to  graduation,  with  the  reason  for  each  step  ; 

Together  with  much  other  information  of  value  to 
Teachers  of  any  system. 


BY  CURTIS  HAVEN, 

Expert  Short-hand  Reporter  and  Type-writist,  Founder  of  the  Ha- 
ven Colleges  of  Practical  Phonography  and  Type-writing, 
Author  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography,  Haven's 
Complete  Manual  of  Type-writing,  Etc.,  Etc. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY 

is  the  ONLY  system  of 

SHOKT-HAND 

requiring  NO  dictionary  or  phrase  book:  the  only 
system  available  for  every  purpose  for  which 
PHONOGRAPHY  or  PENMANSHIP  are  em- 
ployed; the  ONLY  system  by  which  the  notes  of 
one"  writer,  when  correctly  written,  can  be  read 
with  CERTAINTY  by  ANY  other  writer  of  the  sys- 
tem; and  the  only  system  which  one  has  time  to 
learn  these  busy  days. 

INDORSED  BY  THB  LEGAL  FRATERNITY,  COLLEGE  FAC- 
ULTIES, THE  PRESS  AND  THE  PROFESSION  AS  THE 

"MOST  RAPIDLY  READ  AND 

WRITTEN  AND  EASIEST  LEARNED 

of  any  system."  Some  students  have  even  learned 
to  use  it.  and  satisfactorily  fill  short-hand  posi- 
tions within  the  brief  space  of  one  to  two  months* 
time,  without  any  previous  knowledge  of  any 
short-hand.  ANYONE  can  learn  ft  in  three 
months  if  the  directions  in  the  book  are  followed. 

This  short-hand  -writing  's  as  legible  as  print 
when  learned,  and  records  of  over  300  words  a 
minute  have  been  made  by  it. 

Send  for  circular  of  testimonials  and  free  first 
lesson.  

THE  COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOK  OP 

Haven's   Practical    Phonography 

Contains  Self-Teaching  Lessons,  together  with  a 
number  of  Short-Hand  Reading  Pages,  including 
Correspondence,  Court  and  Convention  Report- 
Ing,  with  Key  in  common  print,  making  this  book 
the  only  treatise  on  Short-Hand  Writing  com- 
plete in  one  volume.  Price,  §2,  free  of  postage 
to  any  address.  Order  of 

CURTIS    HAVEN, 
Room  1",  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  teacher  of  the  system. 

Whether  you  are  Teacher.  Expert,  Learner,  ot 
about  to  learn  Type-Writing— no  matter  wbat 
make  of  machine  you  favor— you  cannot  afford 
to  be  without  a  copy  of 

Haven's  Complete  Manual 

OP 

Type-Writing 

Instructor  for  the  Home  Student,  a  Book  01 
Kffcrenct-  for  the  Expert,  a  Guide  to  tlic  Teaciu-i, 
and  a  Text-Book  for  all  Schools  and  Colleger. 

The  Manual  contains  fac-simile  specimens  of 
type-writer  work  of  every  kind — epistolary, 
society,  legal,  journalistic,  and  commercial- 
accompanied  by  perfectly  clear  explanations 
descriptive  of  each  specimen,  its  execution  in 
detail,  spacing,  centering  of  lines,  rules  of  con- 
trast, etc.,  most  of  the  points  being  found  to  be 
both  new  and  useful  to  even  the  most  expert 
operators. 

Endorsed  by  the  New  York  Herald,  Philadel- 
phia Press,  Boston  Herald,  and  other  leading 
Eastern  and  Western  dailies,  and  hosts  of  prac- 
tical operators. 

"The  only  complete  work  on  Type- Writing 
published." 

Price,  $2,  free  of  postage,  to  any  address. 

Orderof  CURTIS    HAVEN, 

Room  17,  Tribune  Building,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 
Or  of  any  Haven  teacher. 


ANYONE     CAN 


GAIN 


Short-Hand 


TYPE-  WRITING 

SKILL  IN  THREE  MONTHS 

BY  HA.VEN'8  SYSTEM. 
NO  FAILURES. 

No  previous  knowledge  of  either  art  required1. 

Haven  teachers  insure  all  students  speedy  and 
thorough  tuition  in  both  Short-hand  and  Type- 
Writing.  qualifying  many  students  in  as  short  a 
time  as  one  to  two  months,  and  requiring  no 
longer  time  than  three  months  for  even  the 
dullest,  so  long  as  they  possess  a  common-school 
education  and  study  and  practice  as  directed. 
INSTRUCTION  PERSOXALL  Y  ORB  Y  MAIL. 

SPECIAL  NOTICE. 

As  there  are  a  few  teachers  of  other  systems 
who,  being  able  to  qualify  in  three  to  six  months 
an  occasion  ally  brignt  student  who  has  had  pre- 
vious study  at  home,  and  which  schools  are  on 
that  score  advertising  that  they  can  graduate 
students  in  three  months'  time  (meaning  of 
course,  not  all  their  students),  it  is  necessary  that 
we  call  attention  to  the  difference  between  such 
misleading  advertisements  and  our  own  claims, 
as  follows: 

We  quiiiify  ALL  students  within  three  months 
—the  bright  ones  in  much  less  time. 

Students  who  can  by  any  possibility  master 
and  gain  speed  in  three  to  six  months  by  other 
systems,  can  be  given  such  skill  by  the  Haven 
system  in  one  month. 

Students  who  require  from  six  to  twelve  months 
to  gain  skill  in  other  systems  require  no  longer 
than  two  months  by  the  Haven  plan  . 

Those  who  can  NOT  learn  other  systems 
under  any  conditions,  can  succeed  by  the  Haven 
plan  in  the  guaranteed  three  months'  time. 
Haven's  is  the  only  system  within  the  compre- 
hension of  everyone. 

As  before  stated,  we  make  NO  FAILURES 
where  our  instructions  are  followed. 

Teachers  who  cannot  meet  these  claims  by  the 
system  they  teach  should  investigate  Haven's. 
and  change,  if  they  desire  to  be  up  with  the  times. 

Students  not  successful  at  other  shools,  as  well 
as  all  persons  desirous  of  learning  in  shortest 
possible  time  the  fastest  written  andeasient  read 
>>>•<'  em,  should  correspond  with  the  Haven  Col- 
lege nearest  their  address. 

HAVEN  COLLEGES  OF 

Short-Hand  and  Type-Writing, 

CHICAGO,  ILL,,    1302  W.   Madison   Street, 

Mrs.  CURTIS  HAVEN,  Principal. 
PHILADELPHIA,  Pa.,  1126  South  Broad  Street, 

J.  M.  CONWA  Y,  Principal. 
ROCHESTER,  N.  Y.,  16  State  Street, 

B.  S.  UNDERBILL,  Principal. 
DALLAS,  TEXAS,  C.   HAXSEX,  Principal. 
L  0  CKP  OR  T,  N.  Y.,38  Hodge  Opera  II' 
E.  L,  WARREN,  Principal. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


A     000  571  383     9 


- 


